SpeedStreamª Router Family

Command Line Interface Guide

November 2000

Copyright
Efficient Networks provides this publication Òas isÓ without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any means without written
permission from Efficient Networks.

Changes are periodically made to the information in this book. They will be incorporated in subsequent editions.
Efficient Networks may make improvements and/or changes in the product described in this publication at any
time.

© Copyright 1996-2000 Efficient Networks, Inc.

Trademarks
Efficient NetworksÒ is a registered trademark of Efficient Networks, Inc.

SpeedStream is a trademark of Efficient Networks, Inc.

All other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned in this manual are the sole property of their respective
companies.

2
WhatÕs New in This Release?

This version of the Command Line Interface (CLI) manual has been updated to document features available with
this release of the kernel software. The following list directs you to the CLI documentation for these new features:

Release 5.0:
VRRP Backup Ñ page 107

¥ Implements the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (RFC 2338).

¥ Allows other routers in the LAN to serve as backups for a static default gateway.

Dial Backup Ñ see page 103

¥ Uses a V.90 modem connected to the console port as an automatic backup when the DSL link fails.

SDSL Autobaud Pre-Activation Procedure Ñ see page 305

¥ Shortens the time required to find the correct line speed by checking the line quality before activation.

New IKE Commands

¥ Perfect Forward Secrecy option to increase the security of the IKE key exchange Ñ see page 136.

¥ Option to restrict policy use to a specific interface Ñ see page 337.

¥ Option to have network address translation performed before IPSec encryptionÑ see page 340.
Interface Stop, Start and Restart

¥ Commands to stop, start, and restart a logical Ethernet interface Ñ see page 77.

¥ Commands to stop, start, and restart an active session for a remote Ñ see page 32.

Voice router support

¥ Command to change voice profile available if voice gateway is ATM standards-based Ñ see page 21.

¥ Command to adjust jitter buffer size Ñ see page 175.

Multiple BootP relays Ñ see page 152

¥ Use dhcp addrelay and dhcp delrelay commands to change the BootP server list.

Changes to Syslog server list Ñ see page 153

¥ The command syntax has changed for system addSyslogServer and system delSyslogServer.

New Òall protocolsÓ option on AddServer commands

¥ system addServer Ñ see page 209; remote addServer Ñ see page 259; eth ip addServer Ñ see page 232.

New DHCP command Ñ see page 312

¥ Command to clear all DHCP information.

3
IP Filter changes Ñ see eth ip filter, page 237 or remote ipfilter, page 267

¥ New -tcp rst parameter allows a filter to match the TCP RESET flag.

¥ Watch messages are also sent to Unix Syslog servers.

New IP remote LANCONFIG option Ñ see page 278

¥ PPP remote can receive IPCP information for dyamically reconfiguring the Ethernet interface.

Command to delete software options Ñ see page 115

¥ The command reboot bridgeonly deletes the KEYFILE.DAT file.

Upgradable Bridge Support Ñ see page 17

4
About This Manual

This manual contains information on the syntax and use of the Command Line Interface for the family of DSL
routers. Configuration of network connections, bridging, routing, and security features are essentially the same for
all DSL routers, unless otherwise noted.

This manual is intended for small and home office users, remote office users, and other networking professionals
who are installing and maintaining bridged and routed networks.

It assumes that you have read the Quick Start Guide that came with the router and have installed the router as
described in that guide.

How This Manual is Organized

This manual is organized into these parts:

How to Access the Command Line. Describes how to access the router command line from a PC so you can
enter router commands.

Router Concepts. Contains information on topics such as interoperability, routing and bridging operations, PAP/
CHAP security negotiation, bandwidth management, protocol conformance, and the file system.

Planning for Router Configuration. Provides information unique to configuration using the Command Line
Interface including worksheets for collecting required information.

Configuring Router Software. Describes the basic configuration of the router using the Command Line.

Configuring Special Features. Describes how to configure advanced features, such as Bridge Filtering, RIP,
DHCP, NAT, Dial Backup and VRRP.

Configuring Software Options. Describes how to install and configure features available via software option
keys, including Encryption, IP Filtering, L2TP Tunneling, and IKE/IPSec.

Managing the Router. Describes SNMP management capabilities, TFTP client and server, TELNET support
and how to upgrade the system software, boot code, backup and restore configuration files, FLASH memory
recovery procedures, and batch file command execution.

Troubleshooting. Describes diagnostic tools used for identifying and correcting hardware and software problems.

Command Reference. Describes the syntax of each command and the results when the command is entered.

Appendix A provides blank Network Information Sheets. Appendix B describes IPX configuration.

Two indexes are provided at the end of the manual. The Command Index directs you to the desired command
description. The Topic Index directs you to specific feature discussions.
Typographic Conventions
The following typeface conventions are used in this guide:

Typeface Item Examples

Italics Book titles, command Refer to the Quick Start Guide.

reference parameters,
cross-references, text system name <name>
emphasis.

Bold Keywords in command save

reference instructions

Mono-spaced font Examples. remote listIpRoute hq

Uppercase File names Copy Þle CFGMGR.EXE

6 About This Manual

Table of Contents

WhatÕs New in This Release? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Release 5.0: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
How This Manual is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
How to Access the Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Terminal Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Terminal Session under Windows (HyperTerminal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Terminal Session for Macintosh or UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Telnet Session for Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Chapter 1. Router Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Routing and Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
When to Use Routing or Bridging or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
How Routing and Bridging Work Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Routing and Bridging Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Bridge Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Telephony Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Configuring Your Telephony Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Changing Your Voice Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
PAP/CHAP Security Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Authentication Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Security Passwords and Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Interoperability Between the Router and Other Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Protocol Conformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
IPX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Encapsulation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
PPPLLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
RFC 1483 or RFC 1490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
MAC Encapsulated Routing: RFC 1483MER (ATM) or RFC 1490MER (Frame Relay). . . . . .28
FRF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
rawIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Router System and Configuration Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Managing the Remote Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Protocols to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
PPP Link Protocol (over ATM or Frame Relay). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
RFC 1483/RFC 1490 Link Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
MAC Encapsulated Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
FRF8 Link Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Dual-Ethernet Router Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

7
 Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Configuring PPP with IP Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Configuring PPP with IPX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Configuring PPP with Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IPX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring MAC Encapsulated Routing: RFC 1483MER / RFC 1490MER with IP Routing . 55
Configuring FRF8 with IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Configuring Mixed Network Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Configuring a Dual-Ethernet Router for IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Verify the Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Test IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Test Bridging to a Remote Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Test IPX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Sample Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Sample Configuration 1: PPP with IP and IPX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Sample Configuration 2: RFC 1483 with IP and Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sample Configuration 3: Configuring a Dual-Ethernet Router for IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Multiple IP Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Logical Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Stopping and Starting an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Interface Routing and Filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Virtual Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Bridge Filtering and IP Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configure Bridge Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Enable/Disable Internet Firewall Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
IP (RIP) Protocol Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DHCP Address Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DHCP Client Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
DHCP Administration and Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Manipulating Subnetworks and Explicit Client Leases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Setting Option Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Managing BootP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Defining Option Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DHCP Information File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Clearing All DHCP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Network Address Translation (NAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
General NAT Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Masquerading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Classic NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuring for PPPoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Managing PPPoE Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Controlling Remote Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Disabling Remote Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Re-enabling Remote Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Validating Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Restricting Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Changing the SNMP Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Disabling WAN Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

8
 Dial Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Configuring Dial Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
VRRP Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
VRRP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Defining the VRRP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Defining the VRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Defining VRRP Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Listing and Deleting the VRRP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Sample VRRP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Master Router Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Backup Router Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Software Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Listing the Installed Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Adding a New Software Option Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Deleting Software Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
PPP DES (RFC 1969) Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Diffie-Hellman Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
IP Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Filters and Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Configuring Filters with Network Address Translation Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Filter Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
IP Filter Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Special Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
L2TP Tunneling Ñ Virtual Dial-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
L2TP Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Sample Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
IPSec (Internet Protocol Security) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Transport and Tunnel Encapsulation Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
ESP and AH Security Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
IKE Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Main Mode and Aggressive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Additional IKE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Security Associations (SAs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
IKE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
IKE Peer Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
IKE Proposal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
IKE IPSec Proposal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
IKE IPSec Policy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
IKE Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Main Mode Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Aggressive Mode Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
IPSec Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Chapter 6. Managing the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
SNMP Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Telnet Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Client TFTP Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
TFTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
BootP Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

9
 BootP Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
BootP Service by the DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Relaying BootP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Syslog Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Boot Code Maintenance Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Manual Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Identifying Fatal Boot Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Software Kernel Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Booting and Upgrading from the LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Upgrading from the WAN Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Backup and Restore Configuration Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Backup Configuration Files (Recommended Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Restore Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
FLASH Memory Recovery Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Recovering Kernels for Routers with Configuration Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Recovering Kernels for Routers with a Reset Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Recovering Passwords and IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Routers with Configuration Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Routers with a Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Batch File Command Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Chapter 7. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Using LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
History Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Ping Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Investigating Hardware Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Investigating Software Configuration Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Problems Connecting to the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Problems with the Login Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Problems Accessing the Remote Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Problems Accessing the Router via Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Problems Downloading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trouble-Shooting Telephony Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
System Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Time-Stamped Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Debugging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
General Debug Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
ATM Debug Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Web GUI Debug Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
SDSL Debug Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Voice Router Debug Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
ADSL DMT Router Debug Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Frame Relay Debug Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
ATM Tracing Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
IP Filtering Debug Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Before Contacting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Chapter 8. Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
System-Level Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
File System Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Frame Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

10
 Router Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
SYSTEM (Target Router System Configuration Commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
ETH (Target Router Ethernet LAN Bridging and Routing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Remote Access Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
REMOTE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
ADSL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
ATM Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
DMT Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Dual-Ethernet Router (ETH) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
HDSL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
IDSL Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
SDSL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
DHCP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
L2TP Ñ Virtual Dial-Up Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
FILTER BR (Bridge Filtering) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
PPPoE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
IPSec Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Configuring PPP with IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Configuring PPP with IPX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Configuring PPP with Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IPX Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Configuring RFC 1483MER / RFC 1490MER with IP Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Configuring FRF8 with IP Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Configuring a Dual-Ethernet Router for IP Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Appendix B. Configuring IPX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
IPX Routing Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Configure IPX Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Step 1: Collect Your Network Information for the Target (Local) Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Step 2: Review your Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Command Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Topic Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374

11
How to Access the Command Line

This manual describes the Command Line Interface for your router. The Command Line Interface gives you
access to all capabilities of your router.

Many of the router configuration capabilities are also available through an easy-to-use, graphic interface. To learn
how to access the graphic interface, see the Quick Start Guide that came with the router.

To use the Command Line Interface, you must Þrst access the router command line. To do this, you:

1. Connect a PC (or ASCII) terminal to a port of the router.

(The required cable and adapter are provided with the router. The connection procedure is described in detail
in the Quick Start Guide that came with the router.)

2. Restart the PC and power on the router.

3. Open a terminal window or start a terminal session on the PC.

4. The router displays the Login: prompt.

Login:

5. Enter the login password. (The default is admin. To change the login password, use the system admin
command, page 212). You may then begin entering router commands.

The router supports both local access and remote access. In step 3 above, the terminal session could be:
¥ The terminal window from within the Quick Start or Configuration Manager application (for local access)

¥ A terminal session (for local access)

¥ A Telnet session (for remote access)

Terminal Window
To access the terminal window from within the Quick Start or Configuration Manager application:

¥ Select Tools and Terminal Window from the main menu.

The menu selection Commands provides shortcuts to most of the commands described in this manual.
Terminal Session under Windows (HyperTerminal)
To open the HyperTerminal emulator available under the Windows operating system:

1. Click Start on your desktop and then select Programs > Accessories > Communications > Hyperterminal.

2. Double-click Hypertrm.exe.

3. In the Connection Description

window, enter a name for the
connection and select OK.

3. In the Phone Number window, under Connect using, select Choose Direct to Com 1 (or 2).

4. In the Com 1 (or 2) Properties page, enter the following port settings and select OK:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Hardware
(To use a baud rate other than
9600, see page 157.)

How to Access the Command Line 13

Terminal Session for Macintosh or UNIX
To open a terminal window emulation in a Macintosh or UNIX environment, you need a VT100 terminal
emulation program.

1. Start your VT100 terminal emulator.

2. Configure the emulator with the following port settings:

Baud rate
(Data rate): 9600
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Hardware
(To use a baud rate other
than 9600, see page 157.)

Telnet Session for Remote Access

The router supports Telnet access. (For more information, see Telnet Remote Access, page 151.) However, remote
access to the router configuration can be disabled or restricted (see Controlling Remote Management, page 101).

To set up a Telnet session under Windows for remote access to the router:

1. Make sure that your PC and router addresses are in the same subnetwork. For example, the router address
could be 192.168.254.254 and the PC address could be 192.168.254.253.

2. Click the Start button on your PC desktop and select Run.

3. In the window, enter telnet 192.168.254.254 and select OK.

14 How to Access the Command Line

4. The router displays a line identifying itself and then displays the Login: prompt.

How to Access the Command Line 15

Chapter 1. Router Concepts

This chapter provides background information applicable to the router on topics useful to network administrators.
These topics include:

¥ Routing and bridging

¥ Routing and bridging controls
¥ Bridge filtering
¥ Voice routing

¥ PAP/CHAP security authentication

¥ Security passwords and levels

¥ Interoperability between the router and other systems

¥ Protocol conformance
¥ Encapsulation options

¥ System and configuration files

Routing and Bridging

The router can operate as a bridge, a router, or as both (sometimes called a brouter). The following sections
describe routing and bridging and how the two functions operate together.

Routing
Routing is the process that determines where data is sent. A router can route user data from source to destination
over different LAN and WAN links. Routing relies on routing address tables to determine the best path for each
packet to take.

The routes within a routing address table are established in two ways:

¥ The routing tables can be seeded, that is, addresses for remote destinations are placed in the table along with
path details and the associated costs (path latency).
¥ The routing tables can also be built dynamically; i.e., the location of remote stations, hosts, and networks are
updated from broadcast packet information.

Routing helps to increase network capacity by localizing traffic on LAN segments. It also provides security by
isolating traffic on segmented LANs. Routing extends the reach of networks beyond the limits of each LAN
segment.

16 Chapter 1. Router Concepts

Numerous network protocols have evolved, and within each protocol are associated protocols for routing, error
handling, network management, etc. The following chart displays the networking and associated protocols
supported by the router.

Network Protocol Associated Protocols Description

Internet Protocol Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Maintains a map of the network
(IP)

Address-Resolution Protocol (ARP) Maps IP addresses to datalink

addresses

Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP)a Maps data-link addresses to IP

addresses

Internetwork Control Message Protocol Diagnostic and error reporting/

(ICMP) recovery

Simple Network Management Protocol Network management

(SNMP)

Internet Packet Routing Information Protocol (RIP)b Maintains a map of the network
Exchange (IPX)

Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) Distributes information about service

names and addresses

a Used only during a network boot.

b IPX-RIP is a different protocol from IP-RIP and it includes time delays.

Bridging
Bridging connects two or more LANs so that all devices share the same logical LAN segment and network
number. Transparent bridging allows locally connected devices to send frames to all devices as if they were local.

The MAC layer header contains source and destination addresses used to transfer frames. An address table is
dynamically built and updated with the location of devices when frames are received. (To see the contents of the
bridging table, use the command bi list, page 189.)

Bridging allows frames to be sent to all destinations regardless of the network protocols used. It allows protocols
that cannot be routed (such as NETBIOS) to be forwarded and allows optimizing internetwork capacity by
localizing traffic on LAN segments. A bridge extends the physical reach of networks beyond the limits of each
LAN segment. Bridge filtering can increase network security.

The router bridging support includes the IEEE 802.1D standard for LAN-to-LAN bridging and the Spanning Tree
Protocol for interoperability with other vendorsÕ bridge/routers. Bridging is provided over PPP as well as adjacent
LAN ports.

Bridge-Only Units

A series of bridge-only units is available, both upgradable and non-upgradable. An upgradable bridge can be
upgraded to a router; a non-upgradable bridge cannot.

Chapter 1. Router Concepts 17

These bridge-only units are pre-configured; no further configuration is required. The unit comes up in bridge
mode automatically.

Upgrading an upgradable bridge to become a router requires the addition of a software option key. The software
option key turns on the IP Routing feature. To read about software option keys, see page 114.

When to Use Routing or Bridging or Both

The following charts describe the operational characteristics of the router when you enable routing, bridging, or
both routing and bridging.

IP/IPX Routing On Bridging to/from Remote Router Off

Data packets carried IP (TCP, UDP), IPX

Operational Basic IP, IPX connectivity

characteristics

Typical usage When only IP/IPX trafÞc is to be routed and all other trafÞc is to be
ignored. For IP, used for Internet access.
Note: This is the most easily controlled configuration.

IP/IPX Routing On Bridging to/from Remote Router On

Data packets carried IP/IPX routed; all other packets bridged.

Operational IP/IPX routing; allows other protocols, such as NetBEUI (that canÕt be
characteristics routed), to be bridged.

Typical usage When only IP/IPX trafÞc is to be routed but some non-routed protocol is
required. Used for client/server conÞgurations.

IP/IPX Routing Off Bridging to/from Remote Router On

Data packets carried All packets bridged.

Operational Allows use of protocols that canÕt be routed (such as NetBEUI).

characteristics

Typical usage Peer-to-peer bridging and when the remote end supports only bridging.

How Routing and Bridging Work Together

The router follows these rules when operating as both a router and a bridge:

¥ The router operates as a router for network protocols that are enabled for routing (IP or IPX).
¥ The router operates as a bridge for protocols that are not supported for routing.

18 Chapter 1. Router Concepts

¥ Routing takes precedence over bridging; i.e., when routing is active, the router uses the packetÕs protocol
address information to route the packet.
¥ If the protocol is not supported, the router uses the MAC address information to forward the packet.

Routing and Bridging Controls

The router can be configured to perform general routing and bridging while allowing you to set specific controls.

¥ One remote router can be designated as the outbound default bridging destination. All outbound bridging
traffic with an unknown destination is sent to the default bridging destination.
¥ Bridging from specific remote routers can be controlled by enabling or disabling bridging from individual
remote routers.
¥ Routing is performed to all remote routers entered into the remote router database. All routing can be enabled
or disabled with a system-wide control.

Operation of the router is influenced by routing and bridging controls and filters set during router configuration as
well as automatic spoofing and filtering performed by the router. For example, general IP or IPX routing, and
routing or bridging from specific remote routers are controls set during the configuration process.

Spoofing and filtering, which minimize the number of packets that flow across the WAN, are performed
automatically by the router. For example, RIP routing packets and certain NetBEUI packets are spoofed even if
only bridging is enabled.

Bridge Filtering
You can control the flow of packets across the router using bridge filtering. Bridge filtering lets you ÒdenyÓ or
ÒallowÓ packets to cross the network based on position and hexadecimal content within the packet. This feature
lets you restrict or forward messages with a specified address, protocol, or data content. Common uses are to
prevent access to remote networks, control unauthorized access to the local network, and limit unnecessary traffic.

For example, it might be necessary to restrict remote access for specific users on the local network. In this case,
bridging filters are defined using the local MAC address for each user to be restricted. Each bridging filter is
specified as a ÒdenyÓ filter based on the MAC address and position of the address within the packet. Deny
filtering mode is then enabled to initiate bridge filtering. No packet with one of the MAC addresses can be bridged
across the router until the deny filtering mode is disabled.

Similarly, protocol filtering can be used to prevent a specific protocol from being bridged. In this case, the
protocol ID field in a packet is used to deny or allow a packet. You can also restrict, for example, the bridging of
specific broadcast packets.

For a further discussion of bridge filtering, see page 79.

Telephony Services

A Voice over DSL (VoDSL) router allows the delivery of both telephony (voice) and data services over a single
DSL line. It acts as an Integrated Access Device (IAD), residing on the customer premises and connecting to a
DSL circuit. As such, it serves as a circuit/packet gateway and provides standard telephone service as well as
Internet service via an Ethernet connection. Thus, the user has access to toll-quality telephone lines and
continuous, high-speed Internet and remote LAN services over a single copper loop.

Features provided in your VoDSL router may include:

Chapter 1. Router Concepts 19

¥ Support for these voice gateways:
¥ Jetstream proprietary
¥ CopperCom proprietary
¥ ATM Forum Standards based (ATM Forum doc. VMOA-0145.00)
¥ Upstream traffic shaping (bandwidth management) of data when the telephony interface is active
¥ ADPCM or PCM voice encoding
¥ Local echo canceling (G.168)

This diagram illustrates how a Voice over DSL router connects both a phone system to the PSTN and a LAN to
the Internet over the same DSL line.

Phone Phone lines

system Voice
DSLAM Class 5 PSTN
Gate-
Switch
way
Voice
over DSL ATM/Frame
DSL Line Network
Ethernet Router
Router Internet
LAN

Configuring Your Telephony Services

Router models are available to support telephony services over both ATM and Frame Relay networks. For
telephony over ATM, the VPI/VCI is automatically set. (For most routers, it is set to 0*39). For telephony over
Frame Relay, the DLCI is automatically set to 22. The value must match your service providerÕs value. You can
change the value if necessary (see Trouble-Shooting Telephony Services, page 174).

The phone number for each port is set by your voice service provider.

The phone dial tone is provided by the Class 5 switch via the voice gateway at your regional switching center
(RSC). All voice features of the switch are passed through to the phone set. The router supports the calling
services that you subscribe to from your service provider, such as call forwarding, caller ID, messaging, etc.

The bandwidth required for a voice call depends on whether PCM or ADPCM encoding is used. With PCM, each
voice call takes about 80 Kb of bandwidth (64 Kb plus overhead) when the phone goes off hook. With ADPCM,
only about 40 Kb is used (32 Kb plus overhead).

Configuration for voice and data routing can be performed using the Web-based Easy Setup configuration
program. For ATM standards-based gateways, the voice profile must match the configuration of the voice
gateway (see Changing Your Voice Profile, page 21).

You can use the Port Monitor GUI program to see the voice PVC and the last event message. To see LMI
statistics for a frame relay router, use the frame stats command (page 204). To see AAL2 statistics for the voice
gateway, use the voice l2stats command (Jetstream gateway only). For other commands to monitor telephony
services, see Trouble-Shooting Telephony Services (page 174).

20 Chapter 1. Router Concepts

Changing Your Voice Profile
If your voice gateway is an ATM standards-based gateway, the voice profile must match the configuration of the
voice gateway. (You do not set a voice profile for the other supported gateways.)

The voice profile determines the following attributes:

¥ Voice compression: ADPCM32 or PCM or PCM only?

¥ Silence suppression supported: yes or no?
¥ Voice cell payload size: 44 bytes or 40 bytes?

You can display and change your active voice profile. To display the current voice profile, enter this command:

voice profile

To change your active voice profile, specify the profile number on the voice profile command.

voice profile <profile>

Silence Payload
profile ADPCM32? Suppression? Size?
7 Yes Yes 44 bytes
8 No Yes 44 bytes
9 No No 44 bytes
10 Yes No 44 bytes
11 Yes No 40 bytes
12 Yes Yes 40 bytes

For example, the following command selects voice profile 7:

# voice profile 7
The active profile has been changed
Profile 7 active, pcm or adpcm32, silence, 44 byte packets

Chapter 1. Router Concepts 21

PAP/CHAP Security Authentication

The router supports PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication
Protocol) under PPP.

Security authentication may not be required due to the nature of the connection in a DSL environment (traffic
occurs on a dedicated line/virtual circuit. However, authentication may be specifically required by the remote end,
the ISP, or the NSP. When authentication is not required, security can be disabled with the command remote
disauthen (page 266).

PAP provides verification of passwords between routers using a two-way handshake. One router (peer) sends the
system name and password to the other router. Then the other router (known as the authenticator) checks the
peerÕs password against the configured remote routerÕs password and returns acknowledgment.

PAP Authentication
1

New York Chicago

...New York & xyz.......
System Name=New York System Name=Chicago
System Password=xyz System Password=abc
Remote Router Database Remote Router Database
Remote=Chicago Remote=New York
Password=abc 2 Password=xyz

.....Accepted/Rejected.......

CHAP is more secure than PAP because unencrypted passwords are not sent across the network. CHAP uses a
three-way handshake. One router (known as the authenticator) challenges the other router (known as the peer) by
generating a random number and sending it along with the system name. The peer then applies a one-way hash
algorithm to the random number and returns this encrypted information along with the system name.

The authenticator then runs the same algorithm and compares the result with the expected value. This authentica-
tion method depends upon a password or secret known only to both ends.

CHAP Authentication
1
Challenge
New York New York & encrypted number Chicago

System Name=New York System Name=Chicago

System Password=xyz System Password=abc
Remote Router Database Hashes random Remote Router Database
Remote=Chicago number and Remote=New York
Password=abc 2 secret ÒabcÓ Password=xyz

Chicago & encrypted secret

Performs same hash 3
with number and
.....Accepted/Rejected.......
secret ÒabcÓ and
compares results

22 Chapter 1. Router Concepts

Authentication Process
The authentication process occurs regardless of whether a remote router connects to the local router or vice versa,
and even if the remote end does not request authentication. It is a bi-directional process, where each end can
authenticate the other using the protocol of its choice (provided the other end supports it).

During link negotiation (LCP), each side of the link negotiates which protocol to use for authentication during the
connection. If both the system and the remote router have PAP authentication, then they negotiate PAP
authentication.

Otherwise, the router always requests CHAP authentication first; if CHAP is refused, PAP will be negotiated. If
the remote end does not accept either PAP or CHAP, the link is dropped; i.e., the router will not communicate
without a minimum security level. On the other hand, the router will accept any authentication scheme required by
the remote node, including no authentication at all.

During the authentication phase, each side of the link can request authentication using the method they negotiated
during LCP.

For CHAP, the router issues a CHAP challenge request to the remote side. The challenge includes the system
name and random number. The remote end, using a hash algorithm associated with CHAP, transforms the name
and number into a response value. When the remote end returns the challenge response, the router can validate the
response challenge value using the entry in the remote router database. If the response is invalid, the call is
disconnected. If the other end negotiated CHAP, the remote end can, similarly, request authentication from the
local router. The router uses its system name and password to respond to CHAP challenge.

For PAP, when a PAP login request is received from the remote end, the router checks the remote router PAP
security using the remote router database. If the remote router is not in the remote router database or the remote
router password is invalid, the call is disconnected. If the remote router and password are valid, the local router
acknowledges the PAP login request.

If PAP was negotiated by the remote end for the remote-side authentication, the router will issue PAP login
requests only if it knows the identity of the remote end. The identity is known if the call was initiated from the
router, or if the remote end returned a successful CHAP challenge response. For security reasons, the router will
never identify itself using PAP without first knowing the identity of the remote router.

If PAP was negotiated by the remote end for the local side of the authentication process and the minimum security
level is CHAP, as configured in the remote router database, the link will be dropped for a security violation.

Security Passwords and Levels

When configuring the router, you may set the following passwords:

¥ System authentication password Ñ the default system password used to access any remote router. Remote
sites use this password to authenticate the local site.
¥ System override password Ñ optional password used only to connect to a specific remote router for
authentication by that remote site.
¥ Remote authentication password Ñ password used by the router to authenticate the remote site. Each remote
router entered in the remote router database has a password used when the remote site attempts to gain access
to the local router.

To specify a unique system override password for a remote router, use the command remote SetOurPasswd
(page 282). This password is used instead of the general system password only for connecting to a specific remote

Chapter 1. Router Concepts 23

router. This allows you to set a unique CHAP or PAP authentication password for authentication of the local site
by the remote site only when the router connects to that remote site.

A common use is for the system override password is to set a password assigned to you by Internet Service
Providers (ISPs). Similarly, the system name of the local router can be overridden for connecting to a specific
remote with the command remote setOurSysName (page 283).

The router also uses security levels, as follows:

¥ Remote authentication protocol Ñ Each remote router entered in the remote router database has a minimum
security level that must be negotiated before the remote router gains access to the local router.
¥ System authentication protocol Ñ A system-wide control is available for overriding the minimum security
level in the entire remote router database.

24 Chapter 1. Router Concepts

Interoperability Between the Router and Other Equipment

The router uses industry-wide standards to ensure compatibility with routers and equipment from other vendors.
To interoperate, the router supports standard protocols on the physical level, data link level for frame type or
encapsulation method, and network level. For two systems to communicate directly, they must use the same
protocol at each level. Most protocols do not support negotiable options, except for PPP.

The physical protocol level includes hardware and electrical signaling characteristics. This support is provided by
the router Ethernet and modem hardware interfaces.

The router supports both ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) and Frame Relay transmission. ATM transports
fixed-length cells; Frame Relay transports variable-length packets.

The data-link protocol level defines the transmission of data packets between two systems over the LAN or WAN
physical link. The frame type or encapsulation method defines a way to run multiple network-level protocols over
a single LAN or WAN link. The router supports the following WAN encapsulations:

¥ PPP (VC multiplexing)

¥ PPP (LLC multiplexing)

¥ PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet)

¥ RFC 1483 (for ATM)

¥ RFC 1483 with MAC encapsulated routing (for ATM)

¥ FRF8 (for ATM)

¥ RFC 1490 (for Frame Relay)

¥ RFC 1490 with MAC encapsulated routing (for Frame Relay)

Protocol Conformance

The router conforms to RFCs designed to address performance, authentication, and multi-protocol encapsulation.
The following RFCs are supported:

¥ RFC 1058 Routing Information Protocol (RIP)

¥ RFC 1144 Compressing TCP/IP headers (Van Jacobson)
¥ RFC 1220 Bridging Control Protocol (BNCP)
¥ RFC 1332 IP Control Protocol (IPCP)
¥ RFC 1334 Password Authentication Protocol and Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (PAP/
CHAP)
¥ RFC 1389 RIP2
¥ RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
¥ RFC 1490 Multiprotocol Interconnect over Frame Relay
¥ RFC 1542 DHCP Relay Agent
¥ RFC 1552 Novell IPX Control Protocol (IPXCP)
¥ RFC 1577 Classical IP and ARP over ATM
¥ RFC 1631 Network Renumbering
¥ RFC 1661 Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
¥ RFC 1723 RIP Version 2

Chapter 1. Router Concepts 25

¥ RFC 1877 Automatic IP / DNS
¥ RFC 1962 PPP Compression Control Protocol (CCP)
¥ RFC 1969 DES
¥ RFC 1973 PPP in Frame Relay
¥ RFC 1974 Stac LZS compression protocol
¥ RFC 1990 Multi-Link Protocol (MLP)
¥ RFC 1994 User Authentication PAP / CHAP
¥ RFC 2104
¥ RFC 2131 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
¥ RFC 2132 DHCP Client
¥ RFC 2364 PPP over ATM
¥ RFC 2419 DES v2
¥ RFC 2401 Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol
¥ RFC 2402 IP Authentication Header
¥ RFC 2403 The Use of HMAC-MD5-96 within ESP and AH
¥ RFC 2404 The Use of HMAC-SHA-1-96 within ESP and AH
¥ RFC 2405 The ESP DES-CBC Cipher Algorithm With Explicit IV
¥ RFC 2406 IP Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP)
¥ RFC 2407
¥ RFC 2408
¥ RFC 2409
¥ RFC 2410
¥ RFC 2412
¥ RFC 2451

IP Routing
IP routing support, in conformance with RFC 791, provides the ability to process TCP/IP frames at the network
layer for routing. IP routing support includes the Routing Interface Protocol (RIP), in conformance with RFC
1058 (RIP v.1) and RFC 1723 (RIP v.2).

IPX Routing
IPX routing conforms to the Novell¨ NetWareª IPX Router Development Guide, Version 1.10.

Encapsulation Options

This section describes the format of each packet associated with a particular encapsulation option supported by the
router.

The encapsulation type for each remote entry is defined using the remote setProtocol command (page 284).

PPP
Each packet begins with a one- or two-byte protocol ID. Typical IDs are:

0xc021 LCP

0x8021 IPCP

26 Chapter 1. Router Concepts

 0x0021 IP

0x002d Van Jacobson compressed TCP/IP

0x002f Van Jacobson uncompressed TCP/IP

0x8031 Bridge NCP

0x0031 Bridge Frame

The command for this encapsulation option is: remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName>
See page 284.

Note: With PPP over ATM, the address and control fields (i.e., FF03) are never present; this also is the case for
LCP packets.

PPPLLC
This protocol (LLC-multiplexed) allows PPP traffic to be carried simultaneously with other traffic on a single
virtual circuit (as opposed to the PPP method of encapsulationÑVC multiplexingÑwhich dedicates a virtual
circuit to PPP traffic only).

Each PPP packet is prepended with the sequence 0xFEFE03CF. Thus, an LLC packet has the format:
0xFEFE03CF 0xC021.

The command for this encapsulation option is: remote setProtocol PPPLLC <remoteName>
See page 284.

RFC 1483 or RFC 1490

Bridging

User data packets are prepended by the sequence 0xAAAA0300 0x80c20007 0x0000 followed by the
Ethernet frame containing the packet.

802.1D Spanning Tree packets are prepended with the header 0xAAAA0300 0x80C2000E.

Routing

IP packets are prepended with the header 0xAAAA0300 0x00000800.

IPX packets are prepended with the header 0xAAAA0300 0x00008137.

The commands for this encapsulation option are:

remote setProtocol RFC1483 <remoteName> (for ATM)

remote setProtocol FR <remoteName> (for Frame Relay - RFC 1490)

See page 284.

Chapter 1. Router Concepts 27

MAC Encapsulated Routing: RFC 1483MER (ATM) or RFC 1490MER
(Frame Relay)
MER encapsulation allows IP packets to be carried as bridged frames, but does not prevent bridged frames from
being sent as well, in their normal encapsulation format: RFC 1483 (ATM) or RFC 1490 (Frame Relay).

If IP routing is enabled, then IP packets are prepended with the sequence 0xAAAA0300 0x80c20007 0x0000 and
sent as bridged frames. If IP routing is not enabled, then the packets appear as bridged frames.

The commands for this encapsulation option are:

remote setProtocol RFC1483MER <remoteName> (for ATM)

remote setProtocol MER (for Frame Relay)

FRF8
IP packets have prepended to them the following sequence: 0x03CC.

The command for this encapsulation option is: remote setprotocol FRF8 <remoteName>

Note: This protocol allows sending ATM over Frame Relay.

rawIP
IP packets do not have any protocol headers prepended to them; they appear as IP packets on the wire. Only IP
packets can be transported since there is no possible method to distinguish other types of packets (bridged frames
or IPX).

The command for this encapsulation option is: remote setProtocol rawIP <remoteName>

28 Chapter 1. Router Concepts

Router System and ConÞguration Files

The system software and configuration information for the router are contained in files in its DOS-compatible file
system. It is wise to keep a backup copy of these files. For more information on the backup and restoration of
configuration files, see page 162.

Any file contained within the system may be retrieved or replaced using the TFTP protocol. Specifically,
configuration files and the operating system upgrades can be updated. Only one copy of the router software is
allowed in the routerÕs FLASH memory. For more information on these topics, see Managing the Router, page
150.

Note: Users should not delete any of these files, unless advised to do so by Technical Support.

The router software files are as follows:

KERNEL.F2K Router system software (KERNEL.FP1 for IDSL routers).

ASIC.AIC FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) file that provides the logic that customizes the
router hardware.

The router configuration files are as follows:

SYSTEM.CNF These configuration files contain:

DOD Remote router database

SYS System settings: name, message, authentication method, and passwords
ETH Ethernet LAN configuration settings

DHCP.DAT DHCP files.

FILTER.DAT Bridge filters.

ETH.DEF File used by the manufacturer to set a default Ethernet configuration.

ATM.DAT ATM configuration file.

ATOM.DAT ATM configuration information.

SDSL.DAT SDSL configuration information.

DMT.DAT DMT configuration information.

IPSEC.DAT IPSec configuration information.

IKE.DAT IKE configuration information.

The following files are for automatic execution of command scripts. For more information, see page 166.

AUTOEXEC.BAT Autoexec file of commands to run on next reboot.

AUTOEXEC.OLD Autoexec file that has run already

The keys for software options that have been purchased are kept in the file KEYFILE.DAT. Do not copy the key
file from one router to another router, even if the two routers are the same model with the same kernel. The

Chapter 1. Router Concepts 29

software keys are isomorphic to one and only one router. For more information on software option keys, see page
114.

30 Chapter 1. Router Concepts

Chapter 2. Planning for Router ConÞguration

This chapter describes the basic information you need before you can begin configuring your router. The basic
configuration tasks can be performed using the Command Line Interface described in this manual or the graphic
interface described in the Quick Start Guide that came with your router. This basic information you need is the
same in either case.

The basic configuration tasks include the following:

¥ Setting names, passwords, PVC numbers, and link and network parameters

¥ Configuring specific protocol requirements, such as IP or IPX addresses and IP protocol controls

¥ Activating bridging and routing protocols

¥ Enabling the Internet firewall filter with IP routing

Remote Routers

This manual frequently refers to the target router and remote routers, which are defined as follows.

Target router. Router that you are configuring. Also referred to as local router.

Remote routers. All the routers to which the target (local) router may connect.

Remote router database. Database which resides in the target router and contains information about the
remote routers to which the target router may connect.

The following diagram illustrates these terms.

Target Router Remote Routers

Router A Router B
Remote router database
Router B DSL
Router C
Network
Router C

Router D Router D

As shown in the illustration, the remote router database in the target router contains an entry for each remote
router. A remote router entry defines:

¥ Connection parameters
¥ Security features
¥ Route addressing and bridging functions

Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration 31

The commands that define information for a remote router entry start with the word remote and end with the
name of the remote entry. Most of these commands are described in the section REMOTE Commands, on page
256.

Managing the Remote Entries

You can control the use of a remote entry in the remote router database by enabling or disabling its use. To enable
a remote, use the remote enable command (page 266). To disable a remote, use the remote disable command
(page 265). The remote remains enabled or disabled across reboots of the router.

The active session for a remote can be stopped and started independently of the other remotes (see the commands
remote stop, page 288, remote start, page 287, and remote restart, page 274). Certain configuration changes
require a save and restart before the change becomes effective. Thus, using these commands, you can activate
configuration changes for a remote without rebooting the router. Unlike enable/disable, a stop or start does not
remain in effect across reboots.

Protocols to be Used

The information needed to configure the router depends on the link protocol and network protocols that are to be
used. The link protocol and network protocols used are generally determined by your Network Service Provider.

This chapter is organized in sections that apply to specific protocols.

Note: Use the blank Network Information Worksheets in Appendix A to collect your network information.

If you are using Link and Network Protocols:

PPP with:
¥ IP Routing, go to page 34
¥ IPX Routing, go to page 36
¥ Bridging, go to page 38

RFC 1483 or RFC 1490 with:

¥ IP Routing, go to page 39
¥ IPX Routing, go to page 40
¥ Bridging, go to page 41

RFC 1483MER or RFC 1490MER (MAC Encapsulated Routing) with:

¥ IP Routing, go to page 42

FRF8 with:
¥ IP Routing, go to page 44

32 Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration

To configure a Dual-Ethernet Router:

Select one of these two configurations:

Configuring the Dual-Ethernet Router as a Bridge, on page 45

Configuring the Dual-Ethernet Router for IP Routing, on page 46

Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration 33

PPP Link Protocol (over ATM or Frame Relay)
The PPP Link Protocol is an encapsulation method that can be used over ATM (for ATM routers) or over Frame
Relay (for Frame-Relay routers). For PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE), see page 97.

PPP over ATM and PPP over Frame Relay use different connection identifiers:

¥ VPI/VCI numbers are used for ATM.

¥ A DLCI number is used for Frame Relay.

IP Routing Network Protocol

t System Names and Authentication Passwords

For the Target Router

You define the system name and authentication password for the target router. A system name and
authentication password are required because they are used by a remote router to authenticate the target
router.

For the Remote Router(s)

The Network Service Provider defined the system names and authentication passwords for the remote
routers. You must have this information because it is used by the target router to authenticate the remote
router. The name and password are used in both PAP and CHAP authentication. To see how this
information is used, refer to the diagram under PAP/CHAP Security Authentication, on page 22 .

Note: If the NSP does not support the authentication of the NSP system by the target router, use the
command remote disauthen <remoteName> to disable the authentication process.

Note: A sample configuration containing names and passwords is provided in the section Sample
Configuration 1: PPP with IP and IPX, on page 61 .

t For ATM routers, VPI and VCI Numbers

ATM uses two connection identifiers that describe the PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit). These
identifiers are the VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and the VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier). Your router may
have been preconfigured with VPI/VCI numbers. If not, you need to get these numbers from your
Network Service Provider.

If you are connecting to multiple remote sites, you need the unique VPI and VCI numbers that identify
the remote destinations. You should get these from your Network Service Provider and/or Network
Access Provider.

t For Frame Relay routers, your DLCI

The DLCI (Data Link Connection Identifier) number applies to Frame Relay routers only. Get your
DLCI from your Network Service Provider or Network Access Provider.

34 Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration

 t DNS Internet Account Information (optional)

The Domain Name Service (DNS) maps host names to IP addresses. DNS is performed by Domain
Name Servers. The router can get DNS information automatically. Or, you can choose to configure DNS
manually. Consult with your Network Service Provider to determine if you need to enter the following
information:

¥ DNS server address

¥ DNS second server address

¥ DNS domain name

t IP Routing Addresses

For the Ethernet Interface

This information is defined by the user or your Network Administrator.

Ethernet IP Address (local LAN)

An Ethernet LAN IP address and subnet mask are required for the routerÕs local Ethernet LAN
connection.

Note: An Ethernet route is usually defined when there are multiple routers on the Ethernet that cannot
exchange routing information. This feature is not normally used, except in special circumstances.

For the WAN Interface

This information is defined by the Network Service Provider.

Source (Target/Local) WAN Port Address

If Network Address Translation (NAT) is enabled, you must specify a source WAN IP address for the
WAN connection to the remote router if IP address negotiation under PPP does not provide one. Check
with your system administrator for details on whether the router must communicate in numbered or
unnumbered mode and which addresses are required.

Remote WAN Address

You may need to specify a remote WAN IP address for the WAN connection to the remote router
depending on IP address negotiation under PPP. Check with your system administrator for details on
whether the router must communicate in numbered or unnumbered mode and which addresses are
required.

TCP/IP Remote Routes

An IP route includes an IP address, subnet mask, and metric (a number representing the perceived cost in
reaching the remote network or station).

A TCP/IP Default Route should be designated in the routing table for all traffic that cannot be directed
to other specific routes. Define the default route to a remote router or, in special circumstances, define an
Ethernet gateway. There can be only one default route specified.

Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration 35

IPX Routing Network Protocol

t System Names and Authentication Passwords

For the Target Router

You define the system name and authentication password for the target router. A system name and
authentication password are required because they are used by a remote router to authenticate the target
router.

For the Remote Site(s)

The Network Service Provider defined the system names and authentication passwords for the remote
routers. You must have this information because it is used by the target router to authenticate the remote
router. The name and password are used in both PAP and CHAP authentication. To see how this
information is used, refer to the diagram under PAP/CHAP Security Authentication, on page 22 .

Note: If the NSP does not support the authentication of the NSP system by the target router, use the
command remote disauthen <remoteName> to disable the authentication process.

Note: A sample configuration containing names and passwords is provided in the section Sample
Configuration 1: PPP with IP and IPX, on page 61

t VPI and VCI Numbers

Your router may have been preconfigured with VPI/VCI numbers. If not, you will have to obtain these
numbers from your Network Service Provider and then configure them.

If you are connecting to multiple remote sites, you will need to obtain additional VPI and VCI numbers
from your Network Service Provider and/or Network Access Provider. These numbers identify the
remote destination and must, therefore, be unique for each remote.

t DLCI (for Frame-Relay Routers)

The DLCI number applies to Frame-Relay routers only. Your Network Service Provider or your
Network Access Provider will provide you with a Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The DLCI is
an address identifying your connection.

t IPX Routing Entries

These numbers are defined by the Network Administrator. You will need to obtain the following
information (most likely from your network administrator) for IPX Routing.

Note: IPX routes define a path to a specific destination. They are primarily needed by the routers to
allow the servers and clients to exchange packets. A path to a file server will be based on the Internal
Network Number of the server. A path to a client will be based on the External Network Number
(Ethernet) of the client.

36 Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration

 Internal Network Number
It is a logical network number that identifies an individual Novell server. It is needed to specify a route to
the services (i.e., file services, print services) that Novell offers. It must be a unique number.

External Network (a.k.a. IPX Network Number)

It refers to a physical LAN/wire network segment to which servers, routers, and PCs are connected
(Ethernet cable-to-router segment). It must be a unique number.

WAN Network Number

Important: This number is part of the routing information. It is only used to identify the WAN segment
between the two routers. Note that only those two routers need to have the WAN Network Number
configured.

Service Advertisement Protocol (SAP)

SAP entries should reflect primary logon servers for the clients on the local LAN. Only the servers on the
remote side of the link have to be entered. Local servers do not need to be entered.

Frame Type
With local servers on your LAN, make sure to select the proper frame type for the IPX network number.
To determine this, consult with your network administrator. When you have only NetWare clients on
your LAN, keep the default (802.2) selected as most clients can support any type. The frame type choices
are:

802.2Default recommended by Novell

802.3Other most common type
DIXFor DEC, Intel, Xerox; this setting is also referred to as ÒEthernet IIÓ, and it is rapidly
becoming obsolete.

Note: For step-by-step information on how to configure IPX routing, see Configuring IPX Routing, on
page 366.

Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration 37

Bridging Network Protocol

t System Names and Authentication Passwords

For the Target Router

You define the system name and authentication password for the target router. A system name and
authentication password are required because they are used by a remote router to authenticate the target
router.

t For the Remote Site(s)

This information is obtained from the Network Service Provider. For each remote site, you must have the
site name and its authentication password. They are used by the target router to authenticate the remote
end. The name and password are used in both PAP and CHAP authentication. Please refer to the diagram
under PAP/CHAP Security Authentication, on page 22 to see how this information is used.

Note 1: A sample configuration containing Names and Passwords is provided in the section Sample
Configuration 1: PPP with IP and IPX, on page 61.

Note 2: If the ISP does not support the authentication of the ISP system by the caller, use the command
remote disauthen <remoteName> to disable the authentication.

t VPI and VCI Numbers

Your router may have been preconfigured with VPI/VCI numbers. If not, you will have to obtain these
numbers from your Network Service Provider and then configure them.

If you are connecting to multiple remote sites, you will need to obtain additional VPI and VCI numbers
from your Network Service Provider and/or Network Access Provider. These numbers identify the
remote destination and must, therefore, be unique for each remote.

t DLCI (for Frame-Relay Routers)

The DLCI number applies to Frame-Relay routers only. Your Network Service Provider or your
Network Access Provider will provide you with a Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The DLCI is
an address identifying your connection.

t DNS Internet Account Information (optional)

This information is obtained from the Network Service Provider. Consult with you Network Service
Provider to find out if you need to enter the following information:

¥ DNS server address

¥ DNS second server address

¥ DNS domain name

Note: If you intend to connect to the Internet only, enter this information using the Internet Quick Start
configurator.

38 Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration

RFC 1483/RFC 1490 Link Protocols
The Link Protocol RFC 1483 is a multiprotocol encapsulation method over ATM and is used by ATM routers.
RFC 1490 is a multiprotocol encapsulation method over Frame-Relay and is used by Frame-Relay routers.

RFC 1483 and RFC 1490 combined with the IP, IPX, or Bridging Network Protocols share the same configuration
characteristics, except for the connection identifiers: VPI/VCI numbers are used for RFC 1483 and a DLCI
number is used for RFC 1490.

Obtain the information as described in the appropriate section. This data will be used later to configure your router
using the Command Line Interface (see Configuration Tables, on page 48).

IP Routing Network Protocol

t VPI and VCI Numbers (for RFC 1483)

The VPI and VCI numbers apply to ATM routers only. Your router may have been preconfigured with
VPI/VCI numbers. If not, you will have to obtain these numbers from your Network Service Provider
and then configure them.

If you are connecting to multiple remote sites, you will need to obtain additional VPI and VCI numbers
from your Network Service Provider and/or Network Access Provider. These numbers identify the
remote destination and must, therefore, be unique for each remote.

t DLCI (for RFC 1490)

The DLCI number applies to Frame-Relay routers only. Your Network Service Provider or your
Network Access Provider will provide you with a Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The DLCI is
an address identifying your connection.

t DNS Internet Account Information (optional)

This information is obtained from the Network Service Provider. Consult with you Network Service
Provider to find out if you need to enter the following information:

¥ DNS server address

¥ DNS second server address

¥ DNS domain name

t IP Routing Entries

For the Ethernet Interface

This information is defined by the user or the Network Administrator.

Ethernet IP Address (Local LAN)

An Ethernet LAN IP address and subnet mask are required for the routerÕs local Ethernet LAN
connection.

Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration 39

 TCP/IP Ethernet Routes
You normally do not need to define an Ethernet IP route. An Ethernet IP route consists of an IP
address, a mask, a metric, and a gateway. An Ethernet route is usually defined when there are multiple
routers on the Ethernet that cannot exchange routing information.

For the WAN Interface

This information is obtained from the Network Administrator.

Source (Target/Local) WAN Port Address

If Network Address Translation (NAT) is enabled, you must specify a source WAN IP address for the
WAN connection to the remote router. Check with your system administrator for details.

If NAT is not enabled, you may need to specify a source WAN IP address for the WAN connection to
the remote router. Check with your system administrator for details.

TCP/IP Remote Routes

An IP route includes an IP address, subnet mask, and metric (a number representing the perceived cost
in reaching the remote network or station).

A TCP/IP Default Route default route should be designated in the routing table for all traffic that
cannot be directed to other specific routes. You will need to define the default route to a remote router
or, in special circumstances, define an Ethernet gateway. There can be only one default route specified.

IPX Routing Network Protocol

t VPI and VCI Numbers (for RFC 1483)

The VPI and VCI numbers apply to ATM routers only. Your router may have been preconfigured with
VPI/VCI numbers. If not, you will have to obtain these numbers from your Network Service Provider
and then configure them.

If you are connecting to multiple remote sites, you will need to obtain additional VPI and VCI numbers
from your Network Service Provider and/or Network Access Provider. These numbers identify the
remote destination and must, therefore, be unique for each remote.

t DLCI (for RFC 1490)

The DLCI number applies to Frame Relay routers only. Your Network Service Provider or your
Network Access Provider will provide you with a Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The DLCI is
an address identifying your connection.

t IPX Routing Entries

The user or the Network Administrator defines this information.

Note: IPX routes define a path to a specific destination. They are primarily needed by the routers to
allow the servers and clients to exchange packets. A path to a file server will be based on the Internal
Network Number of the server. A path to a client will be based on the External Network Number
(Ethernet) of the client.

40 Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration

 Internal Network Number
This is a logical network number that identifies an individual Novell server. It is needed to specify a
route to the services (i.e., file services, print services) that Novell offers. It must be a unique number.

External Network (a.k.a. IPX Network Number)

This number refers to a physical LAN/wire network segment to which servers, routers, and PCs are
connected (Ethernet cable-to-router segment). It must be a unique number.

WAN Network Number

Important: This number is part of the routing information. It is only used to identify the WAN segment
between the two routers.

Note: Only the two routers need to have the WAN Network Number configured.

Service Advertisement Protocol (SAP)

SAP entries should reflect primary logon servers for the clients on the local LAN. Only the servers on the
remote side of the link have to be entered. Local servers do not need to be entered.

Frame Type
With local servers on your LAN, make sure to select the proper frame type for the IPX network number.
To determine this, consult with your network administrator. When you have only NetWare clients on
your LAN, keep the default (802.2) selected as most clients can support any type.
The frame type choices are:
802.2Default recommended by Novell
802.3Other most common type
DIXFor DEC, Intel, Xerox; this setting is also referred to as ÒEthernet IIÓ, and it is rapidly
becoming obsolete.

Bridging Network Protocol

t VPI and VCI Numbers (with RFC 1483)

The VPI and VCI numbers apply to ATM routers only. Your router may have been preconfigured with
VPI/VCI numbers. If not, you will have to obtain these numbers from your Network Service Provider
and then configure them.

If you are connecting to multiple remote sites, you will need to obtain additional VPI and VCI numbers
from your Network Service Provider and/or Network Access Provider. These numbers identify the
remote destination and must, therefore, be unique for each remote.

t DLCI (with RFC 1490)

The DLCI number applies to Frame-Relay routers only. Your Network Service Provider or your
Network Access Provider will provide you with a Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The DLCI is
an address identifying your connection.

Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration 41

 t DNS Internet Account Information (optional)

This information is obtained from the Network Service Provider. Consult with your Network Service
Provider to find out if you need to enter the following information:

¥ DNS server address

¥ DNS second server address

¥ DNS domain name

MAC Encapsulated Routing

MAC Encapsulated Routing (MER) allows IP packets to be carried as bridged frames (bridged format). The Link
Protocol RFC 1483 with MER (referred to as RFC 1483MER) is a multiprotocol encapsulation method over ATM
used by ATM routers. RFC 1490 with MER (referred to as RFC 1490MER) is a multiprotocol encapsulation
method over Frame Relay used by Frame-Relay routers.

RFC 1483MER and RFC 1490MER combined with the IP, IPX, or Bridging Network Protocols share the same
configuration characteristics, except for the connection identifiers: VPI/VCI numbers are used for RFC 1483MER
and a DLCI number is used for RFC 1490.

Obtain the information as described in the appropriate section. This data will be later used to configure your router
using the Command Line Interface (see Configuring MAC Encapsulated Routing: RFC 1483MER / RFC
1490MER with IP Routing, on page 55).

IP Routing Network Protocol

t VPI and VCI Numbers (for RFC 1483MER)

The VPI and VCI numbers apply to ATM routers only. Your router may have been preconfigured with
VPI/VCI numbers. If not, you will have to obtain these numbers from your Network Service Provider
and then configure them.

If you are connecting to multiple remote sites, you will need to obtain additional VPI and VCI numbers
from your Network Service Provider and/or Network Access Provider. These numbers identify the
remote destination and must, therefore, be unique for each remote.

t DLCI (for RFC 1490MER)

The DLCI number applies to Frame Relay routers only. Your Network Service Provider or your
Network Access Provider will provide you with a DLCI (Data Link Connection Identifier). The DLCI is
an address identifying your connection.

t DNS Internet Account Information (optional)

This information is obtained from the Network Service Provider. Consult with your Network Service
Provider to find out if you need to enter the following information:

42 Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration

 ¥ DNS server address

¥ DNS second server address

¥ DNS domain name

Note: If you intend to only connect to the Internet, enter this information using the Internet Quick Start
configurator.

t IP Routing Entries

For the Ethernet Interface

This information is defined by the user or the Network Administrator.

Ethernet IP Address (Local LAN)

An Ethernet LAN IP address and subnet mask are required for the routerÕs local Ethernet LAN
connection.

TCP/IP Ethernet Routes

You normally do not need to define an Ethernet IP route. An Ethernet IP route consists of an IP address,
a mask, a metric, and a gateway. An Ethernet route is usually defined when there are multiple routers on
the Ethernet that cannot exchange routing information between them.

For the ATM WAN Interface

This information is obtained from the Network Administrator or the Network Service Provider.

Source (Target/Local) WAN Port Address and Mask

You must specify a Source WAN IP address for the WAN connection to the remote router (whether or
not Network Address Translation is enabled). The Source WAN Address is the address of the local router
on the remote network. The mask is the mask used on the remote network. Check with your system
administrator for details.

TCP/IP Remote Routes

If you are using RFC 1483MER or RFC 1490MER, the IP route includes an IP address, subnet mask,
metric (a number representing the perceived cost in reaching the remote network or station), and a
gateway. The gateway address that you enter is the address of a router on the remote LAN. Check with
your system administrator for details.

A TCP/IP Default Route should be designated in the routing table for all traffic that cannot be directed
to other specific routes. You will need to define the default route to a remote router or, in DLCI (special
circumstances, define an Ethernet gateway. There can be only one default route specified.

Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration 43

FRF8 Link Protocol
The FRF8 Link Protocol is an encapsulation method that allows an ATM router to interoperate with a
Frame- Relay network.

FRF8 is only used in conjunction with the IP Network Protocol. Obtain the information described below. This
data will be used later to configure your router using the Command Line Interface (see Configuration Tables, on
page 48).

IP Routing Network Protocol

t VPI and VCI Numbers

Your router may have been preconfigured with VPI/VCI numbers. If not, you will have to obtain these
numbers from your Network Service Provider and then configure them.

If you are connecting to multiple remote sites, you will need to obtain additional VPI and VCI numbers
from your Network Service Provider and/or Network Access Provider. These numbers identify the
remote destination and must, therefore, be unique for each remote.

t DNS Internet Account Information (optional)

The following information is obtained from the Network Service Provider. Consult with your NSP to
find out if you need to enter the following information:

¥ DNS server address

¥ DNS second server address

¥ DNS domain name

Note: If you intend to connect only to the Internet, enter this information using the Internet Quick Start
configurator.

t IP Routing Entries

For the Ethernet Interface

This information is defined by the user or the Network Administrator.

Ethernet IP Address (Local LAN)

An Ethernet LAN IP address and subnet mask are required for the routerÕs local Ethernet LAN
connection.

TCP/IP Ethernet Routes

You normally do not need to define an Ethernet IP route. An Ethernet IP route consists of an IP address,
a mask, a metric, and a gateway. An Ethernet route is usually defined when there are multiple routers on
the Ethernet that cannot exchange routing information.

44 Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration

 For the ATM WAN Interface
This information is obtained from the Network Administrator or the Network Service Provider.

Source (Target/Local) WAN Port Address and Mask

You must specify a Source WAN IP address for the WAN connection to the remote router (whether or
not Network Address Translation is enabled. The Source WAN address is the address of the local router
on the remote network. The mask is the mask used on the remote network. Check with your system
administrator for details.

TCP/IP Remote Routes

If you are using FRF8, the IP route includes an IP address, subnet mask, metric (a number representing
the perceived cost in reaching the remote network or station). Check with your system administrator for
details.

A TCP/IP Default Route should be designated in the routing table for all traffic that cannot be directed
to other specific routes.
You will need to define the default route to a remote router or, in special circumstances, define an
Ethernet gateway. There can be only one default route specified.

Dual-Ethernet Router Configuration

General Information on Dual Ethernet router

To configure the Dual-Ethernet router, access the router using the Command Line Interface (CLI). The CLI
can be accessed from a Telnet or a console session (using the console cable) connected to the routerÕs default
IP address of 192.169.254.254. You can also configure the router using the Web browser GUI. Refer to the
Dual-Ethernet Router Quick Start Guide.

The Dual-Ethernet router has two interfaces:

ETH/0Ñrefers to the routerÕs hub with four 10Base-T connectors

ETH/1Ñrefers to the single 10Base-T connector (or the second hub on the new hardware model)

Bridging is enabled by default when the router boots up. IP and IPX routing are disabled.

The routerÕs default IP address is 192.168.254.254.

DHCP is enabled by default and the routerÕs DHCP server issues IP addresses to any PC request. The DHCP
default IP pool is 192.168.254. 2 through 192.168.254.20.

To connect to the router, use the routerÕs default IP address using a Telnet session, for example, and any
10Base-T port on the router.

Warning: You cannot boot from the ETH/1 interface.

Configuring the Dual-Ethernet Router as a Bridge

This router is configured by default as a bridge and no configuration steps are needed. The user needs only
establish a connection to the remote location (to the Internet Service Provider, for example).

Bridging is enabled by default when the router boots up. IP and IPX routing are disabled.

Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration 45

Configuring the Dual-Ethernet Router for IP Routing

The eth commands are used to configure the Dual-Ethernet router for IP routing. Refer to the section Dual-
Ethernet Router (ETH) Commands, on page 296, for usage and syntax information.

The last argument of each ETH command determines which interface is being configured (0 for ETH/0, 1 for
ETH/1).

Each interface (ETH/0 and ETH/1) must be set. A minimum of one route must be defined to have a working
configuration. This is generally a default route on the ETH/1 interface where all traffic otherwise specified is
automatically forwarded. This default route is: 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1.

The Gateway address is the IP address supplied by your Internet Service Provider or Network Administrator.

You can customize your router by using the scripting feature, which loads batch files of preset configuration
commands into the router (refer to the Batch File Command Execution, on page 166 section).

A Dual-Ethernet router sample configuration with IP Routing is provided in the Sample Configuration 3:
Configuring a Dual-Ethernet Router for IP Routing, on page 75 section.

46 Chapter 2. Planning for Router Configuration

Chapter 3. ConÞguring Router Software

This chapter covers configuration tables and verifying the router configuration. It also provides sample
configurations.

Configuration commands are outlined for each Link Protocol/Network Protocol supported by the router.
The information needed to configure the router is contingent on the chosen Link Protocol. It is therefore
important to know which Link Protocol you are using (this is determined by your Network Service Provider)
to be able to refer to the configuration sections that apply to your setup.

A configuration table for the Dual-Ethernet Router (with IP routing enabled) is also provided.

The section on verifying the router configuration describes how to test IP, IPX, or Bridging.

In this chapter, you will find two sample configurations with diagrams, commands, and list outputs.
Note 1: For usage conventions and a complete description of the commands mentioned in this chapter, refer
to Chapter 8. Command Reference on page 187.

Note 2: To configure the router software, the Command Line Interface is available to you at all times after
you have installed the router hardware, connected to the router with a terminal-emulation session (or ASCII
terminal), and powered the unit on. This chapter assumes that you have successfully installed the router
hardware as described in the Quick Start Guide.

If you intend to use the Command Line Interface through Configuration Manager, it is assumed that you have
installed the Configuration Manager software and can access the terminal window (refer to the Quick Start
Guide).

Note 3: Worksheets are provided in Appendix A so that you can enter details about your target router and
remote routers. The worksheets list the commands associated with setting the features.

To configure the target router, you need to fill out one chart for the target router and one remote router chart
for each remote router to be entered into the remote router database.

If you are setting up both ends of the network, you will need a mirror image of the information listed below
for configuring the router on the other end of the link.

Important: If you change any the of the following settings, you must use the commands reboot and save for the
changes to take effect:

Ethernet LAN: Ethernet IP or IPX address, TCP/IP routing, IPX routing

Bridging: Bridging, Filters

Remote Router: TCP/IP route addresses, IPX routes, IPX SAPs and bridging control, and enable, disable, or
add remote routers

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 47

ConÞguration Tables

The following tables give you step-by-step instructions for standard configurations of the following Network
Protocol/Link Protocol associations, as well as a configuration table for a Dual-Ethernet Router:

¥ PPP Link Protocol with IP Routing Network Protocol

¥ PPP Link Protocol with IPX Routing Network Protocol

¥ PPP Link Protocol with Bridging Network Protocol

¥ RFC 1483/RFC 1490 Link Protocols with IP Routing Network Protocol

¥ RFC 1483/RFC 1490 Link Protocols with IPX Routing Network Protocol

¥ RFC 1483/RFC 1490 Link Protocols with Bridging Network Protocol

¥ RFC 1483MER/RFC 1490MER Link Protocols with IP Network Protocol

¥ FRF8 Link Protocol with IP Routing Network Protocol

¥ Mixed Network Protocols (combinations of two or three network protocols)

¥ Dual-Ethernet Router with IP routing

Note: Blank Network Configuration Worksheets are available in Appendix A.

Using the tables:

1. Find the configuration table that fits your particular Network Protocol/Link Protocol association. These tables
are designed to provide easy step-by-step instructions.

2. Use the blank Network Configuration Worksheets provided in Appendix A to enter the commands in the
order that they are given in the Commands column of the configuration tables.

3. You may want to refer to the sample configurations at the end of this chapter.

48 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Configuring PPP with IP Routing
This table outlines configuration commands for the PPP Link Protocol with the IP Routing Network Protocol.

PPP with IP Routing

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Name Required system name <name>
System Message Optional system msg <message>
Authentication Password Required system passwd <password>
Ethernet IP Address As required eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>]
DHCP Settings Already enabled; additional dhcp set valueoption domainname
settings may be required <domainname>
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>
Change Login Optional system admin <password>
Remote Routers
New Entry Enter: Remote Name remote add <remoteName>
Link Protocol/PVCa Select: PPP remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName>
(for ATM routers) Enter: VPI/VCI numbers remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>
Link Protocol/DLCIb Select: PPP remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName>
(for Frame Relay routers) Enter: DLCI number remote setDLCI <number> <remoteName>

Security c Choose security level remote setAuthen <protocol> <remoteName>

RemoteÕs Password Enter: password remote setOurPasswd <password> <remoteName>

Bridging On/Off Must be off remote disBridge <remoteName>

TCP/IP Route Address Enter: Explicit or default remote addIproute <ipnet> <ipnetmask> <hops>
route <remoteName>
If NAT is enabled: To enable NAT, use: remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName>
You may need to enter a remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask>
Source WAN Port Address <remoteName>
If NAT is not enabled: You may need to enter a remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask>
Source WAN Port Address <remoteName>
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing Must be enabled eth ip enable
(Internet Firewall) (optional) eth ip Þrewall <on | off>
IPX Routing Must be disabled eth ipx disable
Store save
Reboot reboot

a Enter this information if you are using PPP in an ATM environment.

b Enter this information if you are using PPP in a Frame Relay environment.
c If the ISP does not support the authentication of the ISP system by the caller, use the command remote disauthen
<remoteName> to disable the authentication.

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 49

Configuring PPP with IPX Routing
This table outlines configuration commands for the PPP Link Protocol with the IPX Routing Network Protocol.
Note: Appendix B provides step-by-step information on how to configure IPX routing.

PPP with IPX Routing

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Name Required system name <name>
System Message Optional system msg <message>
Authentication Password Required system passwd <password>
Ethernet IP Address As required eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask>[<port#>]
Settings DHCP Already enabled; addit. dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname>
settings may be required dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver < ipaddr >
Change Login Optional system admin <password>
Ethernet IPX Network # Enter: IPX network # eth ipx addr <ipxnet> [<port#>]
Frame Type (default: 802.2) eth ipx frame <type>
Remote Routers
New Entry Enter: Remote Name remote add <remoteName>
Link Protocol/PVCa Select: PPP remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName>
(for ATM routers) Enter: VPI/VCI numbers remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>
Link Protocol/DLCIb Select: PPP remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName>
(for Frame Relay routers) Enter: DLCI number remote setDLCI <number> <remoteName>
Securityc Choose security level remote setAuthen <protocol> <remoteName>
RemoteÕs Password Enter: password remote setPasswd <password> <remoteName>
Bridging On/Off Must be off remote disBridge <remoteName>
IPX Routes Enter appropriate info remote addIpxroute <ipxNet> <metric> <ticks>
Add <remoteName>
IPX SAPs Enter appropriate info remote addIpxsap <servicename> <ipxNet>
Add <ipxNode> <socket> <type> <hops> <remoteName>
WAN Network # Enter appropriate info remote setIpxaddr <ipxNet> <remoteName>
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing Must be disabled eth ip disable
IPX Routing Must be enabled eth ipx enable
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using PPP in an ATM environment.
b Enter this information if you are using PPP in a Frame- Relay environment.
c If the ISP does not support the authentication of the ISP system by the caller, use the command:
remote disauthen <remoteName> to disable the authentication.

50 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Configuring PPP with Bridging
This table outlines configuration commands for the PPP Link Protocol with the Bridging Network Protocol.

PPP with Bridging

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Name Required system name <name>
System Message Optional system msg <message>
Authorization Password Required system passwd <password>
DHCP Settings Already enabled; additional dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname>
settings may be required dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver < ipaddr >
Change Login Optional system admin <password>
Remote Routers
New Entry Enter: Remote Name remote add <remoteName>
Link Protocol/PVCa Select: PPP remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName>
(for ATM routers) Enter: VPI/VCI remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number> <remoteName>

Link Protocol/DLCIb Select: PPP remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName>

(for Frame Relay routers) Enter: DLCI number remote setDLCI <number> <remoteName>

Securityc Choose security level remote setAuthen <protocol> <remoteName>

RemoteÕs Password Enter: Password remote setOurPasswd <password> <remoteName>
Bridging On/Off Must be ON remote enaBridge <remoteName>
IP and IPX Routing
IP Routing Must be disabled eth ip disable
IPX Routing Must be disabled eth ipx disable
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using PPP in an ATM environment.
b Enter this information if you are using PPP in a Frame-Relay environment.
c If the ISP does not support the authentication of the ISP system by the caller, use the command remote disauthen
<remoteName> to disable the authentication.

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 51

Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IP Routing
This table outlines configuration commands for the RFC 1483 and the RFC 1490 Link Protocols with the IP
Routing Network Protocol.

RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IP Routing

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Message Optional system msg <message>
Ethernet IP Address As required eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>]
DHCP Settings Already enabled; dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname>
additional settings may dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>
be required
Change Login Optional system admin <password>
Remote Routers
New Entry Enter: Remote Name remote add <remoteName>
Link Protocol/PVCa Select: RFC 1483 remote setProtocol RFC1483 <remoteName>
(for ATM routers) Enter: VPI/VCI remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
Numbers <remoteName>
Link Protocol/DLCIb Select: FR remote setProtocol FR <remoteName>
(for Frame Relay Enter: DLCI number remote setDLCI <number> <remoteName>
routers)
Bridging On/Off Must be OFF remote disBridge <remoteName>
TCP/IP Route Enter: Explicit or default remote addiproute <ipnet> <ipnetmask> <hops>
Address route with remote <remoteName>
gateway
If Address Translation To enable NAT, use: remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName>
(NAT) is enabled:

TCP/IP Route Enter: Source WAN Port remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask> <remoteName>
Addresses Address
If NAT is off: You may still need to remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask> <remoteName>
TCP/IP Route enter a Source WAN
Addresses Port Address
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing Must be enabled eth ip enable
(Internet Firewall) (Optional) eth ip Þrewall <on | off >
IPX Routing Must be disabled eth ipx disable
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using RFC 1483 in an ATM environment.
b Enter this information if you are using RFC 1490 in a Frame-Relay environment.

52 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IPX Routing
This table outlines configuration commands for the RFC 1483 and RFC 1490 Link Protocols with the IPX
Routing Network Protocol.

Note: Appendix B provides step-by-step information on how to configure IPX routing.

RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IPX Routing

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Message Optional eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>]
Ethernet IP Address As required dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname>
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver < ipaddr >
DHCP Settings Already enabled; eth ipx addr <ipxnet> [<port#>]
additional settings may be
required
Ethernet IPX Network # Enter: IPX Network # Frame eth ipx frame <type>
Type (default is 802.2)
Change Login Optional system admin <password>
Remote Routers
New Entry Enter: Remote Name remote add <remoteName>

Link Protocol/PVC Select: RFC 1483 remote setProtocol RFC1483 <remoteName>

(for ATM routers) Enter: VPI/VCI Numbers remote setPVC <vpi number>* <vci number>
<remoteName>

Link Protocol/DLCIa Select: FR remote setProtocol FR <remoteName>

(for Frame Relay routers) Enter: DLCI number remote setDLCI < number> <remoteName>
Bridging on/off Must be off remote disBridge <remoteName>
IPX Routes Enter appropriate info remote addIpxroute <ipxNet> <metric> <ticks>
Add <remoteName>
IPX SAPs Enter appropriate info remote addIpxsap <servicename> <ipxNet>
Add < ipxNode> <socket> <type> <hops> <remoteName>
WAN Network Number Enter appropriate info remote setIpxaddr <ipxNet> <remoteName>
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing Must be disabled eth ip disable
(Internet Firewall) (optional) eth ip Þrewall <on | off >
IPX Routing Must be enabled eth ipx enable
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using RFC 1490 in a Frame Relay environment.

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 53

Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with Bridging
This table outlines configuration commands for the RFC 1483 and RFC 1490 Link Protocols with the Bridging
Network Protocol.

RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with Bridging

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Message Optional system msg <message>
DHCP Settings Already enabled; dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname>
additional settings may be dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>
required
Change Login Optional system admin <password>
Remote Routers
New Entry Enter: Remote Name remote add <remoteName>
Link Protocol/PVC Select: RFC 1483 remote setProtocol RFC1483 <remoteName>
(for ATM routers) Enter: VPI/VCI Numbers remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>
Link Protocol/DLCIa Select: FR remote setProtocol FR <remoteName>
(for Frame Relay Enter: DLCI number remote setDLCI <number> <remoteName>
routers)
Bridging On/Off Must be on remote enaBridge <remoteName>
IP and IPX Routing
IP Routing Must be disabled eth ip disable
IPX Routing Must be disabled eth ipx disable
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using RFC 1490 in a Frame-Relay environment.

54 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Configuring MAC Encapsulated Routing: RFC 1483MER / RFC
1490MER with IP Routing
This table outlines configuration commands for the RFC 1483MER and RFC 1490MER Link Protocols with the
IP Routing Network Protocol.

RFC 1483MER / RFC 1490 MER with IP Routing

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Message Optional system msg <message>
Ethernet IP Address As required eth ip addr <ipnet> <ipnetmask> [<port#>]
DHCP Settings Already enabled; dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname>
additional settings may dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>
be required
Change Login Optional system admin <password>
Remote Routers
New Entry Enter: Remote Name remote add <remoteName>
Link Protocol/PVCa Select: RFC 1483MER remote setProtocol RFC1483MER <remoteName>
(for ATM routers) Enter: VPI/VCI Numbers remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>
Link Protocol/DLCIb Select: MER remote setProtocol MER <remoteName>
(for Frame Relay Enter: DLCI number remote setDLCI <number> <remoteName>
routers)
Bridging On/Off Must be off remote disBridge <remoteName>
TCP/IP Route Address Enter: Explicit or default remote addiproute <ipnet> <ipnetmask><ipGateway>
route with remote <ipGateway> <remoteName>
gateway
If NAT is enabled: To enable NAT, use: remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName>
If NAT is OFF: Enter: Source WAN Port remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask><remoteName>
Address + mask of the
remote network
TCP/IP Route Enter a Source WAN Port remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask> <remoteName>
Addresses Address + mask of the
remote networkÕs mask
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing Must be enabled eth ip enable
(Internet Firewall) (optional) eth ip Þrewall <on | off >
IPX Routing Must be disabled eth ipx disable
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using RFC 1483 in an ATM environment.
b Enter this information if you are using RFC 1490 in a Frame-Relay environment.

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 55

Configuring FRF8 with IP Routing
This table outlines configuration commands for the FRF8 Link Protocol with the IP Routing Network Protocol.

FRF8 with IP Routing

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Message Optional system msg <message>
Ethernet IP Address As required eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>]
DHCP Settings Already enabled; dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname>
additional settings may dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>
be required
Change Login Optional system admin <password>
Remote Routers
New Entry Enter: Remote Name remote add <remoteName>
Link Protocol/PVC Select: FRF8 remote setProtocol FRF8 <remoteName>
Enter: VPI/VCI Numbers remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>
Bridging On/Off Must be off remote disBridge <remoteName>
TCP/IP Route Address Enter: explicit or default remote addIproute <ipnet> <ipnetmask> <hops>
route <remoteName>
If Address Translation To enable NAT, use: remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName>
(NAT) is enabled:
If NAT is OFF: Enter: Source WAN Port remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask><remoteName>
Address + mask of the
remote network
TCP/IP Route Enter a Source WAN Port remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask><remoteName>
Addresses Address + mask of the
remote network
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing Must be enabled eth ip enable
(Internet Firewall) (Optional) eth ip Þrewall <on | off >
IPX Routing Must be disabled eth ipx disable
Store save
Reboot reboot

56 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Configuring Mixed Network Protocols
Several network protocols can be configured concurrently in the same router. The possible combinations are:

¥ Bridging + IP routing
¥ Bridging + IPX routing
¥ Bridging + IP routing + IPX routing
¥ IP routing + IPX routing

General configuration rules:

¥ IP (and IPX) routing takes precedence over bridging.

¥ Each network protocol in the combination is individually configured as described in the preceding tables.

¥ When configuring multiple network protocols, make sure that they are all enabled (even though the
preceding individual configuration tables show them to be mutually exclusive).
Example:

To configure bridging + IP routing (both with Link Protocol RFC 1483), refer to the preceding RFC 1483 with
Bridging and RFC 1483 with IP Routing tables. Follow the instructions described in the tables, except for the
Bridging and IP Routing settings. Since you are configuring both bridging and IP routing, make sure that these
two protocols are both enabled (even though the individual configuration tables you are referring to are showing
them to be mutually exclusive). Configure Bridging and then IP Routing. Remember that IP Routing has
precedence over Bridging.

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 57

Configuring a Dual-Ethernet Router for IP Routing
This table outlines commands used to configure a Dual-Ethernet router for IP routing.

Dual-Ethernet Router with IP Routing

Steps Settings Commands

System Settings
System Name Optional system name <name>
System Settings
Message Optional system msg <message>
Ethernet Settings
Routing/ Bridging Enable IP routing eth ip enable
Controls Disable bridging eth br disable
ETH/0 IP Address DeÞne ETH/0 IP address for eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>]
the hub side
ETH/1 IP Address DeÞne ETH/1 IP address for eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>]
the single 10Base-T side
TCP/IP default route ETH/0 sends all trafÞc to eth ip addroute <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> <gateway>
address ETH/1 <hops> [<port#>]
DHCP Settings
Already enabled; additional settings may be required
DHCP Settings DeÞne DHCP network for dhcp add | <net> <mask> | <ipaddr> | <code>
ETH/1 <min> <max> <type>
Create an address pool for dhcp set addresses <Þrst ipaddr> <last ipaddr>
ETH/1
DNS Domain Name dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname>
DNS Server dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>

WINS Server Address dhcp set valueoption winsserver <ipaddr>

58 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Verify the Router ConÞguration

Test IP Routing
Test IP Routing over the Local Ethernet LAN (from PC)

¥ Use the TCP/IP ping command or a similar method to contact the configured target router specifying the
Ethernet LAN IP address.
¥ If you cannot contact the router, verify that the Ethernet IP address and subnet mask are correct and check the
cable connections.
¥ Make sure that you have saved and rebooted after setting the IP address.
¥ Check Network TCP/IP properties under Windows 95. If you are running Windows 3.1, check that you have
a TCP/IP driver installed.

Test IP Routing to a Remote Destination

¥ Using the TCP/IP ping command, contact a remote router from a local LAN-connected PC. When you enter
the ping command, the router will connect to the remote router using the DSL line.

¥ If remote or local WAN IP Addresses are required, verify that they are valid.

¥ Use the iproutes command to check, first, the contents of the IP routing table and, second, that you have
specified a default route as well.

Test Routing from a Remote Destination

¥ Have a remote router contact the target router using a similar method.

Test TCP/IP Routes

¥ Contact a station, subnetwork, or host located on the network beyond a remote router to verify the TCP/IP
route addresses entered in the remote router database.
¥ Verify that you configured the correct static IP routes.
¥ Use the iproutes command to check the contents of the IP routing table.

Test Bridging to a Remote Destination

Use any application from a local LAN-attached station that accesses a server or disk using a protocol that is being
bridged on the remote network beyond the remote router. If you cannot access the server:
¥ Verify that you have specified a default destination remote router.
¥ Make sure that you have enabled bridging to the remote router.
¥ Check that bridge filtering does not restrict access from the local station.

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 59

Test IPX Routing
One way to test IPX routing is to check for access to servers on the remote LAN. Under Windows, use the
NetWare Connections selection provided with NetWare User Tools. Under DOS, use the command pconsole or
type login on the login drive (usually F:). Select the printer server and verify that the server you have defined is
listed. When you attempt to access the server, the router will connect to the remote router using the DSL line.

If you cannot access the remote server:

¥ Check that the local Ethernet LAN IPX network number is correct.

¥ Verify that the WAN link network number is the same as the remote WAN link network number.

¥ Check cable connections and pinouts.

¥ Verify that the IPX routes and IPX SAPs you have specified are correct.

¥ List the contents of the routing and services tables using the ipxroutes and ipxsaps commands, respectively.
¥ Make sure that the security authentication method and password that you configured match the remote router.

60 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Sample ConÞgurations

Sample Configuration 1: PPP with IP and IPX

This configuration example comprises:

¥ A scenario describing the configuration

¥ A diagram showing the configuration of the SOHO router

¥ Tables containing the configuration settings for this example

¥ Several list command outputs that are used to check the information entered for this particular configuration

¥ Information about the names and passwords that are used in this configuration example (required for PPP)

Note: Appendix A contains blank Network Information Worksheets; use them to fill in the information for your
own configuration. If you selected Òinstall documentationÓ, these samples and others are copied from the
installation CD into the samples directory where the GUI was installed .

Scenario:

In this configuration example of a hypothetical network, a small office/home office (SOHO) will access:

¥ The Internet through an Internet Service Provider (ISP); it uses PPP as the link protocol with IP routing
as the network protocol. Network Address Translation (NAT) is enabled to the ISP, because the ISP
assigned the SOHO only one IP address.
¥ A central site (HQ) through a Network Service Provider (NSP provides access to the DSL/ATM Wide
Area Network); it uses PPP as the Link Protocol with IP and IPX as its network protocols.

IP addresses are issued by the DHCP server. DHCP will be set up to issue DNS information to the SOHO LAN.

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 61

Sample Configuration 1: Diagram for Target Router (SOHO)

Small Home Office SOHO (Target/Local Router)

IPX = 456

0,39
(HQ)
SOHO
0,38 2 Virtual
Target Router (ISP) Circuits
Workstation/Server IP:192.168.254.254
PC/Client 192.168.254.3 255.255.255.0
192.168.254.2 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0

DSL / ATM
Network

PPP/IP
192.168.200.20

IPX WAN = 789

Remote Router
HQ IP:172.16.0.1
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.255
ISP
PPP/IP and IPX
IPX NET = 123

Network Service
Provider
(ISP)

DNS: 192.168.200.1
DNS Domain: myISP.com Server NT Server/WINS Server
SERV312_FP, 172.16.0.2
1001 255.255.255.0
PC/Client

Network Service Provider

(HQ)

62 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Sample Configuration 1: Tables for Target Router (SOHO)

SOHO System Settings

ConÞguration
Item Commands
Section

System Settings
Name System Name system name SOHO
Message Message (optional) system msg ConÞgured_Dec_1998
Authentication Authentication Password system password SOHOpasswd
Password
Ethernet IP Address Ethernet IP Address and eth ip addr 192.168.254.254 255.255.255.0
Subnet Mask (default IP
address)
Ethernet IPX Ethernet IPX Network eth ipx addr 456
Network Number
DHCP Settings
DHCP Settings DNS Domain Name dhcp set valueoption domainname myISP.com
DNS Server dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver
192.168.200.1
WINS Server Address dhcp set valueoption winsserver 172.16.0.2

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 63

 SOHO Remote Router Database
Entry: HQ
ConÞguration
Item Commands
Section

Remote Routers
New Entry Remote RouterÕs Name remote add HQ
Link Protocol Link Protocol remote setProtocol PPP HQ
PVC VPI Number/VCI Number remote setPVC 0*39 HQ
Security Minimum Authentication remote setauthen PAP HQ
(PAP is the default)
Remote RouterÕs Password remote setpasswd HQpasswd HQ
Bridging Bridging on/off remote disbridge HQ
(Bridging is off by default)
TCP/IP Route Remote NetworkÕs IP remote addiproute 172.16.0.0 255.255.255.0 1 HQ
Addresses Addresses, Subnet Masks,
and Metric
IPX Address Network #, Hop Count, Ticks remote addipxroute 1001 1 4 HQ
IPX SAPs SAPS: Server Name, Server remote addipxsap SERV312_FP 4 1001 00-00-00-
Type, Network #, Node #, 00-00-01 451 3 1 HQ
Sockets, type, hops
WAN Network # remote setipxaddr 789 HQ
Note: Fill in one worksheet for each remote router in the remote router database.

64 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

 SOHO Remote Router Database
Entry: ISP
ConÞguration
Item Commands
Section

Remote Routers
New Entry Remote RouterÕs Name remote add ISP
Link Protocol Link Protocol remote setProtocol PPP ISP
PVC VPI Number/VCI Number remote setPVC 0*38 ISP
Security Minimum Authentication remote setauthen PAP ISP
(PAP is the default) remote setpasswd ISPpasswd ISP
Remote RouterÕs Password
Bridging Bridging on/off remote disbridge ISP
(Bridging is off by default)
TCP/IP Route Remote NetworkÕs IP remote addiproute 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1 ISP
Addresses Addresses, Subnet Masks, and (Default Route)
Metric
Network Address Translation remote setiptranslate on ISP

In Advanced: remote setsrcipaddr 192.168.200.20 255.255.255 255

Source WAN IP Address and ISP
Subnet Maska
a This is needed only if the ISP does not assign an IP address automatically.
Note: Fill in one worksheet for each remote router in the remote router database

SOHO Routing controls

ConÞguration
Item Commands
Section

IP and IPX Routing

TCP/IP Routing on/off eth ip enable

IPX Routing on/off eth ipx enable

Internet Firewall on/off eth ip Þrewall on

(Firewall is on by default)

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 65

Sample Configuration 1: Check the Configuration with the LIST Commands

Type the following commands to obtain a list of your configuration.

system list

GENERAL INFORMATION FOR <SOHO>

System started on.................... 12/1/1998 at 17:41
Authentication override.............. NONE
WAN to WAN Forwarding................. yes
BOOTP/DHCP Server address............ none
Telnet Port.......................... default (23)
SNMP Port.............................. default (161)
System message: configured Dec-1998
remote list

INFORMATION FOR <HQ>

Status............................... enabled
Protocol in use...................... PPP
Authentication....................... enabled
Authentication level required........ PAP
Connection Identifier (VPI*VCI)...... 0*39
IP address translation............... off
Compression Negotiation.............. off
Source IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Remote IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Send IP RIP to this dest............. no
Send IP default route if known..... no
Receive IP RIP from this dest........ no
Receive IP default route by RIP.... no
Keep this IP destination private..... yes
Total IP remote routes............... 1
172.16.0.0/255.255.255.0/1
IPX network number................... 00000789
Total IPX remote routes.............. 1
00001001/1/4
Total IPX SAPs....................... 1
SERV312_FP 00001001 00:00:00:00:00:01 0451 0003 1
Bridging enabled..................... no
Exchange spanning tree with dest... yes

INFORMATION FOR <ISP>

Status............................... enabled
Protocol in use...................... PPP
Authentication....................... enabled
Authentication level required........ PAP
Connection Identifier (VPI*VCI)...... 0*38
IP address translation............... on
Compression Negotiation.............. off
Source IP address/subnet mask........ 192.168.200.20/255.255.255.255
Remote IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Send IP RIP to this dest............. no
Send IP default route if known..... no
Receive IP RIP from this dest........ no
Receive IP default route by RIP.... no
Keep this IP destination private..... yes
Total IP remote routes............... 1
0.0.0.0/255.255.255.255/1

66 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

 IPX network number................... 00000000
Total IPX remote routes.............. 0
Total IPX SAPs....................... 0
Bridging enabled..................... no
Exchange spanning tree with dest... yes
dhcp list

bootp server ................. none

bootp file ................... n/a

DOMAINNAMESERVER (6) ......... 192.168.200.1

DOMAINNAME (15) .............. myISP.com
WINSSERVER (44) .............. 172.16.0.2

Subnet 192.168.254.0, disabled - other DHCP servers detected

When DHCP servers are active . stop
Mask ......................... 255.255.255.0
first ip address ............. 192.168.254.2
last ip address .............. 192.168.254.20
lease ........................ default
bootp ........................ not allowed
bootp server ................. none
bootp file ................... n/a
eth list

ETHERNET INFORMATION FOR <ETHERNET/0>

Hardware MAC address................. 00:20:6F:02:A1:BF
Bridging enabled..................... no
IP Routing enabled................... yes
Firewall filter enabled ........... yes
Send IP RIP to the LAN............. rip-1 compatible
Advertise me as default router... yes
Process IP RIP packets received.... rip-1 compatible
Receive default route by RIP..... yes
RIP Multicast address................ default
IP address/subnet mask............... 192.168.254.254/255.255.255.0
IP static default gateway............ none
IPX Routing enabled.................. yes
External network number............ 00000456
Frame type......................... 802.2

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 67

Information About Names and Passwords for Sample Configuration 1

In this configuration example, the PPP Link Protocol requires using system names and passwords.

t System Passwords

SOHO has a system password ÒSOHOpasswd,Ó which is used when SOHO communicates with HQ for
authentication by that site and at any time when HQ challenges SOHO.

HQ has a system password ÒHQpasswd,Ó which is, likewise, used when HQ communicates with site
SOHO for authentication by SOHO and at any time SOHO challenges HQ.
ISP has a system password ÒISPpasswdÓ used for the same purpose.

t Remote Passwords

Each router has a remote routerÕs password for each remote router defined in its Remote Router
Database. The router will use the remote password to authenticate the remote router when the remote
router communicates with or is challenged by the local site.

For example, SOHO has remote router entries for HQ and ISP; defined in each table entry is the
respective remote routerÕs password.

The following table shows the names and passwords for each router that must be defined for
authentication to be performed correctly. (This assumes that all three systems use some form of
authentication protocol.)

Note: If you experience trouble with passwords, we recommend that you set the remote router security to
disable authentication to simplify the process.

Names & Names &

Names & Passwords
Passwords Passwords
ConÞgured in
ConÞgured in ConÞgured in
SOHO Router
HQ Router ISP Router

System
SOHO HQ ISP
Name

System
SOHOpasswd HQpasswd ISPpasswd
Password

Remote
HQpasswd
Router SOHOpasswd SOHOpasswd
ISPpasswd
Database

68 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Sample Configuration 2: RFC 1483 with IP and Bridging
This configuration example comprises:

¥ A scenario describing this configuration of the router SOHO

¥ A diagram showing the configuration information needed for this example

¥ Tables containing the configuration settings for this example

¥ Several list command outputs that are used to check the information entered for this particular configuration

Note 1: Names and passwords are not required with the RFC 1483 Link Protocol.

Note 2: Blank Network Information Worksheets are available to fill in the information for your own configuration
in Appendix A.

Scenario:

In this configuration example of a hypothetical network, a small office/home office (SOHO) will access:

¥ The Internet through an Internet Service Provider (ISP); it uses RFC 1483 as the Link Protocol with IP
routing as the network protocol. Network Address Translation (NAT) is enabled to the ISP, since the ISP
assigned SOHO only one IP address.

¥ A central site (HQ) through a Network Service Provider (NSP provides access to the DSL/ATM Wide
Area Network); it uses RFC 1483 as the link protocol with bridging and IP routing as its network
protocols.

IP addresses are issued by the DHCP server. DHCP will be set up to issue DNS information to the SOHO
LAN.

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 69

Sample Configuration 2: Diagram for Target Router SOHO

Small Home Office SOHO (Target Router)

0,39
(HQ)
SOHO
0,38 2 Virtual
Target Router (ISP) Circuits
Workstation/Server IP:192.168.254.254
PC/Client 192.168.254.3 255.255.255.0
192.168.254.2 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0

DSL / ATM
Network

RFC 1483 / IP
192.168.200.20

Remote Router
HQ IP:172.16.0.1
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.255
ISP

RFC 1483 / IP + Bridging

Network Service
Provider
(ISP)

DNS: 192.168.200.1
DNS Domain: myISP.com

NT Server/WINS Server
172.16.0.2
PC/Client 255.255.255.0
Bridging Application

Network Service Provider

(HQ)

70 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Sample Configuration 2: Tables for Target Router (SOHO)

SOHO System Settings

ConÞguration Section Item Commands

System Settings
Message Message (optional) system msg RFC1483_dec98
Ethernet IP Address Ethernet IP Address and eth ip addr 192.168.254.254 255.255.255.0
Subnet Mask
(default IP address)
DHCP Settings DNS Domain Name dhcp set valueoption domainname myISP.com
DNS Server dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver
192.168.200.1
WINS Server address dhcp set valueoption winsserver 172.16.0.2

SOHO Remote Router Database

Entry: HQ
ConÞguration Section Item Commands

Remote Routers
New Entry Remote RouterÕs Name remote add HQ
Link Protocol Link Protocol remote setProtocol RFC1483 HQ
PVC VPI Number/VCI Number remote setPVC 0*39 HQ
Bridging Bridging on/off remote enabridge HQ
TCP/IP Route Addresses Remote NetworkÕs IP remote addiproute 172.16.0.0 255.255.255.0 1 HQ
Addresses, Subnet Masks,
and Metric

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 71

 SOHO Remote Router Database
Entry: ISP
ConÞguration
Item Commands
Section

Remote Routers
New Entry Remote RouterÕs Name remote add ISP
Link Protocol Link Protocol remote setProtocol RFC1483 ISP
PVC VPI Number/VCI Number remote setPVC 0*38 ISP
Bridging Bridging On/Off remote disbridge ISP
(Bridging is Off by default)
TCP/IP Route Remote NetworkÕs IP remote addiproute 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1 ISP
Addresses Addresses, Subnet Masks,
and Metric
Network Address remote setiptranslate on ISP
Translation (NAT)
In Advanced:
Source WAN IP Address remote setsrcipaddr 192.168.200.20
and Subnet Mask 255.255.255.255 ISP

SOHO Routing Controls

ConÞguration Section Item Commands

IP and IPX Routing

IP and IPX Routing TCP/IP Routing on/off eth ip enable
IPX Routing on/off eth ipx disable
(IPX routing is off by default)
Internet Firewall on/off eth ip Þrewall on
(Firewall is on by default)

72 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Sample Configuration 2: Check the Configuration with the LIST Commands

system list

GENERAL INFORMATION FOR <SOHO>

System started on.................... 12/1/1998 at 17:48
Authentication override.............. NONE
WAN to WAN Forwarding.................. yes
BOOTP/DHCP Server address............ none
Telnet Port.......................... default (23)
SNMP Port.............................. default (161)
System message: ADSL RFC1483 sample
eth list

ETHERNET INFORMATION FOR <ETHERNET/0>

Hardware MAC address................. 00:20:6F:02:A1:BF
Bridging enabled..................... yes
IP Routing enabled................... yes
Firewall filter enabled ........... yes
Send IP RIP to the LAN............. rip-1 compatible
Advertise me as default router... yes
Process IP RIP packets received.... rip-1 compatible
Receive default route by RIP..... yes
RIP Multicast address................ default
IP address/subnet mask............... 192.168.254.254/255.255.255.0
IP static default gateway.......... none
IPX Routing enabled.................. no
External network number............ 00000000
Frame type.......................... 802.2
remote list

INFORMATION FOR <HQ>

Status............................... enabled
Protocol in use...................... RFC1483 (SNAP)
Connection Identifier (VPI*VCI)...... 0*39
IP address translation............... off
Compression Negotiation.............. off
Source IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Remote IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Send IP RIP to this dest............. no
Send IP default route if known..... no
Receive IP RIP from this dest........ no
Receive IP default route by RIP.... no
Keep this IP destination private..... yes
Total IP remote routes............... 1
172.16.0.0/255.255.255.0/1
IPX network number................... 00000000
Total IPX remote routes.............. 0
Total IPX SAPs....................... 0
Bridging enabled..................... yes
Exchange spanning tree with dest... yes

INFORMATION FOR <ISP>

Status............................... enabled
Protocol in use...................... RFC1483 (SNAP)
Connection Identifier (VPI*VCI)...... 0*38
IP address translation............... on

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 73

 Compression Negotiation.............. off
Source IP address/subnet mask........ 192.168.200.20/255.255.255.255
Remote IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Send IP RIP to this dest............. no
Send IP default route if known..... no

Receive IP RIP from this dest......... .no

Receive IP default route by RIP.... no
Keep this IP destination private..... yes
Total IP remote routes............... 1
0.0.0.0/255.255.255.255/1
IPX network number................... 00000000
Total IPX remote routes.............. 0
Total IPX SAPs....................... 0
Bridging enabled..................... no
Exchange spanning tree with dest.... yes
dhcp list

bootp server ................. none

bootp file ................... n/a

DOMAINNAMESERVER (6) ......... 192.168.200.1

DOMAINNAME (15) .............. myISP.com
WINSSERVER (44) .............. 172.16.0.2

Subnet 192.168.254.0, disabled - other DHCP servers detected

When DHCP servers are active . stop
Mask ......................... 255.255.255.0
first ip address ............. 192.168.254.2
last ip address .............. 192.168.254.20
lease ........................ default
bootp ........................ not allowed
bootp server ................. none
bootp file .................... n/a

74 Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software

Sample Configuration 3: Configuring a Dual-Ethernet Router for
IP Routing
Scenario:

The following example provides a simple sample configuration for a Dual-Ethernet router (eth_router) with
IP routing enabled.

The routerÕs hub (ETH/0) belongs to the 192.168.254.0 subnet. The routerÕs ETH/1 belongs to the
192.168.253.0 subnet.

ETH/0 will route packets to ETH/1 at the address 192.168.253.254. DHCP is enabled for both subnets.

eth_router ConÞguration
ConÞguration
Item Commands
Section
System Settings
Name System Name (optional) system name eth_router
Message Message (optional) system msg ConÞgured_Jan_1999
Ethernet Settings
Routing/ Bridging Enable IP routing eth ip enable
Controls
Disable bridging eth br disable
ETH/0 IP Address DeÞne ETH/0 IP address for eth ip addr 192.168.254.254 255.255.255.0 0
the hub side
ETH/1 IP Address DeÞne ETH/1 IP address for eth ip addr 192.168.253.254 255.255.255.0 1
the single 10Base-T side
TCP/IP default route ETH/0 sends all trafÞc to eth ip addroute 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
address ETH/1 192.168.253.254 1 1
DHCP Settings
DHCP Settings DeÞne DHCP network for dhcp add 192.168.253.0 255.255.255.0
ETH/1
Create an address pool for dhcp set addresses 192.168.253.2 192.168.253.20
ETH/1
DNS Domain Name dhcp set valueoption domainname myISP.com
DNS Server dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver
192.168.200.1
WINS Server Address dhcp set valueoption winsserver 172.16.0.2

Chapter 3. Configuring Router Software 75

Chapter 4. ConÞguring Special Features

The features described in this chapter are advanced topics. They are primarily intended for experienced users and
network administrators to perform network management and more complex configurations.

¥ Multiple IP subnets

¥ Virtual routing tables

¥ Bridge filtering and IP firewall

¥ RIP (IP protocol controls)

¥ DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

¥ NAT (Network Address Translation)

¥ PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet)

¥ Management security

¥ Dial backup to a V.90 modem

¥ VRRP backup for a static default gateway

Additional features can be purchased as software option keys. These features are described in Configuring
Software Options, page 114. To determine which software options are installed on your router, use the vers
command. (If a feature has not been enabled, it is listed with a ~ prefix.)

76 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

Multiple IP Subnets

You may configure the router to provide access to multiple IP subnets on the Ethernet network. (This feature does
not apply to IPX or bridged traffic.)

Each IP subnet is referenced as a logical (or virtual) Ethernet interface. You may define multiple logical interfaces
for each physical Ethernet interface (that is, port) in the router. Each logical interface is referenced by its port
number and logical interface number (port #:logical#).

Logical Interface Commands

To define a logical interface, first use the eth add command (page 229); it specifies the port number and the new
logical interface number. You then enter an eth ip addr command (page 231) to define the IP address and subnet
mask of the IP subnet.

The default logical interface for each port is interface 0; this logical interface 0 always exists and cannot be
deleted. (Other logical interfaces may be deleted using the eth delete command [page 230].)

Stopping and Starting an Interface

You can stop and start a logical interface without rebooting the entire router. To do so, use these commands:

¥ eth ip stop Stops a logical Ethernet interface (page 245).

¥ eth ip start Starts a logical Ethernet interface (page 244).
¥ eth ip restart Stops and restarts a logical Ethernet interface (page 244).

Note: When you stop or restart an interface, interface changes are discarded if they have not been saved.

Interface Routing and Filtering

After the eth add and eth ip addr commands define the Ethernet logical interface, other eth commands can
reference it, including:

¥ eth ip addRoute Adds an Ethernet IP route that uses the logical Ethernet interface. The route is added to
the default routing table (page 231).

¥ eth ip bindRoute Adds an Ethernet IP route that uses the logical Ethernet interface. The route is added to a
virtual routing table (page 233).

¥ eth ip filter Manages IP filters for the logical Ethernet interface. Lists of input, output, and forward
filters may be defined for the interface (page 237).

¥ eth ip options Sets RIP options for the logical interface; these options set IP routing information
protocol controls (page 243).

Note: In general, logical interface commands are not effective until you save the change and either restart the
logical interface or reboot the router. However, the eth ip bindRoute and eth ip filter commands are effective
immediately if the logical Ethernet interface is already active.

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 77

Virtual Routing Tables

The virtual routing feature allows you to define multiple routing tables. This is also known as IP virtual router
support.

To define a new routing table, you must specify a name for the routing table and a range of IP source addresses
that use that table. The router determines which routing table to use based on the source address in the packet. For
example, if the router receives a packet whose source address is 192.168.254.10, it checks if that address is within
the address range defined for a virtual routing table. If it is, the virtual routing table is used to route the packet. If
it is not, the default routing table is used instead.

The address ranges assigned to the virtual routing tables may not overlap. All source IP addresses not assigned to
a virtual routing table are routed using the default routing table. You can add routes to the default routing table
using eth ip addroute (page 231) and remote addiproute (page 258).

The following commands define the names and address ranges of the virtual routing tables:

system addIPRoutingTable Adds a range of IP addresses to a virtual routing table. The virtual routing table
is defined if it does not already exist (page 209).

system delIPRoutingTable Deletes a range of IP addresses from the range defined for a virtual routing table
or deletes the entire table (page 219).

system moveIPRoutingTable Moves a range of IP addresses from their current assignment to the specified
virtual routing table. The virtual routing table is defined if it does not already
exist (page 223).

To add and remove routes from a virtual routing table, use these commands:

eth ip bindRoute Adds an Ethernet route to a virtual routing table (page 233).

eth ip unbindRoute Removes an Ethernet route from a virtual routing table (page 246).

remote bindIPVirtualRoute Adds a remote route to a virtual routing table (page 260).

remote unbindIPVirtualRoute Removes a remote route from a virtual routing table (page 289).

Note: Unlike changes to the default routing table, changes to IP virtual routing tables take effect immediately.
However, the changes are lost if they are not saved before the next reboot.

78 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

Bridge Filtering and IP Firewall

You can control the flow of packets across the router using bridge filtering. Bridge filtering lets you ÒdenyÓ or
ÒallowÓ packets to cross the network based on position and hexadecimal content within the packet. This enables
you to restrict or forward messages with a specified address, protocol, or data content. Common uses are to
prevent access to remote networks, control unauthorized access to the local network, and limit unnecessary traffic.

For example, it might be necessary to restrict remote access for specific users on the local network. In this case,
bridging filters are defined using the local MAC address for each user to be restricted. Each bridging filter is
specified as a ÒdenyÓ filter based on the MAC address and position of the address within the packet. To initiate
bridge filtering, ÒdenyÓ filtering mode is then enabled. Every packet with one of the MAC addresses would not be
bridged across the router until ÒdenyÓ filtering mode was disabled.

Similarly, protocol filtering can be used to prevent a specific protocol from being bridged. In this case, the
protocol id field in a packet is used to deny or allow a packet. You can also restrict, for example, the bridging of
specific broadcast packets.

Configure Bridge Filtering

Bridge filtering allows you to control the packets transferred across the router. This feature can be used to enhance
security or improve performance. The filtering is based on matched patterns within the packet at a specified offset.
Two filtering modes are available:

¥ ÒDenyÓ mode will discard any packet matched to the ÒdenyÓ filters in the filter database and let all other
packets pass.

¥ ÒAllowÓ mode will only pass the packets that match the ÒallowÓ filters in the filter database and discard all
others.

Up to 40 ÒallowÓ filters or 40 ÒdenyÓ filters can be activated from the filter database.

Enter the filters, including the pattern, offset, and filter mode, into a filter database. If you intend to restrict
specific stations or subnetworks from bridging, then add the filters with a ÒdenyÓ designation and then enable
ÒdenyÓ filtering. If you wish to allow only specific stations or subnetworks to bridge, then add the filters with an
ÒallowÓ designation and enable ÒallowÓ filtering. Add each filter with the following command:

filter br add [pos] [data] [deny | allow]

where [pos] is the byte offset within a packet (number from 0-127) to a [data] (a hex number up to 6 bytes). This
data and offset number can be used to identify an address, a protocol id, or data content. After entering your
filters, verify your entries with the following command:

filter br list

If you have entered an incorrect filter, delete the filter using the filter br del command. When you are satisfied
with the filter list, save the filtering database with the save filter command. You must reboot the router to load the
filtering database. Then enable bridging filtering with the following command:

filter br use [none | deny | allow]

To test the filtering configuration, access the remote destination identified in the filter.

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 79

Enable/Disable Internet Firewall Filtering
The router supports IP Internet Firewall Filtering to prevent unauthorized access to your system and network
resources from the Internet. This filter discards packets received from the WAN that have a source IP address
recognized as a local LAN address.

Caution: This is a simple firewall check; it does not add much security. For more elaborate firewall features, see
IP Filtering, page 119 .

You can control the Internet Firewall Filtering feature using the command:

eth ip firewall [on | off | list]

The Internet Firewall defaults to on during initial configuration, but it is active only when Ethernet LAN IP
routing is on.

As described earlier, Ethernet LAN IP routing is controlled by the commands:

eth ip enable
eth ip disable

Therefore, at initial configuration, to activate the Internet Firewall Filter, you need only enable IP routing. If you
do not wish the router to perform IP Internet Firewall Filtering while doing IP routing, you must turn off the
firewall filter. Remember to save and reboot if you alter the IP routing status.

80 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

IP (RIP) Protocol Controls

You can configure the router to send and receive RIP packet information, respectively, to and from the remote
router. This means that the local site will ÒlearnÓ all about the routes beyond the remote router and the remote
router will ÒlearnÓ all about the local siteÕs routes. You may not want this to occur in some cases. For example, if
you are connecting to a site outside your company, such as the Internet, you may want to keep knowledge about
your local siteÕs routes private.

The default is to not send or receive IP RIP packets. If RIP packets are not allowed to flow on the WAN link, you
must use the remote addiproute command (page 258) to configure static routes for this WAN link. You can also
advertise the local siteÕs existence. The default is to keep the local siteÕs existence private.

Note: RIP options can also be set for a LAN Ethernet interface. To do so, use the command eth ip options (page
243).

To set or clear RIP options for a remote, use this command:

remote setipoptions <option> on | off <remoteName>

The available options are:

rxrip Receive IP RIP packets from the remote destination

rxrip1 Receive and process RIP-1 packets only

rxrip2 Receive and process RIP-2 packet only

rxdef Receive the remote siteÕs default route

txrip Send IP RIP packets to the remote destination

txrip1 Send RIP-1 packets only

txrip2 Send RIP-2 packets only

txdef Send the local siteÕs default route

private Keep the local siteÕs existence private

multicast Send and receive IP multicast traffic

lanconfig Accept IPCP LAN configuration information

lcpecho Use periodic echo

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 81

DHCP (Dynamic Host ConÞguration Protocol)

The router supports DHCP and can act as the DHCP server. (The routerÕs DHCP server disables itself if it locates
other active DHCP servers on the network or if a DHCP server on the WAN has been explicitly specified.)

This section describes how to configure DHCP using the Command Line Interface. Configuring DHCP can be a
complex process; this section is therefore intended for network managers. For a complete list and explanation of
the DHCP commands, see DHCP Commands, page 309.

Note: Some DHCP values can be set using the Windows Quick Start application, the Windows Configuration
Manager, or the web-based EZ Setup application.

DHCP Address Allocation

DHCP is a service that allocates IP addresses automatically to any DHCP client requesting an IP address. (A
DHCP client can be any device attached to your network, for example, a PC.) It can also provide option values
(such as the subnet mask, DNS, and gateway values) automatically.

Using DHCP to automatically acquire initialization parameters translates into avoiding the more involved router/
PC manual initialization process. (The manual initialization requires reconfiguration of router and/or PC addresses
to be in the same network.)

To configure DHCP for a network, the network administrator defines a range of valid IP addresses to be used in
the subnetwork as well as options and other parameters. This process is described in the next section, DHCP
Administration and Configuration.

Note 1: DHCP will work only if the TCP/IP stack is installed on the PCs.

Note 2: In Windows, DHCP is enabled by selecting it on your PC (under Settings, Control Panel, Network, and
TCP/IP in the Configuration tab page).

DHCP Client Requests

Before becoming active, the routerÕs DHCP server attempts to locate other active DHCP servers on the network,
such as Windows NT servers. If one is detected, the routerÕs DHCP server disables itself.

When the WAN link activates and the source IP address or mask is undefined (i.e. 0.0.0.0), the router places a
DHCP client request over the WAN link. The router may learn the following parameters:

¥ DNS address

¥ Default gateway

¥ Syslog server IP address

¥ Time server IP address

¥ Source IP address to use

To see the gateway and source IP addresses that were returned, use the iproutes command.

The IP addresses and options assigned to a client are collectively called the ÒleaseÓ. The lease is only valid for a
certain period of time and is automatically renewed by the client.

82 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

DHCP Administration and Configuration
The DHCP administration and configuration process is divided into the following parts:

¥ Manipulating subnetworks and explicit client leases

¥ Setting option values

¥ Managing BootP

¥ Defining option types

¥ Configuring BootP/DHCP relays

¥ Other information

Note: To save the DHCP conÞguration or changes to ßash memory in the router, remember to use the command
dhcp save.

Manipulating Subnetworks and Explicit Client Leases

Enabling/Disabling a Subnetwork or a Client Lease

To enable/disable a subnetwork or a client lease, use the commands:

dhcp enable all | <net> <ipaddr>

dhcp disable all | <net> <ipaddr>

Examples:
To enable the subnetwork 192.168.254.0 if that subnetwork exists, enter:

dhcp enable 192.168.254.0

To enable the client lease 192.168.254.17 if that client lease exists, enter:

dhcp enable 192.168.254.17

To disable the client lease 192.168.254.18 if that client lease exists, enter:

dhcp disable 192.168.254.18

To check the results of these commands, use: dhcp list

If the client lease does not exist, it must be explicitly created.

Adding Subnetworks and Client Leases

¥ Adding a Subnetwork

The following commands are used to add/delete subnetworks. Only one subnetwork with one pool of IP
addresses may be defined for a subnet.

To add a subnetwork, use:

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 83

 dhcp add <net> <mask>

To remove a subnetwork, use:

dhcp del <net>

Note: All client leases associated with this subnetwork are automatically deleted.

Example 1:
The following command creates a subnetwork 192.168.254.0 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0:
dhcp add 192.168.254.0 255.255.255.0

Example 2:
The following command deletes the subnetwork 192.168.254.0 and deletes all client leases
associated with that subnetwork:
dhcp del 192.168.254.0

¥ Adding Explicit or Dynamic Client Leases

Client leases may either be created dynamically or explicitly. Usually client leases are created
dynamically when PCs boot and ask for IP addresses.

Explicit client leases

To add an explicit client lease, a subnetwork must already exist (use dhcp add <net> <mask> to add the
subnetwork) before the client lease may be added. Use the command:
dhcp add <ipaddr>
To remove a client lease, use:
dhcp del <ipaddr>
Note: An administrator may create a client lease that is part of a subnet but does not fall within the pool
of IP addresses.

Example 1:
To explicitly add the client lease 192.168.254.31, type:
dhcp add 192.168.254.31

Example 2:
To delete the client lease 192.168.254.31, type:
dhcp del 192.168.254.31

Dynamic Client Leases

Dynamic client leases are created from the pool of IP addresses associated with that subnetwork.
To set or change the pool, use:
dhcp set addresses <first ip addr> <last ip addr>
To clear the values from the pool, use:
dhcp clear addresses <net>
Note: Any client leases that currently exist will not be affected.

To remove a client lease that was dynamically created, use:

dhcp del <ipaddr>

84 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

 Caution: If <ipaddr> is a subnet, you will delete the entire subnet.

Setting the Lease Time

¥ Concepts

The information given by the DHCP server (router) to your PC is leased for a specific amount of time.
The client lease has already been selected. The DHCP server will select the lease time based on the
option defined for the client lease as described by this algorithm:

1. If the client lease option is a specific number or is infinite, then the server uses the specified lease
time associated with this client lease.

2. If the client lease option is ÒdefaultÓ, then the server goes up one level (to the subnetwork) and uses
the lease time explicitly specified for the subnetwork.

3. If the client and subnetwork lease options are both ÒdefaultÓ, then the server goes up one level
(global) and uses the lease time defined at the global level (server).

4. Lease time:
The minimum lease time is 1 hour.
The global default is 168 hours.

¥ Commands

The following commands are used by network administrators to control lease time.

To set the lease time explicitly for the client lease, use:
dhcp set lease <ipaddr> <hours>

To set the lease time explicitly for the subnetwork lease, use:
dhcp set lease <net> <hours>

To set the lease time explicitly for the global lease, use:
dhcp set lease <hours>

Example 1:
To set the lease time to ÒdefaultÓ for the client 192.168.254.17, type:
dhcp set lease 192.168.254.17 default
Example 2:
To set the subnetwork lease time to infinite for the subnet 192.168.254.0, type:
dhcp set lease 192.168.254.0 infinite
Example 3:
To set the global lease time to 2 hours, type:
dhcp set lease 2

Manually Changing Client Leases

In general, administrators do not need to change client leases manually. However, if the need arises to do so,
the following two commands are used.

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 85

 Warning: The client will not be aware that the administrator has changed or released a client lease!

To change the client lease expiration time to a given value:

dhcp set expire <ipaddr> <hours>
Setting the expiration time to ÒdefaultÓ will cause the server to compute the lease time using the algorithm as
described in Setting the Lease Time, page 85.

To release the client lease so it becomes available for other assignments:

dhcp clear expire <ipaddr>

Setting Option Values

Administrators can set values for global options, for options specific to a subnetwork, or for options specific to a
client lease.

Note: See RFC 2131/2132 for the description of various options.

Concepts

The server returns values for options explicitly requested in the client request. It selects the values to return
based on the following algorithm:

1. If the value is defined for the client, then the server returns the requested value for an option.

2. If the value for the option has not been set for the client, then the server returns the value option if it has
been defined for the subnetwork.

3. If the value option does not exist for the client and does not exist for the subnetwork, then the server
returns the value option if it has been defined globally.

4. If the value option is not defined anywhere, the server does not return any value for that option in its
reply to the client request.

Important: When the server replies to a client:

¥ It does not return any option values not requested by the client.
¥ It does not support the definition of a ÒclassÓ of clients.

¥ It does not return any non-default option values unless the client requests the option value and the server
has a value defined for that option.

¥ It does not return any non-default values on the clients subnet unless the client requests the value for that
option.

Commands for Global Option Values

To set the value for a global option, use:

dhcp set valueoption <code> <value>...
The code can be a number between 1 and 61 or a keyword.

To see the list of predefined and user-defined options, use:

dhcp list definedoptions

86 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

 To clear the value for a global option, use:
dhcp clear valueoption <code>
Example:
To set the global value for the domain name server option, enter:
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver 192.168.254.2 192.168.254.3

Commands for Specific Option Values for a Subnetwork

To set the value for an option associated with a subnetwork, use:

dhcp set valueoption <net> <code> <value>...
To clear the value for an option associated with a subnetwork, use:
dhcp clear valueoption <net> <code>
Examples:
dhcp set valueoption 192.168.254.0 gateway 192.168.254.254
dhcp set valueoption 6 192.84.210.75 192.84.210.68

Commands for Specific Option Values for a Client Lease

To set the value for an option associated with a specific client, use:
dhcp set valueoption <ipaddr> <code> <value>...
To clear the value for an option associated with a specific client, use:
dhcp clear valueoption <ipaddr> <code>
Example:
dhcp set valueoption 192.168.254.251 winserver 192.168.254.7

Commands for Listing and Checking Option Values

To list the values for global options as well as subnet and client lease information, use:
dhcp list
To list options that are set for that subnet/client lease as well as subnet/client lease information, use:
dhcp list <net>|<ipaddr>
This command lists all available options (predefined and user-defined options):
dhcp list definedoptions
This command lists all available options starting with the string ÒnameÓ.
dhcp list definedoptions name
To list the lease time use:
dhcp list lease
Example:
This command lists the subnet 192.168.254.0 including any options set specifically for that subnet:
dhcp list 192.168.254.0

Managing BootP
Administrators can enable and disable BootP and specify the BootP server. BootP can be enabled at the
subnetwork and at the client lease level.

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 87

Note: By default, the DHCP server does not satisfy BootP requests unless the administrator has explicitly enabled
BootP (at the subnetwork or lease level).

About BootP and DHCP

BootP and DHCP provide services that are very similar. However, as an older service, BootP offers only a
subset of the services provided by DHCP.

The main difference between BootP and DHCP is that the client lease expiration for a BootP client is always
infinite.

Note: Remember, when BootP is enabled, the client assumes that the lease is infinite.

Enable/Disable BootP

To allow BootP request processing for a particular client/subnet, use the command:
dhcp bootp allow <net>|<ipaddr>
To disallow BootP request processing for a particular client/subnet, type:
dhcp bootp disallow <net>|<ipaddr>

Specify the Boot (TFTP) Server

The following commands let the administrator specify the TFTP server (boot server) and boot file name. The
administrator should first configure the IP address of the TFTP server and file name (kernel) from which to
boot.

To set the IP address of the server and the file to boot from, use the commands:
dhcp bootp tftpserver [<net>|<ipaddr>] <tftpserver ipaddr>
dhcp bootp file [<net>|<ipaddr>] <file name>
To clear the IP address of the server and the file to boot from, use:
dhcp bootp tftpserver [<net>|<ipaddr>] 0.0.0.0
Example 1:
To set the global BootP server IP address to 192.168.254.7:
dhcp bootp tftpserver 192.168.254.7

Example 2:
To set the subnet 192.168.254.0 server IP address to 192.168.254.8:
dhcp bootp tftpserver 192.168.254.0 192.168.254.8
Example 3:
To set the client 192.168.254.21 server IP address to 192.168.254.9
dhcp bootp tftpserver 192.168.254.21 192.168.254.9
Example 4:
To set the subnet 192.168.254.0 boot file to Òkernel.100Ó:
dhcp bootp file 192.168.254.0 kernel.100
Example 5:
To clear the global BootP server IP address and file name:
dhcp bootp tftpserver 0.0.0.0

88 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

 Example 6:
To clear the subnet 192.168.254.0 server IP address and file name:
dhcp bootp tftpserver 192.168.254.0 0.0.0.0

Configuring BootP/DHCP Relays

BootP/DHCP relays are used by system administrators when the DHCP configuration parameters are acquired
from a BootP/DHCP server other than the routerÕs DHCP server.

This feature allows configuration information to be centrally controlled. Enabling a BootP/DHCP relay disables
DHCP on the router because, by definition, only one policy mechanism can be supported.

However, multiple relays may be specified. BootP/DHCP requests are forwarded to every relay on the list. It is
assumed, in this case, that the multiple servers are configured to recognize the requests that they are to handle.

To add a BootP/DHCP Relay address to the list, use the command:

dhcp addrelay <ipaddr>

To remove a BootP/DHCP Relay address from the list, use the command:

dhcp delrelay <ipaddr>

Defining Option Types

Concepts

A DHCP option is a code, length, or value. An option also has a ÒtypeÓ (byte, word, long, longint, binary, IP
address, string).

The subnet mask, router gateway, domain name, domain name servers, NetBios name servers are all DHCP
options. Refer to RFC 1533 if you require more information.

Usually users will not need to define their own option types. The list of predefined option types based on RFC
1533 can be shown by typing dhcp list definedoptions.

Commands

The following commands are available for adding/deleting option types:

dhcp add <code> <min> <max> <type>
To list option types that are currently defined, use:
dhcp list definedoptions...
To list the definitions for all known options, use:
dhcp list definedoptions
To get help information, use:
dhcp list definedoptions?
To list the definition for option 1, if option 1 is defined, type:|
dhcp list definedoptions 1
To list the definition for all options that are well-known AND have a name starting with ÒhÓ, type:
dhcp list definedoptions h

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 89

 Example:
To define a new option with a code of 128, a minimum number of IP addresses of 1, a maximum number of
IP addresses of 4, of type ÒIP addressÓ, type:
dhcp add 128 1 4 ipAddress
This information implies that:

¥ Some DHCP client will know about the option with code 128.

¥ Option 128 allows IP addresses.

¥ The server can have a minimum of 1 IP address.

¥ The server can have up to 4 IP addresses.

¥ The administrator will still need to set the option value either globally, specific to a subnetwork, or
specific to a client for the option to have any meaning.

To delete the definition of the option with code 128, type:

dhcp del 128

The values for this option that have been set globally, specific to a subnetwork, or specific to a client will not
be removed. The administrator must remove those values explicitly. Well-known type option codes cannot be
changed or deleted.

DHCP Information File

DHCP information is kept in the file DHCP.DAT, a self-contained file.

This file contains all DHCP information including:

¥ the option definitions

¥ the subnetworks that have been added

¥ the client lease information

¥ the option values that have been set

This file can be uploaded/downloaded from one router to another.

Clearing All DHCP Information

If necessary, you can clear all DHCP information from memory, including all leases and all global DHCP
information. To do so, enter this command:

dhcp clear all records

At this point, the DHCP information is cleared from memory, but the DHCP.DAT file remains unchanged. To
clear the information from the DHCP.DAT file as well, enter:

save

Note: You cannot abbreviate the word records in the dhcp clear all records command.

90 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

Network Address Translation (NAT)

The router supports both of the following NAT techniques:

Classic NAT One NAT IP address is assigned to one PC IP address

Masquerading One NAT IP address is assigned to many PC IP addresses.

General NAT Rules

¥ IP routing must be enabled (see eth ip enable, page 237).

¥ NAT can be run on a per-remote-router and per-Ethernet-interface basis.

¥ Any number of PCs on the LAN may be going to the same or different remote routers at the same time. In
reality, the number of PCs on the LAN that can be supported is limited by how much memory the router
consumes maintaining table information and by how many connections are currently active.

¥ Some operations will not work. Specifically, services that place IP address/port information in the data may
not work until the router examines their packets and figures out what information in the data needs to be
changed. Remember that the router is remapping both IP addresses and ports.

¥ When using NAT with a remote router, either the remote ISP must supply the IP address for NAT translation
or the user must configure the IP address for NAT translation locally.

¥ Any number of PCs on the LAN may have a connection to the same or different remote routers at the same
time. In reality, the number of PCs on the LAN that can be supported is limited by the amount of memory
consumed by the router to maintain table information and by the number of connections the router ÒthinksÓ
are currently active. Theoretically, up to 64,000 active connections per protocol typeÑTCP/UDPÑcan be
concurrently running, if the table space is available.

Masquerading
With masquerading, multiple local (PC) IP addresses are mapped to a single global IP address. Many local (PCs)
IP addresses are therefore hidden behind a single global IP address. The advantage of this type of NAT is that
users only need one global IP address, but the entire local LAN can still access the Internet. This NAT technique
requires not only remapping IP addresses but also TCP and UDP ports.

Each PC on the LAN side has an IP address and a mask. When the router connects to an ISP, the router appears to
be a ÒhostÓ with one IP address and mask. The IP address that the router uses to communicate with the ISP is
obtained dynamically (with PPP/IPCP or DHCP) or is statically configured. When the PC connects to the ISP, the
IP address and port used by the PC are remapped to the IP address assigned to the router. This remapping is done
dynamically.

Client Configuration

¥ Enable NAT

To enable NAT for a remote interface, use the commands:

remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName>

save

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 91

 To enable NAT for an Ethernet interface, use the commands:

eth ip translate on <interface>

save

The save command makes the above changes persistent across reboots; these changes turn NAT on when the
specified interface is used.

¥ Obtain an IP Address for NAT

The IP address (the IP address ÒknownÓ by the remote ISP) used for this type of NAT can be assigned in two
ways.

The ISP dynamically assigns the IP address. Use the commands:

remote setSrcIpAddr 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 <remoteName>

save
The IP address is assigned locally. Use the commands:

remote setSrcIpAddr ww.xx.yy.zz 255.255.255.255 <remoteName>

save
Note: ww.xx.yy.zz is the IP address that the user on the local LAN assigns.

Server Configuration

This section is intended for users and network administrators who wish to allow WAN access to a Web server,
FTP server, SMTP server, etc., on their local LAN, while using NAT.

NAT needs a way to identify which local PC [local IP address(es)] should receive these server requests.
The servers can be configured on a per-remote-router and per-Ethernet-interface basis as well as globally.

¥ Interface-Specific Commands

You can specify servers for specific remote interfaces and for specific Ethernet interfaces. Servers can also be
designated for specific protocols and ports. To enable and disable a local IP address (on your LAN) as the
server for a specific remote interface, use these commands:

remote addServer <action> <protocol> <port> [<last port>[<first private port>]] <remoteName>

remote delServer <action> <protocol> <port> [<last port>[<first private port>]] <remoteName>

See the command descriptions on page 259 and page 265. To see all of the remote entries, use the command
remote list <remoteName>

To enable and disable a local IP address (on your LAN) as the server for a specific Ethernet interface, use
these commands:

eth ip addServer <action> <protocol> <port> [<last port>[<first private port>]] <interface>

eth ip delServer <action> <protocol> <port> [<last port>[<first private port>]] <interface>

See the command descriptions on page 232 and page 235.

92 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

 Remember to type save to make the changes persistent across reboots.

Example 1:

Assume that the local LAN network is 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0. The following commands enable a
Telnet server on the local LAN with the IP address 192.168.1.3, and an FTP server with the IP address
192.168.1.2.
remote addServer 192.168.1.3 tcp telnet router1
remote addServer 192.168.1.2 tcp ftp router1
When the local router receives a request from router1 to communicate with the local Telnet server, the
local router sends the request to 192.168.1.3. If router1 asks to talk to the local FTP server, the local
router sends the request to 192.168.1.2.

Example 2:

Assume that the local LAN network is 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0. When the port value of 0 (zero) is
used, it directs all ports of the specified protocol to the IP address specified.
remote addServer 192.168.1.4 tcp 0 router1

Note: addserver commands using specific port numbers take priority over the port 0 setting.
192.168.1.4 will be asked to serve requests coming from router1 to the local router. If the local router
also has the same Telnet and FTP entries from the previous example, 192.168.1.3 will serve the Telnet
request, 192.168.1.2 will serve the FTP request, and 192.168.1.4 will serve any other request, including
HTTP, SMTP, etc.

Example 3:

remote addServer 192.168.1.10 tcp 9000 9000 telnet route-in

remote addServer 192.168.1.11 tcp 9001 9001 telnet route-in
In this example, an incoming request on TCP port 9000 will be sent to 192.168.1.10 with the port
changed from 9000 to the telnet port (port 23).

An incoming request on TCP port 9001 will be sent to 192.168.1.11 with the port changed from 9001 to
the telnet port.

Error Message: ÒFailed to add serverÓ

The error message Failed to add server indicates that a server entry could not be created. This can occur
either due to port overlap or due to not enough memory.

Port overlap

For example, you enter:

# remote addserver 192.168.1.10 tcp 9000 9000 telnet router1

# remote addserver 192.168.1.11 tcp 9000 9000 telnet router1
Failed to add server

The second command gets an error due to port overlap. If the second server entry was allowed and the
remote end sends a server request to port 9000, the router wouldnÕt know whether to send the request to
192.168.1.10 or 192.168.1.11.

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 93

 Not enough memory was available to create an entry.

This condition should not ordinarily occur because the amount of memory needed for a server entry is
less than 30 bytes. Should this problem occur, it may cause many related problems or failures.

¥ System Commands

The following two commands are used to globally enable/disable a local IP address (on your LAN) as the
server for that particular protocol and/or port.

system addServer <action> <protocol> <port> [<last port>[<first private port>]]

system delServer <action> <protocol> <port> [<last port>[<first private port>]]

For more information, see the command descriptions on page 209 and page 219.

Remember to type save to make the changes persistent across boots.

Examples:

system addserver 192.168.1.5 tcp smtp

system addserver 192.168.1.6 tcp 0
system addserver 192.168.1.6 udp 0
The router sends a server request for SMTP to 192.168.1.5 when such a request comes from any remote
router running NAT. The router sends any other server request (tcp or udp) to 192.168.1.6.

¥ Server Request Hierarchy

As shown above, multiple system addserver, remote addserver, and eth ip addserver commands can
designate different servers for different protocols, ports, and interfaces. When handling a request from a
remote router (to which the local router has NAT enabled), the local router searches the server list for the
appropriate server. The following lists the order of search and the command that added the server to the list:

Search Order Command

1. Protocol and port for a specific interface remote addserver or

eth ip addserver

2. Protocol and port for any interface system addserver

3. Protocol and any port for a specific interface remote addserver with port 0 or
eth ip addserver with port 0

4. Protocol and any port for any interface system addserver with port 0

5. Any protocol and any port for a specific interface remote addserver with protocol all and port 0
eth ip addserver with protocol all and port 0

6. Any protocol and any port for any interface system addserver with protocol all and port 0

7. Local LAN IP address mapped to the WAN system addhostmapping

interface IP address.

8. If none of the above, the local router selects itself

(the local router) as the server.

94 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

Classic NAT
With classic NAT, one PC IP address is translated to one NAT IP address. This NAT technique is primarily used
to make certain hosts on a private LAN globally visible and give them the ability to remap these IP addresses as
well.

Client Configuration

Classic NAT requires that you first enable NAT Masquerading (as described in the previous section); thus,
for the Classic and Masquerading forms of NAT, the clients are configured in the same way. Refer to the
Client Configuration, page 91 section.

Host Remapping

¥ Interface-Specific Commands

You can enable and disable host remapping for specific remote interfaces and for specific Ethernet
interfaces. To enable or disable host remapping on a per-remote basis, use these commands:
remote addHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr>
<remoteName>

remote delHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr>
<remoteName>
Use the command remote addHostMapping whenever a host on the local LAN is known by different IP
addresses to different remotes.

To enable or disable host remapping on a per-Ethernet-interface basis, use these commands:

eth ip addHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr> <interface>

eth ip delHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr> <interface>

¥ System Commands

Use these commands to enable or disable host remapping systemwide:

system addHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr>
system delHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr>
Use the command system addHostMapping whenever a host on the local LAN is known by the same IP
address on all remotes.

¥ IP Address Range

The range of local LAN IP addresses to be remapped is defined by <first private addr> to <second
private addr> inclusive. These addresses are mapped one-to-one to the public addresses.

The range of public IP addresses is defined by <first public addr> only. The rest of the range is computed
automatically (from <first public addr> to <first public addr> + number of addresses remapped - 1)
inclusive.

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 95

 ¥ Multiple-Host Remapping Entries

Users may enter as many host remapping entries as they wish.

Example:
remote addHostMapping 192.168.207.40 192.168.207.49 10.0.20.11 remote1
remote addHostMapping 192.168.207.93 192.168.207.99 10.0.20.4 remote1
remote addHostMapping 192.168.209.71 192.168.209.80 10.12.14.16 remote1
The above entries create three mappings:

192.168.207.40 through 192.168.207.49 are mapped to 10.0.20.11 through 10.0.20.20

192.168.207.93 through 192.168.207.99 are mapped to 10.0.20.4 through 10.0.20.10
192.168.209.71 through 192.168.209.80 are mapped to 10.12.14.16 through 10.12.14.25

¥ Range Overlap Rules

¥ The per-interface commands, remote addHostMapping and eth ip addHostMapping have these
range overlap rules:

Private IP address ranges cannot overlap for an interface.

Public IP address ranges cannot overlap for an interface.

¥ The global command, system addHostMapping, has these range overlap rules:
Private IP address ranges cannot overlap for a system.
Public IP address ranges cannot overlap for a system.

¥ If a private IP address range for an interface and a private IP address range for the system overlap,
the private IP address range for the interface has precedence.

¥ If a public IP address range for an interface and the public IP address range for the system overlap,
the public IP address range for the interface has precedence.

¥ Private IP addresses and public IP addresses can be the same.

For example, to enable IP/port translation to a remote router and make the IP addresses 10.1.1.7 through
10.1.1.10 globally visible, it is permissible to use either one of the following commands:

remote addHostMapping 10.1.1.7 10.1.1.10 10.1.1.7 remoteName

system addHostMapping 10.1.1.7 10.1.1.10 10.1.1.7

If the remapped hostÕs IP address (classic NAT, one-to-one IP address translation) and the masquerading
IP address (many-to-one IP address translation) are the same, then NAT masquerading has precedence
over classic NAT.

96 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet)

PPPoE is a method of delivering PPP sessions over an Ethernet LAN connected to a DSL line, as defined in the
document RFC2516. It was designed to maintain the established PPP interface for the end user and the service
provider, while improving service through use of a DSL line.

¥ PPPoE allows the user to connect to a service provider using the same PPP interface as for a dialup
connection, but the connection is through a DSL line, which provides greater speed and bandwidth.

¥ The service provider also perceives the connection as a standard PPP session, allowing for the same access
control and billing per user as before.

¥ Multiple PPP users share the same DSL line to connect to an access concentrator.

Our router provides additional advantages to PPPoE users and service providers, as follows.

¥ Using our router, no software changes are required in the user PCs. Because the router acts as the PPPoE
client, no PPPoE software is needed in the PC.

¥ Our router acts as both the PPPoE client and as the bridge connecting the Ethernet LAN to the DSL line. It
does all IP address translation.

¥ The PPPoE client information (user name, password, and domain) are configured into the router. Once
configured, the user does not need to enter them, ever.

The following diagram illustrates how our router connects an Ethernet LAN to a service provider by serving as
both the bridge and the PPPoE client.

Ethernet LAN
Router Service Provider
User
Serves as
DSL Line ATM/Frame PPPoE
User bridge and as
PPPoE client Network server
User

PPPoE Session

Configuring for PPPoE

Configuring the router for PPPoE requires that at least two remote router entries be defined in the router. One
remote router entry serves as a bridge for PPPoE traffic. The other remote router entry serves as the PPPoE client.

PPPoE Bridge

PPPoE requires a remote router entry defined for bridging. All PPPoE traffic must be bridged through the PVC or
DLCI of a remote router entry. The entry can use any protocol that supports bridging including PPP, RFC 1483, or
RFC 1490.

The remote entry must be enabled for bridging using the remote enabridge command.

The PPPoE bridge does not require the Spanning Tree Protocol. Turn off the protocol with this command:

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 97

 remote setBrOptions stp off <remoteName>

In addition, if the remote entry should be used only for PPPoE traffic, define it as ÒPPPoE onlyÓ using this
command:

remote setBrOptions pppoeOnly on <remoteName>

For a Dual-Ethernet router, an Ethernet interface can be designated as ÒPPPoE onlyÓ using this command:

eth br options pppoeOnly on <port#>

PPPoE Client

PPPoE configuration requires creation of a new remote router entry to serve as the PPPoE client. The PPPoE
client provides the user name, password, and domain name required for each PPPoE session. In our router, we
refer to the PPPoE domain name as a Òservice nameÓ as described later.

The user name and password can be the router name and password provided by the system name and system
passwd commands. Or a name and password can be specified for the remote router entry using the remote
setOurSysName and remote setOurPasswd commands.

To create the entry, begin by entering these two commands:

remote add <remoteName>

remote setPPPoEservice * <remoteName>

The preceding two commands create a remote router entry that can be used to connect to all PPPoE services. To
create an entry for a specific PPPoE service, use the following two commands:

remote add <remoteName>

remote setPPPoEservice <serviceName> <remoteName>

The service name is the domain name defined by your service provider.

After defining the remote entry with the remote add and remote setPPPoEservice commands, enter commands
to:

¥ Turn off authentication of the remote router by the target router (remote disauthen).

¥ Specify the user name and password for the service (remote setoursysname and remote setourpasswd).

¥ Define the IP route for the remote (remote addiproute). (IP routing must be enabled for the Ethernet interface
with eth ip enable.)

¥ Turn on Network Address Translation (NAT) if needed (remote setiptranslate).

¥ Permanently allocate a channel or allocate a channel only when needed (remote setminline).

If your service provider charges by the hour, you may want a PPPoE session to timeout after a period of no
traffic. However, if you do use a timeout, bringing up a PPPoE session takes 2-3 seconds longer.

To permanently allocate a channel, use:

remote setminline 1 <remotename>

98 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

 To set up a timeout, set the minline value to 0 and specify the timeout period in seconds, as follows:

remote setminline 0 <remotename>

remote settimer <seconds> <remotename>

Sample PPPoE Configuration Script

The following script is an example showing commands for a PPPoE configuration. The script assumes the
following:

¥ The VPI/VCI for the connection is 0/35.

¥ The domain name for the service is DialUpPPP.net.

¥ The CHAP user name is JaneDoe and the CHAP password is Secret.

¥ Network Address Translation is desired for the PPPoE session.

¥ Only PPPoE traffic should pass through the bridge interface.

¥ Default IP route is used for the PPPoE session.

# Sample PPPoE Configuration Script

# ---------------------------------
# Enable IP routing for the Ethernet interface.
eth ip enable
#
# Define a remote router entry (named PPPoEbridge) to serve as
# the bridge for PPPoE traffic only.
remote add PPPoEbridge
#
# Set the link protocol (PPP, RFC 1483, RFC 1490).
remote setprotocol rfc1483mer PPPoEbridge
#
# Specify the VPI/VCI for ATM. (For Frame Relay, you would set the DLCI).
remote setpvc 0*35 PPPoEbridge
#
# Enable bridging through the remote.
remote enabridge PPPoEbridge
#
# Turn off the Spanning Tree Protocol.
remote setbroptions stp off PPPoEbridge
#
# Allow only PPPoE traffic through this remote.
remote setbroptions pppoeonly on PPPoEbridge
#
# -------------------------------------------------------------
# Define a remote router entry (named PPPoEuser) to serve as
# the PPPoE client for connections to the service DialUpPPP.net.
remote add PPPoEuser
remote setpppoeservice DialUpPPP.net PPPoEuser
#
# Turn off authentication of the remote router by the target router.
remote disauthen PPPoEuser
#
# Specify the CHAP user name and password required by the service.
remote setoursysname JaneDoe PPPoEuser

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 99

 remote setourpasswd Secret PPPoEuser
#
# Define an IP route for the remote.
remote addiproute 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1 PPPoEuser
#
# Turn on Network Address Translation for the remote.
remote setiptranslate on PPPoEuser
#
# Permanently allocate a channel for the connection.
remote setminline 1 PPPoEuser
# To have PPPoE sessions timeout after 10 min. (600 sec.) of no traffic,
# change the setminline value to 0 and add this command:
# remote settimer 600 PPPoEuser
#
# -----------------------------------------------
# Save the configuration changes and then reboot.
save
reboot

Managing PPPoE Sessions

Each PPPoE session is listed with the other interfaces in the output from an ifs command. In the following
example, the PPPoE session is shown as the last line of the output.

# ifs
Interface Speed In % Out % Protocol State Connection
ETHERNET/0 10.0.mb 0%/0% 0%/0% (Ethernet) OPENED
DMT/0 8.0mb D 0%/0% (ATM) OPENED
800kb U 0%/0% (ATM) OPENED
ATM-VC/1 8.0mb D 0%/0% (ATM) OPENED to PPPoEbridge
800kb U 0%/0% (ATM) OPENED to PPPoEbridge
ATM-ECHO/2 8.0mb D 0%/0% (ATM) OPENED
800kb U 0%/0% (ATM) OPENED
CONSOLE/0 9600 b 0%/0% 0%/0% (TTY) OPENED
PPPoE/1 10.0 mb 0%/0% 0%/0% (PPP) OPENED to PPPoEuser

You can list more information about the current PPPoE sessions using the pppoe list command. The following is
an example:

# pppoe list
PPPoE Client Session ...... DialUpPPP.net
PPPoE/Ifs number..... 1
Access Concentrator.. 15021109931568-efficient
Peer MAC Address .... 00:10:67:00:66:E2
Session ID .......... 2
State ............... 2
Flags ............... 1

To close a PPPoE session before it terminates, use the pppoe close command. The session is specified by its
number. (Use the PPPoE/n number from the ifs output or the PPPoE/Ifs number from the pppoe list
output.)

100 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

Controlling Remote Management

With the following security control features, the user can control remote management of the router via Telnet,
HTTP, Syslog, and/or SNMP. Disabling SNMP stops the Configuration Manager from accessing the router, which
in some environments is desirable.

Router system event messages can be automatically sent to a Unix Syslog server. The system syslogport and
system addsyslogfilter commands control the port number and valid IP addresses. For more information, see
Syslog Client, page 153.

Disabling Remote Management

To completely disable remote management, enter the following commands from the command line:

system telnetport disabled

system snmpport disabled
system httpport disabled
system syslogport disabled
save
reboot

Re-enabling Remote Management

To reestablish the disabled remote management services, restore the default values with the commands:

system telnetport default

system snmpport default
system httpport default
system syslogport default

Validating Clients
The following commands are used to validate clients for Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, or Syslog. They define a range of
IP addresses that are allowed to access the router via that interface. Only the IP addresses in the range specified
for the interface can access the router via that interface. This validation feature is off by default.

Multiple address ranges can be specified for each filter. If no range is defined, then access to the router is through
the LAN or WAN.

Note: These commands do not require a reboot and are effective immediately.

system addtelnetfilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

system addsnmpfilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN
system addhttpfilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN
system addsyslogfilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

first ip addr First IP address of the client range

last ip addr Last IP address of the client range. May be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.
LAN Local Ethernet LAN

Example:

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 101

 system addsnmpfilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

To delete client ranges previously defined, use these commands:

system deltelnetfilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

system delsnmpfilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN
system delhttpfilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN
system delsyslogfilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

To list the range of allowed clients, use the command:

system list

Restricting Remote Access

To allow remote management while making it more difficult for non-authorized persons to access the router, you
may redefine the ports to a less well-known value. When Network Address Translation (NAT) is used, this port
redefinition feature also allows you to continue using the standard ports with another device on the LAN
(provided the appropriate NAT server ports commands are issued), while simultaneously managing the router
(with non-standard ports).

For example, the following commands redefine the Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, and Syslog ports:

system telnetport 4321

system snmpport 3214
system httpport 5678
system syslogport 6789

Changing the SNMP Community Name

Changing the SNMP community name from its default value of ÒpublicÓ to another string may further enhance
SNMP security. This string then acts like a password, but this password is sent in the clear over the WAN/LAN,
in accordance with the SNMP specification.

Use the following commands to change the SNMP community name.

system community <new community name>

save
reboot

Disabling WAN Management

You can allow management of the router on the local LAN, but not over the WAN. If the router has been
configured to use NAT, you can define two servers that do not exist on the LAN side to handle WAN SNMP and
Telnet requests, and thus WAN management of the router cannot occur.

The following example shows how this is done. It assumes there is no computer at 192.168.254.128.

system addServer 192.168.254.128 udp snmp

system addServer 192.168.254.128 tcp telnet
system addServer 192.168.254.128 tcp http
save
reboot

102 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

Dial Backup

The Dial Backup capability provides a backup V.90 connection to the Internet when the default DSL link goes
down. The V.90 connection is provided through the console port. In this case, the console port is used as a serial
port and must be connected to an external V.90 modem.

Dial Backup is intended for customers with critical applications for which continuous Internet access is vital. If
the DSL link for those applications goes down, the router can automatically switch their traffic to the V.90
modem. Later, after determining that the DSL link is, once again, up and stable, the router automatically switches
the V.90 traffic back to the DSL link.

This feature may also be useful for a customer whose DSL line is not yet installed. The router can begin providing
service through a V.90 modem and later automatically switch to the DSL link when it becomes available.

Dial Backup with a Tunnel

You may wish to use an L2TP tunnel or IPSec tunnel only with the primary interface or only with the backup
interface.

If you do not want tunnel traffic to go through the backup V.90 modem, you should restrict the tunnel to use only
the primary interface. With this restriction in place, if the primary interface fails, the tunnel is terminated, and it is
not re-established with the backup interface.

Or, you might want a tunnel to be established only when the V.90 modem is being used. In this case, you would
restrict the tunnel to the backup interface only.

To set either restriction for an L2TP tunnel, use the command l2tp set wanif (page 328). On the command, you
specify the remote name that the tunnel is restricted to and the tunnel name. To restrict the tunnel to the backup
interface, specify the remote name that you created for the dialup parameters as described in Specifying the
Dialup Parameters, page 106.

To set a restriction for an IPSec tunnel, use the command ike ipsec set interface (page 337). The interface that
you specify on the command is the remote interface that the tunnel is to be restricted to. To restrict the tunnel to
the backup interface, specify the remote name that you created for the dialup parameters as described in
Specifying the Dialup Parameters, page 106.

Configuring Dial Backup

To set up the router to use the Dial Backup feature, you must:

¥ Connect a V.90 modem to the console port of the router.

¥ Configure the router software to use the Dial Backup feature.

To configure the Dial Backup option, you enter commands to:

¥ Enable the Dial Backup option.

¥ Set the conditions that determine the status of the DSL link.

¥ Minimum stability period for the DSL link status signal

¥ Optional IP addresses to be pinged and their ping interval, number of samples, and minimum success rate

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 103

 ¥ Minimum retry period before DSL link restoration is attempted

¥ Specify the modem parameters.

¥ Specify the ISP phone number and other dialup parameters.

Enabling Dial Backup

To enable the Dial Backup option, enter the command:

system backup enable

The option can be disabled using the command:

system backup disable

Setting DSL Link Conditions

The router can determine that the DSL link has failed at either of these levels:

¥ No DSL link status signal

If the signal remains down for a minimum time (the stability period), the DSL link is assumed to be
physically disconnected and down.

¥ IP addresses do not reply to ÒpingsÓ

You have the option to provide the router with one or more addresses to ping. (These could be the addresses
that are vital to your application.) The router pings these addresses at the interval you specify (default, every 5
seconds). It compares a specified number of samples (default, 6) against the specified minimum success rate
(default, 50%). If the success rate is less than the minimum, the DSL link is assumed to be down.

Stability Period

As listed above, DSL link failure is indicated if the DSL link status signal remains down for a minimum time.
This minimum time is the stability period that guards against frequent switching back and forth between the DSL
link and the backup port.

The default stability period is three minutes. To change the stability period, use this command:

system backup stability <minutes>

The minimum stability period is one minute.

Addresses to Ping

If you specify one or more addresses, the router pings those addresses to determine if the DSL link is up. You may
request that the router ping any or all of these:

¥ One or more specific IP addresses (four decimals separated by periods)

¥ Your gateway address (GW)

¥ Your domain name server address (DNS).

104 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

The router determines your gateway and/or DNS address implicitly via a means such as DHCP, static
configuration, PPP negotiation, etc.

If you specify more than one address to ping, you may want to assign the addresses to groups. Each group can be
assigned its own ping interval, number of samples, and success rate. For example, you might want the success rate
for the DNS address to be at least 95%, while a success rate of 50% would be reasonable for a heavily used
website. You can also disable and re-enable ping addresses by group. A group is identified by its number (0
through 65535).

To add an address to the ping list, use this command:

system backup add <ipaddr> | GW | DNS [<group>]

To remove an address from the ping list, use this command:

system backup delete <ipaddr> | GW | DNS [<group>]

To remove a group of addresses, enter:

system backup delete all [<group>]

To clear the ping list of all addresses, enter:

system backup delete all all

Ping Interval, Number of Samples, and Success Rate

By default, the router pings the addresses every 5 seconds until it has pinged each address 6 times; it requires a
minimum success rate of 50%. However, you can change the ping interval, number of samples, and success rate
for an address group using these commands:

system backup pinginterval <seconds> [<group>]

system backup pingsamples <samples> [<group>]

system backup successrate <percentage> [<group>]

Note: To disable a group of ping addresses, specify 0 for any of its three valuesÑ pinginterval, pingsamples, or
success rate.

The same ping interval, number of samples, and success rate apply to all addresses assigned to a group. (Any
address not assigned to a group is considered to belong to group 0.) All groups are tested in parallel. As soon as
any group fails its success rate test, the DSL link is assumed to have failed and the switchover to the backup is
performed.

During the ping test, every address in a group contributes to the current success rate of the group; as soon as the
current success rate falls below the minimum success rate, the group has failed. For example, if the minimum
success rate is 50% and the sample number is 6, the maximum sample size for a three-address group is 18 (6 times
3); thus, as soon as the group accumulates 10 failures (one more than 9 failures, which is 50% of 18), the group
fails.

DSL Restoration Retry Period

Once DSL link failure is determined, the router uses its console port as a serial port and data traffic is sent and
received through the V.90 modem connected to that port. This backup port continues to be used until it is time to

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 105

check whether the DSL link has been restored. This time period between checks is called the retry period
(default, 30 minutes).

When the retry period expires, the router determines if the DSL link has been restored. To do so, it first
determines if the DSL link status signal has been up for the minimum stability period. If it has, then the router
stops the data traffic going through the backup V.90 modem, and checks whether the DSL link can be used
instead.

If you have specified one or more ping addresses, the router pings those addresses via the DSL link. If the DSL
link fails the ping test, the router once again switches data traffic to the backup port until the retry period expires
again.

However, if the DSL link passes the ping test, the DSL link is assumed to be restored and it is used for data traffic
until another failure is detected. The serial port reverts to being the console port.

The default retry period is 30 minutes. To change the retry period, enter this command:

system backup retry <minutes>

Specifying Modem Parameters

You need to provide the router with modem parameters so it can effectively use the V.90 modem connected to the
console port. A default modem setup is provided. To see the default settings, enter:

system defaultmodem

system list

To change the modem settings from the defaults, specify which setting you want to change and the new string. To
do so, use this command:

system modem reset | escape | init | offhook | dial | answer | hangup <string>

For example, the following command changes the string for the init setting:

system modem init ATS0=0Q0V1&C2&D3&K1X4&H1&I0S12=20

The string for the dial setting can be either ATDT for tone dialing or ATDP for pulse dialing. The default is tone
dialing. For example, the following command selects pulse dialing:

system modem dial ATDP

Specifying the Dialup Parameters

To use the V.90 modem to connect to the ISP, the router requires a remote entry defining the connection
parameters. For example, the following commands define a new remote entry named backup:

remote add backup

# Defines the connection as asynchronous and using the PPP protocol

remote setprefer async backup

remote setprotocol ppp backup

# Specifies the phone number to be used when dialing out. The phone
# number begins with 9 (to get an outside line), a comma (for a 2-second

106 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

 # pause), and finally the 7-digit local number.

remote setphone async 1 9,5554218 backup

# Specifies the bit rate for the preceding phone number.

# The bit rate can be 38400, 57600, 115200, or 230400.

remote setspeed 115200 async 1 backup

# Specifies the alternative phone number to be used and its bit rate.

remote setphone async 2 9,5554219 backup

remote setspeed 115200 async 2 backup

# Specifies the name and password provided by the ISP

remote setoursysname <username> backup

remote setourpasswd <password> backup

# Turns off authentication

remote disauthen backup

# Turns on Network Address Translation

remote setiptranslate on backup

# Adds a default route for the backup entry

remote addiproute 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1 backup

VRRP Backup

When a router is defined as a static default gateway and no other dynamic routing protocol or router discovery
protocol is used (such as RIP, page 81), the gateway becomes a critical link in the network. If that router fails, that
critical link would be broken. It, therefore, may be appropriate to set up other routers as backups that can serve as
the static default gateway if necessary.

The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), as defined in RFC 2338, allows other IP routers in a LAN to
provide immediate and automatic backup to a failed IP router. VRRP is a protocol that defines how backup
routers monitor the status of a master router and take over its function if it fails. The new master router adopts the
IP and MAC address of the original master, so that the hosts configured with the single default gateway maintain
their network connection.

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 107

The following illustration shows two routers connecting a LAN to the Internet. By using VRRP, the backup router
can take over as the gateway if the master router fails.

Ethernet LAN

VRRP Routers

Master
Internet
Backup

Routers using VRRP send out advertisement packets at intervals to let the other VRRP routers on the LAN know
that they are still up. The other VRRP routers realize that a router is down when no advertisement packets have
been received for the minimum down interval. The VRRP router assigned the highest priority takes over for the
failed router. When the failed router is restored, it can automatically preempt the backup router and resume its
function in the network.

VRRP Configuration
To configure a LAN to use VRRP, you must enter configuration commands into every router that is to be
provided with backup or that is to serve as backup to another router. Certain values must be the same between the
original router and its backups; other values must differ (as discussed in the following sections).

VRRP configuration requires three basic steps:

1. Define logical interfaces.

2. Define the ID of the Virtual Router (VRID).

3. Define the VRRP attributes of the Virtual Router.

Defining the VRRP Interface

Each router that is to use VRRP must have at least two logical Ethernet interfaces defined, one to be used as the
VRRP interface and the other as the management interface. (Logical interfaces are discussed under Multiple IP
Subnets, page 77.)

The VRRP interface is for VRRP only; it cannot be used for any other purpose. Unlike other logical interfaces, the
VRRP interface does not use the usual Ethernet MAC address associated with the router. Instead, it uses the
VRRP MAC address as defined in RFC 2338, that is, 00005e0001xx where xx is the VRID.

IP Address

Every logical interface is assigned its own IP address, or range of addresses, that is unique on the LAN. The
VRRP interface must be assigned the IP address that serves as the default static gateway for other devices on the
LAN.

108 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

For example, assume that the gateway IP address is 192.168.100.254. If the default logical interface (0:0) is to be
the VRRP interface, it is assigned the gateway address. Another logical interface (0:1) is defined to be the
management interface and is assigned another IP address.

eth ip addr 192.168.100.254 255.255.255.0

eth ip add 0:1
eth ip addr 192.168.254.253 255.255.255.0 0:1

Note: You must assign the same IP address to the VRRP interface in the master router and in every router that is
to serve as its backup. For example, if the VRRP interface is assigned IP address 192.168.100.254 in router A, the
VRRP interface in every backup router for router A must be assigned IP address 192.168.100.254.

RIP Processing

Routers using VRRP do not need RIP protocol processing to discover routes. (See IP (RIP) Protocol Controls,
page 81.) You may, therefore, turn off RIP processing using these commands:

eth ip options txrip off

eth ip options rxrip off

Defining the VRID

The next step is to define a virtual router ID, or VRID, and associate it with the logical Ethernet interface that is to
be the VRRP interface. (The management interface is not assigned a VRID).

For example, the following command assigns the VRID 7 to the logical interface 0:1 that is to serve as the VRRP
interface.

eth ip vrid 7 0:1

A VRID has these characteristics:

¥ Integer from 1 through 255; thus, a LAN can have up to 255 VRIDs.

¥ Unique on the LAN, but can be reused on other LANs.

¥ The same VRID must be defined in all routers that make up the Virtual Router, that is, the original router and
all routers that are to serve as its backups. For example, if VRID 7 is defined in router A, then VRID 7 must
also be defined in all backup routers for router A.

Note: The VRRP interface becomes effective after you both save your changes and either restart the VRRP
interface or reboot the router. For example, these commands save all changes and restart logical interface 0:1.

save
eth restart 0:1

Defining VRRP Attributes

Each time you define a VRID in a router, you must define an attribute record for it in that router. The following
sections describe how to define the record and set the attributes.

Note: The VRRP attribute commands do not require a restart or reboot to take effect. However, you do need to
save your changes if they are to persist after a restart or reboot.

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 109

Adding a VRID Attribute Record

To define a record to contain the attributes for a VRID in a router, use this command:

eth vrrp add <vrid> [<port#>]

The port number is needed only if the router is an Ethernet hub router with two ports (port 0 and port 1).

Priority Attribute (0-255, default, 100)

The priority value determines which backup router takes over when a router fails. The original (or master) router
must be assigned the highest priority (255). Lower priorities are assigned to its backup routers, that is, the other
routers in which the same VRID is defined.

For example, suppose routers A, B, and C all have VRID 7 defined. If router B should take over if router A fails
and if router C should take over if both A and B fail, you would assign priority 255 to A and lower priorities to B
and C, such as, priority 100 to B and priority 50 to C.

The priority command is: eth vrrp set priority <priority> <vrid> [<port#>]

Time Interval Attribute (default, 1 second)

The time interval value specifies how often VRRP advertisement packets are sent. It also determines how quickly
a backup router can recognize that another VRRP router is down.

If the backup does not receive a VRRP packet from another VRRP router during the master down interval, the
backup assumes the other router is down. The master down interval is:

Master _Down_Interval = (3 * Time_Interval) + Skew_Time

Skew_Time = (256 - Priority) / 256

Thus, the default skew time is (256 - 100) / 256, or .609375. The default master down interval is (3 * 1) +
.609375, or 3.609375 seconds.

Note: The time interval must be the same for every router in the Virtual Router, that is, for every router in the
LAN with the same VRID. For example, if a VRRP interface in routers A, B, and C has the VRID 7, routers A, B,
and C must all specify the same time interval for VRID 7.

The time interval command is:eth vrrp set timeinterval <seconds> <vrid> [<port#>]

Password Attribute (no default)

You may specify an optional password of 1 to 8 characters. The password is only used to authenticate VRRP
advertisement packets. It is sent as clear text on the LAN. If you do not specify a password, no password
authentication is done.

Note: The password must be the same for every router in the Virtual Router, that is, for every router in the LAN
with the same VRID. For example, if a VRRP interface in routers A, B, and C has the VRID 7, routers A, B, and
C must all specify the same password for VRID 7.

The password command is:eth vrrp set password <string> <vrid> [<port#>]

The command to clear the password is:eth vrrp clear password <vrid> [<port#>]

110 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

Note: Our implementation does not validate the IP addresses in the advertisement packet or authenticate using an
authentication header.

Preemption Option (default, preempt)

The preemption option determines what the router does when it recovers from a failure, as follows:

¥ If the router is the master router for the IP address (it has priority 255), it always immediately preempts the
backup router and resumes its function in the network.The preemption option cannot change this.

¥ However, if the router is a backup router for the IP address and it determines that a router with a lower
priority is currently functioning as backup, the preemption option determines whether this router immediately
preempts the router with lower priority or waits for the lower priority router to go away before becoming the
active VRRP router.

The preemption option may differ among the backup routers for a VRID.

The preemption command is:eth vrrp set option <preempt | nopreempt> <vrid> [<port#>]

Listing and Deleting the VRRP Configuration

After you have configured a router for VRRP, you can list the VRRP records and the current VRRP status using
the command:

eth vrrp list [<port#>]

To delete the VRRP configuration in a router, you delete the attribute record and the extra logical interface using
these commands:

eth vrrp delete <vrid> [<port#>]

eth delete <port#>:<logical#>

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 111

Sample VRRP Configuration
The sample configuration shown here is for two routers, one master and one backup. It is assumed that either
router can route Internet traffic for the Ethernet LAN containing devices that use a static default gateway address
192.168.100.254.

LAN with Static Gateway VRRP Routers

192.168.100.254
Mgmt. Addr.
192.168.254.253 Master
Gateway Addr. Router
192.168.100.254
Internet
Mgmt. Addr.
192.168.254.252 Backup
Gateway Addr. Router
192.168.100.254

Master Router Configuration File

These are the VRRP configuration commands for the master router.

# A new logical interface 0:1 will serve as the management interface.

# It is assigned the IP address 192.168.254.253
eth add 0:1
eth ip addr 192.168.254.253 255.255.255.0 0:1
#
# RIP is not needed for either interface so it is turned off.
eth ip options txrip off
eth ip options rxrip off
eth ip options txrip off 0:1
eth ip options rxrip off 0:1
#
# The default logical interface 0:0 will serve as the VRRP interface.
# It is assigned the default gateway/LAN address is 192.168.100.254.
#
eth ip addr 192.168.100.254 255.255.255.0
#
# The VRRP interface 0:0 is assigned VRID 7.
eth ip vrid 7
#
# A VRRP attribute record is defined for VRID 7.
eth vrrp add 7
#
# This router is the master router so it is given priority 255.
eth vrrp set priority 255 7
#
# This is a simple password to authenticate VRRP packets.
eth vrrp set password abcdefgh 7

112 Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features

#
# Use the default time interval (1 second) and preemption option (preempt).
#
# Save the changes and then reboot.
save
reboot

Backup Router Configuration File

These are the VRRP configuration commands for the backup router.

# These commands define a logical interface 0:1 to serve as the management interface.
# It is assigned an IP address unique on the LAN, 192.168.254.252.
eth add 0:1
eth ip addr 192.168.254.252 255.255.255.0 0:1
#
# RIP is not needed for either interface so it is turned off.
eth ip options txrip off
eth ip options rxrip off
eth ip options txrip off 0:1
eth ip options rxrip off 0:1
#
# In this example, the VRRP interface is the default logical interface 0:0,
# (The VRRP interfaces for the master and backup routers may have different numbers.)
#
# The VRRP IP address must be the same as that of the master router.
eth ip addr 192.168.100.254 255.255.255.0
#
# The VRRP interface must be assigned the same VRID as in the master router.
eth ip vrid 7
#
# A VRRP attribute record is defined for VRID 7.
eth vrrp add 7
#
# The backup router must have a priority less than 255. Here, the default, 100,
# is used.
eth vrrp set priority 100 7
#
# The backup router must have the same password as the master router.
eth vrrp set password abcdefgh 7
#
# The backup router must have the same time interval as the master router. In this
# example, the default, 1 second, is used.
# The default preempt option is used; it is not required to be the same as the
# master router.
#
# Save the changes and then reboot.
save
reboot

Chapter 4. Configuring Special Features 113

Chapter 5. ConÞguring Software Options

The features described in this chapter can be purchased as software option keys. To determine which software
options are installed on your router, use the vers command. (If a feature has not been enabled, it is listed with a ~
prefix.)

¥ Encryption

¥ IP filtering

¥ L2TP tunneling

¥ IPSec (Internet Protocol Security) and IKE (Internet Key Exchange)

¥ 3DES encryption

Software Option Keys

The router has several optional software features that can be purchased as software option keys when ordering the
router. These optional features are:

¥ IP routing

¥ DES or 3DES encryption (see Encryption, page 116)

¥ IP filters (see IP Filtering, page 119)

¥ L2TP tunneling (see L2TP Tunneling Ñ Virtual Dial-Up, page 122)

¥ IPSec (see IPSec (Internet Protocol Security), page 134)

These options are usually ordered with the router. The options are controlled by the presence of a key file in flash
memory or a bit set in the CMOS. Both values are checked; if either is set, the option is enabled.

Listing the Installed Software Options

To determine which software options are installed in your router, use the vers command. The vers command lists
all options:

¥ Options that are disabled are shown with a ~ prefix.

¥ Options that are enabled by the key file have a + prefix.

¥ Options that are enabled by a set bit have no prefix.

For example, the following vers command output shows that the L2TP and encryption options are disabled, but
all the other options are enabled. The IP Routing feature was enabled by a key.

Options: FRAME RELAY, SDSL, RFC1490, +IP ROUTING, IP FILTERING, WEB, ~L2TP,
~ENCRYPT, BRIDGE, IPX, CMMGMT

114 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

Adding a New Software Option Key
A software option key is a 44-character string, unique to a particular router, that enables a single feature. After
receiving a software option key, you can enter it using either the web GUI or the Command Line Interface.

When using the web GUI, you select the Upgrade Features button and enter the key. When using the Command
Line Interface, you enter the key using the following command:

key add <keystring>

Note: The new feature is not activated until the router is rebooted.

Deleting Software Option Keys

If you wish, you may delete all software option keys from the router. This disables the options that were enabled
by those keys. To do so, enter this command:

reboot bridgeonly

This command does the following:

¥ Deletes the file keyfile.dat.

¥ Syncs the file system.

¥ Reboots the router.

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 115

Encryption

Note: Encryption is a software option. The following section applies only for routers with this option.
For routers shipped with the following encryption options, two variants of encrypted data links over PPP have
been implemented:

¥ PPP DES (Data Encryption Standard) (RFC1969)

¥ Diffie-Hellman

Encryption requires PPP.

Caution: PPP DES and Diffie-Hellman encryption options may not be exported outside the United States or
Canada.

PPP DES (RFC 1969) Encryption

PPP DES (Data Encryption Standard) implementation uses a 56-bit key with fixed transmit and receive keys that
are specified in each router. With RFC 1969, users must manage the keys. This implementation has been tested
for interoperability with other PPP DES vendors such as IBM and Network Express.

Configuration Notes

Simply add the encryption commands to your standard configuration. For PPP DES, the encryption
commands are:

remote setEncryption dese rx <key> <remoteName>

remote setEncryption dese tx <key> <remoteName>
Observe the following guidelines:

¥ PPP DES can only be configured using the Command Line Interface (CLI).

¥ The choice of keys should be carefully considered: they must have eight hexadecimal digits, and values
that are considered cryptographically weak should be avoided. Consult a security expert for advice.

¥ Use the console port or a Telnet port (use the system log command) to view error messages and progress.
If you see ÒUnknown protocolÓ errors, the router receive key and sender Tx key don't match.

¥ Different keys may be used with different remote destinations.

¥ For maximum security, as shown in the following configuration examples, Telnet and SNMP access
should be disabled, and PPP CHAP authentication should be used by both ends.

Sample Configuration

Refer to the section Sample Configurations, page 61, of this guide. The routers SOHO (the target router) and
HQ (the remote router) are configured in the same manner as shown in that section, but the following
encryption commands are added. DonÕt forget to save the configuration and reboot the router (save and
reboot commands).

Remember that the transmit key (tx) of SOHO is the receive key (rx) of HQ. Inversely, the receive key of
SOHO is the transmit key of HQ.

116 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 Use this sample configuration with the additional encryption commands as a guideline to configure your own
routers.

¥ Enable Encryption on the Router HQ

Example:
remote setEncryption dese rx 1111111111111111 SOHO
remote setEncryption dese tx 2222222222222222 SOHO
save
reboot

¥ Enable encryption for the router SOHO

Example:
remote setEncryption dese tx 1111111111111111 HQ
remote setEncryption dese rx 2222222222222222 HQ
save
reboot

Diffie-Hellman Encryption
With Diffie-Hellman encryption, each router has an encryption file that is associated with a public key providing
768-bit security. The predefined keys can be replaced by the user. The key files have a suffix of ÒnumÓ by
convention (e.g., dh96.num).

Configuration Notes

Simply add the encryption command to your standard configuration. For Diffie-Hellman, the encryption
command is:

remote setEncryption DESE_1_KEY|DESE_2_KEY [<fileName>]| <remoteName>

Observe the following guidelines:

¥ DESE_1_KEY specifies that the same key is used in both directions, whereas DESE_2_KEY specifies
that the keys are different. Having the same keys in both directions can significantly reduce time needed
to compute the DES keys from the Diffie-Hellman exchange.

¥ The routersÕ receive key and sender Tx key must not match.

¥ Different keys and key files may be used with different remote destinations.

¥ For maximum security, as shown in these examples, Telnet and SNMP access should be disabled, and
PPP CHAP should be used. Use the console port to view error messages and progress.

Sample Configuration

The sample configuration is the same as the one provided in the preceding PPP DES encryption example, but
the Diffie-Hellman encryption command is used instead of the PPP DES encryption commands.

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 117

 remote setEncryption DESE_1_KEY dh96.num SOHO
save
reboot

File Format for the Diffie-Hellman Number File

The file consists of 192 bytes, in binary format. There are two 96-byte numbers stored, with the most
significant byte in the first position. For example, the number 0x12345678 would appear as
000000...0012345678.
The first 96 bytes form the modulus. In the equation x' = g^x mod n, n is the modulus. According to Diffie
and Hellman, the modulus should be prime, and (n-1)/2 should also be prime.
The second 96 bytes form the generator, or g in the above equation. The generator should be a primitive root
mod n.
The remaining pieces of the encryption key (x and y) are randomly generated at connection time and will
change every time the device connects.
Contact an encryption expert to obtain cryptographically sound generator and modulus pairs if you wish to
change the default values.

¥ Default Modulus

00000000: c9 b4 ed 33 ba 7f 00 9e - ce e0 83 5d a5 4c 19 25
00000010: e0 2d 99 44 e8 8d cd 16 - 02 0e 6c 26 6d 15 7c 95
00000020: 82 9a 8c 2b 19 d0 56 da - 9b 5b a9 cd cf fb 45 2b
00000030: c9 6a 3c 26 e5 b8 1a 25 - 07 b8 07 22 ed 15 8a 56
00000040: 8b f4 30 f2 28 fc 6b f1 - bf a4 3e 87 f0 be d6 1c
00000050: 33 92 b9 5e d1 b7 20 8c - 92 02 cb e5 26 45 02 1d

¥ Default Generator

00000000: 90 f0 09 78 cc 23 79 a8 - 6c 23 a8 65 e0 dc 0f 6d
00000010: fb a7 26 e8 63 0a 21 67 - 5a f8 0f 59 84 09 5c da
00000020: ef af af fc d2 5f 83 e2 - a7 27 05 34 17 94 1a 4f
00000030: b2 87 76 97 e7 48 43 db - 62 29 70 9e 7f eb 2c 6e
00000040: 5d 25 1d a1 65 f0 b4 e6 - 47 4d 25 23 0b 20 b9 93
00000050: 27 f0 56 12 5a 97 f6 c5 - 31 b6 19 fc 67 22 93 f5

118 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

IP Filtering

IP Filtering is a type of firewall used to control network traffic. The process involves filtering packets received
from one interface and deciding whether to route them to another interface or to discard them.

When it is filtering packets, the router examines information such as the source and destination address contained
in the IP packet, the type of connection, etc., and then screens (filters) the packets based on this information;
packets are either allowed to be forwarded from one interface to another interface or simply discarded.

IP filtering requires that IP routing be enabled. This type of filtering offers great flexibility and control of IP
filters, but configuration of this feature requires using a series of commands that may appear complex to a casual
user.

See the installation CD for sample IP Filter command files (filter.txt). This file can be edited for your installation
and copied to the router usingTFTP or the Windows Quick Start application. (See Batch File Command
Execution, page 166.)

Filters and Interfaces

Filters are commands used to screen IP packets: packets are simply matched against a series of filters. If a packet
matches a filter, the filter determines whether the packet is accepted or dropped. If no filter matches the incoming
packet, the packet is accepted by default.

Filters operate at the interface level. Each interface has a series of IP filters associated with it; the filters can be of
three types: Input filters, Output filters, and Forward filters. The following illustrates the filter process.

Input Phase Forward Phase Output Phase

IP-ES Forward
Input N N Output
Filters
Filters A A Filters
ICMP
T T
Redirect
IP Routing
Table

Forward filters on Routing Forward filters on

the input interface Table the output interface
Processing

Input Phase

When an IP packet comes in through an interface (such as the Input interface), the router tries to recognize the
packet. The router then examines the Input filters for this interface and, based on the first Input filter that
matches the IP packet, it decides how to handle the packet (forward or discard it).

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 119

 If NAT translation is enabled for the Input interface, NAT translation is performed.

Forward Phase

At this stage, the router uses its routing table to determine to which interface or link the packet is sent . It then
applies the Forward filters based on the Input interface information. Next the router applies the Forward
filters based on the Output interface information.

Output Phase

If NAT translation is enabled for the Output interface, then NAT translation is performed. The router
examines the Output filters for this interface and handles the IP packet based on the first Output filter that
matches the packet.

Configuring Filters with Network Address Translation Enabled

General NAT Information

Network Address Translation is an IP address conversion feature that translates a PCÕs local (internal) address
into a global (outside/Internet) IP address. NAT is needed when a PC (or several PCs) on a Local Area
Network wants to connect to the Internet or get to a remote network that uses global, registered addresses:
NAT swaps the local IP address with a global IP address: the IP address and port information that the PC uses
are remapped (changed) to the IP address that was assigned to the router and a new port number is assigned.

Note: The preceding section, Filters and Interfaces, describes how NAT ÒbehavesÓ for each filtering phase.

Filter Actions
Each packet is compared to filters at each implementation point (Input, Forward, and Output). If no filter at a
particular point matches the incoming IP packet, the packet is accepted. If a filter does match the packet, the filter
initiates one of the following possible actions:

Accept

When the packet is accepted at a filter interface (Input, Forward, or Output), the router lets it proceed for
further processing.

Drop

With Drop, the packet is discarded.

Reject

With Reject, an ICMP REJECT (Internet Control Management Protocol) is sent to reject the packet.

Pass to IPSec

Two actionsÑinipsec and outipsecÑpass the packet to IPSec for further processing. The inipsec action is
for packets coming from the other IPSec gateway; it passes the packet to IPSec for decrypting. The outipsec

120 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 action is for packets coming from the local protected network; it passes the packet to IPSec so it can be
encrypted and sent to the other IPSec gateway.

Although filters are the mechanism by which packets are passed to IPSec, it is recommended that you use
IKE, rather than your own filters, to manage your IP Security (see IPSec (Internet Protocol Security), page
134).

IP Filter Commands
To define and manage IP filters on an Ethernet interface, use the command eth ip filter. To define and manage IP
filters on the remote interface, use the command remote ipfilter. For more information on these commands, see
eth ip filter, page 237 and remote ipfilter, page 267.

Special Notes
IP filters of Input type are checked before the IP packet is redirected by ICMP. This could adversely affect local
LANs that use ICMP redirect to dynamically learn IP routes. IP filters of Input type are checked before the IP
packet is sent to the router itself as a host.

Example:
The following commands stop any attempt by a host coming from the remote Internet from sending an IP packet
to the Telnet port. Hence, the router does not see the packet, and the packet is not forwarded.

remote ipfilter insert input drop -p tcp -dp 23 internet

save

These commands stop any attempt by a host coming from the remote internet from sending an IP packet to the
Telnet port ÒthroughÓ the router to a different interface. The router itself could still receive the IP packet, hence
the remote host could Telnet to the router itself.

remote ipfilter insert forward drop -p tcp -dp 23 internet

save

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 121

L2TP Tunneling Ñ Virtual Dial-Up

This section has four parts:

¥ The Introduction provides a general overview of L2TP tunneling.

¥ The L2TP Concepts section explains LNS, L2TP client, LAC, dial user, tunnels, and sessions.

¥ Configuration describes preliminary configuration steps and verification steps and lists commands associated
with the configuration of L2TP and PPP sessions.

¥ The Sample Configurations section provides two examples with step-by-step instructions: a simple L2TP
client configuration example and a complete LNS and L2TP client configuration example.

The installation CD also contains sample configuration files. These files can be edited for your installation
and copied to the router using TFTP or the Windows Quick Start application. For more information on TFTP
use, see Batch File Command Execution, page 166.

Introduction
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol) is used to forward a PPP link from a remote site to a corporate site across the
Internet, thus creating virtual paths called tunnels. Because tunneling involves encapsulating data, packets can be
transported across networks using different protocols. The advantages for tunneling the PPP protocol are listed
below:

¥ Different network protocols such as NetBEUI, IPX, and Appletalk can be transported through the Internet
using a tunnel. The protocol packets are encapsulated and routed across the network through the Internet.

¥ Tunnels provide a way to reduce costs and complexity associated with remote dial-up networking by using a
local ISP: users connect to the remote site by dialing into their local ISP and letting the Internet handle the
long-distance connections, thus avoiding long-distance phone charges.

¥ Tunneling PPP allows compression of data through the entire tunnel, which translates into greater throughput.

¥ By allowing encryption over the PPP link, L2TP contributes to more secure networks over the Internet.

¥ Remote users can access the company network, even if there is a company firewall (provided, of course, that
tunnels can come through the firewall).

Note: This feature can interoperate with any vendor that supports L2TP - Draft II.

L2TP Concepts
This section defines the major L2TP concepts and illustrates them with L2TP client examples. It also describes
the creation and destruction of tunnels and sessions.

122 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

LNS, L2TP Client, LAC, and Dial User

An L2TP tunnel is created between an L2TP client and an L2TP network server (LNS). The client and server
control the tunnel using the L2TP protocol.

¥ L2TP Network Server (LNS)

The LNS is the point where the call is actually managed and terminated (e.g., within a corporate
network).

¥ L2TP Access Concentrator (LAC)

The LAC is the physical hardware (such as a router) used for placing and receiving phone calls.

¥ Dial User

A dial user is the remote system or router that is either placing the call to the LAC or receiving the call
from the LAC.

The dial user does not actually dial in to the LNS or receive a call from the LNS, since this is a virtual
connection.

The dial user is one end of a PPP session. The LNS is the other end of the PPP session.

¥ L2TP Client

With an L2TP client, the dial user and LAC are combined in the same hardware device. In this case, the
PPP session is between the LAC and the LNS.

As shown in the following illustration (Figure 1), an L2TP client is used to tunnel a PPP session between
a small office (our router) and a corporate office through the Internet.

L2TP Client Illustration

The tunnel uses UDP/IP traffic as the transport medium over IP. This implementation of L2TP as illustrated
below shows a tunnel from a remote userÕs perspective.

Note: There is one PPP session over ISDN and another PPP session over the tunnel.

Remote User Company

Logical Link
PPP session running over the tunnel
L2TP Client: Company
PC Dial User+LAC TUNNEL LNS Router LAN/server
(ISDN router)

Physical Link Physical Link

INTERNET DSL/ATM traffic
IP traffic to the Internet
PPP session
ISDN line

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 123

LNS and L2TP Client Relationship

The LNS acts as the supervising system. The L2TP client acts both as the dial user and the LAC.

One end of the tunnel terminates at the L2TP client. The other end of the tunnel terminates at the LNS.

One end of the PPP session going through the tunnel terminates at the L2TP client acting as the dial user; the
other end terminates at the LNS.

Tunnels

Tunnels are virtual paths that exist between an L2TP client and an L2TP server.

An L2TP server can communicate simultaneously with more than one L2TP client.

An L2TP client can communicate simultaneously with more than one L2TP server.

Some L2TP implementations including the one discussed in this section allow the same router to act as both
an L2TP client and an L2TP server simultaneously, if so configured.

Caution: Verify that the IP address of the other end of the tunnel is correctly routed through the right, local
interface/remote and will not appear to be routed through the tunnel. An attempt to route the tunnel endpoint
within itself will fail.

Sessions

Sessions can be thought of as switched virtual circuit ÒcallsÓ carried within a tunnel and can only exist within
tunnels. One session carries one ÒcallÓ. This ÒcallÓ is one PPP session. Multiple sessions can exist within a
tunnel. The following briefly discusses how sessions are created and destroyed.

¥ Session creation

Traffic destined to a remote entry (located at the end of the tunnel) initiates a tunnel session. When the
L2TP client wishes to establish a session to an LNS, the L2TP client assumes the role of a LAC and
sends control packets containing incoming call information to the LNS over the tunnel.

¥ Session destruction

A tunnel session automatically times out after the data session stops. When instructed to destroy a
session, the L2TP client closes any PPP session associated with that session. The L2TP client may also
send control messages to the LNS indicating that the L2TP client wishes to end the PPP session.

When the LNS wants to hang up the call, it sends control messages destroying the session.

Configuration

Preliminary Steps to Configure a Tunnel

The following logical steps should be considered before configuring a tunnel:

1. Decide if the router should act as an L2TP Client or LNS.

124 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 2. Decide if one side or both sides of the connection should be allowed to initiate a tunnel.

3. Create the L2TP Tunnel Entry with these characteristics:

¥ The host name of the L2TP client

¥ The host name of the L2TP network server

¥ A Tunnel CHAP secret (both sides of the connection must use the same secret)

¥ The IP address of the other party must be provided to the initiating side of the tunnel

¥ Type of flow control (pacing, sequence numbers, or none)

4. Create a remote entry for the PPP session. Associate the remote entry with the Tunnel.

Verification Steps

1. Verify that the IP address of the other end of the tunnel is correctly routed through the right, local
interface/remote and will not appear to be routed through the tunnel. An attempt to route the tunnel
endpoint within itself will fail.

2. Try to establish IP connectivity (using the ping or tracert commands).

a.ÒPingingÓ from the L2TP client or LNS to the opposite tunnel endpoint should succeed (this tests the
tunnel path).
b.ÒPingingÓ from a tunnel endpoint IP address to an IP address within the tunnel will probably fail due to
the existence of the IP firewall.

Configuration Commands

L2TP configuration commands are used to configure:

¥ Tunnels

¥ The PPP session

¥ Commands to configure tunnels

For additional information, see L2TP Ñ Virtual Dial-Up Configuration Commands, page 322.

L2TP tunnel entry:

l2tp add <TunnelName>

The remote tunnel host name:

l2tp set remoteName <name> <TunnelName>

The local tunnel host name:

l2tp set ourTunnelName <name> <TunnelName>

CHAP secret:
l2tp set CHAPSecret <secret> <TunnelName>

Tunnel authentication:

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 125

 l2tp set authen on | off <TunnelName>

Type of L2TP support for tunnel:

Configure the entry to act as a L2TP client,, an L2TP network server (LNS), or as both a LAC and an
LNS, or the entry can be disabled.

l2tp set type all | lns | l2tpclient |disabled <TunnelName>

Remote tunnel IP address:

l2tp set address <ipaddr> <TunnelName>

Note: Verify that the IP address of the other end of the tunnel is correctly routed. It should not be routed
through the tunnel itself, but over a physical link.

You may also specify the source IP address for the tunnel as an address other than the WAN interface IP
address, such as the Ethernet IP address.

l2tp set ourAddress <ipaddr)> <TunnelName>

Our PPP system name and secret/password:

The following commands specify the routerÕs name and password/secret for authentication purposes on a
per-tunnel basis.

l2tp set ourSysName <name> <TunnelName>

l2tp set ourPassword <password> <TunnelName>

Other commands:
Commands are also available to delete a tunnel, close a tunnel, or set up advanced L2TP configuration
features such as traffic performance fine-tuning (see L2TP Ñ Virtual Dial-Up Configuration
Commands, page 322).

¥ Commands for PPP Session Configuration

Two commands are used to extend a PPP link from a remote site to a corporate site across the Internet
and establish a tunnel. For more information, see L2TP Ñ Virtual Dial-Up Configuration Commands,
page 322.

remote setLNS <TunnelName> <remoteName>

remote setl2tpclient <TunnelName><remoteName>

Sample Configurations
Two sample configurations are described in this section:

¥ A simple configuration. This example describes the information needed to configure one side of the tunnel
(the client side).

¥ A complete configuration. This example describes the information needed to configure both sides of the
tunnel (client and server sides).

126 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

Simple L2TP Client Configuration Example

This example shows how a telecommuter working at home (client side) can configure his/her router SOHO to
tunnel to the companyÕs LAN (server side).

The information given in the Configuration Process section below provides a framework reference for this
type of L2TP Client configuration.

¥ Assumptions

In this example, the following information is assumed:

¥ The server side (the company) has an LNS router connected to the Internet.

¥ The client side has an existing route to the Internet with the remote ÒInternetÓ (refer to the following
Note, if you need sample configuration commands).

¥ IP routing is enabled (refer to the following Note, if you need sample configuration commands).

Note: Below is an example of configuration commands that can be used to enable IP routing and
establish a route to the Internet.

remote add internet

remote disauthen internet
remote setoursysname name_isp_expects internet
remote setourpass secret_isp_expects internet
remote addiproute 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1 internet
remote setphone isdn 1 5551000 internet
remote setphone isdn 2 5553000 internet
eth ip enable
eth ip address 192.168.254.254 255.255.255.0

¥ Configuration Process

The following sets of questions, answers, and configuration commands specific to the L2TP tunnel and
the PPP remote will assist you in configuring the client side router SOHO (also referred to as home
router). Note that the server side is referred to as either company router or router at work.

L2TP tunnel configuration

L2TP tunnel-specific questions
1. What is the host name of the router at home that the user is configuring?

2. What is the host name of the company router at work to which the user will tunnel?

3. What is the shared CHAP secret used for tunneling between the home router (client) and the
company router (server)?

4. What is the IP address of the company router to which the user will tunnel?

L2TP tunnel answers. For our example, letÕs assume the answers to the above tunnel-specific questions
are as follows:
1. Home_Router

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 127

 2. Work_Router

3. Shared_Secret

4. 10.0.0.1

L2TP tunnel configuration commands. These commands would be used to set up the L2TP tunnel
information for our example:
l2tp add Work_Router
l2tp set ourtunnel Home_Router Work_Router
l2tp set chapsecret Shared_Secret Work_Router
l2tp set address 10.0.0.1 Work_Router

PPP remote configuration

PPP remote-specific questions:
1. What is the home routerÕs name for PPP authentication?

2. What is the home routerÕs secret for PPP authentication?

3. Does the home router need PPP authentication for the remote router (company router)?

If yes:

a. What is the remote routerÕs name for PPP authentication?

b. What is the remote routerÕs secret for PPP authentication?
If no:

a. Use the command remote disauthen <remoteName> where <remoteName> is the name used to
refer to the companyÕs router.

4. Does the remote router dynamically assign an IP address for this PPP session?

If yes:
Use IP address translation (NAT)

If no and the home router is to behave as a LAN at home:

Which IP address and network mask does the home router use for its LAN at home? Use the eth ip
addr command to set the LAN at home. Do not enable IP address translation (NAT) for the remote
(company) router.

If no and the home router is to behave as a host at home:

Which IP address does it use at home? Assuming an IP address of www.xxx.yyy.zzz, use the
command:
remote setsrcipaddr www.xxx.yyy.zzz 255.255.255.255 <remoteName>
remote setiptranslate on <remoteName>

5. Which IP and network addresses does the home router access at work through this PPP session?

PPP remote answers. For our example, let us assume the answers to the above PPP remote-specific
questions are as follows:

128 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 1. ppp_soho

2. ppp_soho_secret

3. We assume that this router will authenticate the router at work with the following information:

a) the company routerÕs name is: ppp_work

b) the company routerÕs PPP secret is: ppp_work_secret

4. We assume that the companyÕs router will dynamically assign an IP address to the home router.

5. 172.16.0.0/255.240.0.0

PPP remote configuration commands. For our example, these commands would be used to set up the
PPP remote information for tunneling to work:
remote add ppp_work
remote setlns Work_Router ppp_work
remote setpasswd ppp_work_secret ppp_work
remote setiptranslate on ppp_work
remote addiproute 172.16.0.0 255.240.0.0 1 ppp_work

l2tp set oursysname ppp_soho Work_Router

l2tp set ourpassword ppp_soho_secret Work_Router

Complete LNS and L2TP Client Configuration Example

The following information and illustration (Figure 1) provide a configuration example of an LNS and L2TP
Client.

¥ Assumptions

IP Addresses
The LNS serverÕs LAN IP address is 192.168.100.1 (LNSserver) with a mask of 255.255.255.0.

The LNS has a WAN IP address of 192.168.110.1, which is used as the tunnel endpoint.

The LNS connects to the remote internet.

The L2TP ClientÕs LAN IP address is 192.168.101.1 (soho) with a mask of 255.255.255.0. Additionally,
192.168.101.1 is also the tunnel endpoint within the L2TP client. The router soho connects to the remote
isp.

Secret/password
A shared tunnel secret of ÒtunnelsecretÓ will be used.

PPP Authentication
The LNS will authenticate the client using PPP. The client will not try to authenticate the LNS using
PPP. For PPP authentication, the L2TP client will be known as ÒlacclientÓ with a password of
ÒclientpasswordÓ.

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 129

 Tunnel
Only the L2TP client (soho) will initiate the tunnel and make the connection. The tunnel is routed
through the remote internet which is the default route. The LNS server never calls the L2TP client
(soho).

Figure 1

Remote User Company

PPP session running over the tunnel

L2TP Client: lacclient lnsserver LNS:
(see Note 1) (see Note 3) LNSserver router CO
soho router TUNNEL (DSL) LAN
PC tunnelAtHome tunnelAtWork 192.168.100.1
(ISDN)
(see Note 2) (see Note 2)

Router on the 192.168.110.1

LAN side:
192.168.101.1
LAN:
192.168.100.0
IP traffic to the Internet IP traffic to the Internet
LAN:
192.168.101.0
Frame Relay
ATM traffic

isp
router internet
172.16.0.254 INTERNET router
CO end:
172.16.0.1

Note 1: The CHAP secret is ÒclientPasswordÓ.

Note 2: The CHAP secret is ÒtunnelSecretÓ.

Note 3: No CHAP secret is needed; the client does not authenticate the LNS server.

Configuration Process

The following sample scripts list the commands used to configure the routers soho (L2TP client), LNSserver
(LNS), internet, and isp.

¥ Configuration commands for soho (L2TP client)

Note: soho is an ISDN router.

Define soho:
system name soho
system passwd sohopasswd
system msg configured_12/15/98
system securitytimer 60

130 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 Enable IP routing for soho:
eth ip enable
eth ip addr 192.168.101.1 255.255.255.0

Set up ISDN parameters:

isdn set switch ni1
isdn set dn 5551000 5553000
isdn set spids 0555100001 0555300001

Define DHCP settings for DNS servers, domain, wins server:

dhcp set value DOMAINNAMESERVER 192.168.100.68
dhcp set value DOMAINNAME efficient.com
dhcp set value WINSSERVER 192.168.100.73

Define a remote for the tunnel:

remote add lnsserver
remote disauthen lnsserver
remote setoursysname lacclient lnsserver
remote setourpasswd clientpassword lnsserver
remote setLNS tunnelAtWork lnsserver
remote addiproute 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 1 lnsserver

Define a remote isp:

remote add isp
remote setphone isdn 1 5552000 isp
remote setphone isdn 2 5554000 isp
remote disauthen internet remote addiproute 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1 isp

Define the tunnel:

l2tp add tunnelAtWork
l2tp set chapsecret tunnelsecret tunnelAtWork
l2tp set ourtunnelname tunnelAtHome tunnelAtWork
l2tp set address 192.168.110.1 tunnelAtWork
save
reboot

¥ Configuration commands for internet

Note: internet is a DSL router. The router internet establishes a link to the LNS.

Define internet:
system name internet
system passwd internet
system msg configured_12/15/98
system securitytimer 60

Enable IP routing and add routes:

eth ip enable
eth ip addr 172.16.0.1 255.255.255.0
eth ip opt rxdef off
eth ip addroute 192.168.101.1 255.255.255.0 172.16.0.254 1

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 131

 Create a DHCP pool of addresses:
dhcp add 172.16.0.0 255.255.255.0
dhcp del 192.168.254.0
dhcp set addr 172.16.0.2 172.16.0.20

Set up DSL parameters:

sd term co sd speed 1152

Define a remote LNSserver

remote add lnsserver
remote setauthen chap lnsserver
remote setpasswd serverpassword lnsserver
remote addiproute 192.168.110.1 255.255.255.255 1 lnsserver
remote setprotocol ppp lnsserver
remote setpvc 0*38 lnsserver
save
reboot

¥ Configuration commands for isp

Note: isp is an ISDN router. The router soho calls the router isp.

Define isp:
system name isp
system passwd isppasswd
system msg configured_12/15/98
system securitytimer 60

Enable IP routing:
eth ip enable
eth ip addr 172.16.0.254 255.255.255.0

Add a route to the other end of internet:

eth ip defgate 172.16.0.1
eth ip opt txdef off

Disable DHCP:
dhcp disable all

Set up ISDN parameters:

isdn set switch ni1
isdn set dn 5552000 5554000
isdn set spids 0555200001 0555400001

Define a remote (soho):

remote add soho
remote setauthen chap soho
remote setpassw sohopasswd soho
remote setphone isdn 1 5551000 soho
remote setphone isdn 2 5553000 soho
remote addiproute 192.168.101.0 255.255.255.0 1 soho

132 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 save
reboot

¥ Configuration commands for LNSserver

Note: LNSserver is a DSL router.

Define LNSserver:
system name lnsserver
system passwd serverpassword
system msg Script_for_LNS_called_HQ
system securitytimer 60

Enable IP routing:
eth ip enable
eth ip addr 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.0

Define DHCP settings for DNS servers, domain:

dhcp set value domainname efficient.com
dhcp set value domainnameserver 192.168.100.68

Set up DSL parameters:

sd speed 1152

Define a remote for the Tunnel:

remote add lacclient
remote setpass clientpassword lacclient
remote setLAC tunnelAtHome lacclient
remote setauthen chap lacclient
remote addiproute 192.168.101.0 255.255.255.0 1 lacclient

Define a remote (internet):

remote add internet
remote setphone isdn 1 5552000 internet
remote setphone isdn 2 5554000 internet
remote setauthen chap internet
remote setpasswd internet internet
remote addiproute 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1 internet
remote setsrcipaddr 192.168.110.1 255.255.255.255 internet
remote addiproute 192.168.101.1 255.255.255.255 1 internet
remote setprotocol ppp internet
remote setpvc 0*38 internet

Define the actual tunnel:

l2tp add tunnelAtHome
l2tp set chapsecret tunnelsecret tunnelAtHome
l2tp set ourtunnelname tunnelAtWork tunnelAtHome
save
reboot

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 133

IPSec (Internet Protocol Security)

Note: IPSec security is a software option for your router. The option becomes available after purchase and
installation of the software option key (see Software Option Keys, page 114). The following section applies only
to routers with this option.

IPSec is an open standard that defines optional authentication and encryption methods at the IP packet level. It is a
true network layer protocol that provides authentication, privacy, and data integrity. Its protocol suite is comprised
of:

¥ ESP (Encapsulated Security Payload)Ña security protocol that completely encapsulates and optionally
encrypts and/or authenticates user data.

¥ AH (Authentication Header)Ña security protocol that authenticates each data packet.

¥ IKE (Internet Key Exchange)Ña security protocol used to establish a shared security policy and
authenticated keys before an IPSec data transfer begins.

IPSec sessions are initiated through Security Associations (SAs), which allow peers to negotiate a common set of
security attributes. In a nutshell, IPSec assures source authenticity, data integrity and confidentiality of IP packets,
providing the level of security required by Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).

IPSec can be used in conjunction with L2TP (see L2TP Tunneling Ñ Virtual Dial-Up, page 122). IPSec offers
greater security than L2TP, but it does not support as many network protocols. However, bridged and lower layer
protocol traffic may be transmitted across an IPSec network if packets are first encapsulated by L2TP, and then by
IPSec.

IPSec does not require modification of individual applications or devices for secure data transport. Although it
does require global IP addresses for all peers, Network Address Translation (NAT) may be used with IPSec. (See
Network Address Translation (NAT), page 91.)

Transport and Tunnel Encapsulation Modes

IPSec has two encapsulation modes: transport mode and tunnel mode. Transport mode protects traffic between
two nodes or peers (the endpoints of the communication). Tunnel mode protects traffic between peers and/or
gateways, such as traffic on a VPN or on any other connection where one or both of the endpoints might not be
IPSec systems.

The router supports both IPSec encapsulation methods. It can serve as the endpoint of a tunnel mode connection
or as the endpoint of a transport mode connection. Also, while operating in tunnel mode, the router will allow
transport mode traffic to flow through it.

Tunnel mode is the default encapsulation mode for the router. It is used when the IPSec packet comes from either
another device or from the encrypting device. In tunnel mode, the IP header is encrypted as part of the payload,
and an entirely new IP header is added to the packet. Tunnel mode prevents network traffic analysis. A network
attacker could determine the tunnel endpoints (the gateway addresses), but not the true source and destination of
the tunneled packets, even if they are the same as the tunnel endpoints

Transport mode is used when the IPSec packet originates in the encrypting device. In transport mode, only the
payload (data portion) of each IP packet is encapsulated and/or encrypted. An IPSec header is inserted between
the IP header and the upper layer protocol header.

The router should be configured for transport mode when a client is communicating directly with the router. For
example, use transport mode when a remote user wants to access the HTML setup pages or Telnet into the router.

134 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

It can also be used for L2TP over IPSec. The routers at either end of the L2TP tunnel do both the IPSec and L2TP
encapsulations so the routers can use transport mode for communications.

Tunnel Mode:
Secure Packet Traffic
Between Routers

Device Router Router Device

Transport Mode:
Secure Data Traffic Between Devices

Device Device
Router Router
or router or router

ESP and AH Security Protocols

An IPSec connection must use either the AH or the ESP security protocol.The protocol selected determines the
encapsulation method used. In addition, the protocol also determines whether encryption may be performed. If the
AH protocol is selected, only packet authentication can be performed, not encryption. If the ESP protocol is
selected, it can perform encryption, authentication, or both encryption and authentication.

If ESP encryption is selected, ESP automatically encrypts the data portion (payload) of each packet using the
chosen encryption method, DES (56-bit keys) or 3DES (168-bit keys).

Caution: Restrictions may exist on the export of the DES and 3DES encryption options outside the United States
or Canada.

Although encryption cannot be specified for individual applications, a server could be partitioned to achieve the
same effect. Given that packets can be encrypted using any combination of security association (SA), protocol,
source port, and destination port, you could specify that traffic to and from one database be encrypted while
allowing unencrypted traffic to pass freely to and from other databases on the server.

Both the ESP and AH protocols support authentication and replay detection. Replay detection uses sequence
numbers to reject old or duplicate packets. The packet is authenticated using a message digest derived from either
of two hashing algorithmsÑSHA-1 (Secure Hashing Algorithm 1) or MD5 (Message Digest 5).

The ESP protocol can authenticate the data origin and data integrity; it does not authenticate the entire packet.
More specifically, the message digest is inserted following, not before, the payload. Both the message digest and
payload are sandwiched between the ESP header and ESP trailer.

The AH protocol can perform packet authentication. The AH header protocol defines authentication methods for
both the packetÕs outer IP header and its payload. Unlike ESP authentication, the message digest is inserted in
front of the payload.

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 135

The following figure shows the transformed IP packet after the ESP or AH protocol has been applied in tunnel
mode.

ESP Protocol:

New IP ESP Original IP Rest of original IP packet ESP ESP Authen-

Header Header Header (headers and data) Trailer tication

Encrypted
Authenticated

AH Protocol:

New IP AH Original IP Rest of original IP packet

Header Header Header (headers and data)

Authenticated

IKE Management
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) management makes encryption key exchange practical, even in large networks
where there are many unknown intermediate links between sending and receiving nodes. Unlike protocols that
allow only one key exchange per session, IKE can generate and transfer multiple keys between peers during a
single tunnel session. Users may specify the duration for which keys are valid. This dynamic type of Diffie-
Hellman key exchange greatly reduces the chances of a network attacker finding an entry into a tunnel.

If you wish, you may also select Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) to increase the security of the key exchange. PFS
ensures that the compromise of a single key permits access to only data protected by that particular key. However,
PFS requires use of a Diffie-Hellman group for each rekey, adding overhead to the process and causing IKE to run
more slowly. Thus, PFS is not always desirable.

Because VPN users are likely to be using a variety of protocols, a common set of security attributes must be
negotiated at the beginning of any tunnel session. Phase 1 IKE is responsible for negotiating these security
attributes and establishing peer identities. A secure tunnel for the exchange of encryption keys is also created

136 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

during this phase. Phase 2 IKE then exchanges proposals for IPSec security attributes, generates the encryption
keys and sets up IPSec Security Associations (SAs) for moving user data.

Phase 1 IKE: Phase 2 IKE:

Peer identities IPSec Proposals
Who are you? Router
Router Router Security attributes? Router

Proposals Key generation

Security attributes?
Router Router Router Key exchange Router

Secure tunnel IPSec Security Associations

Router Encryption keys? Router Router Data flow Router

Main Mode and Aggressive Mode

The router supports two Phase 1 IKE modes: main mode and aggressive mode. These modes apply only to the
Phase 1 negotiations, not to the ensuing data transmission.

Main mode is used when both source and destination IP addresses are known. In main mode, only two options
require definition initiallyÑthe remote peer IP address and the shared secret.

Aggressive mode is used when either the source or destination IP address could change, as with a remote modem
or DSL connection. In aggressive mode, additional information must be specified at the beginning of a session.
This additional information includes the remote gatewayÕs IP address, the local and remote peer IDs, and an ID
type. This information is checked against the routerÕs Security Association (SA) database. If a match is found, a
tunnel session can be established.

Phase 1 IKE Ñ Main Mode:

Fixed IP Address Fixed IP Address
Shared secret
Router Router

Phase 1 IKE Ñ Aggressive Mode:

Known ID (e-mail addr.
Fixed IP Address or domain name)
Shared secret
Router Router

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 137

Additional IKE Settings
In addition to the peer identification and shared secret described earlier, IKE requires that the router be configured
with the following information:

¥ Session authentication

¥ Phase 1 IKE message authentication

¥ Phase 1 IKE message encryption

¥ One of the following for each IKE proposal:

ÑIPSec AH packet authentication
ÑIPSec ESP data authentication
ÑIPSec ESP data encryption
ÑIPSec ESP data authentication and data encryption
¥ Diffie-Hellman key generation group

¥ IPSec policy (filter) setup

¥ Policy and peer associations

¥ Policy and proposal associations

Security Associations (SAs)

A Security Association (SA) is an instance of security policy and keying material applied to a data flow. Both IKE
and IPSec use SAs. An IPSec SA is unidirectional, applying to only one direction of data flow. An IKE SA is bi-
directional, and thus, only one IKE SA is needed for a secure connection.

After an IKE SA is established, any number of IPSec SAs may be created. Although IPSec SAs can be configured
manually, most networks rely on IKE to set them up. IKE negotiates and establishes SAs on behalf of IPSec. SAs
are negotiated between the two endpoints of the tunnel and contain information on sequence numbering for anti-
replay.

IPSec SAs are unidirectional so a set of SAs is needed for a secure connection. For each security protocol used,
one SA is needed for each direction (inbound and outbound). Usually, only one protocol (ESP or AH) is used so
the connection would use two SAs (one inbound and one outbound). However, it is possible for a connection to
use four SAs if it uses two proposals and policies, one requiring the ESP protocol and the other requiring the AH
protocol.

IKE negotiates SAs in the following sequence:

Phase 1 IKE:

The session initiator creates a cookie and sends it to the responder, with a zero placeholder in the responder
cookie area. The responder then creates a cookie and fills in the zeros. All packets will contain these two
cookies until the Phase 1 SA expires. IKE Peer commands next establish the identity of local and remote
peers. Then IKE Proposal commands specify how packets will be encrypted and/or authenticated for the
initial exchange.

Phase 2 IKE

IKE IPSec Proposal commands specify how packets will be encrypted/authenticated for the final SA. Then
IKE IPSec Policy commands specify which packets will be encrypted/authenticated for the final SA.

138 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

IKE Commands
The Internet Key Exchange (IKE) process consists of two phases. In phase 1, a moderately secure connection is
established between the two security endpoints. This connection is used to exchange key and connection
information for the final SA, which is used to exchange user data.

You can use the following command to clear all IKE configuration information from the router.

ike flush

The other IKE commands relate to the four categories of information required to set up IKE in the router.

1. The IKE Peer commands establish the identity of the local and remote peers.

2. The IKE Proposal commands define the proposals exchanged during the Phase 1 exchange.

3. The IKE IPSec Proposal commands specify the parameters for the final SA.

4. The IKE IPSec Policy commands specify the filtering parameters for the final SA.

IKE Peer Commands

The IKE peer commands establish the identity of the local and remote peers.

ike peers add <PeerName> Defines the name of a new IKE peer.

ike peers delete <PeerName> Deletes an existing IKE peer.

ike peers list Lists the IKE peers.

The following commands define the peer connection.

ike peers set mode <MAIN | AGGRESSIVE> <PeerName>

Sets the peer connection to either main or aggressive mode. Main mode is used when the IP addresses of
both ends are known. Aggressive mode is used when the address of one end can change, as with a typical
modem or DSL connection.

For a main mode connection, set only the IP address and the secret:

ike peers set address <IPaddress> <PeerName>

Sets the IP address of the other endpoint. In a main mode configuration, the other endpoint is constant.

ike peers set secret <secret> <PeerName>

Sets the shared secret for the peer. The secret must be identical for both ends. It can be up to 256
characters long; do not use spaces or non-printable characters.

For an aggressive mode connection, you must set the IP address and secret and several more options.

ike peers set address <IPaddress> <PeerName>

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 139

 Sets the IP address of the other endpoint. One end, the gateway, has a fixed IP address. The other end, the
client, has a changing address. When configuring the client, set the peer IP address to the gatewayÕs fixed
address. When configuring the gateway for aggressive mode, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.

ike peers set secret <secret> <PeerName>

Sets the shared secret for the peer. The secret must be identical for both ends.It can be up to 256
characters long; do not use spaces or non-printable characters.

ike peers set localid <AggressiveModeID> <PeerName>

Sets the local ID. This must match the peer ID on the other end.

ike peers set localidtype <IPADDR | DOMAINNAME | EMAIL> <PeerName>

Sets the type of the local ID (IP address, domain name, or e-mail address). This must match the peer ID
type on the other end.

ike peers set peerid <AggressiveModeID> <PeerName>

Sets the peer ID. This must match the local ID on the other end.

ike peers set peeridtype <IPADDR | DOMAINNAME | EMAIL> <PeerName>

Sets the type of the peer ID (IP address, domain name, or e-mail address).This must match the local ID
type on the other end.

IKE Proposal Commands

The IKE proposal commands define the proposals exchanged during the Phase 1 SA.

ike proposals add <ProposalName> Defines the name of a new IKE proposal.

ike proposals delete <ProposalName> Deletes an existing IKE proposal.

ike proposals list Lists the IKE proposals.

The following commands specify the contents of the proposals exchanged.

ike proposals set session_auth <PRESHARE> <ProposalName>

Proposes the session authentication; preshared key is currently the only option.

ike proposals set encryption <DES | 3DES> <ProposalName>

Proposes the encryption method used, as follows:

DES Encryption using a 56-bit key.

3DES Encryption using three 56-bit keys, thus, producing 168-bit encryption.

ike proposals set message_auth <NONE | MD5 | SHA1> <ProposalName>

Proposes the message authentication performed. It can propose no message authentication or

authentication using the hash algorithm Message Digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm-1 (SHA1).

140 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 ike proposals set dh_group <NONE | 1 | 2 > <ProposalName>

Proposes the Diffie-Hellman (DH) key generation group used (no group or group 1 or 2).

ike proposals set lifetime <seconds> <ProposalName>

Proposes the length of time (in seconds) before the Phase 1 SA expires; the recommended value is 86400
(24 hours). When the time limit expires, IKE renegotiates the connection.

IKE IPSec Proposal Commands

The IKE IPSec proposal commands define the proposals exchanged to set up an IPSec SA, that is, an SA for the
user data transfer.

ike ipsec proposals add <ProposalName> Defines the name of a new IKE IPSec proposal.

ike ipsec proposals delete <ProposalName> Deletes an existing IKE IPSec proposal.

ike ipsec proposals list Lists the IKE IPSec proposals.

The followings proposals set commands specify the contents of the proposals exchanged.

Note: The next three commands (set espenc, set espauth, and set ahauth) determine the encapsulation
method (AH or ESP) used and the authentication and/or encryption requested by the proposal.

You cannot request both AH and ESP encapsulation in the same proposal. (It is possible for a connection
to use two proposals, one that requests AH and the other that requests ESP.)

In any one proposal, you can request any one of the following:

¥ AH authentication ¥ ESP encryption ¥ ESP authentication ¥ ESP encryption and authentication

ike ipsec proposals set espenc <DES | 3DES | NULL | NONE> <ProposalName>

Determines whether ESP encryption is requested and, if it is requested, the encryption method used.

DES Use ESP encapsulation and 56-bit encryption

3DES Use ESP encapsulation and 168-bit encryption (if 3DES is enabled in the router; see Software
Option Keys, page 114.)

NULL No encryption, but use ESP encapsulation. Headers are inserted as though the data was
encrypted. This allows veriÞcation of the source, but sends the data in the clear, increasing
throughput.
NONE No encryption and no ESP encapsulation. (If you select this option, the encapsulation method
must be requested by a set espauth or set ahauth command.)

ike ipsec proposals set espauth <MD5 | SHA1 | NONE> <ProposalName>

Determines whether ESP message authentication is requested and, if it is requested, the hash algorithm
used.

MD5 Use ESP encapsulation and authenticate using hash algorithm Message Digest 5.
SHA1 Use ESP encapsulation and authenticate using hash algorithm Secure Hash Algorithm-1.

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 141

 NONE No ESP encapsulation and no ESP message authentication. (If you select this option, the
encapsulation method must be requested by a set espenc or set ahauth command.)

ike ipsec proposals set ahauth <MD5 | SHA1 | NONE> <ProposalName>

Determines whether AH message authentication is requested and, if it is requested, the hash algorithm
used.
Note: The proposal cannot request both AH encapsulation and ESP encapsulation.

MD5 Use AH encapsulation and authenticate using hash algorithm Message Digest 5.
SHA1 Use AH encapsulation and authenticate using hash algorithm Secure Hash Algorithm-1.

NONE No AH encapsulation and no AH message authentication. (If you select this option, the encap-
sulation method must be requested by a set espenc or set espauth command.)

ike ipsec proposals set ipcomp <NONE | LZS> <ProposalName>

Proposes either no compression or LZS compression.

ike ipsec proposals set lifetime <seconds> <ProposalName>

Proposes the length of time (in seconds) before the IPSec SA expires; the recommended value is 86400
(24 hours). When the time limit expires, IKE renegotiates the connection.

ike ipsec proposals set lifedata <kbytes> <ProposalName>

Proposes the maximum number of kilobytes for the IPSec SA; 0 means unlimited. After the maximum
data is transferred, IKE renegotiates the connection. By limiting the amount of data that can be
transferred, you reduce the likelihood of the key being broken.

IKE IPSec Policy Commands

The IKE IPSec policy commands specify the filtering parameters for the IPSec SA.

ike ipsec policies add <PolicyName> Defines the name of a new IPsec policy.

ike ipsec policies delete <PolicyName> Deletes an existing IPSec policy.

ike ipsec policies list Lists the IPSec policies.

ike ipsec policies enable <PolicyName> Indicates that the specification of this IPSec policy is complete and
enables use of the policy.

ike ipsec policies disable <PolicyName> Disables an IPSec policy.

The following commands define the filtering parameters for the policy.

ike ipsec policies set peer <PeerName> <PolicyName>

Specifies an IKE peer that may be used for the connection. (The peer must have been defined by IKE
peer commands.)

142 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 ike ipsec policies set mode <TUNNEL | TRANSPORT> <PolicyName>

Specifies the encapsulation mode (tunnel or transport) that may be used for the connection. The default is
tunnel mode.

ike ipsec policies set proposal <ProposalName> <PolicyName>

Specifies an IKE IPSec proposal that may be used for the connection. (It must have been defined by IKE
IPSec proposal commands.) The policy may allow more than one value for the proposal parameter. For
example, two set proposal commands could specify two proposals, either of which could be used by the
connection.

ike ipsec policies set pfs <none | 1 | 2 > <PolicyName>

Sets the Perfect Forward Secrecy negotiation and specifies the Diffie-Hellman group used for each rekey
(none or group 1 or 2). Perfect Forward Secrecy increases the security of the key exchange; compromise
of a single key permits access to only the data protected by that particular key. However, the additional
encryption slows the IKE process so it is not always desirable.

ike ipsec policies set source <IPaddress> <IPmask> <PolicyName>

Requires that the data come from the specified source IP address and mask.

ike ipsec policies set dest <IPaddress> <IPmask> <PolicyName>

Requires that the data be intended for the specified destination IP address and mask.

ike ipsec policies set translate on | off <PolicyName>

Determines whether the router applies NAT (network address translation) before the packets are
encrypted by IPSec. If translate is set to on, the packets are sent using the host routerÕs public IP
address. The remote must have IP address translation enabled (see NAT on page 91). The address that
NAT translates to should be the source or destination address for the policy (use the set source or set
dest commands).

ike ipsec policies set protocol <ProtocolNumber | TCP | UDP | *> <PolicyName>

Requires a specific protocol that must be used or allows any protocol (*).

ike ipsec policies set sourceport <PortNumber | TELNET | HTTP | SMTP | TFTP | *> <PolicyName>

Requires a specific source port for the data or allows any source port (*) (Because port numbers are TCP
and UDP specific, a port filter is effective only when the protocol filter is TCP or UDP.)

ike ipsec policies set destport <PortNumber | TELNET | HTTP | SMTP | TFTP | *> <PolicyName>

Requires a specific destination port for the data or allows any destination port (*). (Because port numbers
are TCP and UDP specific, a port filter is effective only when the protocol filter is TCP or UDP.)

ike ipsec policies set interface <interface> <PolicyName>

Requires a specific interface that must be used or allows all interfaces (all). The policy is only used when
the specified interface is connected. The specified interface must be the interface to the IKE peer.

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 143

IKE Configuration Examples
This section shows two simple IKE configurations. The installation CD also contains sample configuration files.
These files can be edited for your installation and copied to the router using TFTP or the Windows Quick Start
application. For more information on TFTP use, see Batch File Command Execution, page 166.

The first example in this section shows an IKE configuration that uses main mode for a secure connection
between two routers with fixed IP addresses. The second example shows how the first configuration must change
when one of the routers no longer has a fixed IP address thus, requiring aggressive mode.

Main Mode Example

The following example lists two setup files that configure two routers for an IKE main mode connection. The two
routers are referred to as the home office router and the branch office router.

192.168.16.X 192.168.19.X
192.168.17.200 192.168.18.201
Home Branch
Office Public Network Office
Home Office Branch Office
Private Private
Router Router
Network Network

The configuration sets up a secure connection between the two routers across a public network, thus, the routers
are identified by their public IP addresses on the ike peers commands. The packets that are transmitted through
this secure connection are from devices in the home office and branch office networks. These networks use
private addresses, and thus the packets contain private IP addresses. The ike ipsec policies commands specify
these private source and destination addresses.

This is the file for the home office router:

# Home office example using IKE

# Home router private network addresses are 192.168.16.X
# Home router public address is 192.168.17.200
# Branch router private network addresses are 192.168.19.X
# Branch router public address is 192.168.18.201

# Describe the branch office peer

# IKE main mode is used because the branch office has a fixed IP address
# (192.168.18.201). The shared secret is ýThisIsASecret12345;)ý
ike peers add branch_peer
ike peers set mode main branch_peer
ike peers set address 192.168.18.201 branch_peer
ike peers set secret ThisIsASecret12345;) branch_peer

# Describe the branch office IKE phase 1 connection

# DES encryption

144 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

# MD5 authentication
# Diffie-Hellman group 2 key exchange
# 24-hour timeout
# Unlimited data
ike proposals add branch_proposal
ike proposals set encryption des branch_proposal
ike proposals set message_auth md5 branch_proposal
ike proposals set dh_group 2 branch_proposal
ike proposals set lifetime 86400 branch_proposal

# Describe the desired IPSec connection

# Triple-DES encryption
# SHA1 authentication
# 30-minute timeout
# Unlimited data
ike ipsec proposals add branch_ipsec_prop
ike ipsec proposals set espenc 3des branch_ipsec_prop
ike ipsec proposals set espauth sha1 branch_ipsec_prop
ike ipsec proposals set lifetime 1800 branch_ipsec_prop
ike ipsec proposals set lifedata 0 branch_ipsec_prop

# Describe the packets to be encrypted

# All packets from network 192.168.19.0/24 to network 192.168.16.0/24
ike ipsec policies add branch_policy
ike ipsec policies set source 192.168.16.0 255.255.255.0 branch_policy
ike ipsec policies set dest 192.168.19.0 255.255.255.0 branch_policy
ike ipsec policies set peer branch_peer branch_policy
ike ipsec policies set proposal branch_ipsec_prop branch_policy

# Enable the IKE connection

ike ipsec policies enable branch_policy

# Save the setup and reboot

save
reboot

This is the file for the branch office router:

# Branch office example using IKE

# Home router private network addresses are 192.168.16.X
# Home router public address is 192.168.17.200
# Branch router private network addresses are 192.168.19.X
# Branch router public address is 192.168.18.201

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 145

# Describe the home office peer
# IKE main mode is used because the home office has a fixed IP address
# (192.168.17.200). The shared secret is ýThisIsASecret12345;)ý
ike peers add home_peer
ike peers set mode main home_peer
ike peers set address 192.168.17.200 home_peer
ike peers set secret ThisIsASecret12345;) home_peer

# Describe the home office IKE phase 1 connection

# DES encryption
# MD5 authentication
# Diffie-Hellman group 2 key exchange
# 24-hour timeout
# Unlimited data
ike proposals add home_proposal
ike proposals set encryption des home_proposal
ike proposals set message_auth md5 home_proposal
ike proposals set dh_group 2 home_proposal
ike proposals set lifetime 86400 home_proposal

# Describe the desired IPSec connection

# Triple-DES encryption
# SHA1 authentication
# 30-minute timeout
# Unlimited data
ike ipsec proposals add home_ipsec_prop
ike ipsec proposals set espenc 3des home_ipsec_prop
ike ipsec proposals set espauth sha1 home_ipsec_prop
ike ipsec proposals set lifetime 1800 home_ipsec_prop
ike ipsec proposals set lifedata 0 home_ipsec_prop

# Describe the packets to be encrypted

# All packets from network 192.168.16.0/24 to network 192.168.19.0/24
ike ipsec policies add home_policy
ike ipsec policies set source 192.168.19.0 255.255.255.0 home_policy
ike ipsec policies set dest 192.168.16.0 255.255.255.0 home_policy
ike ipsec policies set peer home_peer home_policy
ike ipsec policies set proposal home_ipsec_prop home_policy

# Enable the IKE connection

ike ipsec policies enable home_policy

# Save the setup and reboot

146 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

save
reboot

Aggressive Mode Example

This example supposes, like the preceding main mode example, that a secure connection is needed between a
home office router and a branch office router. However, now the DSL connection for the branch office router does
not provide a fixed IP address for the branch office router. Thus, an aggressive mode IKE configuration is
required.

192.168.16.X 192.168.19.X
(No fixed IP address)
192.168.17.200 Domain: branchoffice.big.com
Home Branch
Office Public Network Office
Home Office Branch Office
Private Private
Router Router
Network Network

To change the main mode configuration to an aggressive mode configuration, you only need to change the ike
peers commands. All the other IKE commands remain the same. Change the mode to aggressive and change the
address of the router that has no fixed address to 0.0.0.0, and specify either its e-mail address or domain name.

Note: Remember to save and reboot each router after entering the configuration changes.

Change the ike peers commands in the home office router configuration to the following:

#Describe the branch office peer

#IKE aggressive mode is required because the branch office does not have
#a fixed IP address. The shared secret is ÒThisIsASecret12345;)Ó
ike peers add branch_peer
ike peers set mode aggressive branch_peer
ike peers set address 0.0.0.0 branch_peer
ike peers set secret ThisIsASecret12345;) branch_peer
ike peers set peeridtype domainname branch_peer
ike peers set peerid branchoffice.big.com branch_peer
ike peers set localidtype ipaddr branch_peer
ike peers set localid 192.168.17.200 branch_peer

Change the ike peers commands in the branch office router configuration to the following:

#Describe the home office peer

#IKE aggressive mode is required because the branch office does not have
#a fixed IP address. The shared secret is ÒThisIsASecret12345;)Ó
ike peers add home_peer
ike peers set mode aggressive home_peer
ike peers set address 192.168.17.200 home_peer
ike peers set secret ThisIsASecret12345;) home_peer
ike peers set peeridtype ipaddr home_peer
ike peers set peerid 192.168.17.200 home_peer

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 147

ike peers set localidtype domainname home_peer
ike peers set localid branchoffice.big.com home_peer

IPSec Commands
The following commands allow you to define an IPSec connection without IKE.

Note: If you define a tunnel using IPSec commands, the keys will remain static. This could pose a security risk
and is not recommended. Use of IKE for key management is recommended.

ipsec flush Clears all IPSec definitions.

ipsec add <SAname> Defines an SA name.

ipsec del <SAname> Deletes an existing SA.

ipsec list [<SAname>] Lists one or all SA entries.

ipsec enable <SAname> Enables a defined SA entry.

ipsec disable <SAname> Disables a defined SA entry.

The following commands define parameters for the specified Security Association (SA).

ipsec set mode <TUNNEL | TRANSPORT> <SAname>

Requests the encapsulation mode (tunnel or transport) for the SA. The default is tunnel mode.

ipsec set direction <INBOUND | OUTBOUND> <SAname>

Defines the direction of the SA.

ipsec set gateway <IPaddress> <SAname>

Defines the IP address of the gateway.

ipsec set encryption <NULL | DES-CBC | 3DES> <SAname>

Selects no encryption, DES (56-bit) encryption or 3DES (168-bit) encryption.

ipsec set authentication <SHA1 | MD5> <SAname>

Selects authentication using either SHA-1 (Secure Hashing Algorithm 1) or MD5 (Message Digest 5)

ipsec set enckey <key> <SAname>

Specifies the encryption key (in hexadecimal, 64 bits for DES or 192 bits for 3DES).

ipsec set authkey <key> <SAname>

Specifies the authentication key (hexadecimal).

ipsec set ident <ident> <SAname>

148 Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options

 Specifies the identifier (SPID) for the IPSec tunnel. It must match the SPID at the other end of the tunnel,
that is, the tx SPID on this end must match the rx SPID on the other end.

ipsec set service <ESP | AH | BOTH> <SAname>

Selects the authentication and/or encryption services used: AH authentication, ESP encryption, or both
ESP encryption and ESP authentication (encryption applied first and then authentication).

ipsec set compression <NONE | LZS> <SAname>

Selects either LZS compression or no compression.

Chapter 5. Configuring Software Options 149

Chapter 6. Managing the Router

This chapter describes facilities for managing, monitoring, and securing the router. The options discussed include:

¥ SNMP, Syslog, TFTP, Telnet, and BootP support

¥ Booting software

¥ Upgrading the router with new releases of software

¥ Backing up and restoring configuration files

¥ FLASH memory recovery

¥ Password recovery

¥ Script execution

SNMP Support

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), a member of the TCP/IP protocol suite, was designed to provide
network management interoperability among different vendorsÕ management applications and equipment. SNMP
provides for the exchange of messages between a management client and a management agent. The messages
contain requests to get or set variables that exist in network nodes, thus allowing a management client to obtain
statistics, set configuration parameters and monitor events. These variables (or objects) are defined in
Management Information Bases (MIBs), some of which are general or standard SNMP-defined bases. Other
bases, such as Enterprise Specific MIBs are defined by different vendors for specific hardware.

The router provides SNMP agent support and support for standard as well as Enterprise Specific MIBs. SNMP is
also used internally for configuration of the router. The active SNMP agent within the router accepts SNMP
requests for status, statistics, and configuration updates. Communication with the SNMP agent occurs over the
LAN or WAN connection.

The supported MIBs and a description of their contents are listed in the following table:

Internet-standard MIB contains only essential elements such as system,

MIB II
interface, addressing, protocol (e.g., IP) and SNMP objects

Bridge MIB State/statistics (including spanning tree states) within bridging system

Ethernet MIB State/statistics of Ethernet port (e.g., collisions)

IP Forwarding MIB State of routing tables (updates MIB II)

PPP MIB For LCP State/statistics for each PPP link

Enterprise MIB for conÞguration Router-speciÞc objects for conÞguration purposes

Any management application using SNMP over UDP/IP has access to the local SNMP agent. SNMP network
management tools vary but often have features to display network maps of SNMP nodes, poll nodes at intervals,

150 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

trigger alarms on thresholds, graph or list node statistic counters, view and edit individual MIB variables, and
print reports.

An example of useful information that can be obtained from a remote SNMP client would be the current status of
the routerÕs WAN link and Ethernet interfaces, including protocol (PPP, CSMA-CD), line speed, maximum frame
(transmission unit) size, physical address, operating status, or packet traffic rates.

Telnet Remote Access

The router supports Telnet access. Telnet allows you to log in to the router as if you are directly connected
through the console port. You can issue commands, using the command line interface, to configure the router and
perform status monitoring from any remote location.

To access the router using Telnet, use one of the available TCP/IP packages containing the Telnet application.
Issue the appropriate command syntax and assign the IP address of the router. You are then directly connected to
the router and can issue commands. (For an example, see Telnet Session for Remote Access, on page 14.) To end
the Telnet session, exit the application by entering logoff or another appropriate command.

By default, a system security timer logs out a Telnet session after 10 minutes of inactivity. To change the timer
period, use the system securitytimer command, page 226.

To disable and re-enable Telnet access, use the command system telnetport, page 227. For more information on
controlling Telnet access to the router, see page 101.

Client TFTP Facility

A client Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) facility is built into the router that is capable of reading from and
writing to the network. A TFTP server must be properly configured to communicate with the router for file
transfers to be successful. The client TFTP facility can be used to boot software from a TFTP server, perform
software upgrades and copy configuration files to a TFTP server. A TFTP server is integrated into the WindowsÕ
Configuration Manager and can also be used as a stand-alone application.

TFTP Server

The TFTPD (Trivial File Transfer Protocol Daemon) program is installed on your PC as part of the DSL Tools
software. TFTPD waits for incoming TFTP requests from TFTP clients. It can put a file on your computerÕs hard
disk or get one from it.

Because there is no security built into TFTPD, it is important to specify a root directory where all accessible files
are located. When a file is requested, it must be at or below the level of this root directory on your directory tree or
the request is denied. If a TFTP client attempts to put a file on your PC, the file must already exist for writing.

The Options menu of the TFTPD program allows the user to configure additional parameters, such as the number
of retries and the time between retries. The root directory can also be specified from the Options menu.

The DOS command line usage for TFTPD is:

Chapter 6. Managing the Router 151

 TFTPD rootdirectory

The TFTPD operational parameters are kept in file ROUTER.INI in the form:

rootdir=rootdirectory
retries=maxtries
timeout=timeout
TFTPD is automatically called by BootP and Configuration Manager.

BootP Service

This section first discusses what BootP is and then describes the BootP service available from the router.

BootP Concepts
BootP refers to the Bootstrap Protocol. In general, BootP requests have these purposes:

¥ To obtain an IP address to use.

¥ To obtain a TFTP server address and file information to continue the booting up process.

For example, a diskless workstation could use a BootP request to get an IP address for itself, the TFTP server
address where it is to get the kernel it is to load and run, and the file name of that kernel.

A BootP server waits for incoming BootP broadcasts from BootP clients. The server looks up the MAC addresses
of the incoming BootP request in its database. If the MAC address is found, the server normally responds to the
requestor with an IP address. It may also respond with boot information, that is, the IP address of a TFTP server,
and the name of a file.

BootP Service by the DHCP Server

BootP is a subset of DHCP. The router has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server (as described
in detail on page 82). By default, the DHCP server ignores BootP requests. However, if desired, you can enable
the DHCP server in the router to process BootP requests. BootP processing can be enabled globally, on a per
subnetwork basis, or on a per client (IP address) basis. For more information, see Managing BootP, on page 87.

If the DHCP server in the router is disabled, it, of course, cannot process BootP requests even if BootP processing
is enabled. The DHCP server in the router disables itself if one of the following occurs:

¥ If another DHCP server is active on the network.

¥ If you enter the commands dhcp disable all and save.

¥ If the DHCP relay list contains one or more IP addresses.

152 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

Relaying BootP Requests
The DHCP relay list is an optional list of IP addresses of servers on the network. You create the list manually;
addresses are not automatically added or removed. You add addresses to the list using the command dhcp
addrelay (page 310) and remove addresses from the list using the command dhcp delrelay (page 313).

While the relay list contains at least one address, the DHCP server in the router is disabled, and the router
forwards all DHCP requests and BootP requests to all servers in the relay list. It forwards every reply received
from any of the servers in the relay list to the appropriate LAN.

If you remove all addresses from the DHCP relay list, the DHCP server is re-enabled and resumes processing
DHCP requests and also BootP requests if BootP processing is enabled.

Syslog Client

The router can act as a Syslog client, automatically sending system event messages to one or more Unix Syslog
servers. (For example, if you request an IP filter watch, the messages are sent to the Syslog servers; see ETH IP
FILTER, on page 237.) Messages generated by the router and sent to a Syslog server are sent to facility local0
with priority notice.

To send messages to Syslog servers, the router must know:

¥ The Syslog port number, and

¥ The IP address(es) of the Syslog servers.

To disable, re-enable, or redefine the Syslog port, use the command system syslogPort (page 227).

The router can learn the IP addresses of Syslog servers in two ways:

¥ Via DHCP. The router can, under certain circumstances, send out a DHCP message and learn the IP
address(es) of Syslog servers. For more information, see DHCP Client Requests, on page 82.

¥ By explicit configuration. To configure the IP address of a Syslog server, use the command system
addSyslogServer (page 211).
You can limit the Syslog server addresses that the router learns through DHCP. To do so, set a filter for valid
Syslog server addresses using the command system addSyslogFilter (page 210).

Chapter 6. Managing the Router 153

Boot Code Maintenance Options

The router provides a number of maintenance options for booting router software.

¥ You can boot from the routerÕs FLASH memory, the most common option.

¥ Or, you can boot across the LAN network from a TFTP server, perhaps to test a new level of router software
before downloading it to FLASH memory.

¥ You can also boot through a gateway to a WAN. The router allows you to set permanent network boot
parameters used during network booting, and it enables you to temporarily override those parameters.

¥ Finally, the router lets you define the order in which the router boot procedures are performed. You can make
changes to the boot procedures and specify network boot parameters by entering manual boot mode.

This section provides Boot Mode information for models with configuration switches.

Note: For routers with a reset button, see Recovering Kernels for Routers with a Reset Button, on page 164.

Manual Boot Menu

This information applies to most routers with configuration (DIP) switches.

When the router is shipped, it is set for automatic boot from FLASH memory. If you wish to change the boot
options to allow for network booting, to change the order of boot procedures, or to perform a manual boot, you
must enter manual boot mode. Automatic and manual boot are controlled by the configuration switches on the
back panel of the router. The Options menu will be displayed if the routerÕs kernel is missing.

To access Manual Boot Mode

1. Set switch 6 down for Manual Boot mode.

2. Reboot the router by issuing the reboot command or by powering up the router.

The router then displays this menu of options:

1. Retry start-up
2. Boot from Flash memory
3. Boot from network
4. Boot from specific file
5. Configure boot system
6. Set date and time
7. Set console baud rate
8. Start extended diagnostics

To return to Automatic Boot Mode:

1. To return to automatic boot mode, set switch 6 up.

2. Reboot by selecting options 1, 2, 3, or 4. If you reboot with switch 6 in the up position, the router boots
its software automatically in the order and manner that you have specified.

154 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

Option 1: Retry Start-Up

If you are in Manual Boot mode, you can reboot the router in the boot procedure order by selecting option 1,
ÒRetry start-upÓ. The boot procedure order is either the one you have specified or the default order. The default
order is to boot from FLASH memory and then from the network (if defined). If you wish to boot from the
network and/or alter the boot procedure order, refer to Option 3: Boot from Network, on page 155.

Option 2: Boot from FLASH Memory

To perform a manual boot from FLASH memory, select option 2 from the main boot procedure menu. The
router then attempts to boot from FLASH memory. If the boot is unsuccessful, the router returns to manual
boot mode. (When you first receive the router, it defaults to booting from FLASH during power-up or
automatic reboot.)

Option 3: Boot from Network

Before you can boot from the network, you must first define permanent network boot parameters using option
5. You can then select option 3 from the main boot procedure menu to perform a manual boot from the
network. The router attempts to boot from the network using the permanent network boot parameters you
have specified.

If you have not defined network boot parameters, the router attempts to locate a BOOTP or RARP server on
the network.

BOOTP can be used to supply an IP address, a TFTP Server IP address, and a filename.

RARP is used to obtain an IP address, if it knows the MAC address. The router assumes that the RARP server
is also capable of performing the duties of a TFTP server and it will request the filename KERNEL.F2K (or
the filename assigned when permanent network boot parameters are set.)

If a BOOTP or RARP server exists and is properly configured with the routerÕs MAC address, the router
boots from the network. If the boot is unsuccessful, the router returns to manual boot mode.

Option 4: Boot from Specific File

You can temporarily override permanent network boot parameters when you perform a network boot.

1. When the router is in manual boot mode, select option 4, Boot from specific file, from the
main boot procedure menu.

2. Set the network boot parameters; the current default (permanent) parameters are as shown.

3. After you set the parameters, hit the return key and the router boots from the network using the
temporary boot parameters. If the boot is unsuccessful, the router returns to manual boot mode.

Once you have installed router software on a network TFTP server, you can have the router boot across the LAN.
Network booting requires three parameters:

¥ the boot IP address

¥ the TFTP boot server address

¥ the router software filename on the server

Chapter 6. Managing the Router 155

The boot IP address is the router LAN IP address used during the boot procedure. This address may differ from
the LAN IP address that the router is ultimately assigned. This address is different so that a system can be booted
from one subnetwork and then moved to its operational network, if necessary.

The boot IP address is in the form: zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz.

The TFTP boot server address is specified as: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the LAN IP address of the
boot server).

The filename must be in the format: yyyyyyyy.yyy (similar to the DOS filename format).

Note that once you have set a TFTP server address, it will be assigned to the router software TFTP facility. This
server address will then be used whenever a server address is not explicitly specified, including when the copy
command is in the form:

copy tftp:filename kernel.f2k

Option 5: Configure Boot System

To specify permanent network boot parameters:

1. Boot the router in manual boot mode.

2. Select option 5, Configure boot system, from the main boot procedure menu.

3. Select options 2, 3, and 4 to set the three boot parameters (boot IP address, TFTP boot server address,
and router software file name on the server). To reset any parameter, press enter following the prompt.

4. Set the boot procedure order. You can specify whether the router boots from FLASH memory first, from
a network TFTP server first, or never automatically reboots.

a. Select step A under Configure Boot System, option 5.

b. To boot from FLASH memory first, enter option 1;

To boot from the network first, enter option 2.
If you enter option 3, the router will always go into manual boot mode; i.e., you must select the boot
procedure to be performed.

5. Select option 4 to Boot through the IP gateway. In this procedure, the router on the local LAN can
boot from a boot server that is not connected directly. Instead, the path to the boot server can include
other networks (including the WAN, if adequate routers exist). The gateway must be located on the local
LAN and reachable by the local router.

Option 6: Set Time and Date

To set the current time and date, boot the router in manual boot mode, and select option 6 from the main boot
procedure menu. Set the new date in the format mm[/dd[/yy (or yyyy)]]. Set the new time in military format
hh[:mm[:ss]]). You are shown the current date and time.

Note: Your router is Y2K compliant. If you choose to enter only two digits to specify the year, values greater
than 93 translate to 19xx. Values less or equal to 93 translate to 20xx. The router has a one-hundred-year date
range (from 1994 to 2093).

If the date is set to zero (0/0/00), the real-time clock is disabled for long-term storage.

156 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

 When the router is configured by a PC, the GUI overwrites the time and date fields. The router time and date
values are copied from the PC time and date values.

Option 7: Set Console Baud Rate

Select option 7 to alter the baud rate that the router uses to communicate over the Console port with a
terminal-emulation program. You can override the default rate of 9600. Remember to set the identical baud
rate in your terminal emulation program.

Option 8: Start Extended Diagnostics

Option 8 in manual boot mode is for running extended diagnostics. Boot diagnostics are only available on
routers with the MC68EN360 processor.

You may want to run extended diagnostics if you suspect a hardware problem. If you select option 8 from the
main boot-procedure menu, you will see the following display:

[1] DRAM test

[2] Parity test
[3] POST Þrmware CRC test
[4] Real-Time Clock chip test
[5] Timers and Interrupts test
[6] Multi-port UART (internal loopback) test
[7] Multi-port HDLC (internal loopback) test
[8] SCC2 External Loopback test
[9] SCC3 External Loopback test
[a] SCC4 External Loopback test
[b] Ethernet Transceiver (internal loopback) test
[-] Deselect all tests
[+] Select all tests
[.] Run selected tests
[#] Enter debugger
[/] Exit extended diagnostics (reboot)

Enter the number of each test that you would like to run, or select all tests. Then enter Ò.Ó to begin diagnostic
testing. (All of the tests automatically run when you power up or reboot the router.) A debugging mode is
available for use primarily when you encounter a serious problem, in consultation with customer support
services.

Chapter 6. Managing the Router 157

Identifying Fatal Boot Failures

Fatal boot failures can be identified by the light patterns shown by the LEDs on the front panel of the router.

Note: Normal LED states are described in the Hardware Specifications section of the Quick Start Guide.

The TEST, LNK, WAN, and LANT LEDs indicate fatal errors according to the following patterns where:

0 Off
G Blinking green
FG Blinking fast
Y Blinking yellow
* On, off, or blinking

Pattern Failure

0-0-0-G CPM failure

0-0-G-0 Timer failure

0-0-G-G Bad FCS

0-G-0-0 DRAM failure

0-G-0-G Interrupt failure

0-G-G-0 SCC failure

Y-0-0-0 CPU step failure

Y-0-0-G Ethernet loop failure

FG-0-0-* Wait stuck in the boot menu;

kernel Þle could be missing
(green LED blinking very
rapidly)

G-0-0-* Green occasionally blinks off (at

10-second intervals). The router
is issuing BootP requests.

Any other combinations of the four LEDs flashing in a regular pattern indicates an internal error. Should this
occur, return the router to the factory for repair or replacement.

Note: Non-fatal errors are not displayed by the LEDs, but they do prompt the system to print explanatory
messages on the console.

158 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

Software Kernel Upgrades

You can upgrade the software kernel by downloading a new version from the LAN or from the WAN.

Booting and Upgrading from the LAN

You can download a new version of the router software kernel using a TFTP server that already exists on the
LAN. The following steps demonstrate how to boot the router software from the network and copy the image from
the network into the routerÕs FLASH memory. When it first connects to the router, the GUI backs up all the files
to a directory called Sxxxxx, where x is the routerÕs serial number.

Note: We strongly recommend that you use the Configuration ManagerÕs Upgrade/Backup tool to upgrade or
back up the kernel. The Configuration ManagerÕs tool is more convenient to use than the Command Line
Interface.

Upgrade Instructions

Read the following steps very carefully before you perform an upgrade:

1. Warning: Before performing this procedure, make sure that you can successfully boot from the network
using the manual boot procedure option 3 or 4. Refer to the section Option 3: Boot from Network, on
page 155.

2. Copy the router software file KERNEL.F2K (or KERNEL.FPL for an IDSL router) to a directory where
it can be accessed by a TFTP server. The TFTP server must be on the same LAN as the target router; i.e.,
there must not be a router or gateway between the target system and the TFTP server. If the TFTP sever
is not on the same network as the target router, enter the gateway in the boot menu as described in the
previous section.

3. Log into the Command Line Interface.

4. Enter the reboot command to synchronize the file system and reboot the router. Because the kernel is no
longer stored in FLASH memory, the router tries to boot from the network. If you have never set
permanent boot parameters, the router attempts to locate a BOOTP or RARP server. If the router
successfully reboots from the server, go to step 7.

5. Select option 4 to boot router software from the TFTP server using temporary network boot parameters.
You are prompted for:

¥ the routerÕs boot LAN IP address,

¥ the TFTP serverÕs IP address,

¥ the load address, and

¥ the filename of the routerÕs kernel saved on the server.

6. Note that the LAN IP address is the proper address to use during the network boot and this may differ
from the IP address ultimately assigned to the router. Enter the temporary network boot parameters (hit

Chapter 6. Managing the Router 159

 the return key for the load address). If all entered information is valid, the router boots from the
network. An example follows:

Enter selection: 4
Enter my IP address:
128.1.210.65
Enter server IP address:
128.1.210.70
Enter load address [80100]:
Enter Þle name: kernel.f2k

Alternatively, select option 5 to set permanent network boot parameters and then boot from the network
using option 3. You would use this option if you wish to boot from the network for a period of time
before copying the software to FLASH memory.

7. After the boot is complete, verify that the kernel is running successfully.

8. When you are satisfied that the new kernel is performing as expected, copy the kernel into FLASH
memory in the router by typing the two following commands:

copy [email protected]:sfilename kernel.f2k

sync
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the TFTP server IP address, SFILENAME is the server filename of the kernel,
and KERNEL.F2K is the name of the file loaded from FLASH memory by the boot procedure. If you do
not specify the server address, a permanent or more recent override TFTP server address will be used, if
you have previously defined one. Enter the sync command to commit the changes to FLASH memory.

Warning: After the kernel is copied, do not power down the router until you have issued either a sync or
reboot command to reboot the router. Otherwise the file will not be written to FLASH memory.

9. After successfully copying the kernel to the router, set Configuration switch 2 or 6 to the up position (if
you have set it down), and reboot the router from FLASH memory via the reboot command. If you have
altered the boot procedure order in any way, reset to boot from FLASH memory first. Verify the software
revision number by issuing the vers command.

The system is now ready to be re-configured, if necessary. The configuration files are unchanged by the
upgrade process.

Upgrading from the WAN Line

You can download a new version of the router software kernel by using a TFTP server over the WAN line. The
following steps show you how to copy the software across the WAN line into the routerÕs FLASH memory.

Warning: Before performing this procedure, make sure that you can successfully access the software across the
WAN line via a TFTP server.

1. Copy router software KERNEL.F2K to a directory where it can be accessed by a TFTP server.

2. Log in to the Command Line Interface.

3. Copy the kernel into FLASH memory in the router using the following commands:
copy [email protected]:sfilename kernel.f2k
sync

160 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

 where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the TFTP server IP address, sfilename is the server filename of the kernel, and
KERNEL.F2K is the name of the file. If you do not specify the server address, a permanent or more recent
override TFTP server address will be used, if you have previously defined one.

Warning: After the kernel is copied, do not power down the router until you have either issued a sync command
or rebooted the router. Otherwise the file is not written to FLASH memory.
4. After successfully copying the kernel to the router, reboot the router from FLASH memory via the reboot
command. If a problem occurs during the upgrading process, try the command again (do not reboot until you
have successfully copied the kernel). If you have altered the boot procedure order in any way, be sure to reset
the router system to boot from FLASH memory first. Verify the software revision number by issuing the vers
command.

The router system is now ready to be re-configured if necessary. The configuration files are unchanged by the
upgrade process.

Chapter 6. Managing the Router 161

Backup and Restore ConÞguration Files

To successfully save configuration files to the server, those files must already exist and be writeable by everyone.
This restriction is part of the TFTP protocol. Moreover, all the files accessed by the TFTP server must be under a
single root directory. Multiple sub-directories can exist below this root directory, but they must be created
manually at the server. Neither the sub-directories nor the files can be created remotely.

Note: Remember to start the TFTP server from the DSL Tools menu.

The copy command lets you upload configuration files to the TFTP server where the destination is in the form:

[email protected]:filename.ext

Backup Configuration Files (Recommended Procedure)

1. Create a directory under the TFTP root directory corresponding to the system name you want to back up.

2. Create files called SYSTEM.CNF, DHCP.DAT, and FILTER.DAT in this subdirectory. The files can be
empty or not, but should be writeable by everyone.

Note: SYSTEM.CNF, FILTER.DAT, and DHCP.DAT are three key files that should be backed up. To see
other files that you may also want to save, type the command dir.

3. To back up a copy of the configuration files, enter

copy system.cnf [email protected]:myname/system.cnf

copy filter.dat [email protected]:myname/filter.dat
copy dhcp.dat [email protected]:myname/dhcp.dat

where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the TFTP server and myname is the router name.

Restore Configuration Files

To restore the configuration files SYSTEM.CNF, FILTER.DAT, and DHCP.DAT, enter:

copy [email protected]:myname/system.cnf system.cnf

copy [email protected]:myname/filter.dat filter.dat
copy [email protected]:myname/dhcp.dat dhcp.dat
sync

162 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

FLASH Memory Recovery Procedures

Recovering Kernels for Routers with Configuration Switches

In the unlikely event that the FLASH file system should become corrupted, attempt to recover using these steps.
Perform the following procedures in the order listed:

1. Try to repair the file system by issuing the msfs command. While logged in, issue a sync command followed
by an msfs command. If the display shows that the file system is corrupted, verify that no other console (via
Telnet) is currently modifying the file system with the ps command. Then attempt to repair the file system
typing the following commands:

msfs fix
sync

2. If the file system is still corrupted (i.e., you cannot write a file), you will have to reformat the file system.
First, attempt to save your configuration files as explained in the section Backup and Restore Configuration
Files, on page 162. Then, while logged in, enter the following commands:
format disk
save
copy [email protected]:kernel.f2k kernel.f2k
sync
The above command sequence assumes that the software presently running from RAM is correctly configured
and is still functional. The save command re-creates all the configuration files (except the FILTER.DAT file,
which you may re-create manually by typing save filter). The copy command reinstalls the operational
software on the FLASH file system, and sync commits all this information to disk.

3. In the event that the software running from RAM is not sufficiently functional to perform those steps, you
will have to boot from the network using a TFTP server, as explained in the section Software Kernel
Upgrades, on page 159.

If you cannot issue the format command (as explained in the previous step), you will have to erase the
FLASH file system from the boot code.

a. Flip configuration switch 6 to the down position and reboot the router (by powering down and up again,
for example).
b. At the manual boot menu, select 5. ÒConfigure boot systemÓ, and enter the ÒmagicalÓ number 98. Then,
move switch 6 back to its up position.
c. Reboot from the network following the steps described in the Software Upgrade Procedure. You will
notice error messages indicating that the file system is not formatted. Then log in and enter:
format disk

d. Recreate the configuration files either by re-entering the information or by restoring them from a TFTP
server. Re-install the operational software by entering the command:
copy [email protected]:kernel.f2k kernel.f2k

This assumes that TCP/IP routing is enabled and that an IP address has been assigned to the Ethernet
interface.

Chapter 6. Managing the Router 163

Recovering Kernels for Routers with a Reset Button
The reset button (if your router has one) is recessed in an unlabeled hole on the back panel of the router (to the
right of the Ethernet hub connector). If your router has a reset button, you can use it to perform these functions:

¥ If the reset button is depressed during the power on sequence, the router attempts to download a kernel from a
BootP server as described in Recovery Steps Using BootP, on page 164. (The BootP server must be
configured to recognize the router.) The existing configuration file (SYSTEM.CNF) is written to file
SYSTEM.BAK (overwriting the existing SYSTEM.BAK file). The firmware creates a new SYSTEM.CNF
file that can be accessed using the default password admin.

Note: Use this function only if other recovery methods have failed and you need to start over with a new
kernel image.

¥ If the reset button is depressed after the TEST LED turns green and until after all the LEDs flash, it bypasses
the loading of the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) file that provides the logic that customizes the
router hardware. The actual file name is ASIC.AIC. This function is useful if a mismatch occurs between the
hardware, the kernel, and the FPGA file because it forces a error that allows you to continue and replace the
ASIC.AIC file.

¥ If the reset button is depressed while running the kernel, the router enters a ten-minute recovery period.
During this period, the router password is the router serial number and DHCP is temporarily changed to the
default subnet 192.168.254.0. (This reset function is described in Recovering Passwords and IP Addresses, on
page 165.)

Recovery Steps Using BootP

A router that fails to boot may be an indication that the kernel has been corrupted. To recover, you need a kernel
for your particular router model. If you installed the DSL Tools and successfully connected to the router, an
automatic backup process was started that saved a copy of the kernel and other files to the PC in a subdirectory
under DSL Tools called Sxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the serial number of the unit. The file needed for this recovery
is called KERNEL.F2K.

Before you proceed with the recovery steps described below, make sure that the router has a good Ethernet
connection to the PC. If a console cable is available, you may want to connect it and start a terminal emulator
session so you can see the routerÕs console messages. You can also check the LEDsÕ blinking patterns (on the
front panel of the router) to help you identify the state of the router.

1. Make sure that the PC path and directory information to a valid kernel are correct.

2. Start the Configuration Manager or Quick Start application (refer to your Quick Start Guide).

3. Select Tools and BootP.

4. In the BootP dialog box, enter the following information:

¥ The path to the kernel file

¥ The serial number of the router

¥ The IP address to be used for the boot

Note: This IP address needs to belong to the same subnet as your PC and not be used by another device. For a
simple configuration, the IP address 192.168.254.254 will work if your PC already received an IP address
from the router when it was still functioning.

164 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

5. In the BootP Setting dialog box, click OK. Configuration Manager writes the above settings to a file called
BOOTDBASE.TXT and calls the Bootp server.

6. Power off the router.

7. Insert a a small pen or pointed object into the small reset switch (unlabeled hole) on the back panel of the
router (to the right of the Ethernet hub connector). With the object still inserted in the reset switch, power up
the router. Wait until all the LED lights flash (about 10 seconds).

8. Once this is accomplished, the BootP server should receive a BootP request and start the TFTPD server. The
TFTPD server will send the kernel to the router.

9. Restart Configuration Manager and try to connect to the router. Using the following instructions, you will
attempt to write a new kernel to the flash system.

10. From the Configuration ManagerÕs Main Menu, select Tools and Upgrade/Backup.

11. Click Firmware and the Upgrade button.

12. Select a kernel file and click OK.

13. Wait until the file is copied, and click Yes to reboot the rooter.

Recovering Passwords and IP Addresses

Routers with Configuration Switches

Recover a password: Set switches 5 and 6 in the down position after the router has booted. With this step, the
system password is overridden, thus allowing a forgotten password to be re-entered.

Recover an IP address: Connect to the console terminal and type the eth list command to find out what the
routerÕs IP address is.

Routers with a Reset Button

The following step will assist you in recovering the routerÕs administrative password or IP address, should you
forget them.

Push the reset button and hold it for 3 seconds while the router is running. With this step, the following features
are enabled for a period of 10 minutes:

¥ The system password can be overridden by using the routerÕs serial number as the password.

¥ A DHCP client address is enabled or created, so that a connected PC can obtain an IP address from the router.

Chapter 6. Managing the Router 165

Batch File Command Execution

This feature is used to load batch files of configuration commands into the router. This allows the user to
customize and simplify installation of the router. A script file can contain commands, comments (lines introduced
by the # or ; characters), and blank lines.

There are two kinds of script files:

¥ A one-time script that is executed on startup (only once).

¥ A group of commands that can be executed at any time from the Command Line Interface with the execute
<filename> command.

One-time scripts are useful to execute the complete configuration process from a default (unconfigured) state.

The following steps describe how to proceed in order to create and execute a one-time script from the Quick Start
application.

¥ Create the script on your PC using Notepad or other text editor. The command syntax can be found in the
Command Line Reference manual or enter ? on the router command line (assuming you have access to the
Command Line with the console or with Telnet).

¥ Select the Tools | Execute Script menu item and choose the script file you just prepared. When you click
OK, the script file is loaded to the router (under the name AUTOEXEC.BAT) and the router is restarted, thus
executing the script.

Alternatively, you can manually transfer the script file from your PC to the router using the following method:

¥ Start the TFTP server on your PC and set the root directory where the script file is located.

¥ Use the following command to copy the script file to the router file system:
copy tftp@ <PC_IP_address>:<PC_file> <router_file>

¥ To process the commands in the script file, you can either reboot your router (if the script file was copied
under the name AUTOEXEC.BAT onto the router) or use the command execute <file>.

Note: If present, the file AUTOEXEC.BAT is renamed AUTOEXEC.OLD before it is executed, so that it is only
run once. If you clear the router configuration with the Reset Defaults button of the Upgrade/Backup tool or the
reboot default command, the AUTOEXEC.OLD is renamed back to AUTOEXEC.BAT and re-run after the boot
up, thus restoring your configuration.

You can include the commands rename <autoexec.old> <autoexec.bat> or reboot in a script file; there is no
limitation on the commands that you might define in your scripts. The rename command is useful if you need the
script to execute on every startup, whereas the reboot command is useful to apply changes and have them take
effect (almost) immediately.

Caution: If you create a one-time script file (copied to the router under the name AUTOEXEC.BAT), do not
include the commands rename <autoexec.old> < autoexec.bat> and reboot at the same time. This will result in
an endless loop of starting the router, executing the script, restarting the router, re-executing the script.

166 Chapter 6. Managing the Router

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

Software problems usually occur when the routerÕs software configuration contains incomplete or incorrect
information. This chapter discusses:

¥ Diagnostic tools that are available to help identify and solve problems that may occur with your router

¥ Symptoms of software configuration problems

¥ Actions for you to take

¥ System messages

Diagnostic Tools

This section describes three diagnostic tools available to you:

¥ The LEDs on the front panel of your router.

¥ The History Log the lists the routerÕs activity.

¥ The ping command that can verify IP connectivity.

Using LEDs

Most hardware problems can be diagnosed and solved by checking the LEDs on the front panel of your router.
The following table summarizes the normal LED sequence in the left column (five consecutive states) from
Power On to Ready State. The right column lists suggestions for problems reflected by an ÒabnormalÓ LED state
(no progression to the next state).

For the LED patterns that indicate fatal boot errors, see Identifying Fatal Boot Failures, on page 158.

Note that the normal LED progression involves:

PWR LED (power LED)

TEST LED (self-test indicator LED)
LINK LED (modem link)

If the Power (PWR) LED is off:

¥ Check that the power cord is firmly plugged into the back panel of the router and the other end into an active
AC wall or power-strip outlet.

¥ Check that the power switch is turned on.

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 167

 Normal LED State Problem
Sequence Length If the LED sequence stops at this stage:

State 1
Power ON A hardware problem has been detected.
5 sec
PWR - green Contact Technical Support.
TEST - amber
LINK - off

State 2
All lights flash 1 sec

State 3
PWR - green 1. Check that the DIP switches are all up.
5 sec
TEST - green 2. Check that the correct software was loaded.
LINK - off

State 4
1. Check your DSL cable.
PWR - green 5 to 10 sec 2. Check the physical connection from your router to the DSLAM (Central
TEST - green
OfÞce).
LINK - amber
3. Possible problem with DSLAM card.

State 5
PWR - green
Ready State
TEST - green
LINK - green

Once the router is in Ready State, the other LEDs may indicate transmitting and receiving activity as follows:

¥ The WAN LED indicates that the WAN is transmitting activity.

¥ The LANT LED indicates that the Ethernet LAN is transmitting activity.

¥ The LANR LED indicates that the Ethernet LAN is receiving activity.

History Log

The History Log utility is a troubleshooting tool which displays the routerÕs activity. It can be accessed from a
terminal emulation session (including Configuration Manager) or from Telnet.

To see message explanations, refer to the System Messages section, page 176.

Accessing History Log through Telnet

1. Click Connect and then Remote System.

2. Enter the routerÕs IP address.

3. Click Connect.

168 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

Accessing History Log through Configuration Manager

1. Select Tools and Terminal Window (the console cable is required).

2. Log in with your administration password into the router (e.g. ÒadminÓ).

3. Use the command system history to view the buffer contents.

Other Logging Commands

¥ If you wish to monitor your router activity at all times, use the command system log start to view a
continuous log, using Telnet. (This command will not work in a Terminal Window session; it only works
from Telnet.)

¥ The command system log status is used to find out if other users, including yourself, are using this
utility.

¥ To discontinue the log at the console, use the command system log stop.

When you exit Telnet, you automatically stop any logging programs running in that session.

Note: History Log is preserved across reboots, but not across power outages or power down.

Ping Command

You can verify IP connectivity to the router by running a ping command. You will probably find a ping utility
bundled with your TCP/IP stack. In Microsoft Windows, the command is called PING.EXE and can be found in
your Windows directory.

Note: Before using the ping command to troubleshoot, make sure that the PWR, TEST, and LINK lights are
green.

Instructions for Windows 95

1. Start a DOS window

a. Select Start from the Windows 95 taskbar.

b. Select Programs.

c. Select MS-DOS Prompt.

t 2. Issue the ping command

In the DOS window, type the command:

ping <IP address>

Example: ping 192.168.254.254

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 169

Interpretation and Troubleshooting

To isolate a problem with the TCP/IP protocol, perform the following three tests:

1. Try to ping the IP address of your PC. If you get a response, proceed directly with step 2. If you donÕt get a
response, check that:

¥ The network adapter card is installed.

¥ The TCP/IP protocol is installed.

¥ The TCP/IP protocol is bound to the network adapter.

2. Try to ping the IP address of your router. If you get a response, proceed directly to step 3. If you donÕt get a
response, the problem lies between your PC and router:

¥ Check the cables.

¥ Check the hub.

¥ Make sure that your PC and the local router are in the same IP subnetwork.

3. Try to ping the DNS server. Write down the results and call your Network Service Provider.

Investigating Hardware Installation Problems

When investigating a hardware installation problem, first check the LEDs on the front panel of the router. Many
common hardware problems can be easily diagnosed by the LED indicators. For more information, refer to this
chapterÕs section entitled Diagnostic Tools, Using LEDs, page 167.

If the terminal window display has a problem:

¥ Ensure your console is plugged in and turned on.

¥ Verify that you are on the right communications port (Com1, Com2).

¥ Check the configuration parameters for speed, parity, etc. Make sure the console is not in an XOFF state. Try
entering a Òctrl qÓ.

¥ Verify that the RS232 device attached to the console is configured as a DTE. If not, a crossover or null
modem adapter is required.

If the factory configuration has a problem:

¥ Compare the router configuration with your router order.

¥ Verify that the model number is correct (the number is displayed during the boot procedure). The model
number and serial number are also displayed on the main window of Configuration Manager.

Investigating Software ConÞguration Problems

This section suggests what to do if you cannot:

170 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

¥ connect to the router.

¥ log in.

¥ access the remote network.

¥ access the router via Telnet.

¥ download software.

Finally, if you have a VoDSL router, it suggests how to trouble-shoot your telephony services.

Problems Connecting to the Router

If you cannot connect your PC to the target router for configuration:

¥ For a LAN connection, verify that the routerÕs IP address matches the IP address previously stored into the
routerÕs configuration. You must have previously set the routerÕs Ethernet LAN IP address and subnet mask,
saved the Ethernet configuration changes, and rebooted the router for the new IP address to take effect.
¥ Check that your LAN cable is pinned correctly and each pin end is securely plugged in.
Note: If you are using a straight-through cable, the colors for pins 1, 2, 3, and 6 should match on both
connectors. If you are using a crossover cable, the colors for pins 1, 2, 3, and 6 on one connector should
match respectively 3, 6, 1, and 2 on the other connector.

¥ Make sure the PC and target router are on the same IP subnetwork or the target router is reachable through a
router on your LAN. They can, however, be on different networks if IP routing is off.

¥ Check Network TCP/IP properties under Windows 95 and the control panel of the TCP/IP driver installed
under Windows 3.1.

¥ Check if the LAN LED on the routerÕs front panel blinks when ÒpingedÓ.

¥ Check your Ethernet board IRQ settings: the PCÕs table may have become ÒconfusedÓ. If so, reboot your PC.

Problems with the Login Password

You have been prompted for the login password and received the following message: Login Password is invalid.

¥ Type the correct password and press enter. Remember that the password is case-sensitive. If the password is
admin, check that you are entering it in lowercase and that the Caps key is not active.

¥ If you have forgotten the password, you must reset the login password. Refer to Recovering Passwords and IP
Addresses, on page 165. If the router has configuration switches, perform the following procedure:

1. Move switches 5 and 6 down.

2. Type login <newpasswd>. Password checking is overridden.

3. Move switches 5 and 6 up.

4. Complete any configuration update that caused the prompt for login.

5. Change your login password to a new password.

6. Store the configuration and reboot the router.

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 171

Note: If you do not reset switches 5 and 6 to the up position and then reboot, the router is placed in maintenance
mode. Set switches 5 and 6 up and turn the power off and then on again.

Problems Accessing the Remote Network

Bridging

¥ Make sure to reboot if you have made any bridging destination or control changes.

¥ All IP addresses must be in the same IP subnetwork (IP is being bridged).

¥ Check that a bridging default destination has been configured and is enabled.

¥ Be sure to reboot if the bridging destination or status has been changed.

¥ Check that bridging is enabled locally (use the remote listBridge command, page 272).

¥ Verify that bridging is enabled by the remote router (use the remote list command, page 271).

¥ Verify that the authentication passwords are correct.

¥ Reboot your PC if you have Windows for WorkGroups.

¥ In Windows 95, do not forget to declare shared disk directories. Check the sharing properties on your C:
drive.

¥ In the Terminal Window, check that calls are answered from the remote router.

¥ Check also for any PAP/CHAP errors for the remote router.

TCP/IP Routing

¥ Check that Ethernet LAN TCP/IP Routing has been enabled (eth list command, page 248).

¥ The IP addresses of the local and remote networks belong to different IP subnetworks.

¥ Make sure that there is an existing route to the remote network.

¥ Make sure that there is a route back from the remote network.
¥ There must be a source WAN IP address defined if you are using NAT.

¥ Check that, if required, the source and remote WAN IP addresses are on the same subnetwork

¥ Reboot if you have made any IP address or control or protocol option changes.

¥ Check that the IP address of the station/network connected to the LAN beyond the remote router is
correct, as well as the associated subnet mask.

¥ If the remote router WAN IP address and subnet mask are required, check that they have been specified
correctly.

¥ Check that a default route has been specified, if needed.

¥ Be sure to reboot if IP addresses or control or protocol option changes have been made.

¥ Check that you are using an Ethernet cable.

¥ Check that IP routing is enabled at both ends.

172 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

 ¥ The IP address must be within the valid range for the subnet.

¥ Verify that the IP and gateway addresses are correct on the PC.

¥ Windows 95 may remember MAC addresses: if you have changed MAC addresses, reboot the router and
the PC.

¥ In Windows 3.1., check that the TCP driver is installed correctly. Ping (ping command) your PCÕs IP
address from the PC. Successful ÒpingingÓ results let you know that the TCP driver is working properly.

¥ If you have changed an IP address to map to a different MAC device, and ping or IP fails, reboot your
PC.

¥ Use the iproutes command (page 191) to verify which routerÕs name is the default gateway (this cannot
be 0.0.0.0).

IPX Routing

¥ Check that IPX routing has been enabled and that the remote end is enabled for IPX routing.
¥ Validate that the IPX WAN network number matches the remote routerÕs WAN network number.
¥ Check that IPX SAPs correctly identify the servers and applications on the remote network and have
valid network numbers, node numbers, etc.

¥ Check that every SAP has a router to its internal network.

¥ Check that the IPX routes (network numbers, hops, and ticks) seeded into the routing table for network
segments and servers beyond the remote router are correct.

¥ Validate that the IPX WAN network number matches the remote routerÕs WAN network number.

¥ Check that the IPX routes (network numbers, hops, and ticks) seeded into the routing table for network
segments and servers beyond the remote router are correct.

¥ Check that IPX SAPs correctly identify the servers and applications on the remote network and have
valid network numbers, node numbers, etc.

¥ Be sure to reboot if IPX addresses, routes, SAPs or control has been changed.

¥ If the router fails to negotiate IPX:

¥ Make sure that at least one WAN number is not equal to zero at one end of the link.

¥ The server must have an IPX route to the remote LAN.

¥ The Novell server needs to have burst mode turned on.

¥ Large Internet packets have to be turned on.

¥ For Novell 3.12 and later:

¥ Client needs VLM.EXE, net.cfg: large Internet packets=ON, Pburst=5

¥ If you canÕt see the server SAPs:

¥ Check the frame types using the eth list command (page 248) and ensure that they are the same on
both routers.

¥ Check that the Ethernet cable is correctly plugged in.

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 173

 ¥ Make sure that the Novell server is up.

Incorrect VPI/VCI (ATM Routers)

If you are given an incorrect VCI/VPI number or none at all to use for the remote, and you need to determine
what the possible value might be, use the atom findpvc command (see ATM Debug Commands, on page
181).

Problems Accessing the Router via Telnet

¥ Ensure that the router has a valid IP address.

¥ Check that the Ethernet cable is plugged in.

Problems Downloading Software

¥ Ensure that a TFTP server is properly set up to locate the router software.

¥ Verify that the router is loading from the network and not from FLASH memory.

Trouble-Shooting Telephony Services

After the router WAN link activates (the LINK LED is green), you should get a dial tone. The dial tone should be
received even if you have not yet configured your IP and bridge network settings.

If you do not get a dial tone, check the following:

¥ Does the router have power?

¥ Is the local phone cord plugged in?
¥ Is the voice PVC set correctly in the router? (See the following debug commands.)
¥ Is the WAN link down? (The LINK LED should be solid green.)
¥ Is the DSLAM provisioned for the second PVC?
¥ Is the voice gateway connected and provisioned?
¥ Is the ATM network down between the DSLAM and the voice gateway?

If you hear clicking during heavy data downloads, check that the DSLAM supports quality of service (QoS) and
that the ATM switch has the voice PVC provisioned for vRT and the data at a lower priority.

The Port Monitor GUI program can show you the voice PVC and the last event message. The following debug
commands may also be helpful.

ifs Shows whether the data and voice PVCÕs are configured and percent loading.

For ATM routers:

atom voice Displays the voice PVC.

atom voice <x*y> Changes the voice PVC to the specified x*y.

For Frame Relay routers:

frame voice Displays the voice DLCI.

174 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

 frame voice <x> Changes the voice DLCI to the specified number x.

frame stats Shows LMI statistics.

For a frame stats example, see page 204.

If the voice gateway is a Jetstream gateway, the following commands are available:

voice l2stats Shows AAL2 statistics for control messages.

voice l2clear Clears the AAL2 statistics to 0.

The following commands allow you to trace all signaling cells sent and received and all encoding changes for
voice ports.

voice lestrace 1 Enables trace messages to the console.

voice lestrace 0 Disables trace messages to the console.

voice lestrace Displays trace messages.

To see the CRC and line errors for SDSL, enter:

sdsl stats

For an sdsl stats example, see page 307.

The dsp debug commands are shown in Voice Router Debug Commands, on page 183.

Adjusting the Jitter Buffer

The jitter buffer shapes data to overcome the problem of latency, that is, the time delay between packets of voice
data that can cause gaps in or loss of traffic in a voice call. A command is available that allows you to adjust the
size of the jitter buffer. The command is as follows:

dsp jitter [<milliseconds>]

milliseconds Length of the jitter buffer in milliseconds (0 - 60).

To display the current jitter buffer, enter the dsp jitter command without its parameter. For example:

# dsp jitter
Jitter Buffer: 15 ms
usage: dsp jitter <milliseconds 0-60>

Use this command if you get what sounds like voice playout underruns under full network loading. Increase the
buffer size until the problem is corrected. However, do not set the buffer unnecessarily large because that would
introduce unnecessary latency.

The jitter buffer should be set to the best estimate of the effective worst-case jitter in the voice-packet arrival time
from the voice gateway. Be aware of the granularity of the setting: for G.711 voice compression, only integer
multiples of 5.5 ms can be realized; for G.726, only integer multiples of 11 ms can be realized. Thus, the
following table illustrates the difference between the value you specify and the actual holding time for G.711 and
G.726. The numbers in parentheses are the number of voice frames held in the jitter buffer.

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 175

 Value Actual Actual
Specified (G.711) (G.726)
0-5 5.5 (1) 11 (1)
6-11 11 (2) 11(1)
12-16 16.5 (3) 22 (2)
17-22 22 (4) 22 (2)
23-28 27.5 (5) 33 (3)
29-33 33 (6) 33 (3)
34-39 38.5 (7) 44 (4)
40-44 44 (8) 44 (4)
45-50 49.5 (9) 55 (5)
51-55 55 (10) 55 (5)
56-60 60.5 (11) 66 (6)

System Messages

System messages are displayed on the terminal and sent to a log file (if you have opened one). The messages
listed in this section are time-stamped informational and error messages. The messages are in the following
format:

dd+hh:mm:ss:nn sysfunc: message

dd date in xx/xx/xx format as speciÞed during router initialization

hh:mm:ss:nn time in military format (hours:minutes:seconds:hundredths of seconds)

sysfunc software function

message message

The following are examples of messages:

12/05/1997-16:31:17:ADSL: Startup initiated

12/05/1997-16:36:26:ADSL: Startup handshake in progress

Time-Stamped Messages
<router/user> didn't negotiate our IP address correctly

Explanation: The remote router did not negotiate the IP address options as was expected by the local router.

<router/user> terminated IPCP prematurely

Explanation: IP failed to negotiate. Try to change the remote or the source WAN IP address.

Far Avg SQ #: <2-digit number> dB [4-digit number]

Explanation: Message about the average signal quality for the remote router. This information appears during
modem startup and should be ignored unless requested by Technical Support.

Authorization failed

176 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

Explanation: PAP cannot be negotiated.

Can't agree with <router/user> on what their IP address should be

Explanation: The IP address entry for the remote router in the remote router database does not match what the
local router expects.

Can't obtain an IP address from <router/user>: one is needed in single user mode

Informative message.

Can't supply an IP address to <router/user>

Explanation: The remote end requests an IP address from the local end, which cannot supply it.

Cannot remove SYSTEM.CNF

Informative message.

Connecting to <router/user> @ <number> over <link/number>

Explanation: The local router is trying to connect to the specified remote destination.

Data Mode

Explanation: The connection is established and operational.

Duplicate IPX route to <router/user>

Explanation: There exist two routes to the same IPX destination. Remove one of the routes.

Duplicate IPX SAP <SAP number> to <router/user>

Explanation: There exist two IPX SAPs for the same IPX destination. Remove one of the SAPs.

Duplicate route <IP route> found on remote <router/user>

Explanation: There exist two IP routes to the same IP destination. One route needs to be removed.

Idle

Explanation: Data is not being transmitted.

IP is configured for numbered mode with <router/user>, but no address for it

Explanation: On one end of the connection, remote entries have been configured for numbered mode. On the other
end, remote entries have been configured for unnumbered mode. Neither end cab communicate with the other.

No Signal Detected -- Check WAN Cable!

Explanation: (SDSL-specific error message) Your SDSL router cannot establish connectivity. Check your
physical line.

No system name known - using defaults

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 177

Explanation: The router does not have a system name. For PAP/CHAP negotiation, the router will use a default
name and password.

Note: IPX is misconfigured for <router/user> - no IPX WAN network

Explanation: IPX WAN address is wrong or missing.

Note: There is no IPX route statically defined for <router/user>

Informational message.

PPP: Peer not negotiating <IP | BNCP | IPX | CCP> right now

Explanation: One end of the network is not negotiating the same protocol as the other end.

Remote <router/user> didn't accept our CHAP password

Informational message.

Remote <router/user> does not respond to LPC echo. Link closed

The connection was terminated.

Remote <router/user> on <channel> didn't authenticate in time

Explanation: PPP authentication protocol did not succeed.

Remote <router/user> refuses to authenticate

Informational message.

Remote <router/user> tried to use PAP when CHAP was expected

Explanation: The remote end negotiated PAP while its minimum security level in the remote database was set to
CHAP.

Remote <router/user> used wrong password <CHAP | PAP>

Explanation: The remote end has used an invalid password during CHAP or PAP security authentication.

Remote didn't accept our CHAP password

Explanation: The router attempted CHAP security authentication but the remote end rejected the password.

Remote on <interface> didn't authenticate in time

Informational message.

Remote on <interface> rejected our password with PAP

Informational message.

Remote on <interface> refuses to authenticate with us

178 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

Explanation: The remote destination refused to participate in the PAP/CHAP authentication process.

Startup failed

Explanation: The ATM modem could not synchronize with the remote end. Call Technical Support.

Startup failed: failure code = <number>, Status [code]

Explanation: The ATM modem could not synchronize with the remote end. Call Technical Support

TelnetD

Explanation: Connection accepted. A remote configuration session has been established.

User <router/user> is disabled in remote database

Informative message.

User <router/user> not found in remote database <PAP | CHAP>

Explanation: The authentication is coming from an unknown remote router.

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 179

Debugging Commands

The following commands may be available for debugging purposes. Please use them with caution because they
are not fully supported.

General Debug Commands

ifs

Shows which interfaces are configured or active. For an example of its output, see page 190.

mlp debug <LCP | NCP | BNCP | IPCP | IPXCP | CCP | ECP | MLP | AUTH | NCPSTATES> [<0>]

BNCP is for bridging, ECP for encryption, and NCPSTATES for state table changes.

To turn off the trace, enter the command with the optional 0 at the end.

ipdebug icmp 1

ipdebug nat 1

These commands show data received. The ipdebug icmp 1 command is useful for showing the router can
receive cells ok.

dod whycall 80

Prints out the packet that is causing the link to come up. This is useful when system onewan on is set. (This
command makes PVCÕs look like dial-up links, that is, the link comes up only if user traffic exists and the
link times out on inactivity.) For more information, see SYSTEM ONEWANDIALUP, on page 225.

dod debug <1 | 0>

Shows trace of when we bring up the link or time out link on inactivity. Specify 1 to turn on the trace; specify
0 to turn off the trace.

ping [-c count] [-i wait] [-s | -l size] [-I sourceipaddr] <ipaddr>

Sends an echo message to the specified IP address. You cannot ping your own LAN address; you can ping
your own WAN address.

You can set the length of user data down to 0 bytes (-s 0 or -l 0) so in routing mode it fits in one ATM cell.
(See page 194.)

traceroute [-c count] [-i wait] [-s | -l size] [-I sourceipaddr] <ipaddr>

Traces the route taken by packets sent from the target router to the specified IP address. A packet is sent for
each hop in the route. The output lists the IP addresses of the hops that returned packets. (See page 198.)

system log [start | stop | status]

Starts event logging when logged in via Telnet. Otherwise, you donÕt see any event messages. It is not needed
if you are using a console cable. (See page 223.)

system support

180 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

 Dumps all tables. If you capture and send this output to Technical Support, it can be useful in debugging
problems. For more information, see SYSTEM SUPPORTTRACE, on page 226.

The information dumped includes the history log and information about the version, memory, processes, the
file system, general system information, Ethernet, DHCP, Voice, remote database, interfaces, bridging, the
ARP table, IP routes, IPX routes, IPX SAPs, L2TP tunnels, and IP filters.

copy /RAW-IMAGE [email protected]:test

Uses the special file name /RAW-IMAGE to copy all of flash memory to a backup file for system debugging.

ATM Debug Commands

atom findPVC <on | off>

Shows VPI*VCI of cells received. This command is normally used to find the ATM VPI*VCI number
necessary for configuring a remote when the Service Provider either has supplied the wrong value or simply
is not able to supply one.This command should only be used when there are no remotes defined or when the
remote entries are disabled.

The command output is directed to the console. If Telnet is used to log into the router, then issue the system
log start command to direct the console output to the Telnet session.

Example:

# atom findPVC on
No remote entry found with PVC (VPI*VCI) 1*2

In this case, an ATM VPI*VCI is found for which there is no remote defined. 1 is the number of the VPI as
found in the ATM stream. 2 is the number of the VCI as found in the ATM stream. The discovered number
may be used as the VPI*VCI value in the remote, for determining whether communications are possible.

atom echoPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>

Enables an echo pvc (use atom echo 0*21). This is configured automatically and can be disabled with atom
echo 0*0. The echoPVC will echo back any ATM cell received on the PVC exactly as received. This is useful
when an administrative service wishes to ensure ATM connectivity but cannot use ATM OAM F5 cells to
achieve this function.

atom pls <on | off>

Changes payload scrambling.

atom empty <ATMF | ITU>

Changes type of ATM empty cell sent or expected. It is useful if ATM sync delineation errors when
combined with atom stats command.

atom dumpunknowncells [on | off]

Looks at the content of an ATM cell. It will not affect normal operation performance.

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 181

Web GUI Debug Commands
If you point your web browser to http://192.168.254.254/tools/index.html, you can display an index to special
pages in the web GUI. These pages include:

dump.html State variable dump (for debugging purposes)

access.html Control router administrative access.

editor.html Edit files in the router file system.

routing.html Edit the static routing table for an interface.

features.html Display and modify feature list.

password.html Change administrative password.

newpass.html Password redirection page

strings.html String table for the tools module

time.html Set router clock.

reboot.html Reboot the router.

default.html Reboot the router, restoring to defaults.

factory.html Reboot the router, erasing all configuration information.

SDSL Debug Commands

sdsl *

Displays all available SDSL commands.

sdsl btstat

Displays available status values.

Example:

# sdsl bts
Available status:
SLM ........................... Input Signal Level
DC_METER ...................... Input DC Offset
FELM .......................... Far-End Signal Attenuation (CalÕd at 1168 Kbs)
NMR ........................... Noise Margin
TIMING_RECOVERY_CONTROL ....... Timing Recovery Control
STARTUP_STATUS ................ Bit-Pump Status
BIT_PUMP_PRESENT .............. Bit-Pump Present
SELF_TEST ..................... Self Test
REGISTER ...................... Read Register
CONFIGURATION ................. Big-Pump Configuration
STAGE_NUMBER .................. Stage Number
AAGC_VALUE .................... AAGC
READ_TX ....................... Read Tx Gain

182 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

 BER_METER_STATUS .............. BER Meter Status
sdsl btstat *

Displays available SDSL status commands.

sdsl bts felm

Displays Far-End Signal Attenuation. It gives an estimate of the length of the loop.

Output example: SDSL: FELM: 63 [0x3f]

sdsl bts nmr

Displays noise margin. Large values are symptoms of a bad or excessively lengthy loop.

Output example: SDSL: NMR: 224 [0xe0]

sdsl states trace [<all>]

Turns on trace of line changes. To turn off the trace, append all to the command.

Example:

# sdsl states trace

SDSL State Trace [00000001]: states => s
# sdsl states trace all
SDSL State Trace [00000000]: off
sdsl huh

Dumps various registers.

Example:

# sdsl huh
SDSL:
Bitpump: 8973
CPE -- ACTIVATING
Line Rate: [AUTO] 192 Kb/s [3072 KHz]
Activation Interval: 99 [AUTO:20] [symbol_rate: 24]
AutoSpeed:
FastSearchAttemptsPerPass: 2
FastSearchPasses.........: 2
SlowSearchAttemptsPerPass: 5
SaveDelayInSeconds.......: 45
Two Symbol Time: 23 uS
FW: V4.3 CS 5: BR = 80000401 OR = fffff8f66
Ints -- On : 1228462 Mask: 0b00 IRQ: 02
BP Status Reads: 0
BT assumed on other end!
BT - Self Test will run
SDSL CONFIGURATION: 0x03f9 20 LOST: 10 [0x0a] Sym Rate: 24 [0x18]

Voice Router Debug Commands

voice 12stats

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 183

 Shows AAL2 statistics for voice router.

voice 12stats clear

Resets values.

dsp <NOEC | ECON>

Turns echo canceller on (NOEC) or off (ECON).

The following commands can be used for standalone phone verification. (This is for lab or bench verification
only.)

dsp init nobortStarts DSP for this test.

dsp cas x Connects and rings port x.

dsp ploop x-y Connects port x to port y.

dsp init Reinitialize after testing.

For example, to connect port 1 to port 2, use this command sequence:

ds init nobort
ds cas 1
ds cas 2
ds ploop 1-2

ADSL DMT Router Debug Commands

dmt *

Displays the available DMT commands.

dmt ver

Displays the code version of line driver.

dmt speed

Displays the speed of the link.

dmt ms

Shows the modem status.

dmt link <DEFAULT | T1_413 | G_DMT | G_LITE | MULTIMODE>

Sets the link type. It is used to force the CPE into ANSI (T1.413), G_DMT, or G_LITE mode. DEFAULT
and MULTIMODE are the same. The link type survives reboots.

dmt log

Prints the log file.

184 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

Frame Relay Debug Commands
frame stats

Displays statistics. For more information, see FRAME STATS, on page 204.

ATM Tracing Commands

atom print

Shows count of good and bad atm cells and frames.

atom rx <on | off>

Shows AAL5 frames received.

atom promisc on

Turns on promiscuous mode (rx ATM cells no matter what VPI*VCI).

atom cellrx <on | off>

Traces ATM cells received.

atom tx <on | off>

Traces ATM cells sent.

atom stats <n>

Prints the ATM statistics every n seconds. It shows good and bad cells and frames.

IP Filtering Debug Commands

The following commands can start and stop an IP filter watch. For more information about IP filter watch, see the
command descriptions on page 237 and page 267.

eth ip filter watch <on | off>

remote ipfilter watch <on | off>

Prints a message to the console if a packet to or from this remote is dropped or rejected.

Before Contacting Technical Support

Before you contact Technical Support, please have the following information ready:
¥ Router model number

¥ Router software version

¥ Date of purchase

Chapter 7. Troubleshooting 185

¥ Type of operating system (Windows 95, 98, NT, or Windows for Workgroups)

¥ Description of the problem

¥ List of other equipment such as personal computers, modems, etc. and third-party software you are using,
including revision levels.

To determine how to contact Technical Support, see the Quick Start Guide and the Customer Release Notes that
came with your router.

186 Chapter 7. Troubleshooting

Chapter 8. Command Reference

This chapter lists the formats of the commands you can enter on the router command line.

The commands are organized as follows:

¥ System-level commands

¥ File system commands

¥ Frame commands

¥ Target router configuration commands (system and eth)

¥ Remote router commands:

remote hdsl l2tp

adsl idsl filters
atm sdsl save
dmt dhcp erase

¥ IPSec commands (ike and ipsec)

Command Conventions

The Command Line Interface follows these conventions:

¥ Command line length may be up to 120 characters long.

¥ The Command Line Interface is not case-sensitive except for passwords and router names.

¥ All parameters are positional; i.e., each keyword/parameter must be entered in the correct order, as shown in
the command format in this manual.

The command formats shown in this manual follow these conventions:

¥ Items that appear in bold type must be typed exactly as they appear.However, commands can be shortened to
just those characters necessary to make the command unique.

¥ Items that appear in italics are placeholders representing specific information that you supply.

¥ Parameters enclosed in the characters < and > must be entered.

¥ Parameters enclosed in the characters [ and ] are optional.

Sample command responses are shown in this chapter. In many cases, only the command prompt # is returned. If
you have not entered the correct parameters, the syntax of the command is displayed.

? OR HELP
By entering ? or help, you can list the commands at the current level as well as subcommands. At the lowest
subcommand level, entering a ? may return the syntax of the command. Note that some commands require a
character string and the ? will be taken as the character string if entered in that position.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 187

 ? or help

Example:
# ?
Top-level commands:
? help version
filter logout exit
reboot mem ps
copy dir delete
rename execute format
sync msfs ifs
ipifs iproutes arp
ipxroutes ipxsaps bi
system eth save
erase key remote
call ping tcp
dhcp l2tp ipsec
ike atom dsp
sdsl voice

System-Level Commands

These commands are online action and status commands. They allow you to perform the following functions:

¥ log into and log out of configuration update mode

¥ display the routerÕs configuration, the version and level numbers

¥ list running tasks, memory, and communication interfaces

¥ connect to a remote router to test the line

¥ list IP routes, IPX routes and SAPs, and root bridge

¥ save the new configuration image

¥ reboot the system

ARP DELETE
Deletes the IP address of the entry in the ARP table.

arp delete <ipaddr>|all

ipaddr IP address in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

all Deletes all existing arp table entries

Example: arp delete 128.1.2.0

188 Chapter 8. Command Reference

ARP LIST
Lists Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table entries in an IP routing environment. ARP is a tool used to find
the appropriate MAC addresses of devices based on the destination IP addresses.

arp list <ipaddr><InterfaceName> <InterfaceUnit>

ipaddr IP address associated with a MAC address for a device on the local interface in the format of 4
decimals separated by periods.

InterfaceName MAC address on the local network

InterfaceUnit For an Ethernet interface, this can be a 1 or 0. For a DSL interface, this is a VPN number.

Example: arp list

Response:
IP Addr Mac Address Interface
192.84.210.148 00:05:02:00:80:A8 ETHERNET/0

BI
Lists the root bridge, and indicates whether the router is learning, listening, or forwarding.

bi

Response:
# bi
GROUP 0Our ID=8000+00206f0249fc Root ID=8000+00206f0249fc
Port ETHERNET/0 00+00 FORWARDING

BI LIST
Lists the contents of the bridge table.

Each MAC address in the table is listed with its corresponding bridge port as learned by the bridge function. The
line also shows the number of seconds elapsed since the last packet was received by the MAC address followed by
flags. Possible flags include:

P Permanent (This entry is not aged out of the table.)

FLD Flood
US This entry is for the target router.
A Accept
FWD Forward
BC Broadcast
MC Multicast
.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 189

 bi list

Example:

# bi list
BRIDGE GROUP 0:
00206F024C34: P US SD A
0180C2000000: P A MC
FFFFFFFFFFFF: P FLD A BC MC
02206F02E70D: ETHERNET/0 325 FWD
00C04F2E1AEB: ETHERNET/0 143 FWD
0060081BD761: ETHERNET/0 95 FWD

CALL
Dials a remote router. This command can be used to test the ISDN link or L2TP secession and the configuration
settings for the remote router.

call <remoteName>

Response:
# Request Queued

EXIT
Has the same function as logout, but will disconnect you from a Telnet session.

exit

IFS
Lists the communication interfaces installed in the router and the status of the interfaces.

ifs

Example:

ifs
Interface Speed In % Out % Protocol State Connection
ETHERNET/0 10.0mb 0%/0% 0%/0% (Ethernet) OPENED
SDSL/0 384kb 50%/50% 50%/50% (ATM) OFF
ATM-VOICE/1 384kb 45%/45% 0%/0% (ATM) OFF
BACKUP/0 57kb 0%/0% 0%/0% (AHDLC/PPP) OPENED to backup
CONSOLE/0 9600 b 0%/0% 0%/0% (TTY) OFF
VOX-STRM/0 0 b (CLEAR) OFF

190 Chapter 8. Command Reference

Additional interfaces on other routers could include:

FR/3 144kb 0%/0% 0%/0% (HDLC/FR) OPENED

FR-VC/1 144kb 0%/12% 0%/2% (FR) OPENED to internet
DMT/0 0 b (ATM) OFF
ATM-VC/1 0 b (ATM) OFF

Interface ETHERNET LAN

SDSL WAN physical layer

DMT
FR

ATM-VC WAN layer 2 virtual circuit

FR

BACKUP Dial Backup modem

ATM-VOICE Voice over DSL

CONSOLE Serial port

VOX-STRM Streaming voice control channel

In% Out% Downstream and upstream percentages. The first percentage is an instantaneous value taken
every second. The second percentage is the weighted average over 5 seconds using the formula:

current avg = (4 * old average + instant value)/5

Protocol Protocol in use, such as frame relay (FR), asynchronous PPP (AHDLC/PPP), and serial (TTY).

State Current state of the interface.

OFF Down
STANDBY Being negotiated.
OPEN Up

IPIFS
Lists the IP interface.

ipifs

Response:
ATM_VC/1 192.168.254.1 (FFFFFF00) dest 192.168.254.2 sub 192.168.254.0
net 192.168.254.0 (FFFFFF00) P-2-P
ETHERNET/0 192.84.210.12 (FFFFFF00) dest 0.0.0.0 sub 192.84.210.0
net 192.84.210.0 (FFFFFF00) BROADCAST mtu 1500

IPROUTES
Lists the current entries in the IP routing table.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 191

 iproutes

Response:
# iproutes
IP route / Mask --> Gateway Interface Hops Flags

0.0.0.0 /ffffffff --> 0.0.0.0 [none] 0 NW PRIV

192.84.210.0 /ffffff00 --> 0.0.0.0 ETHERNET/0 1 NW FW DIR PERM
192.84.210.12 /ffffffff --> 0.0.0.0 ETHERNET/0 0 ME
192.168.254.0 /ffffff00 --> 0.0.0.0 [none] 0 NW PRIV
192.168.254.1 /ffffffff --> HQ ATM_VC/1 0 ME
192.168.254.2 /ffffffff --> HQ ATM_VC/1 1 FW DIR PRIV
224.0.0.9 /ffffffff --> 0.0.0.0 [none] 0 ME
255.255.255.255 /ffffffff --> 0.0.0.0 [none] 0 NW PERM

Where: NW Network
PERM Permanent (static)
DOD Initiate link dial-up
FW Forward
DIR Direct
ME This router

IPXROUTES
Lists the current entries in the IPX routing table.

ipxroutes

Response:
# ipxroutes
Network Gateway Interface Hops Ticks Flags
00001001: HQ [down] 1 4 STATIC FORWARD DOD
00000456: (DIRECT) ETHERNET/0 0 1 FORWARD

where: STATIC Static route

DOD Initiate link dial-up
FORWARD
DIRECT

IPXSAPS
Lists the current services in the IPX SAPs table.

ipxsaps

Response:
# ipxsaps

192 Chapter 8. Command Reference

Service Name Type Node number Network Skt Hops
SERV312_FP 4 000000000001:00001001:045 1

LOGOUT
Logs out to reinstate administrative security after you have completed changing the routerÕs configuration.

logout

MEM
The mem command report the amount of ram installed in the router.

mem

Response:
# mem
Small buffers used.......18 (7% of 256 used)
Large buffers used.......41 (16% of 256 used)
Buffer descriptors used..59 (7% of 768 used)
Number of waiters s/l....0/0

Table memory allocation statistics:

Sizes 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048
Used 34 18 12 3 8 9 8 7
Free 3 1 4 0 1 1 1 1

Sizes 4096 8192

Used 3 1
Free 1 0
Total in use: 51936, total free: 857368 (8272 + 849096)

MLP SUMMARY
Lists the status of the protocols negotiated for an active remote connection. The following are the most common
protocols:

¥ MLP (Multilink Procedure)

¥ IPNCP (IP routing Network Protocol)
¥ CCP (Compression Control Protocol)
¥ BNCP (Bridging Network Protocol)
¥ IPXCP (IPX Network Protocol)

Open indicates that the protocol is in ready state.

Stopped means that the protocol is defined, but did not successfully negotiate with the remote end.
No message means that the link is not active.

mlp summary

Chapter 8. Command Reference 193

Example: mlp summary

PING
This command sends an echo message, available within the TCP/IP protocol suite. The echo message is sent to a
remote node and returned in order to test connectivity to the remote node. It is particularly useful for locating
connection problems on a network.

A status message is issued for each echo message sent.

You cannot ping your own LAN address; you can ping your own WAN address.

To fit the echo message into one ATM cell in routing mode, set the length of user data down to 0 bytes (-s 0 or -l
0).

Note: To terminate the ping before it ends, press control-c.

ping [-c count] [-i wait] [- s size (or -l size)] [-I srceaddr] <ipaddr>

-c count Number of packets sent (from 1 to 2000000000). The default is 5 packets.

-i wait Wait period between packets in seconds (from 1 to 10). The default is 1 second.

-s size Packet data length in bytes (from 0 to 1648). The default is 56 bytes.

-l size Same as -s size.

-I srcaddr Source IP address contained in the echo message (4 decimals separated by periods). Use this
option to force packets into a tunnel or to force use of the management address as the source
address.

ipaddr IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

Examples:

The followng command requests 2 echo messages sent 7 seconds apart with a packet length of 34 bytes. The
messages are sent to IP address 192.168.254.2.

# ping -c 2 -i 7 -s 34 192.168.254.2

ping: reply from 192.168.254.2: bytes=34 (data), time<5 ms

ping: reply from 192.168.254.2: bytes=34 (data), time<5 ms

ping: packets sent 2, packets received 2

The following command sends packets with the source IP address 192.168.254.254 to the IP address
192.4.210.122. Default values are used for the other options.

ping -I 192.168.254.254 192.4.210.122

The following command uses management address 192.168.1.2 as the source address when pinging destination
address 192.168.100.100.

ping -I 192.168.1.2 192.168.100.100

194 Chapter 8. Command Reference

PS
Lists all of the tasks (processes) running in the system and the status of the tasks.

ps

Response:
# ps

TID: NAME FL P BOTTOM CURRENT SIZE

1:IDLE 02 7 1208f0 121008 2032
3:MSFS_SYNC 03 6 1224a0 122ba8 2032
4:SYSTEM LOGGER 03 5 122cd0 1233d8 2032
5:LL_PPP 03 5 126750 126e58 2032
6:NL_IP 03 5 126fe0 1272e0 1000
7:TL_IP_UDP 03 3 127460 127768 1000|
8:TL_IP_TCP 03 3 1278c0 127fd0 2032
9:IP_RIP 03 4 128120 128420 1000
10:TELNETD 03 5 128550 128838 1000
11:DUM 03 5 12b580 12bc88 2032
12:ATM25 03 1 12c0a0 12c790 2032
13:SNMPD 03 5 124b60 125a70 4080
14:BOOTP 03 5 12e3d0 12e6c0 1000
15:CMD 01 6 12cba0 12d9f8 4080

TID: task ID field

NAME: name of the task
FL: flag field
P: number from 1 to 7 with the highest priority equal to 1
BOTTOM: address of the task stack
CURRENT: current stack pointer
SIZE: stack size in bytes

REBOOT
This command causes a reboot of the system.

Caution: A reboot erases any configuration changes that have not been saved. Remember to enter a save
command before the reboot command.

Certain configuration settings require a reboot before the setting becomes effective, including:

¥ A change from IP routing to bridging or the reverse.

¥ The addition of IKE filters

¥ IPX changes

Other configuration changes become effective following either a reboot or a restart of the Ethernet or remote
interface. These changes include:

¥ System settings

Chapter 8. Command Reference 195

¥ Ethernet IP address

¥ TCP/IP routing

¥ Remote router default bridging destination

¥ TCP/IP route addresses

¥ SAPs and bridging

¥ Adding a new remote entry to the remote database.

A reboot also ensures that all file system updates are completed. There is a time lag between the entry of a save
command and the safe storage of the data in FLASH memory. If the power goes off before the data is stored in
memory, the data can be lost. Always reboot before powering off the router. Or, use the sync command (page 203)
to commit file changes to memory.

reboot [<option>]

option If no option is specified, the router is rebooted using the existing configuration file.

default This option deletes the system configuration file and restores the router to its original defaults
(before any configuration was entered).

Note: The word default must be fully spelled out.

factory This option deletes all files except AUTOEXEC.OLD if it exists. AUTOEXEC.OLD is renamed
AUTOEXEC.BAT; it is re-executed by the reboot. This option also resets the non-volatile RAM;
thus deleting the IP address of the router and the TFTP server during the boot process and also
forcing the router to boot from FLASH instead of from the network.

SAVE
The save command saves the entire routerÕs configuration or parts of it to FLASH memory. The keyword in the
command determines what is saved.

Note: There is a time lag between the response issued by the save command and the time when the data is actually
stored in FLASH memory. Issue a sync command after a save command before powering off the router. This
commits the changes to FLASH memory.

save all | keys | dod | sys | eth | filter | atom | sdsl | dhcp | l2tp | ipsec | IKE

Examples:

save all Saves the configuration settings for the system, Ethernet LAN, DSL line, and remote
router database into FLASH memory.

save atom Saves the ATM configuration settings.

save dhcp Saves the DHCP configuration settings into FLASH memory.

save dod Saves the current state of the remote router database.

196 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 save eth Saves the configuration settings for the Ethernet LAN into FLASH memory.

save filter Saves the bridging filtering database to FLASH memory. A reboot must be executed to
load the database for active use.

save sys Saves the name, message, and authentication password system settings into FLASH
memory.

ERASE
The erase command erases the entire routerÕs configuration or parts of it from FLASH memory. The parts that can
be erased include:

¥ System

¥ Ethernet LAN

¥ DSL and remote router database settings

¥ DHCP settings

¥ Filters

Once you erase part of the configuration, you will need to completely reconfigure that part.

Note: An erase command does not take effect until after a reboot without a save command

Note: There is a time lag between the response issued by the erase command and the time that the data is actually
deleted from FLASH memory. Issue a sync command after an erase command before powering off the router.
This commits the changes to FLASH memory.

erase all | keys | dod | sys | eth | filter | atom | sdsl | dhcp | l2tp | ipsec | IKE

Examples:

erase all Erases the configuration settings for the system, Ethernet LAN, DSL line, DHCP, and
remote router database from FLASH memory.

erase atom Erases the ATM configuration settings.

erase dhcp Erases the DHCP configuration settings from FLASH memory. To clear all DHCP
information without erasing FLASH memory, use the command dhcp clear all records
(page 312).

erase dod Erases the current state of the remote router database.

erase eth Erases the configuration settings for the Ethernet LAN from FLASH memory.

erase filter Erases the current bridging filtering database from FLASH memory.When you issue this
command you must reboot (without a save).

erase sys Erases the name, message, and authentication password system settings from FLASH
memory.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 197

TCP STATS
Displays the TCP statistics and open connections.

tcp stats

Example: tcp stats

TRACEROUTE
Traces the route taken by packets sent from the target router to the specified IP address. A packet is sent for each
hop in the route. The output lists the IP addresses of the hops that returned packets.

Note: To terminate the traceroute before it completes, press control-c.

traceroute [-c count] [-i wait] [- s size (or -l size)] [-I srceaddr] <ipaddr>

-c count Number of packets sent (from 1 to 255). The default is 30 packets.

-i wait Wait period between packets in seconds (from 1 to 2000000000). The default is 1 second.

-s size Packet data length in bytes (from 0 to 1648). The default is 56 bytes.

-l size Same as -s size.

-I srcaddr Source IP address contained in the echo message (4 decimals separated by periods). Use this
option to force packets into a tunnel or to force use of the management address as the source
address.

ipaddr IP address at the end of the route (4 decimals separated by periods).

Example:

The following command sends up to 30 packets with a wait period of 1 second and a packet length of 56 bytes.
The route ends at IP address 204.71.200.68.

# traceroute 204.71.200.68
2: 24.26.161.37
3: 24.26.161.1
4: 24.26.161.65
5: 24.218.190.110
6: 24.218.190.114
7: 24.128.191.90
8: 24.128.191.18
9: 24.128.191.13
10: 204.246.198.121
11: 206.132.118.85
12: 206.132.117.209
13: 206.132.110.113
14: 206.132.110.73
15: 208.48.118.118
16: 208.50.169.62
17: 206.132.254.37

198 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 18: 208.178.103.62
19: reply from 204.71.200.68: bytes=56 (data), time=95 ms
traceroute: packets sent 19, packets received 18

VERS
Displays the software version level, source, software options, and amount of elapsed time that the router has been
running.

All software options are listed. If the option has a + prefix, the option was enabled using a key. If the option has a
~ prefix, the option is disabled in this router. For more information, see Software Option Keys, on page 114.

vers

Example:

# vers
Flowpoint/2025 ATM25 Router
FlowPoint-2000 BOOT/POST V3.0.0 (12-Dec-98 18:10)
Software version 3.0.1 (built Wed Jan 7 13:17:37 PST 1999
18:36:15 PST 1999
Maximum users: unlimited
Options: FRAME RELAY, SDSL, RFC1490, +IP ROUTING, IP FILTERING, WEB, ~L2TP,
~ENCRYPT, BRIDGE, IPX, CMMGMT
Up for 0 days 0 hours 20 minutes (started 1/7/1999 at 13:28

Chapter 8. Command Reference 199

File System Commands

The file system commands allow you to perform maintenance and recovery on the router. These commands allow
you to:

¥ Format the file system

¥ List the contents of the file system

¥ Copy, rename, and delete files

The router file system is DOS-compatible, and the file system commands are similar to the DOS commands of the
same name.

COPY
Copies a file from the source to the destination. This command allows you to update the router software level or to
write configuration files to a TFTP server

Issue a sync command after a copy command to commit the changes to FLASH memory.

Caution: No warning message is issued if you copy over an existing file.

copy <srcfile> <dstfile>

srcÞle Filename of the source Þle to be copied.It can be either the name of a local file or a file accessed
remotely via a TFTP server.
A local filename is in the format: name.ext.

A remotely accessed filename is specified as: tftp@serveraddr:filename.ext. The TFTP server

address is optional. If the TFTP server address is not specified, the address used is either the one
from which the router booted or the one permanently configured in the boot system.

To force use of a specific source address when copying a file from a TFTP server, use this format:
tftp@serveraddr-sourceaddr:filename.ext

dstÞle Destination Þlename to which the Þle is copied.

Examples:
The following command copies the Þle KERNELNW on TFTP server 128.1.210.66 to the local Þle KERNEL.F2K.

# copy [email protected]:kernelnw kernel.f2k

Copying...
421888 bytes copied
The following command uses the source address 192.168.1.2 when copying the Þle KERNELNW on TFTP server
192.168.100.100 to the local Þle KERNEL.F2K.

copy [email protected]:kernelnw kernel.f2k

200 Chapter 8. Command Reference

DELETE
Removes a file from the file system.

delete <filename>

filename Name of the file to be deleted. The filename is in the format xxxxxxxx.xxx.

Example: delete kernel.f2k

Response:
kernel.f2k deleted.

DIR
Displays the directory of the file system. The size of each file is listed in bytes.

dir

Example: dir

EXECUTE
This command loads batch files of configuration commands into the router. This allows for customization and
simpler installation of the router. A script file can contain commands, comments (lines introduced by the # or ;
characters), and blank lines.

There are two kinds of script files:

¥ A one-time script that is executed on startup (only once).

¥ A group of commands that can be executed at any time from the Command Line Interface with the execute
<filename> command.

One-time scripts are useful to execute the complete configuration process from a default (unconfigured) state.

execute <filename>

Þlename Name of the Þle to be executed.

Example: execute script1

FORMAT DISK
Erases and reformats the router file system. This command should only be used when the file system is unusable.
If the router does not execute the POST test and software boot successfully, and the result of the dir command

Chapter 8. Command Reference 201

indicates the file system is corrupted, you may wish to reformat the disk, reboot the router, and recopy the router
software.

format disk

Example: format disk

Response:
NEWFS: erasing disk...
NEWFS: fs is 381k and will have 762 sectors
NEWFS: 128 directory slots in 8 sectors
NEWFS: 747 fat entries in 3 sectors
NEWFS: writing boot block...done.
NEWFS: writing fat tables...done.
NEWFS: writing directory...done.
Filesystem formatted!

MSFS
Checks the structure of the file system. This command performs a function similar to the DOS chkdsk command.
The router analyzes the File Allocation Table (FAT) and produces a file system status report.

Warning: When you specify fix, make sure that no other operation is being performed on the configuration files
at the same time by Configuration Manager or by another user.

msfs [fix]

Þx If Þx is speciÞed, errors are corrected in the FAT. This option should only be used when an
msfs command results in a recommendation to apply the Þx option.

Example: msfs

Response:
Filesystem 0, size=825k:
Checking filesystem...
Checking file entries...
SYSTEM CNF ... 2304 bytes .. ok.
ATM25 DAT ... 20 bytes .. ok.
DHCP DAT ... 1536 bytes .. ok.
KERNEL F2K ... 257014 bytes .. ok.
IDL_7 AIC ... 14828 bytes .. ok.
ASIC AIC ... 14828 bytes .. ok.
FILTER DAT ... 1284 bytes .. ok.
1097 fat(s) used, 0 fat(s) unused, 0 fat(s) unref, 534 fat(s) free
561664 bytes used by files, 9728 bytes by tables, 273408 bytes free

202 Chapter 8. Command Reference

RENAME
Renames a file in the file system.

rename <oldName> <newName>

oldName Existing name of the Þle. The Þlename is in the format xxxxxxxx.xxx.

newName New name of the Þle. The Þlename is in the format xxxxxxxx.xxx.

Example: rename ether.dat oldeth.dat

Response:
Ôether.datÕ renamed to Ôoldeth.datÕ

SYNC
Commits the changes made to the file system to FLASH memory.

sync

Example: sync

Response:
Syncing file systems...done.

Warning: Syncing is not complete until you see the message ÒdoneÓ.

Frame Commands

FRAME ?
Lists the frame commands.

frame ?

Example:

# frame ?
Frame Commands:
? help lmi
stats voice

Chapter 8. Command Reference 203

FRAME LMI
Turns frame LMI either on or off.

frame < on | off>

Example:

# frame on
LMI is on

FRAME VOICE
Displays the voice DLCI for voice routers.

frame voice

Example:

# frame voice
Voice DLCI is 22

FRAME STATS
Displays frame relay statistics.

frame stats

Example:

# frame stats
FR/0 Frame Relay Statistics
ANSI LMI:
Protocol Errors........................ 0
Unknown Msg Recv....................... 0
T391 Timeouts.......................... 0
PVC Status Changes..................... 0
StatusEnq Sent......................... 0
Status Recv............................ 0
StatusEnq Recv......................... 0
Unconfigured DLCIs recv in Status Msgs. 0

LMI Stats for DLCI................. 22

LMI State.......................... UNKNOWN
Status State Changes............... 0
Active to Not Active Changes....... 0
Not Active to Active Changes....... 0
Data Packets In.................... 0
Data Packets Out................... 0

204 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 Data Packets Out Queued............ 0
Data Packets Out (dropped Q Full).. 0
Voice Cells In..................... 0
Voice Cells In (with errors)....... 0
Voice Cells Out.................... 0

LMI Stats for DLCI................. 16

LMI State.......................... UNKNOWN
Status State Changes............... 0
Active to Not Active Changes....... 0
Not Active to Active Changes....... 0
Data Packets In.................... 0
Data Packets Out................... 0
Data Packets Out Queued............ 0
Data Packets Out (dropped Q Full).. 0
Voice Cells In..................... 0
Voice Cells In (with errors)....... 0
Voice Cells Out.................... 0

Data Out (Delayed by Voice)........ 0

Chapter 8. Command Reference 205

Router ConÞguration Commands

Configuration commands are used to set configuration information for each functional capability of the router.
Each functional capability has a specific prefix for its associated commands:

¥ ? or help Summary of available commands

¥ system Target router system commands

¥ eth ip Ethernet IP routing commands

¥ remote Remote router database commands

¥ adsl Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line commands (ADSL routers only)

¥ atm Asynchronous Transfer Mode commands (ATM routers only)

¥ eth Dual-Ethernet router commands only

¥ hdsl High-speed Digital Subscriber Line commands (HDSL routers only)

¥ isdn (for IDSL) ISDN Digital Subscriber Line (IDSL routers only)

¥ sdsl Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line commands (SDSL routers only)

¥ dhcp Dynamic Host ConÞguration Protocol commands

¥ l2tp Layer-2 Tunneling Protocol commands

¥ save Save conÞguration to FLASH memory commands

¥ erase Erase conÞguration from FLASH memory commands

¥ filter Filtering commands

¥ ike Internet Key Exchange commands

¥ ipsec IPSec commands

206 Chapter 8. Command Reference

SYSTEM (Target Router System Configuration
Commands)
The following commands set basic router configuration information:

¥ name of the router

¥ optional system message

¥ authentication password

¥ security authentication protocol

¥ management security

¥ system administration password

¥ IP address translation

¥ NAT configuration

¥ host mapping

¥ WAN-to-WAN forwarding

¥ filters

SYSTEM ?
Lists the supported keywords.

system ?

Example:

# sys ?
System commands:
? msg name
passwd authen community
list admin history
log addHostMapping delHostMapping
addServer delServer bootpServer
supportTrace telnetport snmport
httpport syslogport addTelnetFilter
delTelnetFilter addSNMPFilter delSNMPFilter
addHTTPFilter delHTTPFilter addSyslogFilter
delSyslogFilter wan2wanforwarding OneWANdialup
blockNetBIOSDefault addUDPrelay delUDPrelay
securityTimer addIPRoutingTable delIPRoutingTable
moveIPRoutingTable

Chapter 8. Command Reference 207

SYSTEM ADDBOOTPSERVER
Adds an address to the BootP server list. (The BootP server list is also the DHCP relay list.)

While the BootP server list has at least one address, the router disables its own DHCP server and, instead,
forwards all DHCP/BootP requests to all servers in the list. It forwards every reply received from any of the
servers in the list to the appropriate LAN.

Addresses can also be added to the list using the dhcp addrelay command (page 310). To remove an address
from the list, use the dhcp delrelay command (page 313).

system addbootpServer <ipaddr>

ipaddr IP address of the server (4 decimals separated by periods).

Example: system addbootpServer 128.1.210.64

SYSTEM ADDHOSTMAPPING
This command is used to remap a range of local-LAN IP addresses to a range of public IP addresses on a system-
wide basis. These local addresses are mapped one-to-one to the public addresses.

Note: The range of public IP addresses is defined by <first public addr> only. The rest of the range is computed
automatically (from <first public addr> to <first public addr> + number of addresses remapped - 1) inclusive.

system addHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr>

Þrst private addr First IP address in the range of IP addresses to be remapped, in the format of 4 decimals
separated by periods.

second private addr Last address in the range of IP addresses to be remapped, in the format of 4 decimals
separated by periods.

Þrst public addr DeÞnes the range of public IP addresses, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

The rest of the range is computed automatically.

Example: system addHostMapping 192.168.207.40 192.168.207.49 10.1.1.7

SYSTEM ADDHTTPFILTER
This command is used to allow devices within the defined IP address range to use the HTTP protocol (for
example, to browse the Web). This command is useful to block devices on the WAN from accessing the Web
browser.

system addHTTPFilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

Þrst ip addr First IP address of the range.

208 Chapter 8. Command Reference

last ip addr Last IP address of the range. May be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

LAN Local Ethernet LAN.

Example: system addHTTPFilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

SYSTEM ADDIPROUTINGTABLE
Defines a new virtual routing table. Once defined, you can add routes to the table using the commands eth ip
bindRoute (page 233) and remote bindIPVirtualRoute (page 260).

The command specifies the name of the new routing table and the range of IP addresses that reference the table
for their routing. When the router receives a packet, the source address of the packet determines which routing
table is used. For example, if the range of addresses for the virtual routing table ROSA includes address
192.168.25.25, then every packet with the source address 192.168.25.25 is routed using virtual routing table
ROSA.

If the source address of a packet is not within the address ranges for any virtual routing table, the default routing
table is referenced to route the packet.

For more information, see Virtual Routing Tables, on page 78.

system addIPRoutingTable <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] <tablename>

first ip addr First IP address of the range (4 decimals separated by periods).

last ip addr Last IP address of the range (4 decimals separated by periods). This parameter may be omitted if
the range contains only one IP address. The specified address range may not overlap the address
range defined for any other virtual routing table.

tablename Name of the virtual routing table to which the addresses are assigned (character string).

Example:

The following command defines a virtual routing table named ROSA (if it does not already exist) and assigns
it the IP address range 192.168.1.5 through 192.168.1.12.

system addIPRoutingTable 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12 ROSA

SYSTEM ADDSERVER
This Network Address Translation (NAT) command is used to configure a local IP address as the selected server
on the LAN (FTP, SMTP, etc.) for the global configuration. To learm more, see Network Address Translation
(NAT), on page 91.

Multiple system addserver, remote addserver (page 259), and eth ip addserver (page 232) commands can
designate different servers for different protocols, ports, and interfaces. When a request is received, the router
searches the server list for the appropriate server. The order of search for a server is discussed in Server Request
Hierarchy, on page 94.

system addServer <action> <protocol> <first port> [<last port> [<first private port>]]

Chapter 8. Command Reference 209

action One of the following command actions:
ipaddr Selects the host with this IP address as server (4 decimals separated by periods).
discard Discards the incoming server request.
me Sends the incoming server request to the local router, regardless of its IP address.

protocol Protocol used by the selected server.

protocolid Numeric protocol ID.
tcp TCP only.
udp UDP only.
all All protocols.

first port First or only port as seen by the remote end. Port used by the selected server
portid Numeric value between 0 and 65,535. A numeric value of 0 matches any port.
ftp FTP port.
telnet Telnet port.
smtp SMTP port.
sntp SNTP port.
http HTTP port.
tftp TFTP port.
all All ports.

last port Optional last port in the range of ports as seen by the remote end for the server on the LAN.

first private port If specified, this is a port remapping of the incoming request from the remote end.

Example:

system addServer 192.168.1.5 tcp smtp

SYSTEM ADDSNMPFILTER
This command is used to validate SNMP clients by defining a range of IP addresses that are allowed to access the
router via SNMP. This validation feature is off by default.

Note 1: This command does not require a reboot and is effective immediately.

Note 2: To list the range of allowed clients, use the command system list when you are logged in with read and
write permission (be sure to log in with password).

system addSNMPFilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

Þrst ip addr First IP address of the client range.

last ip addr Last IP address of the client range. May be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

LAN Local Ethernet LAN.

Example: system addSNMPFilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

SYSTEM ADDSYSLOGFILTER
Limits the Syslog server addresses that may be returned by DHCP. By default, this validation feature is off.

210 Chapter 8. Command Reference

The Syslog filter can comprise one or more ranges of IP addresses that DHCP may return for Syslog servers. To
delete addresses from the Syslog filter, use the command system delsyslogfilter (page 220).

This command does not affect the Syslog server addresses that you specify explicitly. For more information on the
router as Syslog client, see page 153.

Note: This command does not require a reboot and is effective immediately.

system addSyslogFilter <firstipaddr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

first ip addr First IP address of the valid server range.

last ip addr Last IP address of the valid server range. May be omitted if the range contains only one IP
address.

LAN Limits the valid Syslog servers to those on the local Ethernet LAN.

Example:

system addSyslogFilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

SYSTEM ADDSYSLOGSERVER
Adds an address to the list of Syslog servers. The router sends system event messages to all Syslog servers in the
list, unless the Syslog port has been disabled. For more information about the router as Syslog client, see page
153.

To see the server addresses, use the command system list. To remove a Syslog server address from the list, use
the command system delSyslogServer (page 221).

Note: This command does not require a reboot; it takes effect immediately.

system addSyslogServer <ipaddr>

ipaddr IP address to be added to the Syslog server address list (4 decimals separated by periods).

Example:

system addSyslogServer 192.168.1.5

SYSTEM ADDTELNETFILTER
This command is used to validate Telnet clients by defining a range of IP addresses that are allowed to access the
router via Telnet. This validation feature is off by default.

Note 1: This command does not require a reboot and is effective immediately.

Note 2: To list the range of allowed clients, use the command system list when you are logged in with read and
write permission (log in with password).

system addTelnetFilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

Chapter 8. Command Reference 211

first ip addr First IP address of the client range.

last ip addr Last IP address of the client range. May be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

LAN Local Ethernet LAN.

Example:

system addTelnetFilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

SYSTEM ADDUDPRELAY
This command is used to create a UDP port range for packet forwarding. You can specify a port range from 0 to
65535; however, 137 to 139 are reserved for NetBIOS ports. Overlap of UDP ports is not allowed.

system addUDPrelay <ipaddr> <first port>|all [<last port>]

ipaddr IP address of the server to which the UDP packet will be forwarded.

Þrst port First port in the UDP port range to be created.

all Incorporates all the available UDP ports in the new range.

last port Last port in the UDP port range to be created.

Example: system addUDPrelay 192.168.1.5 all

SYSTEM ADMIN
Sets the administration password that is used to control write access to the target router configuration.

system admin <password>

password Write-enable login password.

Example: system admin adx1lp

SYSTEM AUTHEN
Forces the target router authentication protocol that is used for security negotiation with the remote routers when
the local side authentication is set. You should not need to issue this command as the best security possible is
provided with the none default.

system authen none | pap | chap

none When set to none (the default), the authentication protocol is negotiated, with the minimum best
security level as deÞned for each remote router in the database.

212 Chapter 8. Command Reference

pap When set to pap, negotiation will begin with PAP (instead of CHAP) for those entries that have
PAP in the remote database and only when the call is initiated locally.

chap Overrides all the remote database entries with chap; i.e., only CHAP will be performed.

Example: system authen CHAP

SYSTEM BACKUP ADD

Adds an IP address to the list of addresses to be pinged for the Dial Backup option. The command can specify an
explicit address, or it can request that the router determine the gateway or DNS address and add that address to the
list.

For more information about Dial Backup, see page 103.

system backup add <ipaddr> | GW | DNS [<group>]

ipaddr IP address to be added to the list (four decimals separated by periods).

GW Gateway address. The router determines the actual gateway address.

DNS Domain Name Server address. The router determines the actual DNS address.

group Optional number of a group to which the address is assigned (integer, 0 thru 65535). The default is
group 0.

Examples:

The following command adds the address 192.168.1.5 to group 0 of the addresses to be pinged.

system backup add 192.168.1.5

The following command adds the gateway address to group 1 of the addresses to be pinged.

system backup add GW 1

SYSTEM BACKUP DELETE

Deletes an IP address from the list of addresses to be pinged for the Dial Backup option. The command can:

¥ Specify an explicit address to be deleted.

¥ Request that the router delete the gateway or DNS address from the list.

¥ Delete all addresses in a group.

¥ Clear all addresses from the list.

To see the addresses in the current list, use the command system list. For more information about Dial Backup,
see page 103.

system backup delete <ipaddr> | GW | DNS | all [<group> | all ]

Chapter 8. Command Reference 213

ipaddr IP address to be deleted from the list (four decimals separated by periods).

GW Gateway address. The router determines the actual gateway address and deletes it.

DNS Domain Name Server address. The router determines the actual DNS address and deletes it.

all Requests deletion of all addresses in the group.

group Optional number of a group from which the specified address or all addresses are deleted (integer, 0
thru 65535). The default is group 0.

all Specifies all groups, including group 0.

Examples:

The following command deletes the address 192.168.1.5 from group 0.

system backup delete 192.168.1.5

The following command deletes the gateway address from group 1.

system backup delete GW 1

The following command deletes all addresses from group 2.

system backup delete all 2

The following command clears all addresses from the list.

system backup delete all all

SYSTEM BACKUP DISABLE

Disables the Dial Backup option in the router.

To re-enable the Dial Backup option, use the system backup enable command.

For more information about Dial Backup, see page 103.

system backup disable

SYSTEM BACKUP ENABLE

Enables the Dial Backup option in the router.

Note: The Dial Backup option cannot be used until its software option key is installed in the router. For more
information, see Software Option Keys, on page 114.

To disable the Dial Backup option, use the system backup disable command.

For more information about Dial Backup, see page 103.

system backup enable

214 Chapter 8. Command Reference

SYSTEM BACKUP PINGINTERVAL
Changes the ping interval for a group, that is, the number of seconds between pings during a test of the addresses
in the group.

Note: If you change the ping interval to 0, you disable the group of addresses.

To see the current ping intervals, use the system list command. For more information about the ping interval and
Dial Backup, see Ping Interval, Number of Samples, and Success Rate, on page 105.

system backup pinginterval <seconds> [<group>]

seconds Number of seconds in the ping interval for the group (integer). The default is 5 seconds.

group Optional number of a group (integer, 0 thru 65535). The default is group 0.

Examples:

The following command changes the ping interval to 10 seconds for group 0.

system backup pinginterval 10

The following command disables the pinging of addresses in group 1.

system backup pinginterval 0 1

SYSTEM BACKUP PINGSAMPLES

Changes the number of ping samples for a group, that is, the number of pings performed for each address in the
group.

Note: If you change the ping samples value to 0, you disable pinging for that group of addresses.

To see the current ping sample values, use the system list command. For more information about ping samples
and Dial Backup, see Ping Interval, Number of Samples, and Success Rate, on page 105.

system backup pingsamples <samples> [<group>]

samples Number of times the addresses in the group are pinged (integer). The default is 6.

group Optional number of a group (integer, 0 thru 65535). The default is group 0.

Examples:

The following command changes the number of ping samples to 10 for addresses in group 0.

system backup pingsamples 10

The following command disables the pinging of addresses in group 1.

system backup pingsamples 0 1

Chapter 8. Command Reference 215

SYSTEM BACKUP RETRY
Changes the Dial Backup retry period. The retry period determines how often the router attempts to restore the
DSL link. For more information about the Dial Backup retry period, see DSL Restoration Retry Period, on page
105.

The default retry period is thirty minutes. The minimum retry period is two minutes.

To see the current retry value, use the system list command.

system backup retry <minutes>

minutes Number of a minutes in the retry period (integer). The default is 30; the minimum is 2.

Example:

The following command changes the retry period to 60 minutes.

system backup retry 60

SYSTEM BACKUP STABILITY

Changes the Dial Backup stability period. The stability period guards against frequent switching back and forth
between the DSL link and the backup port. For more information about the Dial Backup stability period, see
Stability Period, on page 104.

The default stability period is three minutes. The minimum stability period is one minute.

To see the current stability value, use the system list command.

system backup stability <minutes>

minutes Number of a minutes in the stability period (integer). The default is 3; the minimum is 1.

Example:

The following command changes the stability period to 5 minutes.

system backup stability 5

SYSTEM BACKUP SUCCESSRATE

Changes the minimum success rate required for a group of pinged addresses. If the success rate is less than the
minimum, the DSL link is assumed to have failed and a switchover to the backup is performed.

Note: If you change the success rate to 0, you disable pinging for that group of addresses.

Note: A minimum success rate of 100% is not recommended; this would require a reply from every ping sent.

To see the current success rate values, use the system list command. For more information about success rates and
Dial Backup, see Ping Interval, Number of Samples, and Success Rate, on page 105.

system backup successrate <percentage> [<group>]

216 Chapter 8. Command Reference

percentage Minimum success rate required during a ping test of the addresses in the group (integer, 0 thru 99).
The default is 50.

group Optional number of a group (integer, 0 thru 65535). The default is group 0.

Examples:

The following command changes the success rate to 75% for addresses in group 0.

system backup successrate 75

The following command disables the pinging of addresses in group 1.

system backup successrate 0 1

SYSTEM BLOCKNETBIOS
The router can block all netbios and netbui requests from being sent over the wan. This command sets the
defaultvalue for the entire router when a remote router is defined.

system blockNetBIOS Default yes|no

After a remote device is deÞned, the command remote blockNetBIOS on|off <remoteName> can enable or disable
this feature.

SYSTEM COMMUNITY
Enhances SNMP security by allowing the user to change the SNMP community name from its default value of
ÒpublicÓ to a different value. Refer to Controlling Remote Management, on page 101.

Note: The command system community (with no value) will display the current community name.

system community [<SNMP community name>]

SNMP community name String of up to 40 characters.

Example 1: system community fred

Example 2: system community

SYSTEM DEFAULTMODEM
Lists the default modem settings. The modem settings are for the backup V.90 modem connected to the console
port.

To change the modem settings, use the system modem command (page 223). For more information on the Dial
Backup option, see page 149.

system defaultmodem

Chapter 8. Command Reference 217

SYSTEM DELBOOTPSERVER
Removes an address from the BootP server list. (The BootP server list is also the DHCP relay list.)

To remove all addresses from the list, use system delbootpserver all.

Addresses can also be removed from the list using the dhcp delrelay command (page 313). To add an address to
the list, use the dhcp addrelay command (page 310).

system delbootpServer <ipaddr> | all

ipaddr IP address of the server (4 decimals separated by periods).

all Removes all addresses from the BootP server list.

Examples:

system delbootpServer 128.1.210.64

system delbootpServer all

SYSTEM DELHOSTMAPPING
Undoes an IP address/host translation (remapping) range that was previously established with the command
remote addHostMapping on a per-systemwide basis.

system delHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr>

Þrst private addr First IP address in the range of IP address, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

second private addr Last address in the range of IP address, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Þrst public addr DeÞnes the range of public IP addresses, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

The rest of the range is computed automatically.

Example: system delHostMapping 192.168.207.40 192.168.207.49 10.1.1.7

SYSTEM DELHTTPFILTER
Deletes an address filter created by the system addHTTPFilter command. To see the address range of the filter,
use the command system list.

system delHTTPFilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

first ip addr First IP address of the range.

last ip addr Last IP address of the range. May be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

LAN Local Ethernet LAN.

Example:

218 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 system delHTTPFilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

SYSTEM DELIPROUTINGTABLE
Deletes a range of addresses that reference a virtual routing table or deletes the entire virtual routing table.

To list the virtual routing tables, use the iproutes command (page 191).

For more information, see Virtual Routing Tables, on page 78.

system delIPRoutingTable ALL | <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] <tablename>

ALL Deletes the virtual routing table. Both the table definition and all routes in the table are deleted.

first ip addr First IP address of the range to be deleted (4 decimals separated by periods).

last ip addr Last IP address of the range to be deleted (4 decimals separated by periods). This parameter
may be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

tablename Name of the virtual routing table (character string).

Examples:

Deletes two IP addresses from the address range that references routing table ROSA:
system delIPRoutingTable 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.6 ROSA

Deletes the virtual routing table ROSA:

system delIPRoutingTable all ROSA

SYSTEM DELSERVER
Deletes an entry created by the system addServer command (page 209).

system delServer <action> <protocol> <first port> [<last port> [<first private port>]]

action One of the following command actions:

ipaddr Selects the host with this IP address as server (4 decimals separated by periods).
discard Discards the incoming server request.
me Sends the incoming server request to the local router, regardless of its IP address.

protocol Protocol used by the selected server.

protocolid Numeric protocol ID.
tcp TCP only.
udp UDP only.
all All protocols.

first port First or only port as seen by the remote end. Port used by the selected server
portid Numeric value between 0 and 65,535. A numeric value of 0 matches any port.
ftp FTP port.
telnet Telnet port.
smtp SMTP port.
sntp SNTP port.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 219

 http HTTP port.
tftp TFTP port.
all All ports.

last port Optional last port in the range of ports as seen by the remote end for the server on the LAN.

first private port If specified, this is a port remapping of the incoming request from the remote end.

Example:

system delServer 192.168.1.5 tcp smtp

SYSTEM DELSNMPFILTER
Deletes the client range previously defined by the command system addsnmpfilter.

Note 1: This command does not require a reboot and is effective immediately.

Note 2: To list the range of allowed clients, use the command system list when you are logged in with read and
write permission (be sure to log in with password).

system delSNMPFilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

Þrst ip addr First IP address of the client range.

last ip addr Last IP address of the client range; may be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

LAN Local Ethernet LAN.

Example: system delsnmpfilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

SYSTEM DELSYSLOGFILTER
Deletes the Syslog address filter.To see the address range of the filter, use the command system list. To define a
new Syslog address filter, use the command system addSyslogFilter (page 210).

Note: This command does not require a reboot; it takes effect immediately.

system delSyslogFilter <firstipaddr> <lastipaddr> | LAN

first ip addr First IP address of the range.

last ip addr Last IP address of the range. May be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

LAN Local Ethernet LAN.

Example:

system delSyslogFilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

220 Chapter 8. Command Reference

SYSTEM DELSYSLOGSERVER
Removes an address from the list of Syslog servers. To see the server addresses, use the command system list. To
specify a new Syslog server address, use the command system addSyslogServer (page 211).

Note: This command does not require a reboot; it takes effect immediately.

system delSyslogServer <ipaddr>

ipaddr IP address to be removed from the Syslog server address list.

Example:

system delSyslogServer 192.168.1.5

SYSTEM DELTELNETFILTER
Deletes the client range previously defined by the command system addTelnetFilter.

Note 1: This command does not require a reboot and is effective immediately.

Note 2: To list the range of allowed clients, use the command system list when logged in with read and write
permission (be sure to log in with password).

system delTelnetFilter <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] | LAN

Þrst ip addr First IP address in the client range.

last ip addr Last IP address in the client range; may be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

LAN Local Ethernet LAN.

Example: system deltelnetfilter 192.168.1.5 192.168.1.12

SYSTEM DELUDPRELAY
Deletes the port range that was previously enabled by the command system addUDPrelay.

system delUDPrelay <ipaddr> <first port>| all [<last port>]

ipaddr IP address of the server.

Þrst port First port in the UDP port range to be deleted.

all Deletes all existing UDP ports.

last port Last port in the UDP port range to be deleted.

Example: system delUDPrelay 192.168.1.5 all

Chapter 8. Command Reference 221

SYSTEM HISTORY
Displays the routerÕs most recent console log.

system history

Example: system history

SYSTEM HTTPPORT
Manages HTTP port access including disabling and re-enabling HTTP port access or redefining the HTTP port for
security reasons. Refer to Chapter 4. Controlling Remote Management on page 101.

Note: This command requires a save and reboot to take effect.

system httpport default | disabled | <port>

default Restores the port value to the default value 80 and re-enables the port.

disabled Disables the HTTP port.

port Defines a new HTTP port number. Use this option to restrict remote access.

Examples:

system httpport default

system httpport disabled

system httpport 3333

SYSTEM LIST
Lists the system settings for the target router.

system list

Example:

# system list
GENERAL INFORMATION FOR <SOHO>
System started on................... 9/8/2000 at 13:29
Authentication override............. none
WAN to WAN Forwarding............... no
Block NetBIOS Default............... no
BOOTP/DHCP Server address........... none
Telnet Port......................... default (23)
Telnet Clients...................... all
SNMP Port........................... default (161)
SNMP Clients........................ all
HTTP Port........................... default (80)
HTTP Clients........................ all

222 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 Syslog Port......................... default (514)
Allowed Syslog Servers.............. all
Default Syslog Servers.............. none
System message:
Security timer...................... 30 minutes
One WAN Dial UP..................... no

SYSTEM LOG
Allows logging of the routerÕs activity in a Telnet session.

system log start | stop | status

start Used to monitor router activity at all times.

Example: system log start

stop Used to discontinue the logging utility at the console.

Example: system log stop

status Used to Þnd out if other users (yourself included) are using this utility.

Example: system log status

SYSTEM MODEM
Changes the selected modem setting. The modem settings are for the backup V.90 modem connected to the
console port.

For more information on the Dial Backup option, see page 149.

system modem reset | escape | init | offhook | dial | answer | hangup <string>

dial The two possible strings for the dial setting are ATDT for tone dialing or ATDP for pulse dialing.
The default is tone dialing.

Examples:

The following command changes the string for the init setting:

system modem init ATS0=0Q0V1&C2&D3&K1X4&H1&I0S12=20

The following command selects pulse dialing:

system modem dial ATDP

SYSTEM MOVEIPROUTINGTABLE
Moves a range of IP addresses to another virtual routing table. The command first looks at the address ranges
defined for other virtual routing tables, searching for the addresses to be moved. If it finds addresses to be moved,

Chapter 8. Command Reference 223

it deletes them from the address ranges for the other virtual routing tables. The command then adds the specified
address range to the virtual routing table named on the command.

To list the routes in the virtual routing tables, use the iproutes command (page 191) or the remote listiproutes
command (page 272).

For more information, see Virtual Routing Tables, on page 78.

system moveIPRoutingTable <first ip addr> [<last ip addr>] <tablename>

first ip addr First IP address of the range to be moved (4 decimals separated by periods).

last ip addr Last IP address of the range to be moved (4 decimals separated by periods). This parameter
may be omitted if the range contains only one IP address.

tablename Name of the virtual routing table to be assigned the address range (character string). The virtual
routing table may be new or it may already exist.

Example:

Suppose you want all packets with source addresses in the range 192.168.254.11 through 192.168.254.20 to
be routed using virtual routing table MIGUEL. Addresses in that range may already be assigned to other
virtual routing tables. Therefore, to delete the addresses from any other virtual routing tables and assign the
address range to MIGUEL, you enter this command:

system moveIPRoutingTable 192.168.254.11 192.168.254.20 MIGUEL

SYSTEM MSG
Sets a message that is saved in the target router you are configuring.

system msg <message>

message Message (character string. Space characters are not allowed within the message; you may use
underscore characters instead. If you do not enter a message, the current message is displayed.
The message may be no more than 255 characters.

Example: system msg Configured _on_ 10/21/98

SYSTEM NAME
Sets the name for the target router that you are configuring. You must assign a name to the target router. This
name is sent to a remote router during PAP/CHAP authentication.

system name <name>

name Name of the target router (character string). Space characters are not allowed within the name;
you may use underscore characters instead. (The system name is a ÒwordÓ when exchanged
with PAP/CHAP.) If you do not enter a name, the current name of the router is displayed. If you
type anything after system name, the characters will be taken as the new name.

224 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 Note: The system name is case sensitive and may be no more than 50 characters.

Example: system name Router1

SYSTEM ONEWANDIALUP
This command is useful when security concerns dictate than the router have only one connection active at a time.
For example, the command can prevent from connecting to the Internet and to another location such as your
company at the same time. The command system oneWANdialup on forces the router to have no more than one
connection to a remote entry active at one time. (Multiple links to the same remote are allowed.)

A connection is only generated when data is forwarded to the remote router (dial-on-demand); Permanent links
cannot be automatically generated.

At system startup time, the router examines each remote entry. If if finds one remote enabled, it leaves the remote
enabled. If it finds more than one remote entry enabled, then it disables every entry that does not have a protocol
of PPP or PPPLLC. It sets the minimum number of active links (remote minLink) to 0 (zero) on the enabled
entries; if the command did not perform this function, connections to multiple destinations would not be possible
(since the link to the destination with minLink=non-zero would be active).

The command allows multiple connections to the SAME location and supports PPP Mult-link protocol.

This system oneWANdialup command complements the system command that controls WAN-to-WAN
forwarding. That command allows multiple connections to different locations to be active at the same time but
stops traffic from passing from one WAN connection to another.

system oneWANdialup on|off

on Enables only one active connection at a time to a remote entry.

off Disables system oneWANdialup.

Example: system oneWANdialup on

SYSTEM PASSWD
Sets the system authentication password for the target router that is used when the router connects to other routers
or is challenged by them. This password is a default password used for all remote sites unless a unique password
is explicitly defined for connecting to a remote router with the remote setOurPasswd command.

system passwd <password>

password Authentication password of the target router.

Note: The password is case-sensitive and should be no more than 40 characters.

Example: system passwd chwgn1

Chapter 8. Command Reference 225

SYSTEM SECURITYTIMER
Automatically logs out a Telnet or console user out of privileged mode when no typing has occurred for 10
minutes. This command allows the user to change the 10-minute default to a different value.

system securityTimer <minutes>

minutes Length of time in minutes.

Auto logout can be disabled by setting the <minutes> to zero.

Example: system securityTimer 15

SYSTEM SNMPPORT
Manages SNMP port access including disabling SNMP, reestablishing SNMP services, or redefining the SNMP
port for security reasons. Refer to Chapter 4. Controlling Remote Management on page 101.

Note: This command requires a save and reboot to take effect.

system snmpport default | disabled | <port>

default Restores the port value to the default value 161 and re-enables the port.

disabled Disables remote SNMP management.

port Defines a new SNMP port number. Use this option to restrict remote access.

Examples:

system snmpport default

system snmpport disabled

system snmpport 3333

SYSTEM SUPPORTTRACE
Lets you capture to a file all the configuration data that Technical Support may need to investigate configuration
problems. This exhaustive list command incorporates the following commands:

¥ system history

¥ vers

¥ mem

¥ system list

¥ eth list

¥ dhcp list (if DHCP is enabled)

¥ remote list

¥ ifs

226 Chapter 8. Command Reference

¥ bi (if bridging is enabled)

¥ ipifs

¥ iproutes

¥ ipxroutes

system supporttrace

Example: system supporttrace

SYSTEM SYSLOGPORT
Manages Syslog port access including disabling and re-enabling the Syslog port or redefining the Syslog port for
security reasons. For more information on configuring the router as a Syslog client, see page 153.

Note: This command requires a save and reboot to take effect.

system syslogport default | disabled | <port>

default Restores the port value to the default value 514 and re-enables the port.

disabled Disables the Syslog port.

port Defines a new Syslog port number. Use this option to restrict remote access.

Examples:

system syslogport default

system syslogport disabled

system syslogport 3333

SYSTEM TELNETPORT
The router has a built-in Telnet server. This command is used to specify which routerÕs TCP port is to receive a
Telnet connection.

Note: This command requires a save and reboot to take effect.

system telnetport default|disabled|<port>

default The default value is 23.

disabled The router will not accept any incoming TCP request.

port Port number of the Ethernet LAN. It is recommended that this number be > 2048 if not 0
(disabled) or 23 (default).

Chapter 8. Command Reference 227

Examples: system telnetport default

system telnetport disabled

system telnetport 3333`

SYSTEM WAN2WANFORWARDING
Allows the user to manage WAN-to-WAN forwarding of data from one WAN link to another.
For example, an employee uses the router at home to access both a company network and the Internet at the same
time, and the company does not want its information to pass to the Internet, then this command is useful for
disabling WAN-to-WAN forwarding.

system wan2wanforwarding on|off

on Allows data to be forwarded from one WAN link to another WAN link.

off Stops data from being forwarded from one WAN link to another WAN link.

Example: system wan2wanforwarding on

228 Chapter 8. Command Reference

ETH (Target Router Ethernet LAN Bridging and Routing)
The following commands allow you to configure the Ethernet interfaces in your router. You can:

¥ Set the Ethernet LAN IP address

¥ Define logical interfaces to provide service to multiple IP subnets

¥ Manage the contents of the default routing table and any virtual routing tables

¥ Enable and disable IP routing

¥ List the current configuration settings

Note: In general, these commands require a save and reboot before they take effect. However, changes made to
IP filters and to virtual routing tables take effect immediately; the changes are lost, though, if they are not saved
before the next reboot.

ETH ?
Lists the supported keywords.

eth ?

Example:

# eth ?
Ethernet commands:

? add delete
br ip ipx
list mtu

# eth ip ?
eth ip sub-commands
? addr ripmulticast
options enable disable
firewall directedBcast addroute
delroute defgateway bindRoute
unbindRoute filter

ETH ADD
Adds a logical interface onto an Ethernet port so that the router can provide service to multiple IP subnets. The eth
add command defines the port number and logical interface number. You should then use an eth ip addr
command to define the IP subnet that uses the logical interface. For more information, see Multiple IP Subnets, on
page 77.

A logical interface 0 always exists for Ethernet port 0 (and for port 1 in a dual-port router); logical interface 0
cannot be deleted.

Once defined, routes and filters can be created for the new logical interface using the other eth commands in this
section. To list the currently defined logical interfaces, use the eth list command (page 248). To remove a logical
interface, use an eth delete command (page 230).

Chapter 8. Command Reference 229

Note: This command requires a save and reboot before it takes effect.

eth add <port#>:<logical#>

port# Ethernet interface (0 for a single-port router; 0 or 1 for a dual-port router).

logical# New logical interface number. It cannot be 0 because logical interface 0 always exists.

Example: eth add 0:1

ETH DELETE
Deletes a logical interface from an Ethernet port. For more information, see Multiple IP Subnets, on page 77

When you delete a logical interface, all information defined for that interface, such as routes and filters, is deleted
automatically.

To list all currently defined logical interfaces, use the eth list command (page 248).

Note: Logical interface 0 cannot be deleted.

Note: This command takes effect immediately; however, if the change is not saved before the next reboot, the
deletion is lost and the deleted interface reappears after the reboot.

eth delete <port#>:<logical#>

port# Ethernet interface (0 for a single-port router; 0 or 1 for a dual-port router).

logical# Logical interface number. (It cannot be 0.)

Example: eth delete 0:1

ETH IP ADDHOSTMAPPING
Remaps a range of local LAN IP addresses to a range of public IP addresses on a per-interface basis. These local
addresses are mapped one-to-one to the public addresses. For more information, see Host Remapping, on page 95.

Note: The range of public IP addresses is deÞned by <Þrst public addr> only. The rest of the range is computed
automatically (from <Þrst public addr> to <Þrst public addr> + number of addresses remapped - 1) inclusive.

eth ip addHostMapping <first private addr><second private addr><first public addr><interface>>

first private addr First IP address in the range of IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

second private addr Last address in the range of IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

first public addr DeÞnes the range of public IP addresses (4 decimals separated by periods). The rest of the
range is computed automatically.

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet
interface.

230 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number
(0 or 1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number
and the logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

eth ip addHostMapping 192.168.207.40 192.168.207.49 10.0.20.11 1

ETH IP ADDR
Defines the IP address and subnet mask for an Ethernet port or logical interface.

eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<interface>]

ipaddr Ethernet LAN IP address (4 decimals separated by periods.)

ipnetmask IP network mask (4 decimals separated by periods.)

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Examples:

The following command sets the IP address and subnet mask for the default Ethernet interface (0:0).

eth ip addr 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0

The following command sets the IP address and subnet mask for logical interface 1 on Ethernet port 0.

eth ip addr 10.0.27.1 255.255.255.0 0:1

ETH IP ADDROUTE
Adds a route to the default routing table for the Ethernet interface.

This command is needed only if the system does not support RIP (see IP (RIP) Protocol Controls, on page 81 and
the eth ip options command, on page 243).

Note: This command requires a save and reboot before it takes effect.

eth ip addRoute <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> <gateway> <hops> [<interface>]

ipaddr Ethernet LAN IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

ipnetmask IP network mask (4 decimals separated by periods).

Chapter 8. Command Reference 231

gateway IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

hops Number of routers through which the packet must go to get to its destination.

interface Ethernet interface through which the packet is sent out. This parameter may be omitted if the
router has only one Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Examples:

The following command adds a route to the default routing table for the default Ethernet interface (0:0).

eth ip addRoute 10.1.2.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.17 1

The following command adds a route to the default routing table for logical interface 1 on Ethernet port 0.

eth ip addRoute 10.1.3.0 255.255.255.0 10.0.27.20 1 0:1

ETH IP ADDSERVER
This Network Address Translation (NAT) command adds a serverÕs IP address (on the LAN) associated with this
interface for a particular protocol. For more information, see Network Address Translation (NAT), on page 91.

eth ip addServer <action> <protocol> <first port> [<last port> [<first private port>]] <interface>

action One of the following command actions:

ipaddr Selects the host with this IP address as server (4 decimals separated by periods).
discard Discards the incoming server request.
me Sends the incoming server request to the local router, regardless of its IP address.

protocol Protocol used by the selected server.

protocolid Numeric protocol ID.
tcp TCP only.
udp UDP only.
all All protocols.

first port First or only port as seen by the Ethernet interface. Port used by the selected server
portid Numeric value between 0 and 65,535. A numeric value of 0 matches any port.
ftp FTP port.
telnet Telnet port.
smtp SMTP port.
sntp SNTP port.
http HTTP port.
tftp TFTP port.
all All ports.

last port Optional last port in the range of ports as seen by the Ethernet interface for the server on the
LAN.

first private port If specified, this is a port remapping of the incoming request from the Ethernet interface.

232 Chapter 8. Command Reference

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

eth ip addServer 192.168.1.5 tcp smtp 1

eth ip addServer 192.168.1.10 tcp 9000 9000 telnet 0

ETH IP BINDROUTE
Adds an Ethernet route to the named IP virtual routing table.

Duplicate routes are not allowed within a routing table. However, identical routes may be added to different
routing tables. For example, the same route may be added to a virtual routing table and to the default routing table.

To list the routes, use the iproutes command, page 191. To remove an Ethernet route from a virtual routing table,
use the eth ip unbindRoute command, page 246.

Note: A route change in an IP virtual routing table takes effect immediately. However, the change is lost if it is
not saved before the next reboot.

eth ip bindRoute <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> <hops> [<gateway>] <tablename> [<interface>]

ipaddr Ethernet LAN IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

ipnetmask IP network mask (4 decimals separated by periods).

hops Number of routers through which the packet must go to get to its destination.

gateway IP address of the gateway (4 decimals separated by periods).

tablename IP virtual routing table to which the route is added.

interface Ethernet interface through which the packet is sent out. This parameter may be omitted if the
router has only one Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

The following commands add a route for IP address 10.1.2.0/255.255.255.0 to four routing tables: ROSA,
MIGUEL, FRANCISCO, and the default routing table. The first two routes are for Ethernet interface 0:1 and
use gateway 192.168.252.9; the second two are for the default Ethernet interface (0:0) and, therefore, specify
another gateway (192.168.252.7).

Chapter 8. Command Reference 233

 eth ip bindRoute 10.1.3.0 255.255.255.0 1 192.168.252.9 ROSA 0:1

eth ip bindRoute 10.1.3.0 255.255.255.0 1 192.168.252.9 MIGUEL 0:1

eth ip bindRoute 10.1.3.0 255.255.255.0 1 192.168.252.7 FRANCISCO

eth ip addRoute 10.1.3.0 255.255.255.0 1 192.168.252.7

ETH IP DEFGATEWAY
Assigns an Ethernet default gateway for packets whose destination address does not have a route defined.

This setting is most useful when IP routing is not enabled, in which case the system acts as an IP host (i.e., an end
system, as opposed to an IP router).

Note: This command requires a save and reboot before it takes effect.

Note: The following command is recommended instead of the eth ip defgateway command. It sends packets for
all IP addresses to the specified gateway:

eth ip addRoute 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 <gateway> 1

eth ip defgateway <ipaddr> [<interface>]

ipaddr Ethernet LAN IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.
If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.
To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and
the logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example: eth ip defgateway 192.168.1.1

ETH IP DELHOSTMAPPING
Undoes an IP address/ host translation (remapping) range that was previously established with the command eth
ip addHostMapping on a per-interface basis (page 230). For more information, see Host Remapping, on page 95.

eth ip delHostMapping <Þrst private addr> <second private addr> <Þrst public addr> <interface>

first private addr First IP address in the range of IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

second private addr Last address in the range of IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

first public addr DeÞnes the range of public IP addresses (4 decimals separated by periods). The rest of the
range is computed automatically.

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet
interface.

234 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number
(0 or 1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number
and the logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

eth ip delHostMapping 192.168.207.40 192.168.207.49 10.0.20.11 1

ETH IP DELROUTE
Removes a route from the default routing table that was added using the eth ip addroute command.

The route to be deleted is identified by its IP address and mask and its Ethernet interface. To see the remaining
routes, use the iproutes command (page 191).

Note: This command requires a save and reboot before it takes effect.

eth ip delRoute <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<interface>]

ipaddr Ethernet LAN IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

ipnetmask IP network mask (4 decimals separated by periods).

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Examples:

The following command deletes the route for IP address 10.9.2.0/255.255.255.0 for the default Ethernet
interface (0:0).

eth ip delRoute 10.9.2.0 255.255.255.0

The following command deletes the route for IP address 10.1.3.0/255.255.255.0 for the Ethernet interface 0:1.

eth ip delRoute 10.1.3.0 255.255.255.0 0:1

ETH IP DELSERVER
Deletes an entry created by the eth ip addServer command (page 232).

eth ip delServer <action> <protocol> <first port> [<last port> [<first private port>]] <interface>

action One of the following command actions:

ipaddr Selects the host with this IP address as server (4 decimals separated by periods).
discard Discards the incoming server request.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 235

 me Sends the incoming server request to the local router, regardless of its IP address.

protocol Protocol used by the selected server.

protocolid Numeric protocol ID.
tcp TCP only.
udp UDP only.
all All protocols.

first port First or only port as seen by the Ethernet interface. Port used by the selected server
portid Numeric value between 0 and 65,535. A numeric value of 0 matches any port.
ftp FTP port.
telnet Telnet port.
smtp SMTP port.
sntp SNTP port.
http HTTP port.
tftp TFTP port.
all All ports.

last port Optional last port in the range of ports as seen by the Ethernet interface for the server on the
LAN.

first private port If specified, this is a port remapping of the incoming request from the Ethernet interface.

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

eth ip delServer 192.168.1.5 tcp ftp 0

ETH IP DIRECTEDBCAST
Enables or disables the forwarding of packets sent to the network prefix-directed broadcast address of an interface.

A network prefix-directed broadcast address is the broadcast address for a particular network. For example, a
networkÕs IP address is 192.168.254.0 and its mask is 255.255.255.0. Its network prefix-directed broadcast
address is 192.168.254.255.

eth ip directedbcast on | off

on Enables the forwarding of packets.

off Disables the forwarding of packets.

Example: eth ip directedbcast on

236 Chapter 8. Command Reference

ETH IP DISABLE
Disables IP routing across the Ethernet LAN. This commands acts as a master switch allowing you to disable all
IP routing for testing or control purposes.

Note: This command requires a save and reboot before it is effective.

eth ip disable

Example: eth ip disable

ETH IP ENABLE
Enables IP routing across the Ethernet LAN. This command acts as a master switch allowing you to re-enable all
IP routing.

Note: This command requires a save and reboot before it is effective.

eth ip enable

Example: eth ip enable

ETH IP FILTER
Manages the IP filters for the Ethernet interface(s). The filters are used to screen IP packets.

Each Ethernet interface can have its own set of filters. The intended interface is designated at the end of the filter
command. If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the interface is designated
by its port number (0 or 1). If logical interfaces have been defined to provide service to multiple IP subnets, the
logical interface number is also specified (port #:<logical #, for example, 0:1).

The set of filters for an interface can be of three types: Input, Forward, and Output. For more information on how
these three types of filters are applied, refer to Chapter 5. IP Filtering on page 119.

Note: IP filters take effect immediately upon entry. They can even affect the current connection that you are using
to enter commands. Unlike other configuration changes, you do not need to save and reboot.

eth ip filter <command> <type> <action> [<parameters>] [<interface>]

The following commands are provided for managing IP filters for an Ethernet interface:

eth ip filter append [<line number>] <type> <action> [<parameters>] [<interface>]

Appends a filter to the list of filters for this <type> and <interface>. The filter is specified by the
<action> and optional <parameters>.

If no line number is specified, the filter is appended to the end of the list; otherwise, it is appended after
the specified line. To see the line numbers, use the eth ip filter list command. Filters are used in the
order they appear in their list.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 237

 eth ip filter insert <type> <action> <parameters> [<interface>]

Inserts a filter in the list of filters for this <type> and <interface>. The filter is specified by the <action>
and optional <parameters>.

If no line number is specified, the filter is inserted at the beginning of the list; otherwise, it is inserted
before the specified line. To see the line numbers, use the eth ip filter list command. Filters are used in
the order they appear in their list.

eth ip filter delete <type> <action> <parameters> [<interface>]

Deletes the first filter that matches the filter specified on the command.

eth ip filter flush [<first line> [<last line>]] <type> [<interface>]

Deletes a range of filters from the list for this <type> and <interface>.

If no line numbers are specified, all filters in the list are deleted. If only the first line number is specified,
all filters from that line to the end are deleted. To see the line numbers, use the eth ip filter list
command. Filters are used in the order they appear in their list.

eth ip filter clear [<first line> [<last line>]] [<type>] <clear arg> [<interface>]

Resets the counters for the specified filters. A filter has a counter if the -c parameter was specified when
the filter was defined.

You can specify the filters whose counters are to be reset by their line number range and type (input,
output, or forward). If no type is specified, the counters for all filters for the interface are reset. If no line
numbers are specified, the counters for all filters for that type and interface are reset. If only the first line
number is specified, all counters for filters from that line to the end of the list are reset. To see the line
numbers and counters, use the eth ip filter list command.

eth ip filter check <type> <parameters> [<interface>]

Checks the action that would be taken if a packet with the specified parameters was compared with the
list of filters defined for the specified type and interface. For example, the command
eth ip filter check input -p TCP 1
would check what action (accept, drop, reject, inipsec, outipsec) would be taken for a TCP packet after it
was compared with the list of input filters defined for port 1.

eth ip filter list <type> [<interface>]

Lists all filters of the specified <type> defined for the specified <interface>.

eth ip filter watch <on | off> [-q | -v] [<interface>]

Turns on or turns off the console watch for the interface. If the watch is on, a message is printed to the
console serial port when a packet is dropped or rejected. (The message is also sent to any Syslog servers;
see Syslog Client, on page 153.)

However, if the parameter -q (quiet) was specified for a filter, no message is printed when that filter
matches a packet. If the parameter -v (verbose) was specified for a filter, a message is printed whenever
that filter matches a packet, regardless of the filter action.

To see the messages, Telnet to the router and enter system log start. The watch does not continue after a
reboot; to resume the watch after a reboot, you must enter the eth ip filter watch on command again.

238 Chapter 8. Command Reference

The Þlter type speciÞes at which point the Þlter is compared to the IP packet (see the illustration under IP Filtering,
on page 119):
input Filter is used when the packet enters the interface, before any IP address translation is
performed.

forward Filter is used, after any IP address translation, but before routing is performed.

output Filter is used after routing and IP address translation have been performed, just before the
packet is sent out an interface.

If the packet matches the Þlter, the speciÞed action is performed:

accept The packet is allowed to proceed for further processing.

drop The packet is discarded, without sending an ICMP (Internet Control Management Protocol)
error message.

reject The packet is discarded and an ICMP error message is returned to the sender.

inipsec The packet is passed to IPSec for decrypting. The filter is intended to match packets coming
from the other IPSec gateway. Although filters are the mechanism by which packets are passed
to IPSec, it is recommended that you use IKE to manage your IP Security (see IPSec (Internet
Protocol Security), on page 134).

outipsec The packet is passed to IPSec so it can be encrypted and sent to the other IPSec gateway. The
filter is intended to match packets coming from the local protected network. Although filters are
the mechanism by which packets are passed to IPSec, it is recommended that you use IKE to
manage your IP Security (see IPSec (Internet Protocol Security), on page 134).

The following parameters specify the characteristics that an IP packet must have in order to match the Þlter. A Þlter
can require any or all of these characteristics.
-p <protocol> | TCP | UDP | ICMP
The packet must have the specified protocol. If no protocol is specified, the filter matches every protocol.

-sa <first source ip addr>[:<last source ip addr>]

The packet must have a source IP address within the specified address range. If only one address is specified,
the packet must have that source IP address. If no source IP address is specified, the filter matches any
address in the range 0.0.0.0:255.255.255.255.

-sm <source ip mask>

The filter uses the specified mask when comparing the <first source ip addr>...<last source ip addr> with the
source IP address in the IP packet. If no source mask is specified, the mask used is 255.255.255.255.

-sp <ICMP type> | <first source port>[:<last source port>]

The packet must have a source port that matches the specified ICMP type or that is within the specified port
range. If only one port is specified, the packet must have that source port. If no source port is specified, the
filter matches any source port in the range 0:0xffff.

-da <first dest ip addr>[:<last dest ip addr>]

The packet must have a destination IP address within the specified address range. If only one address is
specified, the packet must have that destination IP address. If no destination IP address is specified, the filter
matches any address in the range 0.0.0.0:255.255.255.255.

-dm <dest ip mask>

The filter uses the specified mask when comparing the <first dest ip addr>...<last dest ip addr> with the
destination IP address in the IP packet. If no destination mask is specified, the mask used is 255.255.255.255.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 239

 -dp <ICMP type> | <first dest port>[:<last dest port>]
The packet must have a destination port that matches the specified ICMP type or that is within the specified
port range. If only one port is specified, the packet must have that destination port. If no destination port is
specified, the filter matches any destination port in the range 0:0xffff.

-tcp syn|ack|noflag|rst
If the IP packet is a TCP packet, the filter matches the packet only if the packet flag settings are as specified.
If no -tcp option is specified for the filter, flag settings are not checked.

Note: You may specify more than one -tcp option for the IP filter.

The syn, ack, and noflag settings work together as follows:

- Specify -tcp syn if the TCP SYN flag must be set.
- Specify -tcp ack if the TCP ACK flag must be set.
- Specify -tcp noflag if neither the SYN flag nor the ACK flag can be set.
For example, for the IP filter to match the initiation of a TCP connection, specify -tcp syn. The filter will
match TCP packets that have the TCP SYN flag set but not the TCP ACK flag set. For the filter to match the
response to initiation of a TCP connection, specify -tcp syn and -tcp ack. The filter will match only TCP
packets with both the TCP SYN and TCP ACK flags set.

The -tcp rst setting is independent of the others; if you specify -tcp rst for the filter, the filter matches every
TCP packet with the TCP RESET flag set, regardless of the other flag settings. For example, for the filter to
match packets for ÒestablishedÓ connections, you would specify both -tcp rst and -tcp ack so that the filter is
applied to every TCP packet that has either the RESET flag or the ACK flag set.

The following parameters request additional filter options.

-b
This option requests that this filter be compared twice with each packet. The first time the source filter
information is matched against the source information in the IP packet and the destination filter information is
matched against the destination information in the IP packet. The second time the source filter information is
matched against the destination information in the IP packet and the destination filter information is matched
against the source information in the IP packet.

-c <count of times rule used>

This option requests a counter for this filter. If specified, a count is kept of how many IP packets have
matched this filter since the router was rebooted. To see the current count for a filter, use the eth ip filter list
command. To clear a counter, use the eth ip filter clear command.

-ipsec <IPSec record name>

Use this option when the action specified is inipsec or outipsec. It specifies the IPSec Security Association
that uses the filter.

-q or -v

Specify one of these options to determine when watch messages are sent for this filter. The messages are sent
to the console serial port (and to any Syslog servers; see page 153).

If neither -q or -v are specified for the filter, and an eth ip filter watch on command is entered for the
interface, a message is sent each time this filter causes a packet to be dropped or rejected.

If -q (quiet) is specified, no messages are printed for this filter, even if the filter causes a packet to be dropped
or rejected.

240 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 If -v (verbose) is specified, a message is printed every time this filter matches a packet, regardless of the filter
action.

The optional interface determines which Ethernet interface the Þlter applies to.
If the router has only one Ethernet interface, <interface> may be omitted.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (that is, a dual-port router), you must specify the port by its
number (0 or 1).

If logical interfaces have been defined for the physical Ethernet interface, the port number and the logical
interface number are specified (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Examples:

eth ip filter flush input 0

This command deletes all IP filters of type ÒInputÓ on the Ethernet interface 0.

eth ip filter append forward deny

This command denies the forwarding of all IP traffic. This IP filter is useful as the ÒlastÓ IP filter in a default
action.

ETH IP FIREWALL
The router supports IP Internet Firewall Filtering to prevent unauthorized access to your system and network
resources from the Internet. This filter discards packets received from the WAN that have a source IP address
recognized as a local LAN address. This command sets Ethernet Firewall Filtering on or off and allows you to list
the active state.

Note 1: This command requires a save and reboot before it takes effect.

Note 2: To perform Firewall Filtering, IP routing must be enabled. For more information, see Enable/Disable
Internet Firewall Filtering, on page 80.

eth ip firewall on | off | list

on Sets Þrewall Þltering on. IP routing must also be enabled for Þltering to be performed.

off Sets Þrewall Þltering off.

list Lists the current status of Þrewall Þltering.

Example: # eth ip firewall list

The Internet firewall filter is currently on.
0 offending packets were filtered out.

ETH IP MGMT
This command assigns to an Ethernet interface an IP address which is to be used for management purposes only
and not for IP address translation. This management IP address is generally a private network address used solely
by the ISP.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 241

The management IP address is separate from the IP address used for IP address translation. The IP address used
for address translation is generally a public IP address valid on the Internet. It is set by the eth ip addr command
(page 231).

Note: The management address is not effective until after the next save and reboot.

Note: To use the management address as the source address for a ping, you must specify it using the -I option on
the ping command (page 194). For example, to use management address 192.168.1.2 when pinging destination
address 192.168.100.100, specify:
ping -I 192.168.1.2 192.168.100.100

Note: To use the management address as the source address for a copy, you must specify both the source and
destination addresses on the copy command (page 200).

To list the current management address for the Ethernet interface, if any, use the eth list command (page 248). To
set a management address for the WAN interface, see remote setMgmtIpAddr (page 281).

eth ip mgmt <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<interface>]

ipaddr IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

ipnetmask IP subnet mask (4 decimals separated by periods).

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

# eth ip mgmt 10.0.0.2 255.255.255.0 0:1

# save
# reboot

ETH IP MTU
Sets the maximum transfer unit for the Ethernet interface. The default is 1500 bytes.

You can set the MTU size to less than 1500 bytes, but you cannot set the MTU to greater than 1500 bytes, even if
you specify a larger value on an eth ip mtu command. (RFC 1042 recommends 1500 bytes as the maximum MTU
for an Ethernet network.)

To see the current MTU size for an interface that has IP enabled, use the ipifs command (page 191).

eth ip mtu <size> [<interface>]

size Maximum number of bytes that can be transferred as a unit.

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.

242 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

The following command decreases the MTU size for Ethernet interface 0:1 to 1400 bytes.

eth ip mtu 1400 0:1

ETH IP OPTIONS
RIP is a protocol used for exchanging IP routing information among routers. The following RIP options allow you
to set IP routing information protocol controls on the local Ethernet LAN. (See IP (RIP) Protocol Controls, on
page 81)

Note: This command requires a save and reboot before it takes effect.

eth ip options <option> on | off [<interface>]

option Must be one of the following:

rxrip Receive and process IP RIP-1 compatible and RIP-2 broadcast packets from the Ethernet LAN.
Also receive and process RIP-2 packets that are multicast as deÞned by the eth ip ripmulticast
command. Set this option if the local router is to discover route information from the Ethernet
LAN. The default is on.

rxrip1 Receive and process RIP-1 packets only.

rxrip2 Receive and process RIP-2 packets only.

rxdef Receive the default route address from the Ethernet LAN. The default is on. This option is
useful if you do not want to conÞgure your router with a default route.

txrip Transmit RIP-1 compatible broadcast packets and RIP-2 multicast packets over the Ethernet
LAN. The default is on.

txrip1 Transmit broadcast RIP-1 packets only.

txrip2 Transmit multicast RIP-2 packets only.

txdef/avdfr Advertise this router as the default router over the Ethernet LAN (provided it has a default
route). The default is on. Set this to off if another router on the local LAN is the default router.

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.
If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.
To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and
the logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example: eth ip options avdfr off

Chapter 8. Command Reference 243

ETH IP RESTART
Stops and restarts a logical Ethernet interface. To read about logical Ethernet interfaces, see page 77.

Certain configuration changes for a logical Ethernet interface become effective only after the logical interface is
restarted or the router is rebooted. Remember to save the changes before the restart or reboot.

Note: Use restart instead of reboot whenever possible. A restart does not affect other interfaces, allowing their
traffic to continue. For example, using restart, you can add an IP route without killing voice traffic.

To restart an remote interface, use remote restart (page 274).

eth ip restart <interface>

interface Logical Ethernet interface. Specify both the port number and the logical interface number using
the format <port #>:<logical #> (for example, 0:1).

Example:

The following command restarts logical Ethernet interface 0:1.

eth ip restart 0:1

ETH IP RIPMULTICAST
Changes the multicast address for RIP-1 compatible and RIP-2 packets. The default address is 224.0.0.9.

For more information, see IP (RIP) Protocol Controls, on page 81.

eth ip ripmulticast <ipaddr>

ipaddr IP address of the remote network or station (4 decimals separated by periods).

Example: eth ip ripmulticast 239.192.0.9

ETH IP START
Starts a stopped logical Ethernet interface. To read about logical Ethernet interfaces, see page 77.

A logical Ethernet interface is stopped using the command eth ip stop (page 245). To stop and immediately
restart a logical Ethernet interface, use the command eth ip restart (page 244).

eth ip start <interface>

interface Logical Ethernet interface. Specify both the port number and the logical interface number using
the format <port #>:<logical #> (for example, 0:1).

Example:

The following command starts logical Ethernet interface 0:1.

244 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 eth ip start 0:1

ETH IP STOP
Stops a logical Ethernet interface. To read about logical Ethernet interfaces, see page 77.

Note: To keep certain configuration changes, you must enter a save command before stopping the logical
interface.

The stopped interface is disabled until it is started again. To start a logical Ethernet interface, use the command
eth ip start (page 244). To stop and immediately restart a logical Ethernet interface, use the command eth ip
restart (page 244).

eth ip stop <interface>

interface Logical Ethernet interface. Specify both the port number and the logical interface number using
the format <port #>:<logical #> (for example, 0:1).

Example:

The following command stops logical Ethernet interface 0:1.

eth ip stop 0:1

ETH IP TRANSLATE
This command is used to control Network Address Translation on a per-interface basis. It allows several PCs to
share a single IP address to the Internet. To read more about Network Address Translation (NAT), see page 91.

eth ip translate on | off <interface>

on | off Indicates whether Network Address Translation is on or off for this Ethernet interface.

interface Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

This command enables Network Address Translation for port 0.

eth ip translate on 0

This command disables Network Address Translation for logical interface 0:1

eth ip translate off 0:1

Chapter 8. Command Reference 245

ETH IP UNBINDROUTE
Removes an Ethernet route from the named IP virtual routing table.

To list the routes, use the iproutes command, page 191. To add an Ethernet route to a virtual routing table, use the
eth ip bindRoute command.

Note: A route change in an IP virtual routing table takes effect immediately. However, the change is lost if it is
not saved before the next reboot.

eth ip unbindRoute <ipaddr> <tablename> [<interface>]

ipaddr Ethernet LAN IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

tablename IP virtual routing table from which the route is removed.

interface Ethernet interface. This parameter may be omitted if the router has only one Ethernet interface.

If the router has two physical Ethernet interfaces (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or
1) must be specified.

To specify a logical interface other than logical interface 0, specify both the port number and the
logical interface number (<port #>:<logical #>, for example, 0:1).

Example:

The following commands remove Ethernet routes from virtual routing table ROSA. The first deleted route is
for IP address 10.1.2.0 and the default Ethernet interface (0:0). The second deleted route is for IP address
10.1.3.0 and the logical Ethernet interface 0:1.

eth ip unbindRoute 10.1.2.0 ROSA

eth ip unbindRoute 10.1.3.0 ROSA 0:1

ETH IP VRID
Assigns a virtual router ID (VRID) to an Ethernet interface. The same VRID must be assigned to the master router
and its backup routers. For more information, see VRRP Backup, on page 107.

This command designates the interface as the VRRP interface for the router. You must use another logical
Ethernet interface as the management interface for the router. To create a new logical Ethernet interface, use the
command eth add (page 229) and then assign it an IP address with an eth ip addr command (page 231).

To clear the VRRP interface designation, enter the eth ip vrid command with 0 as the VRID.

Note: The assignment takes effect after you save the change and restart the interface or reboot the router.

After you assign the VRID, you specify its attributes with the eth vrrp commands (see page 249).

eth ip vrid <vrid> [<interface>]

vrid Virtual router ID (integer, 1-255).

If you specify 0 as the VRID, the Ethernet interface is no longer the VRRP interface.

246 Chapter 8. Command Reference

interface Ethernet interface. The default Ethernet interface is 0:0.

To specify a logical interface other than 0:0, specify both the port number (0 or 1) and the
logical interface number using the format <port #>:<logical #> (for example, 0:1).

Examples:

This command assigns VRID 7 to the logical Ethernet interface 0:1.

eth ip vrid 7 0:1

This command clears the VRRP interface designation from interface 0:1.

eth ip vrid 0 0:1

This command assigns VRID 1 to the default logical Ethernet interface 0:0.

eth ip vrid 1

ETH IPX ADDR

Sets the IPX network number for the Ethernet LAN connection.

eth ipx addr <ipxnet> [port#]

ipxnet IPX network number represented by 8 hexadecimal characters.

port# Port number of the Ethernet LAN. This number must be 0 or 1, or it may be omitted.

Example: eth ipx addr 123

ETH IPX DISABLE

Disables IPX routing across the Ethernet LAN. This acts as a master switch allowing you to disable IPX routing
for testing or control purposes.

Note: This command requires a reboot.

eth ipx disable [port#]

port# Port number of the Ethernet LAN. This number must be 0 or 1, or it may be omitted.

Example: eth ipx disable

ETH IPX ENABLE

Enables IPX routing across the Ethernet LAN. This acts as a master switch that allows you to enable IPX routing.

Note: This command requires a reboot.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 247

 eth ipx enable [port#]

port# Port number of the Ethernet LAN. This number must be 0 or 1, or it may be omitted.

Example: eth ipx enable

ETH IPX FRAME

Sets the frame encapsulation method. The default is 802.2.

eth ipx frame <type>

type 802.2 (DEC standard)

802.3 (Intel standard)
dix (Xerox/Ethernet II standard)

Example: eth ipx frame 802.3

ETH LIST
Lists information about the Ethernet interfaces including the status of bridging and routing, IP protocol controls,
and IP address and subnet mask.

eth list [<interface>]

interface Ethernet interface for which information is listed. If the parameter is omitted, information is
listed for all Ethernet interfaces in the router.

For a dual-port router, you may specify the port number (0 or 1).

If logical interfaces are defined, you may specify a port and logical interface number
(<port #>:<logical interface #>, such as 0:1).

Example:
# eth list
GLOBAL BRIDGING/ROUTING SETTINGS:
Bridging enabled..................... no
Exchange spanning tree with dest... yes
IP Routing enabled................... yes
Multicast forwarding enabled....... no
Firewall filter enabled............ yes
Directed Broadcasts Allowed........ no
RIP Multicast address.............. default
IPX Routing enabled.................. no

ETHERNET INFORMATION FOR <ETHERNET/0>

Hardware MAC address................. 00:20:6F:02:98:04
Send IP RIP to the LAN................. no
Advertise me as default router..... yes
Process IP RIP packets received...... no
Receive default route by RIP....... yes

248 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 IP filters defined................... no
IP address/subnet mask............... 192.168.0.101/255.255.255.0
Static Ethernet routes defined....... 1
IP address/subnet mask............. 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
IP gateway/metric.................. 192.168.0.252/1
Virtual Ethernet routes defined...... none
IPX External network number.......... 00000000
IPX Frame type....................... 802.2
MTU.................................. default

ETH VRRP ADD

Defines a VRRP attribute record for the VRID (virtual router ID). Attribute records must be defined for the VRID
in the master router and in each of its backup routers. For more information, see VRRP Backup, on page 107.

Note: This command takes effect immediately, but you must save the change if it is to persist after you restart the
interface or reboot the router.

After you define the VRRP attribute record, you specify the attributes with other eth vrrp commands (see
Defining VRRP Attributes, on page 109.)

eth vrrp add <vrid> [<port#>]

vrid Virtual router ID (integer, 1-255). It is defined by an eth ip vrid command (page 246).

port# Physical Ethernet interface (port) number (0 or 1). The default is 0; the parameter may be
omitted if the router has only one port.

If the router has two ports (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or 1) must be specified.

Examples:

This command defines an attribute record for VRID 7 for the default port 0.

eth vrrp add 7

This command defines an attribute record for VRID 2 for port 1.

eth vrrp add 2 1

ETH VRRP CLEAR PASSWORD

Clears the password in a VRRP attribute record for the VRID (virtual router ID). To read more about VRRP
Backup, see page 107.

Note: If the VRRP attribute record has no password, no VRRP authentication is performed.

Note: If you clear the password for one VRRP router, you must clear the password for every router for that VRID
on the LAN. For example, if VRID 7 is defined in routers A, B, and C in the LAN and you clear the password for
router A, you must clear the password for routers B and C as well.

To see the current password, use the command eth vrrp list (page 250). To set a new password, use the command
eth vrrp set password (page 252).

Chapter 8. Command Reference 249

Note: This command takes effect immediately, but you must save the change if it is to persist after you restart the
interface or reboot the router.

eth vrrp clear password <vrid> [<port#>]

vrid Virtual router ID of the VRRP attribute record (integer, 1-255). The attribute record was created
by the command eth vrrp add (page 249).

port# Physical Ethernet interface (port) number (0 or 1). The default is 0; the parameter may be
omitted if the router has only one port.

If the router has two ports (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or 1) must be specified.

Example:

This command clears the password for VRID 7 using default port 0.

eth vrrp clear password 7

ETH VRRP DELETE

Deletes a VRRP attribute record for the VRID (virtual router ID). To read more about VRRP, see page 107.

After deleting the VRRP attribute record, you should also delete the VRRP interface. To do so, use the command
eth delete (page 230).

Note: This command takes effect immediately, but you must save the change if it is to persist after you restart the
interface or reboot the router.

eth vrrp delete <vrid> [<port#>]

vrid Virtual router ID (integer, 1-255).

port# Physical Ethernet interface (port) number (0 or 1). The default is 0; the parameter may be
omitted if the router has only one port.

If the router has two ports (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or 1) must be specified.

Example:

This command deletes the attribute record for VRID 7 for the default port 0.

eth vrrp delete 7

ETH VRRP LIST

Lists the VRRP attribute records for the port and shows the status of the VRRP router. To read more about VRRP,
see page 107.

eth vrrp list [<port#>]

250 Chapter 8. Command Reference

port# Physical Ethernet interface (port) number (0 or 1). The default is 0; the parameter may be
omitted if the router has only one port.

If the router has two ports (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or 1) must be specified.

Example:

This command lists the attribute records for the default port 0.

eth vrrp list

ETH VRRP SET MULTICAST

Changes the multicast address used for VRRP router announcements. This address is used by all VRRP
announcements from this router, regardless of VRID or port. To read more about VRRP Backup, see page 107.

Note: This command is not usually needed for VRRP configuration. Do not use this command unless you clearly
understand its impact.

Note: This command takes effect immediately, but you must save the change if it is to persist after you restart the
interface or reboot the router.

eth vrrp set multicast <ipaddr>

ipaddr IP address that is to be the new multicast address (4 decimals, separated by periods).

Example:

This command specifies a new multicast address for VRRP.

eth vrrp multicast 192.168.17.299

ETH VRRP SET OPTION

Specifies the preemption option in a VRRP attribute record for the VRID (virtual router ID).

Note: The default for the attribute is preempt.

The preemption option determines what the router does when it recovers from a failure, as follows:

¥ If the router is the master router for the IP address (it has priority 255), it always immediately preempts the
backup router and resumes its function in the network.The preemption option cannot change this.

¥ However, if the router is a backup router for the IP address and it determines that a router with a lower
priority is currently functioning as backup, the preemption option determines whether this router immediately
preempts the router with lower priority or waits for the lower priority router to go away before becoming the
active VRRP router.

To read more about VRRP Backup, see page 107.

The preemption option may differ among the backup routers for a VRID.

Note: This command takes effect immediately, but you must save the change if it is to persist after you restart the
interface or reboot the router.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 251

 eth vrrp set option preempt | nopreempt <vrid> [<port#>]

preempt Preempt immediately.

nopreempt Do not preempt a router with lower priority.

vrid Virtual router ID of the VRRP attribute record (integer, 1-255). The attribute record was created
by the command eth vrrp add (page 249).

port# Physical Ethernet interface (port) number (0 or 1). The default is 0; the parameter may be
omitted if the router has only one port.

If the router has two ports (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or 1) must be specified.

Example:

This command specifies no preemption for VRID 7 using default port 0.

eth vrrp set option nopreempt 7

ETH VRRP SET PASSWORD

Specifies the password in a VRRP attribute record for the VRID (virtual router ID). The password is used to
authenticate VRRP advertisement packets. It is sent as clear text on the LAN. To read more about VRRP Backup,
see page 107.

Note: If you do not specify a password, no authentication is performed.

To clear a password, use the command eth vrrp clear password (page 249).

Note: The password must be the same for every router in the Virtual Router, that is, for every router in the LAN
with the same VRID. For example, if a VRRP interface in routers A, B, and C has the VRID 7, routers A, B, and
C must all specify the same password for VRID 7.

Note: This command takes effect immediately, but you must save the change if it is to persist after you restart the
interface or reboot the router.

eth vrrp set password <password> <vrid> [<port#>]

password Password (1-8 characters). The password is case-sensitive.

vrid Virtual router ID of the VRRP attribute record (integer, 1-255). The attribute record was created
by the command eth vrrp add (page 249).

port# Physical Ethernet interface (port) number (0 or 1). The default is 0; the parameter may be
omitted if the router has only one port.

If the router has two ports (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or 1) must be specified.

Example:

This command specifies the password ÒAbCdEfGhÓ for VRID 7 using default port 0.

eth vrrp set password AbCdEfGh 7

252 Chapter 8. Command Reference

ETH VRRP SET PRIORITY
Specifies the priority attribute in a VRRP attribute record for the VRID (virtual router ID). The priority value
determines which VRRP router in the LAN takes over when a VRRP router fails. For more information, see
VRRP Backup, on page 107.

Note: If you do not specify a priority value for a VRRP attribute record, the default priority, 100, is used.

The priority for the master router must be the maximum, 255; the priority for each backup router must be less than
255.

The priority values must differ for each router that uses the same VRID. For example, the master router for VRID
7 must have priority 255 while the first backup router for VRID 7 could have the default priority 100 and a second
backup router for VRID 7 could have priority 50.

Note: This command takes effect immediately, but you must save the change if it is to persist after you restart the
interface or reboot the router.

eth vrrp set priority <priority> <vrid> [<port#>]

priority Priority value (integer, 1-255). The priority for the master router must be 255; the priority for
each backup router must be less than 255.

vrid Virtual router ID of the VRRP attribute record (integer, 1-255). The attribute record was created
by the command eth vrrp add (page 249).

port# Physical Ethernet interface (port) number (0 or 1). The default is 0; the parameter may be
omitted if the router has only one port.

If the router has two ports (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or 1) must be specified.

Examples:

This command specifies the maximum priority for the master router for VRID 7 using default port 0.

eth vrrp set priority 255 7

This command defines priority 50 for a backup router for VRID 7 using port 1.

eth vrrp set priority 50 7 1

ETH VRRP SET TIMEINTERVAL

Specifies the time interval attribute in a VRRP attribute record for the VRID (virtual router ID). The time interval
determines how often VRRP advertisement packets are sent, and thus, how quickly a backup router can recognize
that another VRRP router is down.

Note: If you do not specify a time interval value for a VRRP attribute record, the default time interval, 1 second,
is used.

If the backup does not receive a VRRP packet from another VRRP router during the master down interval, the
backup assumes the other router is down. The master down interval is calculated as follows:

Master _Down_Interval = (3 * Time_Interval) + Skew_Time

Chapter 8. Command Reference 253

 Skew_Time = (256 - Priority) / 256

Thus, the default skew time is (256 - 100) / 256, or .609375. The default master down interval is (3 * 1) +
.609375, or 3.609375 seconds.

For more information, see VRRP Backup, on page 107.

Note: The time interval must be the same for every router in the Virtual Router, that is, for every router in the
LAN with the same VRID. For example, if a VRRP interface in routers A, B, and C has the VRID 7, routers A, B,
and C must all specify the same time interval for VRID 7.

Note: This command takes effect immediately, but you must save the change if it is to persist after you restart the
interface or reboot the router.

eth vrrp set timeinterval <seconds> <vrid> [<port#>]

seconds Time interval value in seconds (integer).

vrid Virtual router ID of the VRRP attribute record (integer, 1-255). The attribute record was created
by the command eth vrrp add (page 249).

port# Physical Ethernet interface (port) number (0 or 1). The default is 0; the parameter may be
omitted if the router has only one port.

If the router has two ports (an Ethernet hub router), the port number (0 or 1) must be specified.

Example:

This command specifies two seconds as time interval for VRID 7 using default port 0.

eth vrrp set timeinterval 2 7

254 Chapter 8. Command Reference

Remote Access ConÞguration

The following commands allow you to add, delete, and modify remote routers to which the target router can
connect. Remote router information that can be configured includes:

¥ PVC numbers

¥ Security authentication protocols and passwords

¥ WAN IP/ IPX addresses

¥ IP routes

¥ IPX routes and SAPS

¥ Remote bridging addresses and bridging control

¥ Host mapping

¥ Encryption (optional)

¥ IP filtering (optional)

¥ L2TP tunneling (optional)

Chapter 8. Command Reference 255

REMOTE Commands

REMOTE ?
Lists the supported keywords. (The list varies depending on the router model.)

remote ?

st

Example:
# remote ?
Sub-commands for remote:
? help add
del delete list
enable disable start
stop restart setAuthen
enaAuthen disAuthen setPasswd
setOurPasswd delOurPasswd setOurSysName
delOurSysName listPhones setLNS
setL2TPClient setProtocol setPVC

setATMnsap delATMnsap setATMTraffic

setPhone delPhone setBWThresh
setBod addCaller delCaller
setMaxLine setMinLine setTimer
addHostMapping delHostMapping addServer
delServer setIPTranslate setIPslavePPP
setPPPOptions ipfilter blockNetBIOS
setCompression stats statsclear
setRmtIpAddr addIproute delIproute
bindIPVirtualRoute unbindIPVirtualRoute setIpOptions
listIproutes setIpxaddr addIpxroute
delIpxroute listIpxroutes addIpxsap
delIpxsap listIpxsaps setIpxOptions
listBridge setBrOptions addBridge
delBridge enaBridge disBridge
setmtu

REMOTE ADD
Adds a remote router entry into the remote router database.

remote add <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: remote add HQ

256 Chapter 8. Command Reference

REMOTE ADDBRIDGE
Defines the remote router entry as the default bridging destination for outbound bridging. The command can
define either the default bridging destination for all MAC addresses or the default bridging destination for a
specific MAC address.

When you specify a MAC address on this command, a permanent entry for that address is created in the bridging
table. Thereafter, packets that contain that MAC address are bridged using the specified remote router entry. (To
see the entries in the bridging table, use the bi list command.)

Note: Bridging using the specified remote is effective only after it has been enabled using the remote enabridge
command (page 267). To see the current bridge settings for a remote, use the remote listbridge command (page
272). To remove the default designation from a remote, use the remote delbridge command (page 261).

If IP and IPX routing are disabled, all packets, with an unknown destination, are bridged to the default bridging
destination. If IP and/or IPX routing is enabled, bridging occurs only for packets that are not routed.

remote addbridge * | <MAC_addr> <remoteName>

* All MAC addresses.

MAC_addr MAC address (six bytes, specified as six hexadecimals, separated by colons).

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example:

remote addbridge 01:08:03:0A:0B:0C HQ

REMOTE ADDHOSTMAPPING
Remaps a range of local LAN IP addresses to a range of public IP addresses on a per-remote-router basis. These
local addresses are mapped one-to-one to the public addresses.

Note: The range of public IP addresses is defined by <first public addr> only. The rest of the range is computed
automatically (from <first public addr> to <first public addr> + number of addresses remapped - 1) inclusive.

remote addHostMapping <first private addr><second private addr><first public addr><remoteName>

Þrst private addr First IP address in the range of local IP address to be remapped, in the format of 4 decimals
separated by periods.

second private addr Last address in the range of local IP address to be remapped, in the format of 4 decimals
separated by periods.

Þrst public addr DeÞnes the range of public IP addresses, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

The rest of the range is computed automatically.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote addHostMapping 192.168.207.40 192.168.207.49 10.0.20.11 HQ

Chapter 8. Command Reference 257

REMOTE ADDIPROUTE
Adds an IP address route to a network or station on the LAN connected beyond the remote router. The route is
added to the default routing table.

The target routerÕs routing table must be seeded statically to access networks and stations beyond this remote
router. After the connection is established, standard RIP update packets can dynamically add to the routing table.
Setting this address is not required if a target router never connects to the remote router and the remote router
supports RIP.

Note: Changes to the default routing table require a save and a remote restart or reboot before they take effect.

remote addIpRoute <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> <hops> [<ipgateway>] <remoteName>

ipaddr IP address of the remote network or station (4 decimals separated by periods).

ipnetmask IP network mask of the remote network or station (4 decimals separated by periods).

hops Perceived cost to reach the remote network or station by this route (number between 1 and 15).

ipgateway Address of a router on the remote LAN (4 decimals separated by periods).

Enter a gateway only if you are configuring a MER interface. Check with your system
administrator for details.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Examples:

The first two addresses in the list represent subnetworks, the third is a class B network, the fourth is a host, and
the fifth address is the default route. The fifth command adds the default route when the WAN interface is a point-
to-point interface; the sixth command adds the default route when the WAN interface is a broadcast interface.

remote addIpRoute 10.1.210.64 255.255.255.192 1 HQ

remote addIpRoute 10.1.210.032 255.255.255.224 1 HQ

remote addIpRoute 172.17.0.0 255.255.0.0 2 HQ

remote addIpRoute 10.1.210.072 255.255.255.255 1 HQ

remote addIpRoute 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1 HQ

remote addIproute 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1 172.16.10.1 HQ

REMOTE ADDIPXROUTE
Adds an IPX route for a network or station on the LAN network connected beyond the remote router. The target
routerÕs routing information table must be seeded statically to access networks and stations beyond this remote
router. After the connection is established, standard RIP update packets will dynamically add to the routing table.
(Setting this address is not required if a target router never connects to the remote router and the remote router
supports RIP.)

Note: A reboot command must be performed on the target router for the addition of a static route to take effect.

remote addIpxRoute <ipxNe#> <metric> <ticks> <remoteName>

258 Chapter 8. Command Reference

ipxNe# IPX network number represented by 8 hexadecimal characters.

metric Number of routers through which the packet must go to get to the network/station.

ticks Number in 1/8 seconds which is the estimated time delay in reaching the remote network or
station.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote addIpxRoute 456 1 4 HQ

REMOTE ADDIPXSAP
Adds an IPX SAP to the server information table for a service on the LAN network connected beyond the remote
router. The target routerÕs SAP table must be seeded statically to access services beyond this remote router. After
the connection is established, standard SAP broadcast packets will dynamically add to the table.

Note: A reboot must be performed on the target router for the addition of a SAP to take effect.

remote addIpxSap <servicename> <ipxNet > <ipxNode> <socket> <type> <hops> <remoteName>

servicename Name of server.

ipxNet IPX network number represented by 8 hexadecimal characters.

ipxNode IPX node address represented by 12 hexadecimal characters.

socket Socket address of the destination process within the destination node. The processes include
services such as Þle and print servers.

type Number representing the type of server.

hops Number of routers through which the packet must go to get to the network/station.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote addIpxSap Fileserver 010a020b 0108030a0b0c 451 HQ

REMOTE ADDSERVER
This Network Address Translation (NAT) command is used to add a serverÕs IP address (on the LAN) associated
with this remote router for a particular protocol. To learn more, see Network Address Translation (NAT), on page
91.

Multiple system addserver (page 209) and remote addserver commands can designate different servers for
different protocols, ports, and interfaces. When a request is received, the router searches the server list for the
appropriate server. The order of search for a server is discussed in Server Request Hierarchy, on page 94.

remote addServer <action> <protocol> <first port> [<last port> [<first private port>]] <remoteName>

action One of the following command actions:

Chapter 8. Command Reference 259

 ipaddr Selects the host with this IP address as server (4 decimals separated by periods).
discard Discards the incoming server request.
me Sends the incoming server request to the local router, regardless of its IP address.

protocol Protocol used by the selected server.

protocolid Numeric protocol ID.
tcp TCP only.
udp UDP only.
all All protocols.

first port First or only port as seen by the remote end. Port used by the selected server
portid Numeric value between 0 and 65,535. A numeric value of 0 matches any port.
ftp FTP port.
telnet Telnet port.
smtp SMTP port.
sntp SNTP port.
http HTTP port.
tftp TFTP port.
all All ports.

last port Optional last port in the range of ports as seen by the remote end for the server on the LAN.

first private port If specified, this is a port remapping of the incoming request from the remote end.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

remote addServer 192.168.1.5 tcp smtp

remote addServer 192.168.1.10 tcp 9000 9000 telnet router2

REMOTE BINDIPVIRTUALROUTE
Adds a remote route to the named IP virtual routing table.

To list the remote routes, use the remote listIProutes command, page 272. To remove a route from a virtual
routing table, use the remote unbindIPVirtualRoute command, page 289.

Note: A route change in an IP virtual routing table takes effect immediately. However, the change is lost if it is
not saved before the next remote restart or reboot.

remote bindIPVirtualRoute <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> <hops> [<ipgateway>] <tableName> <remoteName>

ipaddr IP address of the remote network or station (4 decimals separated by periods).

ipnetmask IP network mask of the remote network or station (4 decimals separated by periods).

hops Perceived cost in reaching the remote network or station by this route (number between 1 and
15).

ipgateway Address of a router on the remote LAN (4 decimals separated by periods).

Enter a gateway only if you are configuring a MER interface.

tableName IP virtual routing table to which the route is added.

260 Chapter 8. Command Reference

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

The following command adds a route to virtual routing table FRANCISCO. The route is to IP address
10.1.2.0/255.255.255.0 and goes through remote router HQ.

remote bindIPVirtualRoute 10.1.2.0 255.255.255.0 1 francisco HQ

REMOTE BLOCKNETBIOS
This command turns on or turns off a filter that blocks all NetBIOS packets over this WAN connection.

remote blockNetBIOS on|off <remoteName>

REMOTE DEL
Deletes a remote router entry from the remote router database.

remote del <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote del HQ

REMOTE DELATMNSAP
This command deletes an ATM mapping set by the remote setATMnsap command (page 274).

remote delATMNasp ATMF | E164 partial | full <nsap> <remoteName>

REMOTE DELBRIDGE
Removes the designation of the remote router entry as the default bridging destination. (Default bridging
destinations are defined using the remote addbridge command, page 257.) To see the bridge settings for a remote
entry, use the remote listbridge command (page 272).

To remove a designation as the default bridging destination for a specific MAC address, specify that address on
the command. The entry is then removed from the bridging table. To see the entries in the bridging table, use the
bi list command (page 189).

remote delbridge * | <MAC_addr> <remoteName>

* All MAC addresses.

MAC_addr MAC address (six bytes, specified as six hexadecimals, separated by colons).

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 261

Example:

remote delbridge 01:08:03:0A:0B:0C HQ

REMOTE DELENCRYPTION
Deletes encryption files associated with a remote router.

remote delEncryption <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote delEncryption HQ

REMOTE DELHOSTMAPPING
Undoes an IP address/host translation (remapping) range that was previously established with the command
remote addhostmapping on a per-remote-router basis.

remote delHostMapping <first private addr> <second private addr> <first public addr> <remoteName>

Þrst private addr First IP address in the range of IP address, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

second private addr Last address in the range of IP address, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Þrst public addr DeÞnes the range of public IP addresses, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.
The rest of the range is computed automatically.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote delHostMapping 192.168.207.40 192.168.207.49 10.0.20.11 HQ

REMOTE DELIPROUTE
Deletes an IP address route for a network or station on the LAN connected beyond the remote router. The route is
deleted from the default routing table.

Note: Changes to the default routing table require a save and remote restart or reboot before they take effect.

remote delIpRoute <ipaddr> <remoteName>

ipaddr IP address of the remote network or station (4 decimals separated by periods).

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote delIpRoute 10.1.2.0 HQ

262 Chapter 8. Command Reference

REMOTE DELIPXROUTE
Deletes an IPX address for a network on the LAN connected beyond the remote router.

Note: The reboot command must be issued on the target router for a deleted static route to take effect.

remote delIpxroute <ipxNet> <remoteName>

ipxNet IPX network number represented by 8 hexadecimal characters.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote delIpxRoute 010a020b HQ

REMOTE DELIPXSAP
Deletes an IPX service on the LAN network connected beyond the remote router.

Note: The reboot command must be issued on the target router for a deleted service to take effect.

remote delIpxSap <servicename> <remoteName>

servicename Name of server

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote delIpxSap Fileserver HQ

Chapter 8. Command Reference 263

REMOTE DELOURPASSWD
Removes the unique CHAP or PAP authentication password entries established by the command remote
setOurPasswd.

remote delOurPasswd <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote delOurPasswd HQ

REMOTE DELOURSYSNAME
Removes the unique CHAP or PAP authentication system name entries established by the command remote
setOurSysName.

remote delOurSysName <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote delOurSysName HQ

REMOTE DELPHONE
Deletes a phone number that was specified by the command remote setPhone (page 283).

remote delPhone async | isdn 1 | 2 <phone#> <remoteName>

async Asynchronous connection

isdn ISDN connection

1 Primary phone number or first ISDN channel

2 Alternative phone number or second ISDN channel.

phone# Decimal number representing the exact digits to be dialed. Digits, the asterisk, and the #
characters are accepted; use a comma to specify a 2-second pause.

remoteName Name of the remote entry (character string).

Example:

remote delphone async 1 9,3801100 backup

remote delphone async 2 9,3801101 backup

264 Chapter 8. Command Reference

REMOTE DELSERVER
Deletes an entry created by the remote addServer command (page 259).

remote delServer <action> <protocol> <first port> [<last port> [<first private port>]]

action One of the following command actions:

ipaddr Selects the host with this IP address as server (4 decimals separated by periods).
discard Discards the incoming server request.
me Sends the incoming server request to the local router, regardless of its IP address.

protocol Protocol used by the selected server.

protocolid Numeric protocol ID.
tcp TCP only.
udp UDP only.
all All protocols.

first port First or only port as seen by the remote end. Port used by the selected server
portid Numeric value between 0 and 65,535. A numeric value of 0 matches any port.
ftp FTP port.
telnet Telnet port.
smtp SMTP port.
sntp SNTP port.
http HTTP port.
tftp TFTP port.
all All ports.

last port Optional last port in the range of ports as seen by the remote end for the server on the LAN.

first private port If specified, this is a port remapping of the incoming request from the remote end.

Example:

remote delServer 192.168.1.5 tcp ftp router1

REMOTE DISABLE
Disables the remote. The remote remains disabled even after a reboot. To enable the remote, you must enter the
command remote enable (page 266).

Note: You may enter and save information and settings for a disabled remote entry. However, the remote entry
cannot be used until it is enabled.

Note: If the remote is currently active when the remote is disabled, the active session is not stopped. To stop the
active session, use the remote stop command (page 288).

remote disable <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote disable HQ

Chapter 8. Command Reference 265

REMOTE DISAUTHEN
This command is intended for situations where third-party routers cannot be authenticated; the target router will
not attempt to authenticate the remote router.

remote disAuthen <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote disAuthen HQ

REMOTE DISBRIDGE
Disables bridging from the target router to the remote router.

Note: This command requires rebooting the target system for the change to take effect.

remote disBridge <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote disBridge HQ

REMOTE ENAAUTHEN
With this command the target router will try to negotiate authentication as defined in the remote router's database.

remote enaAuthen <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote enaAuthen HQ

REMOTE ENABLE
Enables use of an entry in the remote router database. Although the command makes it possible to use the remote
entry, it does not start an active session for the remote.

Note: The entry remains enabled across reboots. The entry remains enabled until it is disabled by a remote
disable command (page 265).

remote enable <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote enable HQ

266 Chapter 8. Command Reference

REMOTE ENABRIDGE
Enables bridging from the target router to the remote router. This command requires rebooting the target system
for the change to take effect.

remote enaBridge <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote enaBridge HQ

REMOTE IPFILTER
This command manages the IP filters on the WAN interface. The filters screen IP packets at the interface level.

You can define filters for any entry in the remote router database. The remote entry is referenced by the name
specified on the remote add command that created the entry.

The set of filters for a remote router entry can be of three types: Input, Forward, and Output. For more information
on how these three types of filters are applied, refer to Chapter 5. IP Filtering on page 119.

Note: IP filters take effect immediately upon entry. They can even affect the current connection that you are using
to enter commands. Unlike other configuration changes, you do not need to save and restart or reboot.

remote ipfilter <command> <type> <action> <parameters> <remoteName>

The following commands are provided for managing IP filters for the WAN interface:

remote ipfilter append [<line number>] <type> <action> [<parameters>] <remoteName>

Appends a filter to the list of filters for this <type> (Input, Output, or Forward) for this remote router
entry.

If no line number is specified, the filter is appended to the end of the list; otherwise, it is appended after
the specified line. To see the line numbers, use the remote ipfilter list command. Filters are used in the
order they appear in their list.

remote ipfilter insert <type> <action> <parameters> <remoteName>

Inserts a filter in the list of filters for this <type> (Input, Output, or Forward) for this remote router entry.

If no line number is specified, the filter is inserted at the beginning of the list; otherwise, it is inserted
before the specified line. To see the line numbers, use the remote ipfilter list command. Filters are used
in the order they appear in their list.

remote ipfilter delete <type> <action> <parameters> <remoteName>

Deletes the first filter that matches the filter specified on the command.

remote ipfilter flush [<first line> [<last line>]] <type> <remoteName>

Deletes a range of filters of this <type> (Input, Output, or Forward) for this remote router entry.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 267

 If no line numbers are specified, all filters in the list are deleted. If only the first line number is specified,
all filters from that line to the end are deleted. To see the line numbers, use the remote ipfilter list
command. Filters are used in the order they appear in their list.

remote ipfilter clear [<first line> [<last line>]] [<type>] <clear arg> <remoteName>

Resets the counters for the specified filters. A filter has a counter if the -c parameter was specified for the
filter.

You can specify the filters whose counters are to be reset by their line number range and type (input,
output, or forward). If no type is specified, the counters for all filters for the interface are reset. If no line
numbers are specified, the counters for all filters for that type and interface are reset. If only the first line
number is specified, all counters for filters from that line to the end are reset. To see the line numbers and
counters, use the remote ipfilter list command.

remote ipfilter check <type> <parameters> <remoteName>

Checks the action that would be taken if a packet with the specified parameters was compared with the
list of filters defined for the specified type and remote router entry.

For example, the command

remote ipfilter check input -p TCP branch1
would check what action (accept, drop, reject, inipsec, outipsec) would be taken for a TCP packet after it
was compared with the list of input filters defined for remote router branch1.

remote ipfilter list <type> <remoteName>

Lists all filters of the specified <type> (Input, Output, or Forward) for this remote router entry.

remote ipfilter watch <on | off> [-q | -v] <remoteName>

Turns on or turns off the console watch for this remote router entry. If the watch is on, a message is
printed to the console serial port when a packet is dropped or rejected. (The message is also sent to any
Syslog servers; see Syslog Client, on page 153.)

However, if the parameter -q (quiet) was specified for a filter, no message is printed when that filter
matches a packet. If the parameter -v (verbose) was specified for a filter, a message is printed whenever
that filter matches a packet, regardless of the filter action.

To see the messages, Telnet to the router and enter system log start. The watch does not continue after a
restart or reboot; to resume the watch, you must enter the remote ipfilter watch on command again.

The Þlter type speciÞes at which point the Þlter is compared to the IP packet (see the illustration under IP Filtering,
on page 119):
input Filter is used when the packet enters the interface, before any IP address translation is
performed.

forward Filter is used, after any IP address translation, but before routing is performed.

output Filter is used after routing and IP address translation have been performed, just before the
packet is sent out an interface.

If the packet matches the Þlter, the speciÞed action is performed:

accept The packet is allowed to proceed for further processing.

268 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 drop The packet is discarded, without sending an ICMP (Internet Control Management Protocol)
error message.

reject The packet is discarded and an ICMP error message is returned to the sender.

inipsec The packet is passed to IPSec for decrypting. The filter is intended to match packets coming
from the other IPSec gateway. Although filters are the mechanism by which packets are passed
to IPSec, it is recommended that you use IKE, rather than your own filters, to manage your IP
Security (see IPSec (Internet Protocol Security), on page 134).

outipsec The packet is passed to IPSec so it can be encrypted and sent to the other IPSec gateway. The
filter is intended to match packets coming from the local protected network. Although filters are
the mechanism by which packets are passed to IPSec, it is recommended that you use IKE to
manage your IP Security (see IPSec (Internet Protocol Security), on page 134).

The following parameters specify the characteristics that an IP packet must have in order to match the Þlter. A Þlter
can require any or all of these characteristics.
-p <protocol> | TCP | UDP | ICMP
The packet must have the specified protocol. If no protocol is specified, the filter matches every protocol.

-sa <first source ip addr>[:<last source ip addr>]

The packet must have a source IP address within the specified address range. If only one address is specified,
the packet must have that source IP address. If no source IP address is specified, the filter matches any
address in the range 0.0.0.0:255.255.255.255.

-sm <source ip mask>

The filter uses the specified mask when comparing the <first source ip addr>...<last source ip addr> with the
source IP address in the IP packet. If no source mask is specified, the mask used is 255.255.255.255.

-sp <ICMP type> | <first source port>[:<last source port>]

The packet must have a source port that matches the specified ICMP type or that is within the specified port
range. If only one port is specified, the packet must have that source port. If no source port is specified, the
filter matches any source port in the range 0:0xffff.

-da <first dest ip addr>[:<last dest ip addr>]

The packet must have a destination IP address within the specified address range. If only one address is
specified, the packet must have that destination IP address. If no destination IP address is specified, the filter
matches any address in the range 0.0.0.0:255.255.255.255.

-dm <dest ip mask>

The filter uses the specified mask when comparing the <first dest ip addr>...<last dest ip addr> with the
destination IP address in the IP packet. If no destination mask is specified, the mask used is 255.255.255.255.

-dp <ICMP type> | <first dest port>[:<last dest port>]

The packet must have a destination port that matches the specified ICMP type or that is within the specified
port range. If only one port is specified, the packet must have that destination port. If no destination port is
specified, the filter matches any destination port in the range 0:0xffff.

-tcp syn|ack|noflag
If the IP packet is a TCP packet, the filter matches the packet only if the packet flag settings are as specified.
If no -tcp option is specified for the filter, flag settings are not checked.

Note: You may specify more than one -tcp option for the IP filter.

The syn, ack, and noflag settings work together as follows:

- Specify -tcp syn if the TCP SYN flag must be set.
- Specify -tcp ack if the TCP ACK flag must be set.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 269

 - Specify -tcp noflag if neither the SYN flag nor the ACK flag can be set.
For example, for the IP filter to match the initiation of a TCP connection, specify -tcp syn. The filter will
match TCP packets that have the TCP SYN flag set but not the TCP ACK flag set. For the filter to match the
response to initiation of a TCP connection, specify -tcp syn and -tcp ack. The filter will match only TCP
packets with both the TCP SYN and TCP ACK flags set.

The -tcp rst setting is independent of the others; if you specify -tcp rst for the filter, the filter matches every
TCP packet with the TCP RESET flag set, regardless of the other flag settings. For example, for the filter to
match packets for ÒestablishedÓ connections, you would specify both -tcp rst and -tcp ack so that the filter is
applied to every TCP packet that has either the RESET flag or the ACK flag set.

The following parameters request additional filter options.

-b
This option requests that this filter be compared twice with each packet.The first time the source filter
information is matched against the source information in the IP packet and the destination filter information is
matched against the destination information in the IP packet. The second time the source filter information is
matched against the destination information in the IP packet and the destination filter information is matched
against the source information in the IP packet.

-c <count of times rule used>

This option requests a counter for this filter. If specified, a count is kept of how many IP packets have
matched this filter since the router was restarted or rebooted.To see the current count for a filter, use the
remote ipfilter list command. To clear a counter, use the remote ipfilter clear command.

-ipsec <IPSec record name>

Use this option when the action specified is inipsec or outipsec. It specifies the IPSec Security Association
that uses the filter.

-q or -v

Specify one of these options to determine when watch messages are sent for this filter. The messages are sent
to the console serial port (and to any Syslog servers; see page 153).

If neither -q or -v are specified for the filter, and an remote ipfilter watch on command is entered for the
interface, a message is sent each time this filter causes a packet to be dropped or rejected.

If -q (quiet) is specified, no messages are printed for this filter, even if it causes a packet to be dropped or
rejected.

If -v (verbose) is specified, a message is printed every time this filter matches a packet, regardless of the filter
action.

The remote name specifies the entry in the remote router database that the command applies to. The remote name
is the name given the entry when it was created by a remote add command.

Examples:

This command deletes all IP filters of type Forward for the remote interface internet.

remote ipfilter flush forward internet

Both of the following commands have the same effect: they deny all IP traffic for the remote interface internet
from the specified destination addresses. The addresses can be specified as 192.168.0.0 masked with 255.255.0.0
or as the range 192.168.0.0 through 192.168.255.255).

270 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 remote ipfilter append forward drop -da 192.168.0.0 -dm 255.255.0.0 internet

remote ipfilter append forward drop -da 192.168.0.0:192.168.255.255 internet

This command lists all IP filters of type Forward for the remote interface internet.

remote ipfilter list forward internet

REMOTE LIST
Lists the remote router entry (or all the entries) in the remote router database. The result is a complete display of
the current configuration settings for the remote router(s), except for the authentication password/secret.

remote list [<remoteName>]

remoteName Name of the remote router to be listed (character string).If you omit the name, all remote router
entries are listed.

Example:

# rem list internet

INFORMATION FOR <internet>
Status............................... enabled
Our System Name when dialing out.....
Our Password used when dialing out... no
Protocol in use...................... PPP
ATM traffic shaping.................. no
Authentication....................... disabled
Authentication level required........ PAP
Use periodic LCP pings............... yes
Connection Identifier (VPI*VCI)...... 0*38
IP address translation............... off
IP filters defined................... no
Send/Receive Multicast............... off
Block NetBIOS Packets................ off
Compression Negotiation.............. off
IP slave mode (PPP).................. no
Try to reacquire IP addr (PPP)....... yes
Source IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Remote IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Send IP RIP to this dest............. no
Send IP default route if known..... no
Receive IP RIP from this dest........ no
Receive IP default route by RIP.... no
Keep this IP destination private..... yes
Total IP remote routes............... 1
10.0.0.0/255.255.0.0/1
IPX network number................... 00000000
Use IPX RIP/SAP (negotiate with PPP): yes
Total IPX remote routes.............. 0
Total IPX SAPs....................... 0
Bridging enabled..................... no
Exchange spanning tree with dest... no
TX Encryption........................ unknown
RX Encryption........................ unknown

Chapter 8. Command Reference 271

 mtu.................................. 1500

REMOTE LISTBRIDGE
Lists the current bridge settings for the specified remote router entry.

remote listBridge <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string). If a name is omitted, the bridge settings for all
remote router entries are listed.

Example:

# remote listbridge
BRIDGING INFORMATION FOR <internet>
Bridging enabled.................... yes
Exchange spanning tree with dest... no
Bridge only PPPoE with dest........ no

BRIDGING INFORMATION FOR <efficient>

Bridging enabled.................... no
Exchange spanning tree with dest... no
Bridge only PPPoE with dest........ no
Mac addresses that dial remote..... none

REMOTE LISTIPROUTES
Lists IP information for a remote router or, if the router name is omitted, for all routers in the remote router
database. The IP information includes all network or station IP addresses defined for the LAN connected beyond
the remote router.

This command lists all routes defined for the remote router, including those defined in the default routing table
and in any virtual routing tables.

remote listIpRoutes [remoteName]

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote listIproutes HQ

Example:

The following command lists routing information for remote router HQ. It lists five routes that use HQ, the first
four are in the default routing table and the fifth is in virtual routing table FRANCISCO.

# remote listIproutes HQ
IP INFORMATION FOR <HQ>
Send IP RIP to this dest............. no
Send IP default route if known..... no
Receive IP RIP from this dest........ rip-1 compatible
Receive IP default route by RIP.... no
Keep this IP destination private..... yes

272 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 Total IP remote routes............... 5
192.168.210.0/255.255.255.0/1
10.0.0.0/255.0.0.0/1
172.16.0.0/255.240.0.0/1
192.168.0.0/255.255.0.0/1
10.1.2.0/255.255.255.0/1 through <FRANCISCO>

REMOTE LISTIPXROUTES
Lists all network IPX route addresses defined for the LAN connected beyond the remote router. The network
number, hop count, and ticks are displayed. If the remote name is not specified, a list of IPX routes is displayed
for each remote router in the database.

remote listIpxroutes [remoteName]

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote listIpxroutes HQ

Response:
IPX ROUTE INFORMATION FOR <HQ>
Total IPX remote routes .............. 1 00001001/1/4

REMOTE LISTIPXSAPS
Lists all services defined for the LAN connected beyond the remote router. Each service includes the server name,
network number, node number, socket number, server type, and hop count. If the remote name is not specified, a
list of IPX SAPs is displayed for each remote router in the database.

remote listIpxsaps [remoteName]

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string.)

Example: remote listIpxsaps HQ

Response:
IPX SAP INFORMATION FOR <HQ>
Total IPX SAPs ................... 1
SERV312_FP 00001001 00:00:00:00:00:01 0451 0004 1

IPX SAP INFORMATION FOR <ISP>

Total IPX SAPs ................... 0
SERV312_FP 00001001 00:00:00:00:00:01 0451 0004 1

REMOTE LISTPHONES
Lists the PVC numbers available for connecting to the remote router.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 273

 remote listPhones <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote listPhones HQ

Response:
PHONE NUMBER(s) FOR <HQ>
Connection Identifier (VPI*VCI)...... 0*38

Note: If the remote name is not specified, a list of phone numbers is displayed for each remote router in the
database.

REMOTE RESTART
Stops the current active session and starts a new active session for a remote.

Certain configuration changes for a remote become effective only after the remote is restarted or the router is
rebooted. Remember to save the changes before the restart or reboot.

Note: Use restart instead of reboot whenever possible. A restart does not affect other interfaces, allowing their
traffic to continue. For example, using restart, you can add an IP route without killing voice traffic.

To restart an Ethernet interface, use eth ip restart (page 244).

remote restart <remoteName>

remoteName Remote interface name.

Example:

The following command restarts the active session for remote HQ.

remote restart HQ

REMOTE SETATMNSAP
RFC1577 (Classical IP over ATM) specifies a mechanism to map an ATM Name (called an NSAP) to a PVC.
NSAP's are normally not needed, but if they are used, they have a syntax defined by using either the ATM or
E164 encodings. By convention, octets 2-7 contain a unique identifier for the router, such as a MAC address.

In the command remote setATMnsap, the complete 20 octets of the NSAP are specified. If Partial mode is
selected, the router substitutes the MAC address of the router for octets 2-7. In Full mode, no change is made to
the NSAP.

To see an ATM NSAP that has been set, use the remote list command.

remote setATMNSAP ATMF|E164 partial | full <nsap> <remoteName>

ATMF ATM forum encoding

274 Chapter 8. Command Reference

E164 ITU E164 encoding.

partial The MAC address of the router is substituted for octets 2-7 of the NSAP.

full No change is made to the specified NSAP.

<nsap> NSAP specified as 40 hex digits or 20 octets (2-digit pairs separated by colons).

<remoteName> Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

# rem setatmnsap atfm partial 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88:99:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF:10:11:12:13 co

# remote list

INFORMATION FOR <co>

Status............................................. enabled
Our Password used when dialing out... no
Protocol in use............................. PPP
ATM NSAP................................ ATM Forum / Partial
value 11:22:33:44:55:66:77:88:99:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF:10:11:12:13

REMOTE SETAUTHEN
Sets the authentication protocol used communicate with the remote router. The authentication protocol is the
minimum security level that the target router must use with the remote router; this level is verified during security
negotiation. The router will always attempt to negotiate the highest level of security possible (CHAP). The router
will not accept a negotiated security level less than this minimum authentication method.
The parameter in the remote router database is used for the local side of the authentication process; this is the
minimum security level used by the target router when it challenges or authenticates the remote router.

remote setAuthen <protocol> <remoteName>

protocol chap, pap, or none. The default is pap.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setAuthen pap HQ

REMOTE SETBOD
Sets the bandwidth on demand (BOD) management option for a DOD (dial on demand) connection, that is, a
connection where the link goes up and down. These links include those for ISDN, L2TP tunnels, IPSec tunnels,
and dial backup.

The bandwidth on demand management option can be set to apply to incoming, outgoing, or both incoming and
outgoing traffic. The bandwidth threshold set by the remote setBWthresh command (page 276) applies to the
direction of traffic set by this command.

remote setBOD in | out | both <remoteName>

Chapter 8. Command Reference 275

in | out | both Incoming traffic, outgoing traffic, or both. The default is both.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

remote setBOD out HQ

REMOTE SETBROPTIONS
Sets controls on bridging for the remote router entry.

To see the current bridging settings for remote router entries, use the remote listbridge command (page 272).

Warning: Do not change the stp setting without approval from your system administrator.

remote setBrOptions <option> on | off <remoteName>

option stp

Set this option to on to use the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). The default is on.

STP is used to detect bridging loops. Set this option to off only if the bridging peers do not support
the Spanning Tree Protocol or if you are certain that no bridging loops could exist. When STP is
disabled on an interface, any STP packets received on that interface are ignored.

Note: The Spanning Tree Protocol adds a 40-second delay each time the ADSL or ATM link
comes up while the interface determines if there is a bridging loop.

pppoeOnly

Set this option to on to limit this remote router entry to bridging PPPoE traffic only. If the option
is set to off, then the entry can bridge any traffic, including PPPoE traffic. The default is off.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Examples:

The following command requests the spanning tree protocol for remote router HQ.

remote setBrOptions stp on HQ

The following command configures remote router PPPoEbridge as the remote through which only PPPoE
traffic is bridged.

remote setBrOptions pppoeonly on PPPoEbridge

REMOTE SETBWTHRESH
Sets the bandwidth threshold for a DOD (dial on demand) connection, that is, a connection where the link goes up
and down. These links include those for ISDN, L2TP tunnels, IPSec tunnels, and dial backup.

276 Chapter 8. Command Reference

The threshold is used in bandwidth on demand management. Initially, a call is activated on one B-channel. When
bandwidth utilization reaches the bandwidth threshold, the second B-channel is activated. (The additional channel
is available if the maximum links was set to 2 by a remote setmaxline command, page 280.)

Both channel are utilized until the bandwidth utilization drops below the threshold. The default is 0% utilization,
in which case, both channels are always used for data transmission.

If you wish, you can have the bandwidth threshold apply only to incoming or outgoing traffic; see the remote
setBOD command (page 275).

remote setBWthresh <threshold> <remoteName>

threshold Percentage of bandwidth utilization (0 through 100). The default is 0, in which case, whenever
data transmission occurs, the maximum number of links is allocated.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

remote setBWthresh 75 HQ

REMOTE SETCOMPRESSION
Enables or disables compression between the local router and the remote router.

remote setCompression on|off <remoteName>

on Compression is negotiated between the local and the remote router if both routers are set to
perform compression and if they both share a common compression protocol.

off Disables compression. The default is off.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

remote setCompression on HQ

REMOTE SETENCRYPTION (RFC 1969 Encryption)

This command is used to specify a PPP DES (Data Encryption Standard) 56-bit key with fixed transmit and
receive keys.

remote setEncryption DESE RX|TX <key> <remoteName>

RX Receive key

TX Transmit key

key Key in the format of an eight-hexadecimal number.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 277

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setEncryption dese tx 1111111111111111 HQ

remote setEncryption dese rx 2222222222222222 HQ

REMOTE SETENCRYPTION (DifÞe-Hellman Encryption)

This command is used to specify encryption based on the Diffie-Hellman key-exchange protocol. Each router
possesses an internal encryption file that is associated with a public key providing 768-bit security. The predefined
keys can be replaced by the user. The configuration file on the router must have a ÒnumÓ suffix (e.g., dh96.num).

remote setEncryption DESE_1_KEY|DESE_2_KEY [<filename>] <remoteName>

DESE_1_KEY SpeciÞes that the same key is used in both directions

DESE_2_KEY SpeciÞes that the keys are different

Þlename Name of the Þle containing the DifÞe-Hellman values. If the Þle is not speciÞed, default values
built into the routerÕs kernel are automatically selected.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setEncryption DESE_1_KEY dh96.num HQ

REMOTE SETIPOPTIONS
Turns on or turns off the selected IP option for the WAN interface. To select IP options for the Ethernet interface,
use the command eth ip options (page 243).

Several RIP options are available. RIP is a protocol used for exchanging IP routing information among routers.
The RIP options allow you to set IP routing information protocol controls over a point-to-point WAN. For more
information, see IP (RIP) Protocol Controls, on page 81.

remote setipoptions <option> on|off <remoteName>

option Specify one of the following options:

rxrip Receive and process IP RIP-1 compatible packets and RIP-2 broadcast packets from the remote
site. Also receive and process RIP-2 multicast packets. Set this option if the local router is to
discover route information from other sites connected to the remote router. This is useful for
hierarchical organizations. If you are connecting to another company or an Internet Service
Provider, you may wish to set this option off. The default is off.

rxrip1 Receive and process RIP-1 packets only.

rxrip2 Receive and process RIP-2 packets only.

rxdef Receive default IP route address. When this option is set on, the local router receives the remote
siteÕs default IP route. The default is off.

278 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 txrip Transmit IP RIP-1 compatible broadcast packets and RIP-2 multicast packets to the remote site.
When this option is set on, the local router sends routing information packets to the remote site.
The default is off.

txrip1 Transmit broadcast RIP-1 packets only.

txrip2 Transmit multicast RIP-2 packets only.

txdef Transmit the local routerÕs default IP route. When this option is set to on, the local router sends
the default route to the remote site. The default is off.

private Keep IP routes private. Used to prevent advertisement of this route to other sites by the remote
router. Used as a security mechanism when the remote site is outside your company (an Internet
Service Provider, for example), or whenever you want to keep the identity of the site private.
The default is yes.

multicast Allows the remote router to send and receive IP multicast traffic.

lanconfig Accept LAN configuration information. Indicates that this PPP remote can receive IPCP
information for dynamically reconfiguring the Ethernet interface.

lcpecho Use periodic echo.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

remote setipoptions private on HQ

REMOTE SETIPSLAVEPPP
Sets the IP Slave PPP mode. If the slave mode is yes, the router accepts the IP address that the remote end informs
the router that it has; the router disregards any IP address specified in its own configuration. If the mode is no, the
router tries to use the address in its configuration.

Normally there is no need to change the default (no) value of this option. However, in certain situations where the
router is managed by another party, (as part of a managed service), you could set this value to yes to ensure that
the central management site always specifies the IP address of the router.

remote setIPSlavePPP yes | no <remoteName>

yes | no Slave mode setting. The default is no.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

remote setipslaveppp yes branchremote

REMOTE SETIPTRANSLATE
This command is used to control Network Address Translation on a per remote router basis. It allows several PCs
to share a single IP address to the Internet. The remote router must assign the source WAN IP address to the

Chapter 8. Command Reference 279

routersÕ local WAN port. This command requires that you define a Source WAN IP Address with the command:
remote setSrcIpAddr

remote setIPTranslate on|off <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setIPTranslate on HQ

REMOTE SETIPXADDR
Sets the IPX network number for the remote WAN connection.

remote setIpxaddr <ipxNet> [port#]

ixpNet IPX network number represented by 8 hexadecimal characters.

port# Port number of the Ethernet LAN. This number must be either 0 or it may be omitted.

Example: remote setIpxaddr 789 HQ

REMOTE SETIPXOPTIONS
Turns on or turns off the IPX option RIPSAP for the remote WAN connection.

remote setIpxOptions ripsap on | off <remote>

on | off Sets the option on or off.

remote Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

remote setIpxOptions ripsap on HQ

REMOTE SETMAXLINE
Sets the maximum links (1 or 2) for a DOD (dial on demand) connection, that is, a connection where the link goes
up and down. These links include those for ISDN, L2TP tunnels, IPSec tunnels, and dial backup.

If you set the maximum links to 2, bandwidth on demand management determines their actual usage; see the
remote setBWthresh command (page 276).

remote setMaxLine 1 | 2 <remoteName>

1|2 Maximum number of links to be used for the connection (1 or 2). The default is 1.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

280 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 remote setMaxLine 2 HQ

REMOTE SETMGMTIPADDR
This command assigns to the remote router entry an IP address which is to be used for management purposes only
and not for IP address translation. This management IP address is generally a private network address used solely
by the ISP.

The management IP address is separate from the IP address used for IP address translation. The IP address used
for address translation is generally a public IP address valid on the Internet. It is set by the remote setSrcIpAddr
command (page 286).

Note: The management address is not effective until after the next save and remote restart or reboot.

Note: To use the management address as the source address for a ping, you must specify it using the -I option on
the ping command (page 194). For example, to use management address 192.168.1.2 when pinging destination
address 192.168.100.100, specify:
ping -I 192.168.1.2 192.168.100.100

Note: To use the management address as the source address for a copy, you must specify both the source and
destination addresses on the copy command (page 200).

To list the current management address for the remote router, if any, use the remote list command (page 271). To
set a management address for an Ethernet interface, see eth ip mgmt (page 241).

remote setMgmtIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask> <remoteName>

ipaddr IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

mask IP subnet mask (4 decimals separated by periods).

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

remote setMgmtIpAddr 10.0.0.3 255.255.255.0 internet

REMOTE SETMINLINE
This command is used for dial-up connections and other connections that behave like dial-up connections, such as
L2TP and PPPoE sessions. The command sets the minimum number of channels to be continually allocated to the
connection. The default is 0, in which case a channel is allocated only when needed.

For example, if your service provider charges by the hour, you might prefer the minlines default value (0) so that
a channel is allocated only when needed. However, if you are not charged by the hour, then having a channel
allocated continually would save you the 2-3 second wait time required for each channel re-allocation.

remote setMinLine <minlines> <remoteName>

minlines Minimum number of channels to be continually allocated for the connection (0, 1, or 2). If you
specify 0, a channel is allocated for the connection only when needed. The default is 0.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Examples:

Chapter 8. Command Reference 281

The following command keeps a channel allocated for the session even when there is no traffic.

remote setMinLine 1 PPPoEuser

The following commands set up a timeout period so that, if there is no traffic for 10 minutes (600 seconds), the
channel is deallocated.

remote setMinLine 0 PPPoEuser

remote settimer 600 PPPoEuser

REMOTE SETMTU
Sets the maximum transfer unit for the remote interface.

To see the current MTU size for an active remote that is doing IP routing, use the ipifs command (page 191).

If the protocol in use is PPP, you can see the MRU and MTU sizes using the command mlp show. The MRU is
the maximum receive unit. Other information in the mlp show output includes the maxtu (the maximum packet
size that can be sent; it is based on the peerÕs MRU size), the ourmru (the maximum PPP packet size that can be
received if multilink is not running), and ourmrru (the maximum PPP packet size that can be received if multilink
is running).

remote setmtu <size> <remoteName>

size Maximum number of bytes that can be transferred as a unit.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

The following command decreases the MTU size for remote interface HQ to 1400 bytes.

remote setmtu 1400 HQ

REMOTE SETOURPASSWD
Sets a unique CHAP or PAP authentication password for the local router that is used for authentication when the
local router connects to the specified remote router. This password overrides the password set in the system
passwd command. A common use is to set a password assigned to you by Internet Service Providers.

remote setOurPasswd <password> <remoteName>

password Authentication password of the local router for use in connecting to the remote router.

Note: The password is case-sensitive and its maximum length is 39 characters.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setOurPasswd s1dpxl7 HQ

282 Chapter 8. Command Reference

REMOTE SETOURSYSNAME
Sets a unique CHAP or PAP authentication system name for the local router that is used for authentication when
the local router connects to the specified remote router. This system name overrides the system name set in the
system name command. A common use is to set a password assigned to you by Internet Service Providers.

remote setOurSysName <name> <remoteName>

name System name of the target router.

Note: The system name is case-sensitive and may be no more than 255 characters.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setOurSysName s1dpxl7 HQ

REMOTE SETPASSWD
Sets the CHAP or PAP authentication password that is used when the remote router establishes a connection or is
challenged by the target router.

remote setPasswd <password> <remoteName>

password Authentication password of the remote router. Note that the password is case-sensitive and its
maximum length is 40 characters.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setPasswd s2dpxl7 HQ

REMOTE SETPHONE
Specifies the phone number to be used for the dial on demand (DOD) connection, that is, a connection where the
link goes up and down. These links include those for ISDN, L2TP tunnels, IPSec tunnels, and dial backup.

For dial backup, the phone number is used when dialing out using the backup V.90 modem connected to the
console port. You may specify both a primary number and an alternative phone number. For more information on
the Dial Backup option, see page 149.

remote setPhone async | isdn 1 | 2 <phone#> <remoteName>

async Asynchronous connection

isdn ISDN connection

1 Primary phone number or first ISDN channel

2 Alternative phone number or second ISDN channel.

phone# Decimal number representing the exact digits to be dialed. Digits, the asterisk, and the #
characters are accepted; use a comma to specify a 2-second pause.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 283

remoteName Name of the remote entry (character string).

Example:

# The phone number begins with 9 (to get an outside line), a comma (for a 2-second

# pause), and finally the 7-digit local number.

remote setphone async 1 9,3801100 backup

remote setspeed 115200 async 1 backup

# Specifies the alternative phone number to be used and its bit rate.

remote setphone async 2 9,3801101 backup

remote setspeed 115200 async 2 backup

REMOTE SETPPPOPT
Turns on or turns off a PPP option.

The default settings vary with the option. To see the current settings of the PPP options, use the command remote
list (page 271).

remote setPPPopt <option> on | off <remoteName>

option Option to be turned on or turned off.

compression Compression allowed.

ipSlaveMode Always accept peer proposal for our WAN IP address.

lcpecho Use periodic echo (if permanent interface or PPPoE).

reacqIPAddr Try to reacquire the IP address.

on | off Desired setting for the option.

remoteName Name of the remote entry (character string).

Example:

remote setPPPopt compression on HQ

REMOTE SETPROTOCOL
Sets the link protocol for the remote router.

remote setProtocol [PPP | PPPLLC | RFC1483 | RFC1483MER | FRF8 | RAWIP] <remoteName>

PPP PPP protocol with no encapsulation.

PPLLC PPP protocol with LLC SNAP encapsulation (used with frame relay internetworking units).

284 Chapter 8. Command Reference

RFC1483 RFC 1483 protocol.

RFC1483MER RFC 1483MER (MAC Encapsulated Routing) protocol.

FRF8 This protocol implements ATM to frame relay as deÞned in the Frame Relay Forum FRF.8
Interworking Agreement.

RAWIP RawIP protocol.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setProtocol ppp fp1

REMOTE SETPVC
Specifies the PVC number for connecting to the remote router.

remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number> <remoteName>

vpi number Virtual Path ID Ñ number that identiÞes the link formed by the virtual path.

vci number Virtual Circuit ID Ñ number that identiÞes a channel within a virtual path in a DSL/ATM
environment.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setPVC 0*38 HQ

REMOTE SETRMTIPADDR
Sets the WAN IP address for the remote router. This address is required only if the remote router does not support
IP address negotiation under PPP (i.e., numbered mode is required, and the remote router cannot specify a WAN
IP address for use during the negotiation process).

remote setRmtIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask> <remoteName>

ipaddr IP address of the remote router, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

mask IP network mask of the remote router, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setRmtIpAddr 128.1.210.65 255.255.255.192 HQ

REMOTE SETSPEED
Specifies the speed to be used when dialing out using the backup V.90 modem connected to the console port.
Specify a speed for each phone number you provide (primary and alternative).

Chapter 8. Command Reference 285

For more information on the Dial Backup option, see page 149.

remote setSpeed <bitrate> | default async 1 | 2 <remoteName>

bitrate Bit rate to be used for the phone number. Possible speeds are 38400, 57600, 115200, or 230400.

default Use the default speed.

1 Primary phone number.

2 Alternative phone number.

remoteName Name of the remote entry (character string).

Example:

# Specifies the primary phone number and its bit rate.

remote setphone async 1 9,5551288 backup

remote setspeed 115200 async 1 backup

# Specifies the alternative phone number to be used and its bit rate.

remote setphone async 2 9,5551289 backup

remote setspeed 115200 async 2 backup

REMOTE SETSRCIPADDR
Sets the IP address for the target WAN connection to the remote router. You may set this address when the remote
router requires the target and the remote WAN IP addresses to be on the same subnetwork. Another instance is to
force numbered mode and to prevent the remote router from changing the target WAN IP address through IPCP
address negotiation. The target WAN IP address defaults to the Ethernet LAN IP address.

remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask> <remoteName>

ipaddr Target IP address of the WAN connection to the remote router, in the format of 4 decimals
separated by periods.

mask IP network mask, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setSrcIpAddr 128.1.210.151 255.255.255.192 HQ

REMOTE SETTIMER
This command is used for dial-up connections and other connections that behave like dial-up connections, such as
L2TP and PPPoE sessions. The command sets the length of the timeout period before disconnection.

When the connection has had no traffic for the timeout period, the channel is deallocated. A channel is re-
allocated when it is needed.

286 Chapter 8. Command Reference

A timeout period is desirable if your service provider charges by the hour. However, the connection has to wait a
few seconds each time a channel is re-allocated.

Note: The timeout period set by this command is not effective if a remote setMinLines command has changed
the minlines value from its default (0) to 1 or 2.

remote setTimer <seconds> <remoteName>

seconds Number of seconds in the timeout period. The default is 60.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

The following commands set up a timeout period so that, if there is no traffic for 10 minutes (600 seconds), the
channel is deallocated.

remote setMinLine 0 PPPoEuser

remote settimer 600 PPPoEuser

REMOTE START
If the remote is not currently active, this command attempts to start an active session.

Note: A reboot ends the active session; to start a session after the reboot, you must enter another remote start
command.

To stop an active session for the remote, use the command remote stop (page 288). To stop and immediately
restart a session for the remote, use the command remote restart (page 274).

remote start <remoteName>

remoteName Remote interface name.

Example:

The following command starts remote interface HQ.

remote start HQ

REMOTE STATS
Shows the current status of the connection to the remote router, including the bandwidth and data transfer rate.

remote stats [<remoteName>]

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote stats HQ

Response:

Chapter 8. Command Reference 287

STATISTICS FOR <HQ>:
Current state ........................ currently connected
Current output bandwidth ............. 0 bps
Current input bandwidth .............. 0 bps
Current bandwidth allocated .......... 25600000 bps
On port ATM_VC/1 ..................... 0+01:02:36 (0%/0% of 25600000 bps)
Total connect time ................... 0+01:11:48
Total bytes out ...................... 15896
Total bytes in ....................... 0

STATISTICS FOR <internet>:

Current state ........................ not connected
Current output bandwidth ............. 0 bps
Current input bandwidth\ ............. 0 bps
Current bandwidth allocated .......... 0 bps
Total connect time ................... 0+00:00:00
Total bytes out ...................... 0
Total bytes in ....................... 0

where:

Current state: connected, not connected, currently connecting, currently attempting to connect, currently
closing, out of service, or not known.

Bandwidth state: idle, increasing, decreasing, decreasing hold, unknown, or idle.

REMOTE STATSCLEAR
Allows the user to reset the statistics counter for a given remote router.

remote statsclear <remoteName>

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote statsclear HQ

REMOTE STOP
If the remote is active, this command stops the active session.

Note: To keep certain configuration changes, you must enter a save command before stopping the remote
interface.

The stop command does not disable the remote entry so another session can be started for the remote.To start an
active session for the remote, use the command remote start (page 287). To stop and immediately restart a
session for a remote, use the command remote restart (page 274).

remote stop <remoteName>

remoteName Remote interface name.

288 Chapter 8. Command Reference

Example:

The following command stops the active session for remote HQ.

remote stop HQ

REMOTE UNBINDIPVIRTUALROUTE
Removes a remote route from the named IP virtual routing table.

To list the remote routes, use the remote listIProutes command, page 272. To add a remote route, use the
remote bindIPVirtualRoute command, page 260.

Note: A route change in an IP virtual routing table takes effect immediately. However, the change is lost if it is
not saved before the next remote restart or reboot.

remote unbindIPVirtualRoute <ipaddr> <tablename> <remoteName>

ipaddr IP address of the remote network or station (4 decimals separated by periods).

tablename IP virtual routing table from which the route is removed (character string).

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example:

The following command removes a route from virtual routing table FRANCISCO. The route removed is for
IP address 10.1.2.0 and remote router HQ.

remote unbindIPVirtualRoute 10.1.2.0 FRANCISCO HQ

Chapter 8. Command Reference 289

ADSL Commands
Use the following commands to manage the ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line) link for an ADSL
router.

ADSL ?
Lists the supported keywords.

adsl ?

Response:
ADSL commands:
? restart stats speed

ADSL RESTART
Resynchronizes the modem with the CO (Central Office) equipment.

adsl restart

Response:
# 12/02/1997-12:47:46:ADSL: Idle
12/02/1997-12:47:46:ADSL: Startup initiated
12/02/1997-12:47:48:ADSL: Startup training in progress
12/02/1997-12:47:54:ADSL: Modem started successfully
12/02/1997-12:47:54:ADSL: Near Avg SQ #: 44 dB [ 3]
12/02/1997-12:47:54:ADSL: Far Avg SQ #: 44 dB [ 3]
12/02/1997-12:47:54:ADSL: Downstream rate: 6272 Kb/s, Upstream rate:
1088 Kb/s
12/02/1997-12:47:54:DOD: connecting to internet @ 0*38 over ATM_VC/1
12/02/1997-12:47:56:ADSL: Data Mode
DUM: BR CHG ATM_VC/1 - to internet now forwarding

ADSL SPEED
Displays the current downstream and upstream rates.The actual speed is set by the DSLAM.

adsl speed

Example: adsl speed

Response:
downstream rate: 6272 Kb/s, upstream rate: 1088 Kb/s

290 Chapter 8. Command Reference

ADSL STATS
Shows the current error status for the ADSL connection.

adsl stats [clear]

clear Option used to reset the counters.

Example: adsl stats

Response:
ASDL Statistics:
Out of frame errors ..... 0
HEC errors received ..... 0
CRC errors received ..... 0
FEBE errors received .... 0
Remote Out-of-frame ....... 0
Remote HEC errors ......... 0

Chapter 8. Command Reference 291

ATM Commands
Use the following commands to manage the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) link for an ATM router.

ATM ?
Lists the supported keywords.

atm ?

Example: atm ?

Response:
ATM commands:
? echoPVC findPVC
help voicePVC

ATM PCR
Sets the speed of the ATM link in cells per second.
To set the speed in kilobytes, use the command atm speed (page 293).

atm pcr <cells/seconds>

cells/second number of cells per second

Example: atm pcr 471

ATM RESET
Performs traffic shaping. It causes the ATM link to re-initialize.

atm reset

Example: atm reset

ATM SAVE
Saves the ATM configuration settings.

atm save

Example: atm save

292 Chapter 8. Command Reference

ATM SPEED
Sets the speed of the ATM link in kilobits per second.

The default upstream speed is 326 Kb/s. Use this command if the upstream speed exceeds 326 Kb/s. Generally,
your speed value is obtained from your Network Service Provider.

To set the speed in cells per second, use the command atm pcr (page 292)

atm speed [upstream speed in Kb/S]

upstream speed in Kb/S Number provided by the Network Service Provider. The default value for the
upstream speed is 326 Kb/s.

Example:

#atm speed 326

ATM Upstream Rate: 326 Kb/S

REMOTE SETATMTRAFFIC
Sets ATM traffic-shaping on a remote router. ATM traffic-shaping allows the user to set the average rate at which
cells are sent, that is, the Sustained Cell Rate (SCR), to a value lower than the ATM link speed, the Peak Cell Rate
(PCR).

ATM traffic-shaping should be used to allocate bandwidth whenever more than one remote router is defined. In
that case, enter a remote setATMTraffic command for each remote. Thus, if you have five remotes, you need to
enter five commands.

If no ATM traffic values are set, ATM traffic for the remote is shaped using UBR (unspecified bit rate).

If a CBR (constant bit rate) is required, then specify 1 as the Maximum Burst Size (MBS). If a VBR (Variable Bit
Rate) is required, specify a value greater than 1 as the Maximum Burst Size (MBS).

To disable ATM traffic-shaping, use the command remote setATMTraffic 0 0 <remoteName>

remote setATMTraffic SCR MBS <remoteName>

SCR Sustained Cell Rate (cells per second).

MBS Maximum Burst Size (cells). For a constant bit rate (CBR), specify 1; for a variable bit rate
(VBR), specify a value greater than 1.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Examples:

Assuming that the ATM link speed (upstream) is 200 Kb/s 471 cells/s and an average upstream data rate of
20 Kb/s (47 cells/s) is desired, you would issue the following command:

remote setATMtraffic 47 31 HQ

If a constant bit rate (CBR) is required, use the following command:

Chapter 8. Command Reference 293

 remote setATMtraffic 47 1 HQ

The following command disables ATM traffic-shaping on remote router HQ:

remote setATMtraffic 0 0 HQ

294 Chapter 8. Command Reference

DMT Commands
These commands manage the ADSL DMT (Discrete MultiTone) router. To see additional DMT debug
commands, see ADSL DMT Router Debug Commands, on page 184.

DMT LINK
Selects the link type for the ADSL DMT router. The link type survives reboots.

Normally, the CO and CPE negotiate the link type to be used. Use the dmt link command when you do not want
the CO and CPE to negotiate the link type, but instead want to specify the type of data link required.

Caution: This command forces the CPE into the specified mode. It is not for normal use.

dmt link DEFAULT | T1_413 | G_DMT | G_LITE | MULTIMODE

DEFAULT Default value. The CO and CPE negotiate the link type used.

T1_413 ANSI standard T1.413

G_DMT G.dmt standard

G_LITE ITU G.Lite standard

MULTIMODE The CO and CPE negotiate the link type used.

DMT MODE
The dmt mode command can request one of three modes: ANSI, no_Trellis_ANSI, and UAWG.

UAWG mode is becoming obsolete.

No Trellis encoding for T1.413 ANSI ADSL is only needed where auto-negotiation is not supported for Trellis.

dmt mode ansi | no_trellis_ansi | uawg

Chapter 8. Command Reference 295

Dual-Ethernet Router (ETH) Commands
The following Ethernet commands are used to manage the Ethernet interfaces of the Dual-Ethernet (Ethernet-to-
Ethernet) router and thus are specific to that type of router only. For the other Ethernet commands, see page 229.

¥ The Dual-Ethernet router has two interfaces:

ETH/0 Hub with four 10Base-T connectors

ETH/1 Single 10Base-T connector

¥ This Dual-Ethernet router may be configured via the Web Browser GUI or from the Command Line Interface
(CLI). To set up any DHCP options and to configure optional features like IP filtering, you must use the CLI.

¥ For configuration information, refer to Dual-Ethernet Router Configuration, on page 45 and the Customer
Release Notes provided with the Dual-Ethernet router.

¥ If you use the Boot from Network option from the boot menu to perform a boot code update, the boot
request is sent from the ETH/0 interface only.

ETH BR ENABLE
Enables bridging in a Dual-Ethernet environment. This command requires rebooting the router for the change to
take effect.

eth br enable

Example: eth br enable

ETH BR DISABLE
Disables bridging in a Dual-Ethernet environment.

Note: This command requires rebooting the router for the change to take effect.

eth br disable

Example: eth br disable

ETH BR OPTIONS
Sets controls on bridging for the Ethernet interface To see the current bridge settings for the Ethernet interface,
use the eth list command.

Warning: Do not change the stp setting without approval from your system administrator.

eth br options <option> on | off [<port#>]

296 Chapter 8. Command Reference

option stp

Set this option to on to use the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). The default is on.

STP is used to detect bridging loops. Set this option to off only if the bridging peers do not support
the Spanning Tree Protocol or if you are certain that no bridging loops could exist. When STP is
disabled on an interface, any STP packets received on that interface are ignored.

Note: The Spanning Tree Protocol adds a 40-second delay each time the ADSL or ATM link
comes up while the interface determines if there is a bridging loop.

pppoeOnly

Set this option to on to limit this Ethernet port to bridging PPPoE traffic only. If the option is set to
off, then the port can bridge any traffic, including PPPoE traffic. The default is off.

port# Ethernet port number (0 or 1). The default is 0.

Examples:

The following command turns off the spanning tree protocol for Ethernet port 0.

eth br options stp off

The following command configures Ethernet port 1 so that only PPPoE traffic is bridged through it.

eth br options pppoeonly on 1

Chapter 8. Command Reference 297

HDSL Commands
Use the following commands to manage the HDSL (High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line) link for an HDSL
router.

General Information about HDSL

t Line activation

Line activation is independent of network settings. During activation, the Link light (on the front panel of
the router) first is yellow and then turns green when the link becomes active.

The router at the CPE end will try auto-speed detection, starting at 384 and then try to detect the next
higher speed (for about 30 seconds per speed). The WAN light should turn yellow, then green, when the
link has activated.

Auto-speed detection can be turned off with the command hdsl speed noauto.

If the line was previously set to Òno auto-speedÓ (noauto), the Link light will be amber instead, when the
line tries to activate.

The ifs command displays the Link as either off or opened when successfully activated. Following is a
sample output.

Sample:
ifs
Interface Speed In % Out % Protocol State
Connection
ETHERNET/0 10.0mb 0%/0% 0%/0% (Ethernet) OPENED
HDSL/0 384kb 0%/0% 0%/0% (HDSL) OPENED
CONSOLE/0 9600 b 0%/0% 0%/0% (TTY) OPENED

t Auto-speed sequence

Auto-speed starts with the lower speed (384) and then tries to activate for 30 seconds. If no activation
takes place, it attempts the next higher speed. The time intervals between activation may change if the
modems donÕt activate as expected. Following is a correct activation output.
03/09/1998-17:11:59:HDSL: Deactivated
03/09/1998-17:12:22:HDSL: CPE is Activating at 384 Kb/s
03/09/1998-17:13:00:HDSL: Deactivated
03/09/1998-17:13:01:HDSL: CPE is Activating at 1168 Kb/s
03/09/1998-17:13:32:HDSL: Deactivated
03/09/1998-17:13:32:HDSL: CPE is Activating at 1168 Kb/s
03/09/1998-17:14:11:HDSL: Deactivated
03/09/1998-17:14:12:HDSL: CPE is Activating at 384 Kb/s
03/09/1998-17:14:51:HDSL: Activated
03/09/1998-17:14:53:FRAMER: The framer is synchronized

298 Chapter 8. Command Reference

HDSL ?
Lists the supported keywords.

hdsl ?

Example: hdsl ?

Response:
HDSL commands:
? help terminal
save speed

HDSL SAVE
Saves the HDSL-related changes across restarts and reboots.

hdsl save

Example: hdsl save

HDSL SPEED
CO end: Sets the speed manually on the Central Office (CO) end only.

CPE end: The router on the Customer Premises End (CPE) is always in auto-speed mode: it uses an auto-speed
algorithm to attempt to match the CO speed. The command hdsl speed noauto is used to override auto-speed.

Note 1: The command hdsl speed (with no option) displays the current speed if the modem has activated
successfully.

Note 2: hdsl speed noauto should be followed by the command hdsl save to be persistent across restarts and
reboots.

Note 3: During auto-speed search, use the command hdsl speed <speed> to stop the search and restart it at the
speed you just entered.

hdsl speed [384 | 1168 | noauto]

384 Default speed for the CO.

1168 Authorized non-default speeds for the CO in Mbps.

noauto Used to override auto-speed on the CPE.

Example: hdsl speed 1168

hdsl speed noauto
hdsl speed

Chapter 8. Command Reference 299

HDSL TERMINAL
The router is by default configured as the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE). Use this command if you intend
to configure the router as the Central Office equipment (CO).

hdsl terminal cpe defines the CPE end (default configuration)

hdsl terminal co defines the CO end.

hdsl terminal displays the current settings.

hdsl terminal [cpe|co]

co This option lets you deÞne the router as the CO.

Example: hdsl terminal

Response:
Customer Premises

Example: hdsl terminal co

300 Chapter 8. Command Reference

IDSL Commands
An IDSL (ISDN Digital Subscriber Line) delivers a maximum symmetric 144 Kbps of bandwidth. The IDSL
bandwidth is composed of two 64 Kbps B channels, plus one 16 Kbps D channel. Your speed setting indicates the
channels that you are using.

When using Frame Relay:

¥ Your IDSL switch setting indicates your committed bandwidth (FR64, FR128, or FR144).

¥ The IDSL router can support several DLCI virtual circuits over a Frame-Relay IDSL link. However, a typical
connection to the Internet requires only one DLCI. The DLCI number must match the DLCI of the remote
end.

This section describes the following commands used to manage your IDSL router:

idsl list Lists the current Frame Relay switch type (FR64, FR128, or FR144).

idsl save Saves the IDSL changes.

idsl set switch Changes the Frame Relay switch type.

idsl set speed Changes the IDSL speed (64, 128, or 144).

remote setdlci Specifies the DLCI for the remote router entry.

remote setprotocol Selects the link protocol for the remote router entry (PPP, Frame Relay, or MER).

IDSL LIST
Lists the current switch type. To change the switch type, use the idsl set switch command.

idsl list

Example:
# idsl list
Switch type is FR128

IDSL SAVE
Saves IDSL-related changes across restarts and reboots. Changes that are not saved are discarded.

idsl save

Example:
# idsl save

IDSL SET SPEED

Specifies the speed of the IDSL connection.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 301

The IDSL bandwidth is composed of two 64 Kbps B channels, plus one 16 Kbps D channel. Your speed setting
indicates the channels that you are using.

idsl set speed 64 | 128 | 144

64 64 Kbps (one channel)

128 128 Kbps (two channels)

144 144 Kbps (three channels)

Example:

# idsl set speed 144

IDSL SET SWITCH

Specifies link speeds of 64, 128, or 144 Kbps for the IDSL connection.

idsl set switch FR64 | FR128 | FR144

FR64 Link speed of 64 Kbps

FR128 Link speed of 128 Kbps

FR144 Link speed of 144 Kbps

Example:

# idsl set switch fr144

REMOTE SETDLCI
This command sets the DLCI for the remote router entry. The DLCI (Data Link Connection Identifier) is an
address identifying a logical connection in a Frame Relay environment. The DLCI is generally provided by the
Network Service Provider.

The IDSL router can support several DLCI virtual circuits over a Frame-Relay IDSL link. However, a typical
connection to the Internet requires only one DLCI. The DLCI number must match the DLCI of the remote end.

remote setDLCI <dlcinumber> <remoteName>

dlcinumber Frame Relay number identifying the data-link connection.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setDLCI 16 HQ

302 Chapter 8. Command Reference

REMOTE SETPROTOCOL
This IDSL-specific command is used to select the appropriate link protocol for your IDSL connection. Your
Network Service Provider will tell you which link protocol to use.

remote setProtocol PPP | FR | MER <remoteName>

PPP PPP protocol with no encapsulation.

FR RFC 1490 protocol (Multiprotocol encapsulation over Frame Relay).

MER RFC 1490 protocol with MAC Encapsulated Routing.

remoteName Name of the remote router (character string).

Example: remote setProtocol FR HQ

Chapter 8. Command Reference 303

SDSL Commands
The commands in this section manage the Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line (SDSL) link for an SDSL router.

¥ sdsl preact Disables or re-enables autobaud pre-activation.

¥ sdsl speed Displays and sets the line speed.

¥ sdsl stats Displays and clears SDSL statistics.

¥ sdsl terminal Redefines the router as CO equipment.

Line activation

Line activation is independent of network settings. During activation, the Link light (on the front panel of the
router) is first yellow and then turns green when the link becomes active. The WAN light should turn yellow,
then green, when the link has activated.

If auto-speed detection was turned off for the line (sdsl speed noauto), the Link light is amber when the line
tries to activate.

The ifs command displays the Link as either off or opened when it has successfully activated. The following
is a sample output.

Sample:
ifs
Interface Speed In % Out % Protocol State
Connection
ETHERNET/0 10.0mb 0%/0% 0%/0% (Ethernet) OPENED
SDSL/0 384kb 0%/0% 0%/0% (ATM) OPENED
CONSOLE/0 9600 b 0%/0% 0%/0% (TTY) OPENED

Line speed

In general, the line activates at the speed it was last activated. The line speed can be changed by several
means depending on the router model. One way is by setting the speed manually with an sdsl speed
command.

In general, if the speed is not set otherwise, the router at the CPE end will try auto-speed detection (unless it
has been disabled).

Auto-speed detection attempts to activate the line at different speeds (for about 30 seconds per speed) until
the line is activated. The following is output from a successful activation.

03/09/1998-17:11:59:SDSL: Deactivated
03/09/1998-17:12:22:SDSL: CPE is Activating at 768 Kb/s
03/09/1998-17:13:00:SDSL: Deactivated
03/09/1998-17:13:01:SDSL: CPE is Activating at 1152 Kb/s
03/09/1998-17:13:32:SDSL: Deactivated
03/09/1998-17:13:32:SDSL: CPE is Activating at 1152 Kb/s
03/09/1998-17:14:11:SDSL: Deactivated
03/09/1998-17:14:12:SDSL: CPE is Activating at 384 Kb/s
03/09/1998-17:14:51:SDSL: Activated
03/09/1998-17:14:53:FRAMER: The framer is synchronized
03/09/1998-17:15:19:DOD: connecting to co @ 0*38 over ATM-VC/1

304 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 03/09/1998-17:15:35:DOD: link to co over ATM-VC/1 is now up
03/09/1998-17:15:57:SDSL: Line Rate at last activation saved

Autobaud pre-activation

The previous section showed an example in which auto-speed detection attempted several speeds, before
settling on the best speed for the connection. In some cases, this process can require substantial time. The
autobaud feature, if available for your router and DSLAM, can shorten the connection set-up time by
determining the probable optimal speed before the connection begins.

If the autobaud feature is available and selected, its pre-activation phase automatically determines the
maximum speed that can be supported by a specific loop. It probes the channel and characterizes the line to
allow the connection to begin at a speed closer to the optimal speed.

Later, after activation, the autobaud feature checks the line quality to determine the optimal speed. If the
autobaud feature is used, the auto-speed detection described in the previous section is not performed;
however, you may still set the speed manually with an sdsl speed command if you wish.

A command is available to turn off autobaud pre-activation (sdsl preact off, page 305). A message is sent
before line activation indicating whether autobaud pre-activation was used. The following example shows the
message sent when pre-activation is available and the response to the sdsl speed command:

08/16/2000-16:11:06:SDSL: Using preactivation-determined rate of 2320 Kb/s

08/16/2000-16:11:06:SDSL: CPE is Activating at 2320 Kb/s

08/16/2000-16:11:20:SDSL: Activated at 2320 Kb/s
08/16/2000-16:11:20:FRAMER: The framer is synchronized
# sdsl speed
SDSL Current Speed (CO-controlled): 2320 Kb/s

The next example shows the message sent when pre-activation is not available:

08/16/2000-16:13:28:SDSL: Preactivation unavailable, using rate of 2320 Kb/s

08/16/2000-16:13:28:SDSL: CPE is Activating at 2320 Kb/s

08/16/2000-16:13:41:SDSL: Activated at 2320 Kb/s
08/16/2000-16:13:42:FRAMER: The framer is synchronized

SDSL ?
Lists the supported keywords for the sdsl command.

sdsl ?

Example:
# sdsl ?
SDSL commands:
? help speed
save stats terminal

SDSL PREACT
Displays and/or changes the autobaud pre-activation status.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 305

The default status is on. However, to be effective, autobaud pre-activation must also be enabled at the Central
Office (CO) end of the connection.

Note: Remember to enter an sdsl save or save command to save SDSL changes across restarts and reboots.

To determine the current pre-activation status, enter sdsl preact.

For more information on the autobaud feature, see Autobaud pre-activation, on page 305.

sdsl preact [on | off]

on Enables pre-activation at the customer premises (CPE) end. (To be effective, pre-activation must also be
enabled at the CO end.)

off Disables pre-activation.

Example:

The first command displays the current pre-activation status. The second command disables pre-activation.

# sdsl preact
Preactivation enabled
# sdsl preact off
Preactivation disabled

SDSL SAVE
Saves SDSL configuration changes across restarts and reboots.

sdsl save

Example: sdsl save

SDSL SPEED
Manages the speed of the SDSL line.

At the Central Office (CO) end, the command sets the speed manually only.

At the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) end, the command can:

¥ Display the current speed setting and list the available speeds (sdsl speed)

¥ Manually set the speed (sdsl speed <speed>)

¥ Override auto-speed detection (sdsl speed noauto)

Note: To re-instate auto-speed detection, enter an sdsl speed <speed> command.

Note: Remember to enter an sdsl save or save command to save SDSL changes across restarts and reboots.

sdsl speed [<speed> | noauto]

306 Chapter 8. Command Reference

speed Speed in kbps. To see the speeds available for the model type, enter sdsl speed. If the auto-speed
search is in progress, this command stops the search and sets the line speed as specified on the
command.

noauto Overrides auto-speed detection. If auto-speed detection is disabled, the Link light on the front panel
is amber when the line tries to activate.

(Auto-speed detection is reinstated if you enter an sdsl speed <speed> command.)

Example:
The example shows three commands:
1. Displays the current line speed, indicates that the line speed is set by auto-speed detection [AUTO], and
lists the available speed options.
2. Requests a line speed of 1152 Kb/s.
3. Shows that the line speed has been changed to 1151 Kb/s and that auto-speed detection is no longer in
effect (the [AUTO] indicator is not displayed).

# sdsl speed
SDSL Current Speed: [AUTO] 768 Kb/s
usage: sdsl speed <value in Kb/s> [ 192 384 768 1152 1536 ] | noauto
# sdsl speed 1152
# sdsl speed
SDSL Current Speed: 1152 Kb/s
usage: sdsl speed <value in Kb/s> [ 192 384 768 1152 1536 ] | noauto

SDSL STATS
Displays SDSL frame statistics. It can also clear the SDSL statistic counters.

sdsl stats [clear]

clear Clears all SDSL statistics counters.

Example:

# sdsl stats
FRAMER Statistics:
Framer Interrupts...... 2118
Out of frame errors.... 1
HEC errors received.... 16
CRC errors received.... 3
FEBE errors received... 2
Remote Out-of-frame.... 16
Remote HEC errors...... 0

SDSL TERMINAL
Displays and/or changes the routerÕs status as CO or CPE.

The router is, by default, configured as Customer Premises Equipment (CPE). Use this command if you intend to
configure the router as Central Office equipment (CO).

To determine the current CO/CPE setting, enter sdsl terminal.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 307

 sdsl terminal [cpe | co]

cpe Defines the router as the customer premises (CPE) equipment.

co Defines the router as the central office (CO) equipment.

Example:

# sdsl terminal
Customer Premises
# sdsl terminal co
Central Office

308 Chapter 8. Command Reference

DHCP Commands
The following DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) commands allow you to:

¥ Enable and disable subnetworks and client leases.

¥ Add subnetworks and client leases.

¥ Set the lease time.

¥ Change client leases manually.

¥ Set option values globally, for a subnetwork, or for a client lease.

¥ Enable/disable BootP.

¥ Use BootP to specify the boot server.

¥ Define option types.

To read about DHCP concepts and the DHCP configuration process, see DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol), on page 82.

DHCP ?
Lists the supported keywords.

dhcp ?

Response:
Sub-commands for dhcp
? help set
list bootp clear
enable add addrelay
del delrelay disable

DHCP ADD
Adds a subnetwork, a client lease, or an option type.

dhcp add [<net> <mask> ]| <ipaddr> | <code><min><max><type>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

mask IP network mask, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

code The user-deÞned code can be a number between 128 to 254 or a keyword.

min Minimum number of value(s).

Chapter 8. Command Reference 309

max Maximum number of value(s).

type Byte | word | long | longint | binary | ipaddress | string

Example 1: dhcp add 192.168.254.0.255.255.255.0

(adds this subnetwork)

Example 2: dhcp add 192.168.254.31

(adds this client lease

Example 3: dhcp add 128 1 4 ipAddress

(adds this option type

Note: In example 3, 128 allows IP addresses, the server has a minimum of one IP address, the
server can have up to four IP addresses, and the type is ÒipaddressÓ).

DHCP ADDRELAY
Adds an address to the DHCP relay list. (This list is also the BootP server list.)

While the relay list contains at least one address, the DHCP server in the router is disabled, and the router
forwards all DHCP requests and BootP requests to all servers in the relay list. (A DHCP request is issued
whenever a device attempts to acquire an IP address). It forwards every reply received from any of the servers in
the relay list to the appropriate LAN.

To remove an address from the list, use the dhcp delRelay command (page 313). For further discussion, see
Configuring BootP/DHCP Relays, on page 89.

dhcp addRelay <ipaddr>

ipaddr IP address of a server (4 decimals separated by periods).

Example: dhcp addrelay 128.1.210.64

DHCP BOOTP ALLOW

Allows a BootP request to be processed for a particular client or subnet.

dhcp bootp allow <net>|<ipaddr>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Example: dhcp bootp allow 192.168.254.0

DHCP BOOTP DISALLOW

Denies processing of a BootP request for a particular client or subnet.

310 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 dhcp bootp disallow <net>|<ipaddr>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Example: dhcp bootp disallow 192.168.254.0

DHCP BOOTP FILE

Specifies the boot file name (kernel) and the subnet to which it applies.

Note: Be sure to specify the TFTP server IP address when you specify the file using the command dhcp bootp
tftpserver (page 313).

dhcp bootp file [<net>|<ipaddr>] <name>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

name Name of the Þle to boot from; the default name for this Þle is KERNEL.F2K.

Example: dhcp bootp file 192.168.254.0 Kernel.f2k

DHCP BOOTP TFTPSERVER

Specifies the TFTP server (boot server).

dhcp bootp tftpserver [<net>|<ipaddr>]<tftpserver ipaddr>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

tftpserver ipaddr IP address of the TFTP server in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods. To clear the
IP address of the server, use 0.0.0.0.

Examples: dhcp bootp tftpserver 192.168.254.7

dhcp bootp tftpserver 192.168.254.0 192.168.254.8
dhcp bootp tftpserver 192.168.254.21 192.168.254.9
dhcp bootp tftpserver 0.0.0.0

DHCP CLEAR ADDRESSES

Clears the values from a pool of addresses.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 311

 dhcp clear addresses <net>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Example: dhcp clear addresses 192.168.254.0

DHCP CLEAR ALL RECORDS

Clears all DHCP information, including all leases and all global DHCP information.

Unlike erase dhcp, this command clears all DHCP information from memory, but leaves the DHCP.DAT file
intact. If you want to clear the information in the DHCP.DAT file as well, enter a save command after dhcp clear
all records.

Note: You cannot abbreviate the word records in the command.

dhcp clear all records

Example:

dhcp clear all records

DHCP CLEAR EXPIRE

Releases the client lease. It then becomes available for other assignments.

dhcp clear expire <ipaddr>

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Example: dhcp clear expire 192.168.254.12

Note: The client does not get updated; it will still have the old value.

DHCP CLEAR VALUEOPTION

Clears the value for a global option, for an option associated with a subnetwork, or with a specific client.

dhcp clear valueoption [<net>|<ipaddr>] <code>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

code Code can be a number between 1 and 61 or a keyword. Use the command dhcp list
deÞnedoptions to list the codes and keywords.

312 Chapter 8. Command Reference

Examples: dhcp clear valueoption 4
dhcp clear valueoption 192.168.254.0 7
dhcp clear valueoption 192.168.254.2 gateway

DHCP DEL
Deletes a subnetwork lease, a specific client lease, or a code.

dhcp del <net |<ipaddr>|<code>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

code The user-deÞned code and can be a number between 128 to 254 or a keyword.

Example 1: dhcp del 192.168.254.0

(deletes this subnetwork)

Example 2: dhcp del 192.168.254.31

(deletes this client lease

Example 3: dhcp del 128

(deletes this option with code 128)

DHCP DELRELAY
Removes an address from the DHCP relay list. (This list is also the BootP server list.)

To remove all addresses from the list, use dhcp delRelay all. If you remove all addresses from the DHCP relay
list, the DHCP server is re-enabled and resumes processing DHCP requests and also BootP requests (if BootP
processing is enabled).

To add an address to the list, use the dhcp addRelay command (page 310). For further discussion, see
Configuring BootP/DHCP Relays, on page 89.

dhcp delRelay <ipaddr> | all

ipaddr IP address to be removed from the list (4 decimals separated by periods).

all Removes all addresses from the list.

Examples:

dhcp delrelay 128.1.210.64

dhcp delrelay all

Chapter 8. Command Reference 313

DHCP DISABLE
Disables a subnetwork or a client lease.

dhcp disable all | <net> | <ipaddr>

all Disables all subnets.

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Examples: dhcp disable 192.168.254.0

dhcp disable 192.168.254.17

DHCP ENABLE
Enables a subnetwork or a client lease.

dhcp enable all | <net>|<ipaddr>

all Enables all subnets.

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Examples: dhcp enable 192.168.254.0

dhcp enable 192.168.254.17

DHCP LIST
Lists global, subnetwork, and client lease information.

dhcp list | <net>|<ipaddr>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Example 1:
The following command lists global information:

#dhcp list
bootp server............... none
bootp file.................
DOMAINNAMESERVER (6)....... 192.168.210.20 192.84.210.21

314 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 DOMAINNAME (15)............ efficient.com
WINSSERVER (44)............ 192.168.254.73
Subnet 192.168.254.0, Enabled
Mask....................... 255.255.255.0
first ip address........... 192.168.254.2
last ip address............ 192.168.254.253
lease...................... Default
bootp...................... not allowed
bootp server............... none
bootp file.................
GATEWAY (3)192.168.254.254
client 192.168.254.2, Ena, jo-computer, Expired
client 192.168.254.3, Ena, Jo, 1999/5/16 11:31:33

Example 2:

The following command lists information for client 192.168.254.3:

#dhcp list 192.168.254.3

Client 192.168.254.3, Enabled
lease....................... Default
expires..................... 1998/5/16 11:31:33
bootp....................... not allowed
bootp server................ none
bootp file..................
HOSTNAME (12)................... JO
CLIENTIDENTIFIER (61)........... 1 2 96 140 76 149 180
Example 3:
The following command lists information for the subnetwork 192.168.254.0:
#dhcp list 192.168.254.0
Subnet 192.168.254.0, Enabled
Mask 255.255.255.0
first ip address 192.168.254.2
last ip address 192.168.254.253
lease Default
bootp not allowed
bootp server none
bootp file
GATEWAY (3) 192.168.254.254
client 192.168.254.2, Ena, Jo-computer, Expired
client 192.168.254.3, Ena, Jo, 1998/5/16 11:31:33

DHCP LIST DEFINEDOPTIONS

Lists all available predefined and user-defined options.

Note: For description of the predefined options listed below, refer to RFC 1533. A predefined code can be a
number between 1 and 61 or a keyword. A user-defined code can be a number between 128 and 254 or a keyword.

dhcp list definedoptions | <code> | <string>

code PredeÞned or user-deÞned number or keyword.

string Character string.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 315

Example 1: To list all available options (they may be predeÞned as in the list below, and/or user-deÞned),
enter:
dhcp list definedoptions

Example 1:
The following command lists all available options (predefined and user-defined):

#dhcp list definedoptions

code TIMEOFFSET (2), 1 occurrence, type LONG
code GATEWAY (3), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code TIMESERVER (4), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code NAMESERVER (5), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code DOMAINNAMESERVER code SUBNETMASK (1), 1 occurrence, type IPADDRESS-RESERVED
(6), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code LOGSERVER (7), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code COOKIESERVER (8), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code LPRSERVER (9), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code IMPRESSSERVER (10), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code RESOURCELOCATION (11), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code HOSTNAME (12), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code BOOTFILESIZE (13), 1 occurrence, type WORD
code MERITDUMPFILE (14), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code DOMAINNAME (15), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code SWAPSERVER (16), 1 occurrence, type IPADDRESS
code ROOTPATH (17), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code EXTENSIONSPATH (18), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code IPFORWARDING (19), 1 occurrence, type BINARY
code NONCALSOURCERTE (20), 1 occurrence, type BINARY
code POLICYFILTER (21), 1 to 31 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code MAXDGMREASSEMBLY (22), 1 occurrence, type WORD
code DEFAULTIPTTL (23), 1 occurrence, type BYTE
code PATHMTUAGETMOUT (24), 1 occurrence, type LONGINT
code PATHMTUPLATEAUTBL (25), 1 to 127 occurrences, type WORD
code INTERFACEMTU (26), 1 occurrence, type WORD
code ALLSUBNETSLOCAL (27), 1 occurrence, type BINARY
code BROADCASTADDRESS (28), 1 occurrence, type IPADDRESScode PERFORMMASKDSCVR (29), 1
occurrence, type BINARY
code MASKSUPPLIER (30), 1 occurrence, type BINARY
code PERFORMRTRDSCVR (31), 1 occurrence, type BINARY
code RTRSOLICITADDR (32), 1 occurrence, type IPADDRESS
code STATICROUTE (33), 1 to 31 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code TRAILERENCAP (34), 1 occurrence, type BINARY
code ARPCACHETIMEOUT (35), 1 occurrence, type LONGINT
code ETHERNETENCAP (36), 1 occurrence, type BINARY
code TCPDEFAULTTTL (37), 1 occurrence, type BYTE
code TCPKEEPALIVEINTVL (38), 1 occurrence, type LONGINT
code TCPKEEPALIVEGARBG (39), 1 occurrence, type BINARY
code NETINFOSVCDOMAIN (40), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code NETINFOSERVERS (41), 1 occurrence, type IPADDRESS
code NETTIMEPROTOSRVRS (42), 1 occurrence, type IPADDRESS
code VENDORSPECIFIC (43), 1 to 255 occurrences, type BYTE
code WINSSERVER (44), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code NETBIOSTCPDGMDIST (45), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code NETBIOSTCPNODETYP (46), 1 occurrence, type BYTE
code NETBIOSTCPSCOPE (47), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code XWSFONTSERVER (48), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code XWSDISPLAYMANAGER (49), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS

316 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 code REQUESTEDIPADDR (50), 1 occurrence, type IPADDRESS-RESERVED
code IPADDRLEASETIME (51), 1 occurrence, type LONGINT-RESERVED
code OPTIONOVERLOAD (52), 1 occurrence, type BYTE-RESERVED
code MESSAGETYPE (53), 1 occurrence, type BYTE-RESERVED
code SERVERIDENTIFIER (54), 1 occurrence, type IPADDRESS-RESERVED
code PARAMREQUESTLIST (55), 1 to 255 occurrences, type BYTE-RESERVED
code MESSAGE (56), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING-RESERVED
code MAXDHCPMSGSIZE (57), 1 occurrence, type WORD-RESERVED
code RENEWALTIME (58), 1 occurrence, type LONGINT
code REBINDTIME (59), 1 occurrence, type LONGINT
code CLASSIDENTIFIER (60), 1 to 255 occurrences, type BYTE
code CLIENTIDENTIFIER (61), 2 to 255 occurrences, type BYTE
code NOTDEFINED62 (62), 1 to 255 occurrences, type BYTE
code NOTDEFINED63 (63), 1 to 255 occurrences, type BYTE
code NISDOMAIN (64), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code NISSERVERS (65), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code TFTPSERVERNAME (66), 4 to 255 characters, type STRING
code BOOTFILENAME (67), 1 to 255 characters, type STRING
code MOBILEIPHOMEAGNT (68), 0 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code SMTPSERVERS (69), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code POP3SERVERS (70), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code NNTPSERVERS (71), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code WWWSERVERS (72), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code FINGERSERVERS (73), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code IRCSERVERS (74), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code STREETTALKSERVERS (75), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS
code STREETTALKDASRVRS (76), 1 to 63 occurrences, type IPADDRESS

Example 2:

The following command lists options starting with the string ÒgaÓ:

#dhcp list definedoptions ga

code, number of values, type of value
code GATEWAY (3), occurrence 1, type IPADDRESS

DHCP LIST LEASE

Lists the lease time.

dhcp list lease

Example: dhcp list lease

Response:
Default lease time ......... 168 hours

DHCP SET ADDRESSES

Creates or changes a pool of IP addresses that are associated with a subnetwork.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 317

 dhcp set addresses <first ipaddr> <last ipaddr>

Þrst ipaddr First address in a pool of addresses for a particular subnetwork.

last ipaddr Last address in a pool of addresses for a particular subnetwork.

Example: dhcp set addresses 192.168.254.1 192.168.254.250

DHCP SET EXPIRE

This command is used to manually change a client lease expiration time to a certain value.

Note 1: Changing a client lease time manually is rarely required.

Note 2: The client information does not get updated. It will still have the old value.

dhcp set expire <ipaddr> <hours> | default | infinite

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

hours Lease time; minimum is 1 hour; the global default is 168 hours.

default Lease time that has been speciÞed at the subnetwork or global level.

inÞnite No lease time limit; the lease becomes permanent.

Example: dhcp set expire 192.168.254.18 8

DHCP SET LEASE

Controls lease time.

dhcp set lease [<net>|<ipaddr>]<hours>|default|infinite

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

ipaddr IP address of the client lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

hours Lease time; minimum is 1 hour; the global default is 168 hours.

default Lease time that has been speciÞed at the subnetwork or global level.

inÞnite No lease time limit; the lease becomes permanent.

Example 1: dhcp set lease 192.168.254.17 default

(sets client lease time to default)

Example 2: dhcp set lease 192.168.254.0 infinite

(sets lease time to inÞnite for this subnet)

318 Chapter 8. Command Reference

Example 3: dhcp set lease 192.168.254.0 infinite
(sets lease time to inÞnite for this subnet)

Chapter 8. Command Reference 319

DHCP SET MASK
Used to conveniently change the mask of a DHCP subnet without having to delete and recreate the subnet and all
its entries.

dhcp set mask <net> <mask>

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

mask IP network mask, in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

Example: dhcp set mask 192.168.254.0 255.255.255.0

DHCP SET OTHERSERVER

This command instructs the routerÕs DHCP server to either continue or stop sending DHCP requests when another
DHCP server is detected on the LAN. The default is stop.

dhcp set otherserver <net> continue|stop

net IP address of the subnetwork lease in the format of 4 decimals separated by periods.

continue The routerÕs DHCP server continues sending DHCP requests, even if another DHCP server is
detected on the LAN.

stop The routerÕs DHCP server stops sending DHCP requests when another DHCP server is detected
on the LAN.

Example: dhcp set otherserver 192.168.254.17 stop

DHCP SET VALUEOPTION

Sets values for global options, options specific to a subnetwork, or options specific to a client lease. For more
information, see Setting Option Values, on page 86.

dhcp set valueoption [<ipaddr>|<net>] <code> <value>....

ipaddr Specify the client IP address if the option value applies only to the client lease (4 decimals
separated by periods).

net Specify the subnetwork IP address if the option value applies only to the subnetwork lease (4
decimals separated by periods).

code Code specifying the option to be set. It can be a number between 1 and 61 or a keyword. Use
the command dhcp list deÞnedoptions to list the codes and keywords (see DHCP LIST
DEFINEDOPTIONS, on page 315.)

320 Chapter 8. Command Reference

value Value to be assigned to the speciÞed option. It could be a byte, word, signed long, unsigned
long, binary, IP address, or string depending on the option.

Example 1: This command does not specify an client or subnetwork address, and thus sets a global value
for the domainnameserver option.
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver 192.168.254.2 192.168.254.3

Example 2: This command sets the value for the gateway option associated with the subnetwork.
dhcp set valueoption gateway 192.168.254.0 192.168.254.254

Example 3: This command sets a value for the winserver option associated with a speciÞc client.
dhcp set valueoption 192.168.254.251 winserver 192.168.254.7

Example 4: This command sets a static route (option 33) to IP address 192.168.253.253 through router
192.168.254.254. (No mask is specified.)

dhcp set valueoption 33 192.168.254.254 192.168.253.253

Chapter 8. Command Reference 321

L2TP Ñ Virtual Dial-Up Configuration Commands
This section contains L2TP command descriptions. For a complete discussion of L2TP tunneling, see L2TP
Tunneling Ñ Virtual Dial-Up, on page 122.

L2TP commands allow you to:

¥ Add, delete, and modify tunnels

¥ ConÞgure L2TP router information including:

¥ Names

¥ Security authentication protocols and passwords

¥ Addresses

¥ Management of trafÞc performance

¥ Restrict a tunnel so it can be established only with a specific remote interface (l2tp set wanif).

Note: Two remote commands speciÞc to L2TP are included in this section.

L2TP ?
Lists the supported keywords.

l2tp ?

Response:
L2tp Sub-commands:
? add del
forward list set
call close

L2TP ADD
Creates a tunnel entry.

l2tp add <TunnelName>

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case sensitive.

Example: l2tp add PacingAtWork

L2TP CALL
This command is primarily used for debugging purposes and it establishes a tunnel without creating a session.

322 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 l2tp call <TunnelName>

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case sensitive.

Example: l2tp call PacingAtWork

L2TP CLOSE
Closes an L2TP tunnel and/or session.

l2tp close <L2TP unit number>|-n<TunnelName>|-t<tunnelid>|-s<serialnum>|-c<callid>

L2TP unit number

-n TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case sensitive.

-t tunnelid Local tunnel id.

-s serialnum Serial number of the call within the tunnel.

-c callid ID of the local call for the session.

Note: Either <TunnelName> or <tunnelid> must be speciÞed.

Example: l2tp close -n PacingAtWork

L2TP DEL
Deletes a tunnel entry.

l2tp del <TunnelName>

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp del PacingAtWork

L2TP FORWARD
The router can be conÞgured to forward all incoming calls to an LNS without answering the incoming call. This
feature is normally used when the router is acting as a LAC or both a LAC and LNS.

Note: Only one tunnel entry can have this option set.

l2tp forward all | none <TunnelName>

all Forward all incoming calls through the tunnel to an LNS

Chapter 8. Command Reference 323

none No incoming calls are allowed to be forwarded through the tunnel to an LNS

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp forward PacingAtWork

L2TP LIST
Provides a complete display of the current conÞguration settings for tunnel(s), except for the authentication
password/secret.

l2tp list |<TunnelName>|

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case sensitive.

Example: l2tp list PacingAtWork

# l2tp list
INFORMATION FOR <pacingAtWork>
type ........................... L2TPClient (LAC-will not dial)/LNS
All Incoming Calls Tunneled here . no
CHAP challenge issued .......... yes
hidden AVPs used ............... yes
sequencing/pacing .............. window pacing
sequencing/pacing is ......... required
window size for sequencing/pacing 10
ip address ..................... 10.0.0.1
Our host name .................. pacingAtHome

ACTIVE TUNNEL .................. UNKNOWN

current state ................ CLOSED
LOCAL TUNNEL ID .............. 1
REMOTE TUNNEL ID ............. 0
remote firmware .............. 0
remote ip address ............ 10.0.0.1
LAC SESSION serial number ... Ô 0
current state .............. CLOSED
LOCAL CALL ID .............. 1
local window size ........ 10
sequencing/pacing ........ WINDOW PACING
sequencing/pacing is ... required
REMOTE CALL ID ............. 0
remote window size ....... 0

L2TP SET ADDRESS

Used to deÞne the IP address of the other end of the tunnel, either the remote L2TP Access Concentrator (LAC) or
remote L2TP Network Server (LNS).

324 Chapter 8. Command Reference

Caution: If the IP address of the remote tunnel is part of a subnet that is also reached through the tunnel, a routing
table entry for this address must be explicitly added. Normally, this routing entry will be added to remote entry,
which has the default route.

Note 1: When a remote router tries to create a tunnel, the remote routerÕs IP address is not authenticated .

Note 2: If this command is not used, then <ipaddr> defaults to 0.0.0.0, and this end cannot initiate the tunnel.

l2tp set address <ipaddr> <TunnelName>

ipaddr IP address of the remote LAC or LNS.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp set address 192.168.100.1 PacingAtWork

L2TP SET AUTHEN

Enables or disables authentication of the remote router during tunnel establishment using the CHAP secret, if it
exists. If the remote router tries to authenticate the local end during tunnel authentication, the local router will
always attempt to respond, provided a CHAP secret has been conÞgured.

l2tp set authen on | off <TunnelName>

on Enables authentication.

off Disables authentication.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp set authen PacingAtWork

L2TP SET CHAPSECRET

Creates a CHAP secret. This CHAP secret is used to authenticate the creation of the tunnel and is used for hiding
certain control packet information. The LAC and the LNS can share a single CHAP secret for a given tunnel.

l2tp set CHAPSecret <secret> <TunnelName>

secret CHAP secret (character string) used to authenticate the creation of the tunnel.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case sensitive.

Example: l2tp set CHAPSecret PacingAtWork

Chapter 8. Command Reference 325

L2TP SET DIALOUT
Lets the LNS instruct the L2TP client to use an ISDN phone line to place a call on its behalf.

l2tp set dialout yes | no <TunnelName>

yes This option lets the router place outgoing calls.

no This option prevents the router from placing outgoing calls.The default is no.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp set dialout yes PacingAtWork

L2TP SET HIDDENAVP

ConÞgures the router to protect some L2TP control information (such as names and passwords for a PPP session)
using hidden AVPs. This command is often used to turn off hidden AVPs (no option), in cases where the other end
of the tunnel does not support hidden AVPs.

l2tp set hiddenAVP yes | no <TunnelName>

yes This option lets the router hide AVPs. The default is yes.

no This option disables hidden AVPs.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case sensitive.

Example: l2tp set hiddenAVP yes PacingAtWork

L2TP SET OURADDRESS

SpeciÞes the source IP address used when the tunnel is originated.

Use this command when you want to specify a source IP address other than the WAN interface IP address. For
example, if NAT (network address translation) is not being used, all IP addresses on the Ethernet LAN would be
visible. You could then specify, as the source IP address, the Ethernet IP address of the router (which would be
visible) instead of the WAN interface IP address.

l2tp set ouraddress <ipaddr> <TunnelName>

ipaddr Source IP address used for this tunnel (four decimals separated by periods).

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp set ouraddress 192.168.254.254 PacingAtWork

326 Chapter 8. Command Reference

L2TP SET OURPASSWORD
SpeciÞes the routerÕs secret/password for PPP authentication on a per-tunnel basis.

l2tp set ourpassword <password> <TunnelName>

password RouterÕs secret/password used for authentication when challenged by another router.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp set ourpassword 7z8x9q0d6j1t3k PacingAtWork

L2TP SET OURSYSNAME

SpeciÞes the routerÕs name for PPP authentication on a per-tunnel basis.

l2tp set oursysname <name> <TunnelName>

name Name of the router that is used for authentication when challenged by another router.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case sensitive.

Example: l2tp set oursysname myName PacingAtWork

L2TP SET OURTUNNELNAME

This command creates local routerÕs host name.

Note: If this command is not used, then, if it has been speciÞed, the <name> from the l2tp set ourSysName
command or the <name> from the command system name <name> is used.

l2tp set ourTunnelName <name> <TunnelName>

name Host name of the local router. This is the fully qualiÞed domain name of the local router.

The name is case-sensitive

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case sensitive.

Example: l2tp set ourTunnelName isp PacingAtWork

L2TP SET REMOTENAME

Creates the host name of the remote tunnel.

Note: If this command is not used, then <TunnelName> of the tunnel entry is used.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 327

 l2tp set remoteName <name> <TunnelName>

name Host name of the remote tunnel. This is the fully qualiÞed domain name of the remote host.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp set remoteName isp PacingAtWork

L2TP SET TYPE

DeÞnes the type of L2TP support for the tunnel. The routerÕs role is deÞned on a per-tunnel basis.

l2tp set type all|lac|lns|l2tpclient|disabled <TunnelName>

all The router is conÞgured to act as both a LAC/L2TP client and an LNS server.

lac The router is conÞgured to act as a LAC for this tunnel.

lns The router is conÞgured to act as an LNS for this tunnel.

l2tpclient The router is conÞgured to act as an L2TP client for this tunnel.

disabled The tunnel entry is disabled.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp set type l2tpclient PacingAtWork

L2TP SET WANIF

Restricts the remote interface with which the L2TP tunnel can be established.

If this command is not used, no remote interface restriction is enforced. For example, no restriction would be
enforced when the Dial Backup feature is used (see page 103). Thus, the tunnel would be terminated and re-
established when switching back and forth between the primary interface and the backup interface. If the tunnel is
to established only with the primary interface or only with the backup interface, you must specify that restriction
with this command.

To clear the remote restriction for a tunnel, enter the l2tp set wanif command with a hyphen (-) as the remote
name.

l2tp set wanif <remote> <TunnelName>

remote Name of the remote router proÞle that must be used when establishing the L2TP tunnel. To list the
remote routers, use the command remote list.

For the dual-Ethernet router, specify the physical interface name, that is, either ETHERNET/0 or
ETHERNET/1.

To clear the remote restriction for a tunnel, enter a hyphen (-) as the remote name.

328 Chapter 8. Command Reference

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

Examples:

This command restricts the tunnel named OfficeTunnel to the remote interface named officertr.

l2tp set wanif officertr OfficeTunnel

This command clears the remote interface restriction for the tunnel named OfficeTunnel.

l2tp set wanif - OfficeTunnel

This command restricts the tunnel named OfficeTunnel to the physical interface ETHERNET/1.

l2tp set wanif ETHERNET/1 OfficeTunnel

L2TP SET WINDOW

Enhances trafÞc performance in a tunneling environment. The commandÕs options affect the way incoming
payload packets are processed. The router is conÞgured with the following default options: sequencing, required,
and size 10.

l2tp set window sequencing|pacing|nosequencing|optional|required|size <TunnelName>

sequencing Sequence numbers are placed in the L2TP payload packets. With this option, one end instructs
the other end to send sequence packets. No acknowledgments are issued for received packets.

pacing Sequence numbers are placed in the L2TP payload packets. When a session is created, the
router speciÞes a window size. Acknowledgments for received packets are issued.

nosequencing No sequence numbers are placed in the L2TP payload packets carrying the PPP packets. If the
remote end carries out sequencing or pacing, the router can still send and receive sequenced
packets.

optional Allows dynamic switching of a session from pacing or sequencing to nosequencing.

required Disables dynamic switching from pacing or sequencing to nosequencing.

size Controls the size of the receive window for receiving packets for sequencing or pacing, when a
session is created. Size can be 0 for packet sequencing. Must be a non-zero value for window
pacing. Size must be less than or equal to 30.

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). This name is case-sensitive.

Example: l2tp set window sequencing PacingAtWork

REMOTE SETL2TPCLIENT
With this command, this remote is the path to the L2TP client and accepts tunnel calls. Use this command if your
router acts as an LNS. You must also specify PPP authentication and IP routes for this remote.

remote setl2tpclient <TunnelName><remoteName>

Chapter 8. Command Reference 329

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string) associated with the remote LAC. The name is case-
sensitive.

remoteName Name of the remote entry (character string). The name is case sensitive.

Example: remote setl2tpclient PacingAtWork Router2

REMOTE SETLNS
With this command, this remote is the path to the LNS, and it will forward the incoming call (which matches this
remote entry) through the tunnel named <TunnelName> if your router is the client.

Note: The remote entry must also have appropriate information such as PPP authentication, IP routing, IPX
routing, bridging, or Caller ID.

remote setLNS <TunnelName><remoteName>

TunnelName Name of the tunnel (character string). The name is case-sensitive.

RemoteName Name of the remote entry (character string).

Example: remote setLNS PacingAtWork lnsServer

330 Chapter 8. Command Reference

FILTER BR (Bridge Filtering) Commands
Bridge filtering allows you to control the packets transferred across the router. This feature can be used to enhance
security or improve performance. Filtering is based on matched patterns within the packet at a specified offset.
Two filtering modes are available.

¥ Deny mode will discard any packet that matches the deny filter database and let all other packets pass.

¥ Allow mode will only pass the packets that match the allow filter database and discard all others.

Up to 40 deny and 40 allow filters can be activated from the filter database.

FILTER BR ?
Lists the supported keywords.

filter br ?

Response:
Bridge filter commands:
? add del
use list

FILTER BR ADD
Adds a bridging filter to the filtering database. The filter can allow or deny the forwarding of packets based on
the contents of the packets. The command specifies the position within the packet that is checked and the data that
must appear in that location in order for the packet to match this filter.

filter br add [pos] [data] allow | deny

pos Byte offset within a packet; number from 0-127.

data Hexadecimal number up to 6 bytes.

Example:

This filter prevents forwarding of RARP packets across the bridge. The data at byte offset 12 in each packet is
checked and, if the data is hex 8035, the packet is denied forwarding.

filter br add 12 8035 deny

FILTER BR DEL
Deletes a bridging filter from the filtering database. The parameters on the command identify the filter to be
deleted.

filter br del [pos] [data] allow | deny

Chapter 8. Command Reference 331

pos Byte offset within a packet; number from 0-127.

data Hexadecimal number up to 6 bytes.

Example:

This command deletes the filter which denies the forwarding of packets that have the hex value 8035 at byte offset
12.

filter br del 12 8035 deny

FILTER BR LIST
Lists the bridging filters in the filtering database.

filter br list

Example: filter br list

Response:
Allow Filter:

Deny Filter:
pos:12, len=2, <80><35>

FILTER BR USE
Sets the mode of filtering to either deny, allow, or none.

filter br use none | deny | allow

Example: filter br use allow

332 Chapter 8. Command Reference

PPPoE Commands
This section contains the commands that are specific to PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet). To learn more about PPPoE
configuration and management, see page 97.

The commands in this section are:

remote setPPPoEservice Used when configuring a PPPoE client entry.

pppoe close Ends a PPPoE session.

pppoe list Lists information about PPPoE sessions.

REMOTE SETPPPOESERVICE
Defines the remote router entry as a PPPoE remote entry. It also specifies the service to which PPPoE users
connect through this remote entry.

Note: Enter this command immediately after the remote add command that defines the remote router entry.

remote setPPPoEservice <service> | * | - <remoteName>

service Name of the PPPoE service to which this remote connects PPPoE users. The service provider
defines the name of its service. The name is case-sensitive.

Specify * if the remote can be used to connect to any PPPoE service.

Specify - to clear the setting.

remoteName Name of the remote router entry (string).

Example:

The following commands define the remote router used to connect to the PPPoE service DialUpPPP.net. Note that
the remote setPPPoEservice command is entered immediately after the remote add command.

remote add PPPoEremote

remote setPPPoEservice DialUpPPP.net PPPoEremote

PPPOE CLOSE
Closes a currently active PPPoE session. To see the currently active PPPoE sessions, enter pppoe list.

pppoe close <ifsnumber>

ifsnumber Session to be closed. Specify the PPPoE/Ifs number for the session as shown in the ifs or pppoe
list command output.

Example:

The first command lists information about a PPPoE session, including its Ifs number (1); the second command
closes that session.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 333

 # pppoe list
PPPoE Client Session ...... DialUpPPP.net
PPPoE/Ifs number..... 1
Access Concentrator.. 15021109931568-efficient
Peer MAC Address .... 00:10:67:00:66:E2
Session ID .......... 2
State ............... 2
Flags ............... 1
# pppoe close 1

PPPOE LIST
Lists information about the currently active PPPoE sessions.

pppoe list

Output Fields:

PPPoE Client Session . . . . . Service name.

PPPoE/Ifs number . . . . Number identifying the session. It is used on the pppoe close command.

Access Concentrator. . . Identification of the access concentrator to which the session is connected.

Peer MAC Address . . . MAC address to which the session is connected.

Session ID . . . . . . . . . . Identification of the session by the access concentrator. The service provider
needs this ID to find the access concentrator log for the session.

State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal value indicating the state of the session:

0 Initial state.
1 Session has finished.
2 Session has been established and can send and receive user data.
3 Reserved.
4 Session is attempting to discover an access concentrator to provide the
requested service.
5 Reserved.
6 Session has selected an access concentrator to provide the service and is
waiting for it to set up the session.

Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal flag. Currently, the only defined value is 1, indicating that this is a client
PPPoE session.

Example:

# pppoe list
PPPoE Client Session ...... DialUpPPP.net
PPPoE/Ifs number..... 1
Access Concentrator.. 15021109931568-efficient
Peer MAC Address .... 00:10:67:00:66:E2
Session ID .......... 2
State ............... 2
Flags ............... 1

334 Chapter 8. Command Reference

IKE (Internet Key Exchange) Commands

The IKE software option and the IKE commands are described in IPSec (Internet Protocol Security), on page 134.

IKE FLUSH
Clears all IKE configuration information from the router. For more information about IKE, see IPSec (Internet
Protocol Security), on page 134.

ike flush

IKE IPSEC POLICIES ADD

Defines the name of an IPsec policy to be used for filtering. Other IPSec Policy commands define the filtering
parameters (see IKE IPSec Policy Commands, on page 142).

ike ipsec policies add <PolicyName>

PolicyName New name for an IPsec policy. To see the policy names in use, use the ike ipsec policies list
command.

Example: ike ipsec policies add mypolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES DELETE

Deletes an existing IPSec policy. To define IPSec Policies, see IKE IPSec Policy Commands, on page 142.

ike ipsec policies delete <PolicyName>

PolicyName Name of an existing IPsec policy. To see the policy names, use the ike ipsec policies list
command.

Example: ike ipsec policies delete mypolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES DISABLE

Disables an IPSec policy. The policy can be re-enabled using the enable command (see IKE IPSec Policy
Commands, on page 142).

ike ipsec policies disable <PolicyName>

PolicyName Name of an existing IPsec policy. To see the policy names, use the ike ipsec policies list
command.

Example: ike ipsec policies disable mypolicy

Chapter 8. Command Reference 335

IKE IPSEC POLICIES ENABLE
Enables an IPSec policy. An enable command is required for each new policy; the enable command indicates that
the specification of the policy is complete and the policy is ready to be used. The enable command can also be
used to re-enable a disabled policy. For more information, see IKE IPSec Policy Commands, on page 142.

ike ipsec policies enable <PolicyName>

PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy. To see the policy names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example: ike ipsec policies enable mypolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES LIST

Lists the IPSec policies. For more information, see IKE IPSec Policy Commands, on page 142.

ike ipsec policies list

Example:

# ike ipsec policies list

IKE IPSec policies:
mypolicy (enabled)
Source address/mask: 192.168.16.0/255.255.255.0
Destination address/mask: 192.168.23.0/255.255.255.0
Protocol: *
Source port: *
Destination port: *
Tunnel mode
Peer: my_aggressive_peer (0.0.0.0)
Proposals: myproposal

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET DEST

Defines a destination filtering parameter value for the policy. The destination parameter requires that the data be
intended for the specified destination IP address and mask. The destination is the device or network that finally
receives the packet, not the router that routes the packet.

ike ipsec policies set dest <IPaddress> <IPmask> <PolicyName>

IPaddress IP address allowed to be the destination of the data (4 decimals separated by periods).

IPmask IP network mask (4 decimals separated by periods).

PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the destination parameter value is added. To see the policy
names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example: ike ipsec policies set dest 192.168.16.0 255.255.255.0 mypolicy

336 Chapter 8. Command Reference

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET DESTPORT
Defines a destination port filtering parameter value for the policy. The destination port parameter requires a
specific destination port for the data or allows any destination port (*). (Because port numbers are TCP and UDP
specific, a port filter is effective only when the protocol filter is TCP or UDP.)

ike ipsec policies set destport <PortNumber | TELNET | HTTP | SMTP | TFTP | *> <PolicyName>

PortNumber Destination port whose data is allowed by the policy. The port can be specified by one of
TELNET the listed names or by its number. To allow data through for any destination port, specify an
HTTP asterisk (*).
SMTP
TFTP
*
PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the destination port parameter value is added. To see the
policy names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Examples: ike ipsec policies set destport * mypolicy

ike ipsec policies set destport http webpolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET INTERFACE

Defines an interface filtering parameter value for the policy. The policy is only used when the specified interface
is connected. For example, if the policy is to be used only when the Dial Backup remote is connected, you would
specify the remote name as the interface for the policy. (To read about Dial Backup, see page 103.)

Note: The specified interface must be the interface to the IKE peer.

Otherwise, if the policy can be used regardless of the connected interface, specify the string none.

This command is intended to allow the user to choose when to apply IPSec/IKE filters and incur the resulting
encryption and authentication costs. With this command, you can limit a policy to a specific interface.

ike ipsec policies set interface <interface | all > <PolicyName>

interface Interface that must be connected when the policy is used. This is usually referenced by a
remote name, although it could be another interface such as Òethernet/0Ó. If no interface
restriction is to be set for this policy, specify the string all.
PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the interface parameter value is added. To see the policies,
use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Examples:

This command requires that, when the remote interface backup comes up, IKE is enabled for packets
described by policy corporate. The specified interface (backup) must be the interface to the IKE peer.

ike ipsec policies set interface backup corporate

This command specifies that IKE is enabled for packets described by policy mypolicy regardless of the
interface the peer is on.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 337

 ike ipsec policies set interface all mypolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET MODE

Defines the mode filtering parameter value for the policy. The mode parameter specifies the encapsulation mode
(tunnel or transport) that may be used for the connection (see Transport and Tunnel Encapsulation Modes, on page
134). If no value is set for the mode parameter, tunnel mode is assumed.

ike ipsec policies set mode <TUNNEL | TRANSPORT> <PolicyName>

TUNNEL Encapsulation method required for the connection. The default is TUNNEL.
TRANSPORT

PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the encapsulation mode parameter value is added. To see
the policy names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example: ike ipsec policies set mode transport rtr2rtrpolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET PEER

Defines a peer filtering parameter value for the policy. The peer parameter specifies an IKE peer that may be used
for the connection. (The peer must have been defined by IKE peer commands; see IKE Peer Commands, on page
139.)

ike ipsec policies set peer <PeerName> <PolicyName>

PeerName Name of an IKE peer. To see the IKE peer names, use the ike peers list command.

PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the peer parameter value is added. To see the policy
names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example: ike ipsec policies set peer my_aggressive_peer mypolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET PFS

Defines the pfs filtering parameter value for the policy. The pfs parameter specifies the Perfect Forward Secrecy
negotiation used for the connection.

If you specify 1 or 2, Perfect Forward Secrecy is performed using the specified Diffie-Hellman group (1 or 2). If
you specify none, then Perfect Forward Secrecy is not required for this connection and no Diffie-Hellman group
is used to encrypt the keys during rekey. To read more about PFS, see IKE Management, on page 136

ike ipsec policies set pfs <1 | 2 | none > <PolicyName>

ike ipsec policies set pfs <1 | 2 | none > <PolicyName>

1 Use Diffie-Hellman group 1 for the Perfect Forward Secrecy negotiation.

2 Use Diffie-Hellman group 2 for the Perfect Forward Secrecy negotiation.

338 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 none Perfect Forward Secrecy negotiation is not required for this connection.

PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the pfs parameter value is added. To see the policy names,
use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example: ike ipsec policies set pfs 2 mypolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET PROPOSAL

Defines a proposal filtering parameter value for the policy. The proposal parameter specifies an IKE IPSec
proposal that may be used for the connection. (It must have been defined by IKE IPSec proposal commands; see
IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on page 141.)

Unlike the other filtering parameters, the policy may allow more than one value for the proposal parameter. For
example, two set proposal commands could specify two proposals, either of which could be used by the
connection. See IKE IPSec Policy Commands, on page 142.

ike ipsec policies set proposal <ProposalName> <PolicyName>

ProposalName Name of an IKE proposal. To see the IKE proposal names, use the ike proposals list
command.

PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the proposal parameter value is added. To see the policy
names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example: ike ipsec policies set proposal myproposal mypolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET PROTOCOL

Defines a protocol filtering parameter value for the policy. The protocol parameter requires a specific protocol
that must be used or allows any protocol (*).

ike ipsec policies set protocol <ProtocolNumber | TCP | UDP | *> <PolicyName>

ProtocolNumber Protocol required by the policy. The protocol can be specified by number or by name
TCP (TCP or UDP). To allow data through for any protocol, specify an asterisk (*).
UDP
*
PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the protocol parameter value is added. To see the
policy names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example: ike ipsec policies set protocol * mypolicy

ike ipsec policies set protocol tcp webpolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET SOURCE

Defines a source filtering parameter value for the policy. The source parameter requires the data come from the
specified source IP address and mask. The source is the device or network that sent the packet, not the router that
routes the packet.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 339

 ike ipsec policies set source <IPaddress> <IPmask> <PolicyName>

IPaddress IP address allowed to be the source of the data (4 decimals separated by periods).

IPmask IP network mask (4 decimals separated by periods).

PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the source parameter value is added. To see the policy
names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example: ike ipsec policies set source 192.168.16.0 255.255.255.0 mypolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET SOURCEPORT

Defines a source port filtering parameter value for the policy. The source port parameter requires a specific source
port for the data or allows any source port (*) (Because port numbers are TCP and UDP specific, a port filter is
effective only when the protocol filter is TCP or UDP.)

ike ipsec policies set sourceport <PortNumber | TELNET | HTTP | SMTP | TFTP | *> <PolicyName>

PortNumber Source port whose data is allowed by the policy. The port can be specified by one of
TELNET the listed names or by its number. To allow data through for any source port, specify an
HTTP asterisk (*).
SMTP
TFTP
*
PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the source port parameter value is added. To see the
policy names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Examples: ike ipsec policies set sourceport * mypolicy

ike ipsec policies set sourceport http webpolicy

IKE IPSEC POLICIES SET TRANSLATE

Defines a translate filtering parameter value for the policy. The translate option determines whether the router
applies NAT (network address translation) before the packets are encrypted by IPSec.

Note: The remote must have IP address translation enabled (see NAT on page 91 and the remote setIpTranslate
command on page 279).

Note: The address that NAT translates to should be the source or destination address for the policy (use the set
source or set dest commands).

Use this option when several remote sites have the same IP subnet, making it impossible to tunnel those sites
unchanged to the corporate network.

When the routerÕs public IP address is not the desired choice for the network address translation, you can define a
virtual Ethernet interface. A virtual Ethernet interface can be created to translate to an arbitrary IP address (see
Multiple IP Subnets, on page 77). Again, be sure that the virtual Ethernet interface has IP address translation
enabled (eth ip translate, page 245), and use the virtual Ethernet interface as the gateway to the other end of the

340 Chapter 8. Command Reference

protected network. (See the example below.) You can use the eth ip addhostmapping command (page 230) to
map a range of NAT addresses to private addresses so the IKE tunnel can be initiated from either end.

ike ipsec policies set translate on | off <PolicyName>

on | off Sets the translate option on or off. If translate is set to on, translation is applied before
encryption, and the packets are sent using the host routerÕs public IP address.

PolicyName Name of the IPsec policy to which the source port parameter value is added. To see the
policy names, use the ike ipsec policies list command.

Example:

The following commands suggest how a virtual interface could be defined for use with Network Address
Translation and an IPSec tunnel.

# The address of the corporate LAN is 192.168.0.0, but the desired

# NAT address is 10.0.0.1 so you create a virtual interface (0:99),
# turn off RIP for the interface, and assign it the address 10.0.0.1/24.
eth add 0:99
eth ip opt txrip off 0:99
eth ip opt rxrip off 0:99
eth ip addr 10.0.0.1 255.255.255.0 0:99
#
# Next, enable NAT for the virtual interface and route traffic to the
# the corporate backbone (192.168.0.0/16) through the virtual interface.
eth ip translate on 0:99
eth ip addroute 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.0.0.0.1 0:99

# Later, when you set up the IKE tunnel, include these commands
# when defining a policy. (The policy name is corporate.)
# The source address must be the virtual interface address.
# The destination address must be the corporate backbone address.
# ike ipsec policies set source 10.0.0.1 255.255.255.255 corporate
# ike ipsec policies set dest 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0 corporate
# ike ipsec policies set translate on corporate

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS ADD

Defines the name of an IKE IPSec proposal. The proposal commands define the proposals exchanged to set up an
IPSec security association (SA), that is, an SA to be used for the user data transfer. See IKE IPSec Proposal
Commands, on page 141.

ike ipsec proposals add <ProposalName>

ProposalName New name for an IPsec proposal. To see the proposal names in use, use the ike ipsec
proposals list command.

Example: ike ipsec proposals add myproposal

Chapter 8. Command Reference 341

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS DELETE
Deletes an existing IKE IPSec proposal. For more information, see IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on page 141.

ike ipsec proposals delete <ProposalName>

ProposalName Name of the IPsec proposal to be deleted. To see the proposal names in use, use the ike
ipsec proposals list command.

Example: ike ipsec proposals delete myproposal

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS LIST

Lists the IKE IPSec proposals. For more information, see IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on page 141.

ike ipsec proposals list

Example:

# ike ipsec proposals list

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS:
myproposal
ESP encryption: 3DES
ESP authentication: SHA1
IPComp: None
Lifetime 600
Lifedata 50000

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS SET AHAUTH

Sets the proposal parameter that determines whether AH message authentication is requested and, if it is
requested, the hash algorithm used.

Note: The proposal must select either the AH or ESP encapsulation methods. It cannot request AH authentication
if it requests ESP encryption and/or ESP authentication.

For more information, see ESP and AH Security Protocols, on page 135 or IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on
page 141.

ike ipsec proposals set ahauth <MD5 | SHA1 | NONE> <ProposalName>

One of the following:

MD5 Use AH encapsulation and authenticate using hash algorithm Message Digest 5.
SHA1 Use AH encapsulation and authenticate using hash algorithm Secure Hash Algorithm-1.

NONE No AH encapsulation and no AH message authentication. (If you select this option, ESP
encapsulation must be requested by a set espenc or set espauth command.)

342 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 ProposalName Name of the IPsec proposal to which the AH authentication parameter is added. To see the
proposal names in use, use the ike ipsec proposals list command.

Example: ike ipsec proposals set ahauth sha1 myproposal

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS SET ESPAUTH

Sets the proposal parameter that determines whether ESP message authentication is requested and, if it is
requested, the hash algorithm used.

For more information, see ESP and AH Security Protocols, on page 135 or IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on
page 141.

ike ipsec proposals set espauth <MD5 | SHA1 | NONE> <ProposalName>

One of the following:

MD5 Use ESP encapsulation and authenticate using hash algorithm Message Digest 5.
SHA1 Use ESP encapsulation and authenticate using hash algorithm Secure Hash Algorithm-1.

NONE No ESP encapsulation and no ESP message authentication. (If you select this option, the
encapsulation method must be requested by a set espenc or set ahauth command.)
ProposalName Name of the IPsec proposal to which the ESP authentication parameter is added. To see the
proposal names in use, use the ike ipsec proposals list command.

Example: ike ipsec proposals set espauth sha1 myproposal

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS SET ESPENC

Sets the proposal parameter that determines whether ESP encryption is requested and, if it is requested, the
encryption method used.

For more information, see ESP and AH Security Protocols, on page 135 or IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on
page 141.

ike ipsec proposals set espenc <DES | 3DES | NULL | NONE> <ProposalName>

One of the following:

DES Use ESP encapsulation and 56-bit encryption

3DES Use ESP encapsulation and 168-bit encryption (if 3DES is enabled in the router; see Soft-
ware Option Keys, on page 114.)

NULL No encryption, but use ESP encapsulation. Headers are inserted as though the data was
encrypted. This allows veriÞcation of the source, but sends the data in the clear, increasing
throughput.
NONE No encryption and no ESP encapsulation. (If you select this option, the encapsulation
method must be requested by a set espauth or set ahauth command.)
ProposalName Name of the IPsec proposal to which the ESP encryption parameter is added. To see the
proposal names in use, use the ike ipsec proposals list command.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 343

Example: ike ipsec proposals set espenc 3des myproposal

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS SET IPCOMP

Sets the proposal parameter that requests either no compression or LZS compression. For more information, see
IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on page 141.

ike ipsec proposals set ipcomp <NONE | LZS> <ProposalName>

ike ipsec proposals set > <ProposalName>

One of the following:

NONE No compression.
LZS Compress using the LZS algorithm.
ProposalName Name of the IPsec proposal to which the IP compression parameter is added. To see the
proposal names in use, use the ike ipsec proposals list command.

Example: ike ipsec proposals set ipcomp none myproposal

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS SET LIFEDATA

Sets the proposal parameter that specifies the maximum number of kilobytes for the IPSec SA; 0 means unlimited.
After the maximum data is transferred, IKE renegotiates the connection. By limiting the amount of data that can
be transferred, you reduce the likelihood of the key being broken.

For more information on proposal parameters, see IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on page 141.

ike ipsec proposals set lifedata <kbytes> <ProposalName>

kbytes Maximum number of kilobytes transferred before renegotiation; 0 means unlimited.

ProposalName Name of the IPsec proposal to which the lifedata parameter is added. To see the proposal
names in use, use the ike ipsec proposals list command.

Example: ike ipsec proposals set lifedata 50000 myproposal

IKE IPSEC PROPOSALS SET LIFETIME

Sets the proposal parameter that specifies the length of time (in seconds) before the IPSec SA expires; the
recommended value is 86400 (24 hours). When the time limit expires, IKE renegotiates the connection.

For more information on proposal parameters, see IKE IPSec Proposal Commands, on page 141.

ike ipsec proposals set lifetime <seconds> <ProposalName>

seconds Maximum number of seconds before renegotiation; 0 means unlimited.

ProposalName Name of the IPsec proposal to which the lifetime parameter is added. To see the proposal
names in use, use the ike ipsec proposals list command.

344 Chapter 8. Command Reference

Example: ike ipsec proposals set lifetime 600 myproposal

IKE PEERS ADD

Defines the name of a new IKE peer. Other commands specify the address, secret, and mode of the peer
connection; see IKE Peer Commands, on page 139.

ike peers add <PeerName>

PeerName New name for an IKE peer. To see the peer names in use, use the ike peers list command.

Example: ike peers add my_aggressive_peer

IKE PEERS DELETE

Deletes an existing IKE peer entry. For more information, see IKE Peer Commands, on page 139.

ike peers delete <PeerName>

PeerName Name of the IKE peer to be deleted. To see the peer names in use, use the ike peers list
command.

Example: ike peers delete my_aggressive_peer

IKE PEERS LIST

Lists the defined IKE peers. For more information, see IKE Peer Commands, on page 139.

ike peers list

Example:

# ike peers list

IKE Peers:
IKE Peers:
my_aggressive_peer
IP address = 0.0.0.0
preshared secret = "confidential_hushhush"
aggressive, peer id = example.efficient.com (Domain name)
local id = test.efficient.com (Domain name)
my_main_peer
IP address = 1.2.3.4
preshared secret = "Shipsailsatmidnight"
main mode

Chapter 8. Command Reference 345

IKE PEERS SET ADDRESS
Sets the IP address of the other endpoint of the secure IKE peer connection. The address specified depends on the
mode of the peer connection, which can be either main mode or aggressive mode. (See IKE Management, on page
136.)

If the mode is main mode, the other endpoint of the peer connection is constant, and you specify its IP address.

If the mode is aggressive mode, one end of the connection, the gateway, has a fixed IP address. The other end, the
client, has a changing address. When configuring the client, set the peer IP address to the fixed gateway address.
When configuring the gateway for an aggressive mode connection, set the peer IP address to 0.0.0.0.

ike peers set address <IPaddress> <PeerName>

IPaddress IP address (4 decimals separated by periods). When configuring a gateway for an aggressive
mode connection, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.

PeerName Name of the IKE peer whose address is specified. To see the peer names, use the ike peers list
command.

Example: ike peers set address 0.0.0.0 my_aggressive_peer

IKE PEERS SET LOCALID

Sets the local ID for the IKE peer connection. This command is used only when aggressive mode has been
selected by the ike peers set mode command for this peer name.

The local ID must match the peer ID on the other end of the connection. The local ID can be an IP address,
domain name, or e-mail address as specified by the set localidtype command. For more information, see IKE Peer
Commands, on page 139.

ike peers set localid <AggressiveModeID> <PeerName>

AggressiveModeID IP address (4 decimals separated by periods), domain name, or e-mail address.

PeerName Name of the IKE peer whose local ID is specified. To see the peer names, use the ike
peers list command.

Example: ike peers set localid test.efficient.com my_aggressive_peer

IKE PEERS SET LOCALIDTYPE

Sets the type of the local ID for the IKE peer connection. This command is used only when aggressive mode has
been selected by the ike peers set mode command for this peer name.

The local ID type must match the peer ID type on the other end of the connection. The possible ID types are IP
address, domain name, or e-mail address. For more information, see IKE Peer Commands, on page 139.

ike peers set localidtype <IPADDR | DOMAINNAME | EMAIL> <PeerName>

346 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 One of the following:

IPADDR The local ID must be an IP address.

DOMAINNAME The local ID must be a domain name.
EMAIL The local ID must be an e-mail address.
PeerName Name of the IKE peer whose local ID type is specified. To see the peer names, use the
ike peers list command.

Example: ike peers set localidtype domainname my_aggressive_peer

IKE PEERS SET MODE

Sets the IKE peer connection mode to either main mode or aggressive mode. Main mode is used when the IP
addresses of both ends are known and constant. Aggressive mode is used when the address of one end can change,
as with a typical modem or DSL connection. (See Main Mode and Aggressive Mode, on page 137.)

ike peers set mode <MAIN | AGGRESSIVE> <PeerName>

One of the following:

MAIN Selects main mode (both ends constant).

AGGRESSIVE Selects aggressive mode (one end can change).
PeerName Name of the IKE peer whose mode is specified. To see the peer names, use the ike
peers list command.

Example: ike peers set mode aggressive my_aggressive_peer

IKE PEERS SET PEERID

Sets the peer ID for the IKE peer connection. This command is used only when aggressive mode has been selected
by the ike peers set mode command for this peer name.

The peer ID must match the local ID on the other end of the connection. The peer ID can be an IP address, domain
name, or e-mail address as specified by the set peeridtype command. For more information, see IKE Peer
Commands, on page 139.

ike peers set peerid <AggressiveModeID> <PeerName>

AggressiveModeID IP address (4 decimals separated by periods), domain name, or e-mail address.

PeerName Name of the IKE peer whose peer ID is specified. To see the peer names, use the ike
peers list command.

Example: ike peers set peerid example.efficient.com my_aggressive_peer

IKE PEERS SET PEERIDTYPE

Sets the type of the peer ID for the IKE peer connection. This command is used only when aggressive mode has
been selected by the ike peers set mode command for this peer name.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 347

The peer ID type must match the local ID type on the other end of the connection. The possible ID types are IP
address, domain name, or e-mail address. For more information, see IKE Peer Commands, on page 139.

ike peers set peeridtype <IPADDR | DOMAINNAME | EMAIL> <PeerName>

One of the following:

IPADDR The peer ID must be an IP address.

DOMAINNAME The peer ID must be a domain name.
EMAIL The peer ID must be an e-mail address.

PeerName Name of the IKE peer whose peer ID type is specified. To see the peer names, use the
ike peers list command.

Example: ike peers set peeridtype domainname my_aggressive_peer

IKE PEERS SET SECRET

Sets the shared secret for the IKE peer connection. The secret must be identical for both ends. For more
information, see IKE Peer Commands, on page 139.

ike peers set secret <secret> <PeerName>

secret Secret (up to 256 characters; do not use spaces or non-printable characters).

PeerName Name of the IKE peer whose secret is specified. To see the peer names, use the ike peers list
command.

Example: ike peers set secret confidential_hushhush my_aggressive_peer

IKE PROPOSALS ADD

Defines the name of a new IKE proposal. The IKE proposal commands define the proposals exchanged during the
Phase 1 SA. For more information, see IKE Management, on page 136.

ike proposals add <ProposalName>

ProposalName Name for the new IKE proposal. To see the proposal names in use, use the ike proposals
list command.

Example: ike proposals add my_ike_proposal

IKE PROPOSALS DELETE

Deletes an existing IKE proposal. See IKE Proposal Commands, on page 140.

ike proposals delete <ProposalName>

348 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 ProposalName Name of the IKE proposal to be deleted. To see the proposal names in use, use the ike
proposals list command.

Example: ike proposals delete my_ike_proposal

IKE PROPOSALS LIST

Lists the IKE proposals. See IKE Proposal Commands, on page 140.

ike proposals list

Example:

# ike proposals list

IKE proposals:
my_ike_proposal
Session authentication: Preshared key
Encryption: DES
Message authentication: MD5
DH Group 2
Lifetime 86400
Lifedata 0

IKE PROPOSALS SET DH_GROUP

Sets the IKE proposal parameter that specifies the Diffie-Hellman (DH) key generation group used (no group or
group 1 or 2). See IKE Proposal Commands, on page 140.

ike proposals set dh_group <NONE | 1 | 2 > <ProposalName>

One of the following:

NONE No DH group is used.

1 Use DH group 1.
2 Use DH group 2.
ProposalName Name of the IKE proposal to which the DH group parameter is added. To see the proposal
names in use, use the ike proposals list command.

Example: ike proposals set dh_group 2 my_ike_proposal

IKE PROPOSALS SET ENCRYPTION

Sets the IKE proposal parameter that requests ESP encryption and specifies the encryption method used. (See IKE
Proposal Commands, on page 140.)

ike proposals set encryption <DES | 3DES > <ProposalName>

Chapter 8. Command Reference 349

 One of the following:

DES Use DES (56-bit) encryption.

3DES Use 3DES (168-bit) encryption (if 3DES is enabled in the router; see Software Option Keys,
on page 114).

ProposalName Name of the IKE proposal to which the encryption parameter is added. To see the proposal
names in use, use the ike proposals list command.

Example: ike proposals set encryption des my_ike_proposal

IKE PROPOSALS SET LIFETIME

Sets the IKE proposal parameter that specifies the length of time (in seconds) before the Phase 1 SA expires; the
recommended value is 86400 (24 hours). When the time limit expires, IKE renegotiates the connection. See IKE
Management, on page 136.

ike proposals set lifetime <seconds> <ProposalName>

seconds Maximum number of seconds before renegotiation; 0 means unlimited.

ProposalName Name of the IKE proposal to which the lifetime parameter is added. To see the proposal
names in use, use the ike proposals list command.

Example: ike proposals set lifetime 86400 my_ike_proposal

IKE PROPOSALS SET MESSAGE_AUTH

Sets the IKE proposal parameter that specifies the message authentication done. It can propose no message
authentication, or it can propose authentication using the hash algorithm Message Digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash
Algorithm-1 (SHA1).

ike proposals set message_auth <NONE | MD5 | SHA1> <ProposalName>

One of the following:

NONE No authentication.
MD5 Authenticate using the MD5 algorithm.
SHA1 Authenticate using the SHA1 algorithm.
ProposalName Name of the IKE proposal to which the message authentication parameter is added. To see
the proposal names in use, use the ike proposals list command.

Example: ike proposals set message_auth md5 my_ike_proposal

IKE PROPOSALS SET SESSION_AUTH

Sets the IKE proposal parameter that specifies the session authentication; preshared key is currently the only
option. For more information on IKE proposals, see IKE Management, on page 136.

ike proposals set session_auth <PRESHARE> <ProposalName>

350 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 PRESHARE Preshared key.

ProposalName Name of the IKE proposal to which the session authentication parameter is added. To see
the proposal names in use, use the ike proposals list command.

Example: ike proposals set session_auth preshare my_ike_proposal

IPSec Commands
The following commands allow you to define an IPSec connection without IKE. To read about IPSec Security,
see IPSec (Internet Protocol Security), on page 134.

Note: If you define a tunnel using IPSec commands, the keys will remain static. This could pose a security risk
and is not recommended. Use of IKE for key management is recommended.

IPSEC ADD
Defines an IPSec security association (SA) name.

ipsec add <SAname>

SAname Name for the new IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec add show_rx

IPSEC DEL
Deletes an existing IPSec security association (SA) name.

ipsec del <SAname>

SAname Name for the IPSec SA to be deleted.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list
command.

Example: ipsec del show_rx

IPSEC DISABLE
Disables a defined IPSec SA entry.

ipsec disable <SAname>

SAname Name for the IPSec SA to be disabled.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list
command.

Example: ipsec disable show_rx

Chapter 8. Command Reference 351

IPSEC ENABLE
Enables a defined IPSec SA entry, indicating it is complete and ready to be used. The command can also re-enable
a disabled SA entry.

ipsec enable <SAname>

SAname Name for the IPSec SA to be enabled.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list
command.

Example: ipsec enable show_rx

IPSEC FLUSH
Clears all IPSec definitions.

ipsec flush

IPSEC LIST
Lists one or all IPSec SA entries.

ipsec list [<SAname>]

SAname Optional name for the IPSec SA to be listed.

Example:

# ipsec list
IPSec security associations:
show_rx
Gateway: 207.135.89.233
Inbound
Tunnel
BOTH
3DES
key=111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555
SHA1
key=aaaaaaaaaabbbbbbbbbbccccccccccdddddddddd (20)
No compression
id =424242
seq=1, bitmap=ffffffff
show_tx
Gateway: 207.135.89.233
Outbound
Tunnel
BOTH
3DES

352 Chapter 8. Command Reference

 key=012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567
SHA1
key=abcdefabcdefabcdefabcdefabcdefabcdefabcd (20)
No compression
id =123456
seq=6734

IPSEC SET AUTHENTICATION

Selects authentication for the IPSec SA using either SHA-1 (Secure Hashing Algorithm 1) or MD5 (Message
Digest 5).

ipsec set authentication <MD5 | SHA1> <SAname>

One of the following:

MD5 Authenticate using the MD5 algorithm.
SHA1 Authenticate using the SHA1 algorithm.
SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set authentication sha1 show_rx

IPSEC SET AUTHKEY

Specifies the authentication key (hexadecimal) for the IPSec SA.

ipsec set authkey <key> <SAname>

key Hexadecimal authentication key.

SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set authkey aaaaaaaaaabbbbbbbbbbccccccccccdddddddddd show_rx

IPSEC SET COMPRESSION

Selects either LZS compression or no compression for the IPSec SA.

ipsec set compression <NONE | LZS> <SAname>

One of the following:

NONE No compression.
LZS Compress using the LZS algorithm.
SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set compression none show_rx

IPSEC SET DIRECTION

Defines the direction of the IPSec SA.

Chapter 8. Command Reference 353

 ipsec set direction <INBOUND | OUTBOUND> <SAname>

One of the following:

INBOUND
OUTBOUND

SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set direction inbound show_rx

IPSEC SET ENCKEY

Specifies the encryption key.

ipsec set enckey <key> <SAname>

key Hexadecimal encryption key (64 bits for DES or 192 bits for 3DES).

SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set enckey 111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555 show_rx

IPSEC SET ENCRYPTION

Selects the encryption used for the IPSec SA: no encryption, DES (56-bit) encryption, or 3DES (168-bit)
encryption.

ipsec set encryption <NULL | DES-CBC | 3DES> <SAname>

One of the following:

NULL Use no encryption.

DES-CBC Use DES (56-bit) encryption.

3DES Use 3DES (168-bit) encryption.

SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set encryption 3des show_rx

IPSEC SET GATEWAY

Defines the IP address of the gateway of the IPSec SA.

ipsec set gateway <IPaddress> <SAname>

IPaddress IP address (4 decimals separated by periods).

SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set gateway 207.135.89.233 show_rx

354 Chapter 8. Command Reference

IPSEC SET IDENT
Specifies the identifier (SPID) for the IPSec tunnel. It must match the SPID at the other end of the tunnel, that is,
the tx SPID on this end must match the rx SPID on the other end.

ipsec set ident <ident> <SAname>

ident SPID for the IPSec tunnel.

SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set ident 424242 show_rx

IPSEC SET MODE

Selects the encapsulation mode (tunnel or transport) for the SA. The default is tunnel mode.

ipsec set mode <TUNNEL | TRANSPORT> <SAname>

One of the following:

TUNNEL Tunnel encapsulation mode.
TRANSPORT Transport encapsulation mode.
SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set mode transport rtr2rtr

IPSEC SET SERVICE

Selects the authentication and/or encryption services used for the SA.

ipsec set service <ESP | AH | BOTH> <SAname>

One of the following:

AH AH authentication.
ESP ESP encryption.
BOTH Both ESP encryption and authentication.

SAname Name of the IPSec SA.To see the IPSec SA names in use, use the ipsec list command.

Example: ipsec set service both show_rx

Chapter 8. Command Reference 355

Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets

To configure the target (local) router, fill out the blank worksheet(s) that corresponds to the desired Link Protocol
and Network Protocol:

¥ page 357 PPP with IP routing

¥ page 358 PPP with IPX routing

¥ page 359 PPP with bridging

¥ page 360 RFC 1483/RFC 1490 with IP routing

¥ page 361 RFC 1483/RFC 1490 with IPX routing

¥ page 362 RFC 1483/RFC 1490 with bridging

¥ page 363 RFC 1483MER/ RFC 1490MER with IP routing

¥ page 364 FRF8 with IP routing

¥ page 365 Dual-Ethernet router with IP routing

If you are connecting to more than one remote router:

Fill out one set of information for each remote router in the Remote Routers section of the worksheet.

If you are setting up both ends of the network:

Use a mirror image of the information listed in your target router worksheet to configure the router on the other
end of the WAN link.

Note: You may want to review the Sample Configurations, on page 61.

356 Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets

Configuring PPP with IP Routing
PPP with IP Routing
Steps Commands Your settings
System Settings
System Name system name <name> ..............................................
System Message system msg <message> ..............................................
Authentication Passwd system passwd <password> ..............................................
Ethernet IP Address eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>] ..............................................
DHCP Settings dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname> ..............................................
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver<ipaddr>
Change Login system admin <password> ..............................................
Remote Routers
New Entry remote add <remoteName> ..............................................
Link Protocol remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName> ..............................................
PVC or DLCI remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number> ..............................................
<remoteName>
remote setDLCI <number><remoteName>
Security remote setAuthen <protocol> <remoteName> ..............................................
RemoteÕs Password remote setOurPasswd <passwd> <remoteName> ..............................................
Bridging On/Off remote disBridge <remoteName> ..............................................
TCP/IP Route Address remote addIproute <ipnet> <ipnetmask> <hops> ..............................................
<remoteName>
If NAT is enabled: remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName> ..............................................
To enable NAT -and- remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask>
You may need to enter <remoteName>
a Source WAN Port
Address
If NAT is OFF: remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> ..............................................
You may need to enter <remoteName>
a Source WAN Port
Address
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing eth ip enable
(Internet Firewall) eth ip Þrewall <on | off> ..............................................
IPX Routing eth ipx disable ..............................................
Store save
Reboot reboot

Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets 357

Configuring PPP with IPX Routing
PPP with IPX Routing
Steps Commands Your Settings
System Settings
System Name system name <name> ..............................................
System Message system msg <message> ..............................................
Authentication Passwd system passwd <password> ..............................................
Ethernet IP Address eth ip addr <ipnet> <ipnetmask> [<port#>] ..............................................
DHCP Settings dhcp set valueoption domainname ..............................................
<domainname>
Change Login dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver ..............................................
<ipaddr>
Ethernet IPX Network system admin <password> ..............................................
#
eth ipx addr <ipxnet> [<port#>]
eth ipx frame <type>
Remote Routers
New Entry remote add <remoteName> ..............................................
Link Protocol remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName> ..............................................
PVC or DLCI remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number> ..............................................
<remoteName>
remote setDLCI <number> <remoteName>
Security remote setAuthen <protocol> <remoteName> ..............................................
RemoteÕs Password remote setPasswd <password> <remoteName> ..............................................
Bridging On/Off remote disBridge <remoteName> ..............................................
IPX Routes remote addIpxroute <ipxNet> <metric> <ticks> ..............................................
Add <remoteName>
IPX SAPs remote addIpxsap <servicename> <ipxNet> ..............................................
Add <ipxNode> <socket> <type> <hops>
<remoteName>
remote setIpxaddr <ipxNet> <remoteName>
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing eth ip disable ..............................................
IPX Routing eth ipx enable ..............................................
Store save
Reboot reboot

358 Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets

Configuring PPP with Bridging
PPP with Bridging
Steps Commands Your Settings
System Settings
System Name system name <name> ...............................................
System Message system msg <message> ...............................................
Authorization system passwd <password> ...............................................
Password
DHCP Settings dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname> ...............................................
dhcp set valueoptiondomainnameserver <ipaddr>
Change Login system admin <password> ...............................................
Remote Routers
New Entry remote add <remoteName> ...............................................
Link Protocol remote setProtocol PPP <remoteName> ...............................................
PVC or DLCI remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number> ...............................................
<remoteName>
remote setDLCI <number> <remoteName>
Security remote setAuthen <protocol> <remoteName> ...............................................
RemoteÕs Password remote setOurPasswd <password> ...............................................
<remoteName>
Bridging On/Off remote enaBridge <remoteName> ...............................................
IP and IPX Routing
IP Routing eth ip disable ...............................................
IPX Routing eth ipx disable ...............................................
Store save
Reboot reboot

Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets 359

Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IP Routing
RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IP Routing
Steps Commands Your Settings
System Settings
System Message system msg <message> ...............................................
Ethernet IP Address eth ip addr <ipnet> <ipnetmask> [port#>] ...............................................
DHCP Settings dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname> ...............................................
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver < ipaddr> ...............................................
Change Login system admin < password> ...............................................
Remote Routers
New Entry remote add <remoteName> ...............................................
Link Protocol/PVCa remote setProtocol RFC1483 <remoteName> ...............................................
(for ATM routers) remote setPVC <vpi number> * <vci number>
<remoteName>
Link Protocol /DLCIb remote setProtocol FR <remoteName> ...............................................
(for Frame Relay Routers) remote setDLCI <number><remoteName>
Bridging On/Off remote disBridge <remoteName> ...............................................
TCP/IP Route Address remote addiproute <ipnet> <ipnetmask> ...............................................
<hops> <remoteName>
If NAT is enabled: remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName> ...............................................
To enable NAT remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask>
-and- <remoteName>
You must enter a Source
WAN Port Address
If NAT is OFF: remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> ...............................................
You may need to enter a <remoteName>
Source WAN Port
Address
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing eth ip enable ...............................................
(Internet Firewall) eth ip Þrewall <on | off>
IPX Routing eth ipx disable ...............................................
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using RFC 1483 in an ATM environment.
b Enter this information if you are using RFC 1490 in a Frame-Relay environment.

360 Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets

Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IPX Routing
RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with IPX Routing
Steps Commands Your Settings
System Settings
System Message system msg <message> ..............................................
Ethernet IP Address eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [port#>] ..............................................
DHCP Settings dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname> ..............................................
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>
Ethernet IPX eth ipx addr <ipxnet> [>port#>] ..............................................
Network # eth ipx frame <type>
Change Login system admin <password> ..............................................
Remote Routers
New Entry remote add <remoteName> ..............................................
Link Protocol/PVCa remote setProtocol RFC1483 <remoteName> ..............................................
(for ATM routers) remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>
Link Protocol/DLCIb remote setProtocol FR <remoteName> ..............................................
(for Frame Relay Routers) remote setDLCI <number><remoteName>
Bridging On/Off remote disBridge <remoteName> ..............................................
IPX Routes remote addIpxroute <ipxNet> <metric> <ticks> ..............................................
Add <remoteName>
IPX SAPs remote addIpxsap <servicename> <ipxNet> ..............................................
Add <ipxNode> <socket> <type> <hops>
<remoteName>
remote setIpxaddr <ipxNet> <remoteName>
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing eth ip disable ..............................................
(Internet Firewall) eth ip Þrewall <on | off >
IPX Routing eth ipx enable ..............................................
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using RFC 1483 in an ATM environment.
b Enter this information if you are using RFC 1490 in a Frame-Relay environment.

Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets 361

Configuring RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with Bridging
RFC 1483 / RFC 1490 with Bridging
Steps Commands Your Settings
System Settings
System Message system msg <message> ...............................................
DHCP Settings dhcp set valueoption domainname <domainname> ...............................................
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>
Change Login system admin <password> ...............................................
Remote Routers
New Entry remote add <remoteName> ...............................................
Link Protocol/PVCa remote setProtocol RFC1483 <remoteName> ...............................................
(for ATM routers) remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>
Link Protocol /DLCIb remote setProtocol FR <remoteName> ...............................................
(for Frame Relay Routers) remote setDLCI <number><remoteName>
Bridging On/Off remote enaBridge <remoteName> ...............................................
IP and IPX Routing
IP Routing eth ip disable ...............................................
IPX Routing eth ipx disable ...............................................
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using RFC 1483 in an ATM environment.
b Enter this information if you are using RFC 1490 in a Frame-Relay environment.

362 Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets

Configuring RFC 1483MER / RFC 1490MER with IP Routing
RFC 1483MER/RFC 1490MER with IP Routing
Steps Commands Your Settings
System Settings
System Message system msg <message> ...................................................
Ethernet IP Address eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask>[<port#>] ...................................................
DHCP Settings dhcp set valueoption domainname < domainname> ...................................................
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr >
Change Login system admin <password> ...................................................
Remote Routers
New Entry remote add <remoteName> ...................................................
Link Protocol/PVCa remote setProtocol RFC1483MER ...................................................
(for ATM routers) <remoteName>
remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>

Link Protocol /DLCIb remote setProtocol MER <remoteName> ...................................................

(for Frame Relay remote setDLCI <number><remoteName>
Routers)
Bridging On/Off remote disBridge < remoteName> ...................................................
TCP/IP Route remote addIproute <ipnet> ...................................................
Address <ipnetmask><ipgateway> <hops>
<remoteName>
If NAT is enabled: remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName> ...................................................
To enable NAT,enter: remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask>
-and- <remoteName> c
Enter a Source WAN
Port Addr
If NAT is not enabled: remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> ...................................................
You may need to enter <remoteName> d
a Source WAN Port
Addr
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing eth ip enable ...................................................
(Internet Firewall) eth ip Þrewall <on | off>
IPX Routing eth ipx disable ...................................................
Store save
Reboot reboot
a Enter this information if you are using RFC 1483 in an ATM environment.
b Enter this information if you are using RFC 1490 in a Frame-Relay environment.
c The mask is the mask of the remote network.
d The mask is the mask of the remote network.

Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets 363

Configuring FRF8 with IP Routing
RFC 1483FR with IP Routing
Steps Commands Your Settings
System Settings
System Message system msg <message> ...............................................
Ethernet IP Address eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>] ...............................................
DHCP Settings dhcp set valueoption domainname < domainname> ...............................................
dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver <ipaddr>
Change Login system admin <password> ...............................................
Remote Routers
New Entry remote add <remoteName> ...............................................
Link Protocol/PVC remote setProtocol FRF8 <remoteName> ...............................................
remote setPVC <vpi number>*<vci number>
<remoteName>
Bridging On/Off remote disBridge <remoteName> ...............................................
TCP/IP Route remoteaddIproute <ipnet> <ipnetmask> ...............................................
Address <hops><remoteName>
If NAT is enabled: remote setIpTranslate on <remoteName> ...............................................
To enable NAT remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask>
-AND- <remoteName> a
You must enter a
Source WAN Port
Addr
If NAT is not enabled: remote setSrcIpAddr <ipaddr> <mask> ...............................................
You may need to enter <remoteName> b
a Source WAN Port
Addr
IP and IPX Routing
TCP/IP Routing eth ip enable ...............................................
(Internet Firewall) eth ip Þrewall <on | off>
IPX Routing eth ipx disable ...............................................
Store save
Reboot reboot
a The mask is the mask of the remote network
b The mask is the mask of the remote network

364 Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets

Configuring a Dual-Ethernet Router for IP Routing
This table outlines commands used to configure a Dual-Ethernet router for IP Routing.

Dual-Ethernet Router - IP Routing

Steps Commands Your Settings
System Settings
System Name system name <name> ..............................................................
Message system msg <message> ..............................................................
Ethernet Settings
Routing/ Bridging eth ip enable ..............................................................
Controls eth br disable
ETH/0 IP Address eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>] ..............................................................
ETH/1 IP Address eth ip addr <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> [<port#>] ..............................................................
TCP/IP default route eth ip addroute <ipaddr> <ipnetmask> ..............................................................
address <gateway> <hops> [<port#>]
DHCP Settings
DeÞne DHCP dhcp add [<net> <mask> | <ipaddr> | ..............................................................
network for ETH/1 <code> <min> <max> <type>
Create an address dhcp set addresses <Þrst ipaddr> <last ..............................................................
pool for ETH/1 ipaddr>
DNS Domain Name dhcp set valueoption domainname ..............................................................
<domainname>
DNS Server dhcp set valueoption domainnameserver ..............................................................
<ipaddr>
WINS Server dhcp set valueoption winsserver <ipaddr> ..............................................................
Address
Store save
Reboot reboot

Appendix A. Network Information Worksheets 365

Appendix B. ConÞguring IPX Routing

IPX Routing Concepts

To establish IPX Routing, you will need to enter all remote routers in the remote router database to which your
router will connect.

1. For each remote router, enter the network addresses and services that may be accessed beyond the remote
router.

2. Also enter a network number for the WAN link.

3. After you have specified the route addressing and services, you can then enable IPX routing across the
Ethernet LAN.

Static Seeding: When IPX traffic is destined for network segments and servers beyond the remote router, the
target routerÕs routing information table must be statically seeded. Static seeding ensures that the target router
connects to the appropriate remote router. After the link is established, RIP broadcast packets will dynamically
add to the target routerÕs routing table. Seeding the routing table is not necessary for target routers that never
connect; they will discover remote networks beyond the calling router as soon as RIP updates arrive (provided the
remote router supports RIP). However, for watchdog spoofing to work, you will need to define the remote IPX
routes for network segments and servers.

ConÞgure IPX Routing

Configuring your router for IPX routing can be rather complex. The following section will guide you through the
configuration process. Remember that PPP authentication configuration must be completed before you attempt
IPX routing configuration. The full router configuration for simple IPX routing includes the following:

¥ PPP authentication

¥ IPX routing (this section)

The following section, Step 1: Collect Your Network Information for the Target (Local) Router, on page 367,
provides a configuration diagram and a command table to assist you with the configuration of the target router.

Step 2: Review your Settings, on page 368 lists the commands used to review the IPX configuration and provides
a configuration example.

366 Appendix B. Configuring IPX Routing

Step 1: Collect Your Network Information for the Target (Local)
Router
The remote side of the WAN link has all of the file and print services.
Enter the needed network information in the blank boxes of the diagram. Then match the boxesÕ numbers
with the numbers in the Command Table below to configure the target router for IPX.
Server Name
1 Enable IPX routing
IPX Frame Type
Ex: 802.2
External Network #
3
(Local Wire address) Server Type
2 Ex: 123
Ex: 4
System Name of remote
router
Ex: ipx_server Socket #
4 SAP info Ex: 451

6
Node #
Ex: 00:00:00:00:00:01

Novell Client
Workstation
ISDN or DSL Internal Network #
IPX router IPX Router Ex: 2002
Novell Client Novell file
(Target Router) (Remote Router)
Workstation server
Name: "ipx_client" Name: "ipx_server"
Novell Client
Workstation
WAN Network # Route to server
Ex: 456 7 through the remote
5 router

9 Reboot the router

8
Command Table
These commands are used to configure the Target (client-side) router (ipx_client). Log in with the password admin.

Ref
IPX Commands with examples Comments
#
eth ipx enable 1 Enable IPX Routing
eth ipx addr 123 2 Set the local ÔwireÕ address
eth ipx frame 802.2 3 Set the Frame Type
remote add ipx_server 4 Add a connection name
remote setIpxaddr 456 ipx_server 5 Set the WAN network # (common to both
sides)
remote addIpxsap SERVER2 2002 00:00:00:00:00:01 0451 4 1 6 Add a Þle server (SAP)
ipx_server
remote addIpxroute 2002 1 4 ipx_server 7 Add a route to the server
save 8 Save your settings
reboot 9 Reboot for changes to take effect

Appendix B. Configuring IPX Routing 367

Step 2: Review your Settings
Commands used to review your IPX configuration:
Ð eth list
Ð remote list
Ð ipxsaps

> eth list Commands used to set and modify your IPX
ETHERNET INFORMATION FOR <ETHERNET/0> settings:
Hardware MAC address................. 00:20:6F:02:4C:35
Bridging enabled..................... no
IP Routing enabled................... no
Firewall filter enabled ........... yes
Process IP RIP packets received.... yes
Send IP RIP to the LAN............. yes
Advertise me as the default router. Yes
Receive default route using RIP.... yes 1 eth ipx enable
IP address/subnet mask............... 192.84.210.123/255.255.255.0
IP static default gateway............ none
IPX Routing enabled.................. yes
eth ipx addr <ipxnet> [port#]
External network number............ 00000123 2 Ex: eth ipx addr 123
Frame type......................... 802.2

> remote list

INFORMATION FOR <ipx_server > eth ipx frame [802.2 | 802.3 | DIX]
Status............................... enabled 3 Ex: eth ipx frame 802.2
Protocol in use.................É... PPP
Authentication....................... enabled
Authentication level required........ PAP remote add <remoteName>
IP address translation............... on
4 Ex: remote add ipx_server
Compression Negotiation.............. off
Source IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Remote IP address/subnet mask........ 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0
Send IP RIP to this dest............. no remote setipxaddr <ipxnet> <remoteName> [port#]
Receive IP RIP from this dest........ no 5 Ex: remote setipxaddr 456 ipx_server
Send IP default route if known....... no
Receive IP default route using RIP... no
Keep this IP destination private..... yes
Total IP remote routes............... 0
IPX network number................... 00000456
remote addipxroute <ipxnet> <ticks> <remoteName>
Total IPX remote routes.............. 1 7 Ex: remote addipxroute 2002 1 4 ipx_server
00002002/1/4
Total IPX SAPs....................... 1
SERVER2 00002002 00:00:00:00:00:01 0451 0004 1
Bridging enabled..................... no remote addipxsap <servername> <Internal IPX net #>
Exchange spanning tree with dest... no <IPX node address> <socket> <server type> <hops>
Mac addresses bridged.............. none <remoteName>
6
Ex: remote addipxsap SERVER2 2002 0:00:00:00:00:01
451 4 2 ipx_server
> ipxsaps
Service Name Type Node number Network Skt Hops

SERVER2 4 000000000001:00002002:0451 1

368 Appendix B. Configuring IPX Routing

 Command Index
Symbols dhcp bootp disallow, 310
?, 187 dhcp bootp file, 311
dhcp bootp tftpServer, 311
dhcp clear addresses, 311
A dhcp clear all records, 312
adsl ?, 290 dhcp clear expire, 312
adsl restart, 290 dhcp clear valueOption, 312
adsl speed, 290 dhcp del, 313
adsl stats, 291 dhcp delRelay, 313
arp delete, 188 dhcp disable, 314
arp list, 189 dhcp enable, 314
atm ?, 292 dhcp list, 314
atm reset, 292 dhcp list definedOptions, 315
atm save, 292 dhcp list lease, 317
atm speed, 293 dhcp set addresses, 317
atom cellrx, 185 dhcp set expire, 318
atom dumpUnknownCells, 181 dhcp set lease, 318
atom echoPVC, 181 dhcp set mask, 320
atom empty, 181 dhcp set otherServer, 320
atom findPVC, 181 dhcp set valueOption, 320
atom pls, 181 dir, 201
atom print, 185 dmt, 184
atom promisc, 185 dmt link, 295
atom rx, 185 dmt mode, 295
atom stats, 185 dod, 180
atom tx, 185 dsp, 184
atom voice, 174 dsp jitter, 175

B E
bi, 189 erase, 197
bi list, 189 eth ?, 229
eth add, 229
C eth br disable, 296
eth br enable, 296
call, 190
eth br options, 296
copy, 200
eth delete, 230
eth ip addHostMapping, 230
D eth ip addr, 231
delete, 201 eth ip addRoute, 231
dhcp ?, 309 eth ip addServer, 232
dhcp add, 309 eth ip bindRoute, 233
dhcp addRelay, 310 eth ip defGateway, 234
dhcp bootp allow, 310 eth ip delHostMapping, 234

369
eth ip delRoute, 235 H
eth ip delServer, 235 hdsl ?, 299
eth ip directedBcast, 236 hdsl save, 299
eth ip disable, 237 hdsl speed, 299
eth ip enable, 237 hdsl terminal, 300
eth ip filter, 237 help, 187
eth ip firewall, 241
eth ip mgmt, 241
eth ip mtu, 242 I
eth ip options, 243 idsl list, 301
eth ip restart, 244 idsl save, 301
eth ip ripMulticast, 244 idsl set speed, 301
eth ip start, 244 idsl set switch, 302
eth ip stop, 245 ifs, 190
eth ip translate, 245 ike flush, 335
eth ip unbindRoute, 246 ike ipsec policies add, 335
eth ip vrid, 246 ike ipsec policies delete, 335
eth ipx addr, 247 ike ipsec policies disable, 335
eth ipx disable, 247 ike ipsec policies enable, 336
eth ipx enable, 247 ike ipsec policies list, 336
eth ipx frame, 248 ike ipsec policies set dest, 336
eth list, 248 ike ipsec policies set destport, 337
eth vrrp add, 249 ike ipsec policies set interface, 337
eth vrrp clear password, 249 ike ipsec policies set mode, 338
eth vrrp delete, 250 ike ipsec policies set peer, 338
eth vrrp list, 250 ike ipsec policies set pfs, 338
eth vrrp set multicast, 251 ike ipsec policies set proposal, 339
eth vrrp set option, 251 ike ipsec policies set protocol, 339
eth vrrp set password, 252 ike ipsec policies set source, 339
eth vrrp set priority, 253 ike ipsec policies set sourceport, 340
eth vrrp set timeinterval, 253 ike ipsec policies set translate, 340
execute, 201 ike ipsec proposals add, 341
exit, 190 ike ipsec proposals delete, 342
ike ipsec proposals list, 342
F ike ipsec proposals set AHauth, 342
ike ipsec proposals set ESPauth, 343
filter br ?, 331 ike ipsec proposals set ESPenc, 343
filter br add, 331 ike ipsec proposals set IPcomp, 344
filter br del, 331 ike ipsec proposals set lifedata, 344
filter br list, 332 ike ipsec proposals set lifetime, 344
filter br use, 332 ike peers add, 345
format disk, 202 ike peers delete, 345
frame, 203 ike peers list, 345
frame lmi, 204 ike peers set address, 346
frame stats, 204 ike peers set localID, 346
frame voice, 175, 204 ike peers set localIDtype, 346

370
ike peers set mode, 347 l2tp set address, 324
ike peers set peerID, 347 l2tp set authen, 325
ike peers set peerIDtype, 347 l2tp set chapSecret, 325
ike peers set secret, 348 l2tp set dialout, 326
ike proposals add, 348 l2tp set hiddenAVP, 326
ike proposals delete, 348 l2tp set ourAddress, 326
ike proposals list, 349 l2tp set ourPassword, 326
ike proposals set dh_group, 349 l2tp set ourSysName, 327
ike proposals set encryption, 349 l2tp set ourTunnelName, 327
ike proposals set lifetime, 350 l2tp set remoteName, 327
ike proposals set message_auth, 350 l2tp set type, 328
ike proposals set session_auth, 350 l2tp set wanif, 328
ipdebug, 180 l2tp set window, 329
ipifs, 191 logout, 193
ipRoutes, 191
ipsec add, 351 M
ipsec del, 351
mem, 193
ipsec disable, 351
mlp, 180
ipsec enable, 352
mlp show, 282
ipsec flush, 352
mlp summary, 193
ipsec list, 352
msfs, 202
ipsec set authentication, 353
ipsec set authKey, 353
ipsec set compression, 353 P
ipsec set direction, 353 password command
ipsec set encKey, 354 for local router when connecting to re-
ipsec set encryption, 354 mote, 282
ipsec set gateway, 354 for remote, 283
ipsec set ident, 355 for the target router, 225
ipsec set mode, 355 ping, 194
ipsec set service, 355 pppoe close, 333
ipxRoutes, 192 pppoe list, 334
ipxSaps, 192 ps, 195

K R
key add, 115 reboot, 195
reboot bridgeonly, 115
L remote ?, 256
l2tp ?, 322 remote add, 256
l2tp add, 322 remote addBridge, 257
l2tp call, 322 remote addHostMapping, 257
l2tp close, 326 remote addIpRoute, 258
l2tp del, 323 remote addIpxRoute, 258
l2tp forward, 323 remote addIpxSap, 259
l2tp list, 324 remote addServer, 259

371
remote bindIPVirtualRoute, 260 remote setMgmtIpAddr, 280, 281
remote blockNetBios, 261 remote setMinLine, 281
remote del, 261 remote setmtu, 282
remote delATMnsap, 261 remote setOurPasswd, 282
remote delBridge, 261 remote setOurSysName, 283
remote delEncryption, 262 remote setPasswd, 283
remote delHostMapping, 262 remote setPhone, 283
remote delIpRoute, 262 remote setPPPoEservice, 333
remote delIpxRoute, 263 remote setPPPopt, 284
remote delIpxSap, 263 remote setProtocol, 284
remote delOurPasswd, 264 remote setProtocol (for IDSL), 303
remote delOurSysName, 264 remote setPVC, 285
remote delPhone, 264 remote setRmtIpAddr, 285
remote delServer, 265 remote setSpeed, 285
remote disable, 265 remote setSrcIpAddr, 286
remote disAuthen, 266 remote setTimer, 286
remote disBridge, 266 remote start, 287
remote enaAuthen, 266 remote stats, 287
remote enable, 266 remote statsClear, 288
remote enaBridge, 267 remote stop, 288
remote ipFilter, 267 remote unbindIPVirtualRoute, 289
remote list, 271 rename, 203
remote listBridge, 272
remote listIpRoutes, 272 S
remote listIpxRoutes, 273
save, 196
remote listIpxSaps, 273
sdsl ?, 305
remote listPhones, 273
sdsl btstat, 182
remote restart, 274
sdsl huh, 183
remote setATMnsap, 274
sdsl preact, 305
remote setATMtraffic, 293
sdsl save, 306
remote setAuthen, 275
sdsl speed, 306
remote setBOD, 275
sdsl states trace, 183
remote setBrOptions, 276
sdsl stats, 307
remote setBWthresh, 276
sdsl terminal, 307
remote setCompression, 277
sync, 203
remote setDLCI, 302
system ?, 207
remote setEncryption (Diffie-Hellman), 278
system addBootpServer, 208
remote setEncryption (PPP DES), 277
system addHostMapping, 208
remote setIpOptions, 278
system addHTTPfilter, 208
remote setIpSlavePPP, 279
system addIpRoutingTable, 209
remote setIPTranslate, 279
system addServer, 209
remote setIpxAddr, 280
system addSNMPfilter, 210
remote setIPXoptions, 280
system addSysLogFilter, 210
remote setL2tpClient, 329
system addSyslogServer, 211
remote setLNS, 330
system addTelnetFilter, 211
remote setmaxline, 280

372
system addUdpRelay, 212 V
system admin, 212 vers, 199
system authen, 212 voice, 183
system backup add, 213 voice l2clear, 175
system backup delete, 213 voice l2stats, 175
system backup disable, 214 voice lestrace, 175
system backup enable, 214 voice profile, 21
system backup pinginterval, 215
system backup pingsamples, 215
system backup retry, 216
system backup stability, 216
system backup successrate, 216
system blockNetBios, 217
system community, 217
system defaultmodem, 217
system delBootpServer, 218
system delHostMapping, 218
system delHTTPfilter, 218
system delIpRoutingTable, 219
system delServer, 219
system delSNMPfilter, 220
system delSysLogFilter, 220
system delSysLogServer, 221
system delTelnetFilter, 221
system delUdpRelay, 221
system history, 222
system httpPort, 222
system list, 222
system log, 223
system modem, 217, 223
system moveIpRoutingTable, 223
system msg, 224
system name, 224
system oneWanDialup, 225
system passwd, 225
system securityTimer, 226
system snmpPort, 226
system supportTrace, 226
system syslogPort, 227
system telnetPort, 227
system wan2wanForwarding, 228

T
tcp stats, 198
traceroute, 198

373
 Topic Index
Numerics extended diagnostics, 157
3DES encryption, 135 manual boot mode, 154
IKE proposal command, 141 time and date, 156
BootP service, 152
A bridge filtering, 79
address translation, 91 commands, 331
ADPCM voice encoding, 20 bridging
ADSL DMT router commands, 295 bridge-only units, 17
debug commands, 184 configuration information (for dual-
AH IPSec protocol, 134, 135 Ethernet router), 45
ASIC.AIC file, 164 configuration information (with RFC
ATM 1483), 41
configuration commands, 292 configuration information (with RFC
debug commands, 181 1490), 41
tracing commands, 185 configuration table (with PPP), 51
authentication configuration table (with RFC 1483/RFC
ESP message, 141, 142, 342, 343 1490), 54
ESP protocol, 135 general information, 17
IKE, 138 test, 59
IKE message, 140 bridging loops
IKE session, 140 Ethernet interface, 297
Authentication Header protocol, 134 remote router entry, 276
autobaud pre-activation, 305 bridging options
Ethernet interface, 296
remote router entry, 276
B
backing up configuration files, 162
C
backup router for a static default gateway,
clearing the configuration, 197
107
clock setting, 156
backup V.90 modem capability, 103
command index, 369
batch file execution, 166
command line access, 12
binding a virtual route
Command Line Interface conventions, 187
for a remote interface, 260
commands
for an Ethernet interface, 233
debugging
boot code
See also Command Index, 180
manual boot mode (for models with a re-
communication interface status command,
set button), 164
190
manual boot mode (for models with con-
configuration examples
figuration switches), 154
dual-Ethernet router with IP, 75
boot code maintenance options, 154
IKE aggressive mode, 147
boot failures, 158
IKE main mode, 144
boot options
PPP with IP and IPX, 61
baud rate for console, 157
RFC 1483 with IP and Bridging, 69
booting from the network, 155

374
 VRRP, 112 group used for IKE key exchange, 141
configuration files, backup/restore, 162 DLCI
configuration information for an IDSL Frame Relay connection,
Dual-Ethernet router, 45 302
FRF8 + IP, 44 DMT commands, 295
PPP + IP, 34, 36, 38 dmt commands, 184
RFC 1483 + bridging, 41 dmt link command, 295
RFC 1483 + IP, 39 dmt mode command, 295
RFC 1483 + IPX, 40 dod command, 180
RFC 1483MER + IP, 42 dual-Ethernet router, 45
RFC 1490 + bridging, 41 commands, 296
RFC 1490 + IP, 34, 36, 38, 39 sample configuration, 75
RFC 1490 + IPX, 40
RFC 1490MER + IP, 42 E
configuration tables Encapsulated Security Payload, 134
dual-Ethernet router +IP routing, 58 encapsulation methods, IPSec, 135
FRF8 + IP routing, 56 encapsulation modes, IPSec, 134
mixed network protocols, 57 encapsulation options, 26
PPP + bridging, 51 encryption
PPP + IP routing, 49 Diffie-Hellman, 117
PPP + IPX routing, 50 ESP protocol for IPSec, 135
RFC 1483/RFC 1490 + bridging, 54 PPP DES (RFC 1969), 116
RFC 1483/RFC 1490 + IP routing, 52 erasing the configuration, 197
RFC 1483/RFC1 490 + IPX routing, 53 error messages, 176
RFC 1483MER/RFC 1490MER + IP ESP IPSec protocol, 134
routing, 55 Ethernet commands, 229, 296
contacting technical support, 186 Ethernet IP address assignment, 231
conventions for commands, 187 Ethernet subnets, 77
export restriction, 135
D
date and time setting, 156 F
debugging commands, 180 fatal boot failures, 158
DES encryption, 135 file system commands, 200
DH. See Diffie-Hellman files, 29
DHCP filtering parameters for IKE IPSec policies,
BootP management, 87 142
clearing, 90 firewall
commands, 308, 309 IP filtering, 119
concepts, 82 IP Internet firewall filtering, 80
configuration, 82 flash memory
relays, 89 copying, 181
TFTP server, 88 recovery procedures, 163
dial backup, 103 FPGA file, 164
Diffie-Hellman encryption, 117 Frame commands, 203
for IKE key exchange, 136 frame relay debug commands, 185
for IKE Perfect Forward Secrecy, 338 Frame relay statistics command, 204

375
FRF8, 44 configuration information (with RFC
1483), 39
G configuration information (with RFC
G.Lite DMT link type, 295 1483MER), 42
G_DMT mode setting, 184 configuration information (with RFC
G_LITE mode setting, 184 1490), 34, 36, 38, 39
GUI debug commands, 182 configuration information (with RFC
1490MER), 42
H configuration table (with FRF8), 56
history log, 168 configuration table (with MAC Encapsu-
host mapping, 95 lated Routing), 55
HTTP access control, 101 configuration table (with RFC 1483/RFC
HTTP port access, 222 1490), 52
HyperTerminal, 13 configuration table (with RFC
1483MER/RFC 1490MER), 55
configuration tables (with PPP), 49
I test, 59
IAD, 19 IP routing table, 78
IDSL router commands, 301 defining, 209
IKE deleting, 219
command formats, 335 moving, 223
IPSec policy commands, 142 IP subnets, 77
IPSec proposal commands, 141 IP virtual router support, 78
peer commands, 139 IP virtual routing, 233, 246, 260, 289
proposal commands, 140 IPCP, 4, 279
proposal exchange, 138 ipdebug command, 180
protocol, 134 IPSec
IKE configuration examples command formats, 351
aggressive mode, 147 connection without IKE, 148
main mode, 144 RFCs, 26
Integrated Access Device, 19 security, 134
interface status command, 190 IPX routing
Internet Key Exchange protocol, 134 concepts, 366
IP address assignment, 231 configuration information (with RFC
IP filtering, 119 1483), 40
debug commands, 185 configuration information (with RFC
Ethernet interface command, 237 1490), 40
WAN interface command, 267 configuration table (with PPP), 50
IP firewall configuration, 80 configuration table (with RFC 1483/RFC
IP interface list command, 191 1490), 53
IP RIP packets, 81 test, 60
IP routing ISDN, 301
configuration information (for dual-
Ethernet router), 46
J
configuration information (with FRF8),
jitter buffer adjustment, 175
44

376
K example, 71
kernel sample worksheets, 71
upgrade from the LAN, 159 non-fatal errors, 158
upgrade from the WAN line, 160
keyfile.dat, 115 P
PAP, 22
L PAP/CHAP, 22
L2TP, 122 password command
commands, 322 for the administration password, 212
configurations, 124 password example, 68
over IPSec, 135 password recovery, 165
LED fatal boot patterns, 158 password reset, 165
LED sequence, 167 passwords for sample configuration, 68
LMI command, 204 PCM voice encoding, 20
logical Ethernet interfaces, 77 peer commands, IKE, 139
for VRRP, 108 Perfect Forward Secrecy, 136
login procedure, 12 PFS, 136
ping command, 169, 194
M policy commands, IKE, 139
MAC Encapsulated Routing, 42 port translation, 91
management IP address PPP Link Protocol, 34
for a remote router, 281 PPPoE, 97
for Ethernet interface, 241 bridge entry, 97
management security, 101 client, 98
MER, 42 close session command, 333
MIBs, 150 commands, 333
mlp debug command, 180 domain name, 98
MTU command list command, 334
for Ethernet interface, 242 sample configuration script, 99
for WAN interface, 282 session management, 100
multicast address timeout, 98
for RIP, 244 pre-activation, 305
for VRRP, 251 proposal commands, IKE, 139
multiple Ethernet subnets, 77 protocol standards, 25
multiple IP subnets, 77 pulse dialing, 106
multiple routing tables, 78
R
N RARP server, 155
NAT, 91 RAW-IMAGE special file name, 181
Network Address Translation, 91 reboot command, 195
classic NAT, 95 remote routers, 31
configuration, 91 commands, 255
IP filtering, 120 replay detection, 135
masquerading, 91 reset button, 164
network information restarting a remote, 32
restoring configuration files, 162

377
RFC 1483, 34, 39 software option keys, 114
RFC 1483MER, 42 software options
RFC 1490, 34, 39 encryption, 116
RFC 1490MER, 42 IP filtering, 119
RFCs supported, 25 keys, 114
RIP packet controls, 81 L2TP tunneling, 122
route tracing command, 198 source routing, 78
router configuration commands, 206 Spanning Tree Protocol
Ethernet interface, 297
S remote router entry, 276
sample configurations standards conformance, 25
dual-Ethernet router with IP, 75 STP protocol
IKE, 144 Ethernet interface, 297
PPP with IP and IPX, 61 remote router entry, 276
RFC 1483 with IP and bridging, 69 subnets, 77
VRRP, 112 support, contacting, 185
SAs, 134 Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line, 304
save dod, 196 Syslog client, 153
saving configuration files, 162 system commands, 207
saving the configuration, 196 system files, 29
script execution, 166 system level commands, 188
SDSL commands, 304 system messages, 176
autobaud pre-activation, 305
autospeed detection, 304 T
debug commands, 182 T1.413 mode setting, 184
secure VPN target router, 31
IPSec tunnels, 134 TCP/IP routing
L2TP tunnels, 122 control, 65, 72
security source and remote addresses, 40
general information, 23 technical support, contacting, 185
IKE, 134 telephony services, 19
IPSec, 134 trouble-shooting, 174
Security Associations, 134 Telnet, 151
Setting a management address command line access, 14
for a remote router, 281 controlling router access, 101
setting a management address Telnet client validation, 101
for a remote router, 281 terminal access to the command line, 12
for Ethernet interface, 241 TFTP
signaling cells, 175 client facility, 151
SNMP server, 151
access control, 101 time and date setting, 156
client validation, 101 timeout period for a dial-up connection, 286
support, 150 time-stamped messages, 176
supported MIBs, 150 tone dialing, 106
software kernel, 29 traceroute command, 198
upgrades, 159 tracing signaling cells, 175

378
transport mode, 134 frame voice command, 204
troubleshooting trouble-shooting, 174
bridging, 172 VPI/VCI
console, 170 find value, 174
factory configuration, 170 VPN, 122
hardware problems, 170 security, 134
history log, 168 VRID, 109
IP routing, 172 VRRP, 107
IPX routing, 173 clearing the VRRP interface designation,
login password, 171 246
normal LED sequence, 168
PC connection, 171 W
power light off, 167 web GUI debug commands, 182
remote network access, 172
terminal window display, 170 Y
using LEDs, 167 Y2K compliance, 156
using ping, 169
troubleshooting voice routing, 174
tunneling
IPSec, 134
L2TP, 122
L2TP configurations, 124
with Dial Backup, 103

U
unbind IP virtual route command
for a remote interface, 289
for an Ethernet interface, 246
upgradable bridges, 17
upgrading the software kernel, 159

V
V.90 backup modem, 103
virtual Ethernet interface, 77
Virtual Private Network security, 134
virtual route binding, 233
virtual router ID, 109
virtual routing table, 78
adding, 209
deleting, 219
moving, 223
VoDSL router, 19
voice gateways, 20
voice profile, 21
voice routing, 19
debug commands, 183

379